The End of Life of Our Old Universe

Mind Control

You are not Your Physical Body; You are Not the Physical Matter: You are Sun Energy !

Link to Site Map listing other articles, books and useful websites:  SITE MAP

This link is in english and in russian. Any material inc. pictures can be taken from this website only don't make money on it !

ANNOUNCEMENT: This page has been modified to be viewable on Mobile devices

Важное Сообщение - эта Страница теперь может быть просмотрена на мобильных телефонах !

Cathy O'Brian

About Our Parallel Personalities

"Handbook for the New Paradigm" About Mind Control

My Personal Experiences with Mind-Control


Remote Viewers on Youtube

Speakers about Mind-Control on Youtube

Non-Physical Mind-Controlling Devices for Crown Chakras


Appropriate Articles on Internet

The Introduction

Stephanie and Michael on Remote Viewing

Robert Monroe's attitude towards Remote Viewing

Psychic Warrior by David Morehouse

Fritz Springmeier and Cisco Wheeler on Mind Control

Time Portals for Future Beings

Interview with Duncan Cameron and Preston Nichols

Interview with Al Bielek 1991

Interview with Al Bielek 1997, part 1

Interview with Al Bielek 1997, part 2

The Montauk Project and the Philadelphia Experiment

Dave Wilcock about Montauk

Preston Nichols

Fringe Knowledge For Beginners

Heat Wave or ADS?

Статьи на русском

Video:They Are Here: Huge Alien Craft In Our Solar System

There are so many SLEEPWALKERS in the world (in millions), who doesn't know it. They are mindcontrolled SLAVES, aliens and Dero (degenerate robots) mindcontrol them with certain rays coming from their generators. It's high time to stop it ! Here is a fresh article from about this issue :

Article: "I went driving and motorbiking in my sleep", 11 December 2017

(in the movie "Out on a limb" by Shirley Maclain, mindcontrolled Sleepwalker demonstrated to Shirley Maclain, how he could drive a car with his eyes closed)
Jackie in car. Sleepwalking can be risky when water, busy roads or cliffs are involved. But sleep-driving elevates the dangers to a whole new level. Consultant neurologist Guy Leschziner describes the case of one of his patients, Jackie, who has been driving in her sleep on both two wheels and four. Shortly after moving to the UK from Canada, Jackie was lodging with an elderly woman. "One morning she asked, 'Where did you go last night?'" Jackie says. Jackie said she had not gone anywhere. "Well, you went out on your motorbike," the landlady replied. Jackie was shocked. She immediately asked if she had been wearing her helmet. "Oh yes, you clomped down the stairs and you had your helmet and you went out," the landlady said, adding that she had been gone for about 20 minutes. Jackie had no recollection of her moonlit ride because she was asleep at the time. And there were no other clues to indicate she had been out, as she had returned the motorbike to exactly the same place it had been before. Motorbike riding at night.  As a child in Canada, Jackie was not the most popular girl to share a tent with in her Brownie group. "I used to make this sort of growling," she says. "But it wasn't a quiet sort of growl. I think they thought a bear was coming after them. I growled so much and so loud that it frightened them, so they wouldn't have me around." I know one person who every night would get up and sing the national anthem and then go back to bed. She was also a handful for the adults supervising the trips. "I'd get up in the middle of the night and I'd walk down to the river. I'd walk into the woods and you know they couldn't cope with me, so I had to be picked up and taken back home again." Jackie had been a sleepwalker even before these camping trips. "I used to walk down the stairs to the lounge, open the door and stand in the doorway where my parents were," she says. "Well, it freaked mother out, but father just took my hand, took me back upstairs and put me to bed and that was it." This kind of behaviour is very common in childhood. So are other related forms of behaviour such as sleep-talking, eating in sleep and night terrors - where a child appears to be terrified, screaming and shouting in an inconsolable manner, but wakes with no memory of what has happened. As many adults will know, it can be even more terrifying for the parent. For most children, these events - termed non-REM parasomnias, because they occur outside the dreaming (REM) phase of sleep - slowly disappear over time. But in 1-2% of cases they persist into adulthood. Jackie responded to the discovery of her motorcycling escapade by giving the keys to her landlady to look after. And with that she thought the problem had been solved. Many years later, now living in Seaford, near Brighton, she was leaving her flat in Brighton when some neighbours asked her what she had been doing around 01:30 or 02:00 in the morning. She told them she had been asleep. "They said, 'No, no, you were driving out as we were coming home.' And I said, 'I have no idea…' As I had done on my motorbike, I was now in the car driving." Once again, Jackie had parked her car in exactly the same spot, leaving no clue that might have revealed her nocturnal wanderings. We worry when a person who has this kind of behaviour gets into a car. The news that she had been sleep-driving was not entirely a surprise. Although her sleep-motorcycling occurred in the distant past, she had more recently gone walking around a cruise ship in the middle of night - to prevent an accident she had given her cabin key to a crew member, who locked her in at night and returned it in the morning. She has also been seen walking along the promenade in Seaford in the early hours. But the thought of driving around the town in her sleep, putting herself and others at risk, greatly alarmed her. It was at this point that she asked her doctor for advice. What explains this incredibly complex behaviour, apparently arising in deep sleep?
Dolphins and some other animals are able to sleep with one half of the brain at a time. We have known for years that certain animals like dolphins, seals and birds can sleep with one half of their brain at a time, allowing them to swim or fly while sleeping. In humans, this does not occur, but we do now know that sleep and wake can exist in different parts of the brain at the same time. When sleep-deprived, our brains show small areas of the cerebral cortex, the outer surface of the brain, exhibiting "local sleep" - electrical activity consistent with sleep. Studies of sleepwalkers show that the parts of the brain controlling vision, movement and emotion appear to be awake, while areas of the brain involved in memory, decision-making and rational thinking appear to remain in deep sleep. These findings to some extent explain why sleepwalkers may appear to be awake - with eyes open, speaking and performing difficult tasks like riding a motorbike - but behave in an odd manner, and have no (or only limited) recollection. When sleepwalking parts of the brain show activity similar to that of a waking brain. A brain in deep sleep should look like the scan on the right - but parts of a sleepwalker's brain will resemble the scan on the left. Like many aspects of sleep, this probably has a genetic basis. Many of my patients at the Guy's Hospital Sleep Disorder Centre report a strong family history of non-REM parasomnias, and preliminary studies have identified areas of the genome that may be involved. Jackie eventually ended up at Guy's Hospital herself, but in the meantime she had worked out her own ways of managing her condition. Initial attempts such as hanging a large cowbell from the handle of her front door failed - Jackie's partner Ed is such a heavy sleeper that he was not woken up, and a bell any louder would have woken all the neighbours. But then Jackie invested in a time-locked safe. Every night she puts her keys in, and the safe does not unlock until 06:00. She leaves a set with a neighbour, in case of emergencies. Jackie puts keys in safe. This strategy has worked, preventing her from leaving the flat or driving in the middle of the night. For the most part, behaving like this is inconvenient or embarrassing. People may make phone calls or send texts in the middle of the night, find themselves wandering outside incompletely clothed, or cook meals in their sleep. "I know one person who every night would get up and sing the national anthem and then go back to bed," says Prof Meir Kryger, of Yale University. But for some, non-REM parasomnias can be more serious, and in rare cases devastating. A German sleepwalker playing the tuba in Hettstadt, from an Italian newspaper (1932). "We worry when a person who has this kind of behaviour gets into a car, if that type of person starts to walk outdoors and if they start to use implements like knives that may be quite dangerous," Kryger says. For the vast majority of individuals however, non-REM parasomnias are much less dramatic, and managing them is often straightforward. Anything that results in frequent interruptions to sleep, such as sleep apnoea - a condition that causes the airway to obstruct in sleep - makes this behaviour more likely to occur. So by improving the quality of sleep and addressing any issues that might cause frequent sleep disruption, things often improve. Occasionally, for more severe cases, medication has a role. Like Jackie, and her time-locked safe, simple practical precautions can make a huge difference.

За рулем во сне: опасности, подстерегающие сомнамбул

(сомнамбулы или лунатики - люди, телами которых пользуются Негативные инопланетяне - как на картинке ниже - и совершают жуткие поступки, пока тела людей спят, а потом людей сажают в тюрьму. Это не лунатизм или парасомния! ЛМ).
12 декабря 2017
Джеки (женщина) в своей машине. Даже ходить во сне бывает весьма опасно, но если в таком состоянии сесть за руль, возникает реальная угроза жизни человека, страдающего сомнамбулизмом, и его окружающих. Невролог Гай Лешзинер рассказывает об одной из своих пациенток, которая во сне ухитрялась водить машину и даже мотоцикл. Переехав из Канады в Великобританию, Джеки поселилась у одной пожилой женщины. Однажды та поинтересовалась, куда Джеки наведывалась прошлой ночью. Джеки ответила, что не выходила из дома.
"Ну, вообще-то ты куда-то ездила на своем байке", - сказала хозяйка квартиры. Джеки была потрясена и тут же спросила, надевала ли она шлем. "Да, на тебе был шлем, когда ты спустилась по лестнице и вышла из дома," - рассказала женщина, добавив, что Джеки отсутствовала около 20 минут. Джеки ничего этого не помнила, потому что все это время спала. Никаких следов от ее поездки не осталось: Джеки аккуратно поставила свой мотоцикл на то же самое место, на котором он стоял вечером. Ночная поездка на мотоцикле. Вряд ли нужно кому-либо доказывать, что водить мотоцикл во сне - довольно опасное занятие. В детстве, которое Джеки провела в Канаде, подружки-скауты неохотно соглашались ночевать с ней в одной палатке. "Я издавала что-то вроде рычания (aliens, LM), и это было довольно громко, - рассказывает Джеки. - Наверное, им казалось, что где-то рядом медведь. Я так часто и громко рычала, что это пугало их, они отказывались ночевать рядом со мной". Я знаю человека, который каждую ночь вставал, пел национальный гимн и опять ложился как ни в чем не бывало. Джеки была головной болью и для организаторов таких поездок на природу. "Я могла проснуться среди ночи и уйти на речку или в лес. Помешать этому у взрослых не получалось, приходилось меня разыскивать и приводить обратно в лагерь", - вспоминает она. Джеки страдает лунатизмом с детства. "Я выходила ночью в гостиную и открывала дверь к родителям. Маму это очень пугало, а папа просто брал меня за руку, отводил обратно в комнату и укладывал в постель", - рассказывает Джеки. Джеки страдает лунатизмом с детства, но с течением времени придумала, как самостоятельно справляться со своей проблемой. Такое случается со многими детьми. Они могут говорить во сне или есть. Они могут истошно кричать, испугавшись ночного кошмара, а потом ничего об этом не помнить. Многие родители признаются, что в такие моменты были напуганы не меньше своих детей. Подобные расстройства сна называются парасомнией. У детей парасомния постепенно проходит по мере взросления, но в 1-2% случаев остается и во взрослом возрасте. Джеки думала, что решит проблему, отдав ключи от своего мотобайка хозяйке квартиры. Но оказалось, что не всё так просто. Джеки за рулем машины. Джеки с ужасом думает о том, что точно так же водила машину во сне. Однажды много лет спустя, когда Джеки жила в местечке Сифорд близ Брайтона, соседи спросили ее, что она делала в районе двух часов ночи. Джеки ответила, что спала, на что они возразили: "Нет-нет, ты куда-то уезжала на машине, когда мы подходили к дому". Джеки рассказывает, что и в этот раз ничего подобного она не помнила. "Сначала я на мотоцикле ездила, и вот теперь - на машине", - говорит она. Автомобиль Джеки, как и в случае с мотоциклом, стоял на своем обычном месте, не было никаких намеков на ее ночные похождения. Нас очень беспокоят случаи, когда пациент с таким расстройством имеет доступ к машине. Впрочем, новость о вождении машины во сне не стала для Джеки таким уж большим сюрпризом. История с мотоциклом произошла много лет назад, но недавно она посреди ночи ходила во сне по круизному лайнеру. Тогда, чтобы уберечь себя от несчастного случая, Джеки отдала ключи от своей каюты одному из членов экипажа, который каждый вечер запирал ее, а утром возвращался, чтобы отпереть дверь. Кроме того, Джеки уже успела прогуляться во сне и по ночному Сифорду. Но мысль о том, что она водила машину во сне, поставив под угрозу и свою, и чужие жизни, привела Джеки в ужас. Она поняла, что пора идти к врачу. Исследования состояния сомнамбул показывают, что часть их мозга, отвечающая за зрение, движение и эмоции, активна, в то время как области мозга, связанные с памятью, принятием решений и рациональным мышлением, находятся в глубоком сне. Это частично объясняет, почему лунатики выглядят так, будто находятся в сознании: у них открыты глаза, они могут говорить и выполнять сложные функции (например, вести машину), но при этом ведут себя странно и потом ничего (или почти ничего) не могут вспомнить. Многие из пациентов Центра расстройств сна в лондонской больнице Гайс рассказывают, что в их семьях на протяжении поколений люди сталкивались с парасомнией. Джеки в итоге тоже попала в эту больницу. Но она смогла найти и некоторые способы самостоятельно справляться со своей проблемой. Поначалу Джеки вешала на ручку входной двери довольно большой и звучный колокольчик, который обычно надевают на шею коровам. Но ее партнер Эд ничего не слышал: у него очень крепкий сон. Более громкий колокольчик мог разбудить соседей, поэтому от идеи пришлось отказаться. После этого Джеки приобрела сейф, запирающийся на определенное время. Каждый вечер она запирала ключи в сейфе, зная, что он не откроется раньше шести часов утра. Запасную связку ключей она отдавала соседям. Эта идея сработала, и Джеки уже больше не садилась за руль во сне. Каждый вечер Джеки запирала ключи в сейфе, зная, что он не откроется раньше шести утра. Многим подобное расстройство кажется постыдным. Некоторые лунатики пишут эсэмэски или звонят кому-нибудь посреди ночи, готовят во сне еду или обнаруживают себя полуодетыми на улице. "Я знаю человека, который каждую ночь вставал, пел национальный гимн и опять ложился как ни в чем не бывало", - рассказывает профессор Мейр Кригер из Йельского университета. Но для некоторых парасомния в стадии медленного сна может быть крайне опасной. "Нас очень беспокоят случаи, когда пациент с таким расстройством имеет доступ к машине, когда он выходит из дома или берет в руки опасные предметы вроде ножей", - говорит Кригер. Впрочем, для подавляющего большинства людей парасомния в фазе медленного сна не столь опасна и вполне поддается контролю. Все, что приводит к нарушениям сна, например, апноэ (состояние, когда человек перестает дышать во сне), может спровоцировать и развитие парасомнии. Лунатик, играющий на тубе в немецком городе Хеттштадте.

Сексомния: "Мой бойфренд во сне изнасиловал свою бывшую подругу"

(Сомнамбулы или Лунатики, это люди, телами которых управляют инопланетяне когда человек отделяется от тела во время сна и улетает на 4й нефизический Уровень. Это не Сексомния, а  "специалисты" как обычно наворачивают этому кучу новых терминов. ЛМ).
7 декабря 2017
Каждому приходилось слышать о людях, которые ходят во сне. Но это - далеко не единственная форма сомнамбулизма. Расстройство сна может принимать и куда менее безобидные формы. Так, некоторые мужчины во сне пытаются заняться сексом. Как рассказывает корреспондент Би-би-си Салли Абрамс, один из них попал из-за этой особенности организма в серьезную неприятность. Сара встретила Тома в гостях у общих друзей, и между ними мгновенно проскочила искра. Ее подкупили его открытость, умение вести разговор и тонкое чувство юмора, которое напоминало ей о ее брате. Они начали встречаться, вместе ужинали, ходили в кино или подолгу гуляли. Иногда Сара оставалась у Тома на ночь, иногда он спал у нее. Они только присматривались друг к другу, когда произошел странный случай, из-за которого Саре стало немного не по себе. Ночью Сара проснулась от того, что Том энергично пытался заняться с ней сексом в довольно грубой форме. Поскольку они были знакомы недавно, ей было неловко об этом заговорить, и она спустила все на тормозах. "Кажется, я подумала тогда, что он просто решил немного подурачиться, так что я просто решила не придавать этому большого значения и ничего ему не сказала. Думаю, что так же происходило и прошлом", - вспоминает девушка. Она и думать забыла о ночном эпизоде, но через несколько месяцев все повторилось. Вернувшись домой после вечеринки, где они оба изрядно выпили, Сара и Том сразу пошли спать. Девушку пробудило от глубокого сна то, что он пытался заняться с ней сексом прямо через ее нижнее белье. Саре было больно и неприятно. Утром она заявила, что с нее довольно подобных экспромтов и она хочет прекратить отношения. Реакция Тома ее поразила: он понятия не имел, о чем говорит Сара. "Он совершенно не понимал, о чем я пытаюсь ему сказать, и не хотел даже слышать, - вспоминает она. - А я была в ярости от того, что можно разбудить среди ночи подобным образом, а наутро заявить, что ты ничего не помнишь".
Том настаивал, что не помнит ничего из того, что было ночью. Ее рассказ глубоко потряс его, и он испытывал чувство вины за то, что причинил ей боль. Она не знала, что и подумать: то, как он пытался ей овладеть той ночью, и правда резко отличалось от его обычной манеры - нежной, заботливой и чувственной. Но Сара также помнила и то, что он рассказал ей еще в самом начале их знакомства: много лет назад он был обвинен в изнасиловании своей бывшей подруги Карен и осужден на на семь лет тюрьмы. Сара стала вспоминать детали той истории и сопоставлять факты. Кошмары приходятся на ту же фазу сна, что и приступы сексомнии. Он пришел проведать их общего с Карен ребенка. Они выпили, посмотрели фильм и легли спать в одной постели. Через 45 минут его разбудили вопли Карен: "Что ты делаешь? Ты не в себе! Ты никогда таким не был, я не узнаю тебя". Том был настолько сконфужен и шокирован ее реакцией, что схватил свои вещи в охапку и стремглав вылетел из квартиры. О том, что произошло, пока он спал, у него не осталось никаких воспоминаний. Зато Сара вспомнила, что Тому присущи и другие странности. Например, однажды он посреди ночи надел на себя одни лишь брюки и заявил, что уходит. Наутро он также не мог ничего вспомнить. Сара уговорила Тома сходить к врачу, который направил его на клиническое обследование. Ему предстояло провести ночь в больнице с прикрепленными к голове датчиками. Результат оказался неожиданным и должен был отразиться на всей дальнейшей жизни Тома: выяснилось, что он одновременно глубоко спит и бодрствует. Вместе с рассказами Сары это позволило врачам диагностировать у него "расстройство", известное как "сексомния". "Если посмотреть на его энцефалограмму, то можно заметить на протяжении коротких периодов длинные плавные волны, характерные для фазы глубокого сна, на которые накладываются быстрые ритмы, указывающие на то, что он в то же самое время бодрствует", - объясняет доктор Гай Лешзинер, нейролог, занимавшийся случаем Тома. Склонные к парасомнии люди способны совершать во сне самые разнообразные действия и наутро ничего об этом не помнить. Это одна из форм лунатизма, объясняет профессор Мейр Кригер из Йельского университета. Суть расстройства в том, что ответственная за память, принятие решений и рациональное мышление часть мозга спит. А участки, ответственные за зрение, движение и эмоции, бодрствуют (тело двигается инопланетянами! ЛМ). Так что человек может говорить, ходить, готовить еду и даже заниматься сексом, не отдавая себе в этом отчета. Сексомния связана не только с лунатизмом, но и с ночным ужасом - когда люди испытывают приступы (от aliens), схожие с ночными кошмарами, не находясь при этом в фазе сновидений. Все эти расстройства носят общее название "парасомния" и обычно проявляют себя в начале ночи, во время очень глубокого сна, говорит профессор Кригер... Сексомния и другие расстройства проявляются во время глубокого сна. Смягчающие обстоятельства
Поможет ли диагноз снять с Тома обвинения в изнасиловании? Пока неизвестно, но он на это надеется: все эти годы он считал, что осужден незаслуженно. "Без электродов, подключенных к его голове в тот вечер, когда произошло изнасилование, невозможно говорить с уверенностью, было ли это результатом расстройства сна у Тома, - рассуждает доктор Лешзинер. - Он ведь был признан виновным коллегией присяжных". Однако надежда все же есть. В последние годы были случаи, когда по делам, в которых упоминались расстройства сна, в том числе и сексомния, выносились оправдательные приговоры, хотя в других обстоятельствах обвиняемым грозили бы серьезные тюремные сроки. С точки зрения права важно установить, имел ли подсудимый умысел на совершение преступления или же действовал на автомате, не осознавая своих действий. "Например, был известный случай в Торонто: мужчина сел за руль, проехал довольно большое расстояние, затем убил свою тещу и едва не убил тестя. Присяжные постановили, что преступление было совершено в состоянии сомнамбулизма, и, следовательно, подсудимый невиновен", - рассказывает Мейр Кригер из Йельского университета.
"Похожая история произошла в Аризоне несколько лет назад: мужчина убил собственную жену. Подсудимый также утверждал, что действовал во сне, однако все равно был признан виновным", - добавляет ученый. Специалисты советуют страдающим от сексомнии спать в одежде, чтобы свести к минимуму телесный контакт. Если таких доказательств нет, но есть подтверждение, что он страдает от расстройства сна, он может быть признан невиновным. Сара рассказывает, что поставленный Тому диагноз произвел на него сильнейший эффект, поскольку он всегда был уверен, что обвинение в изнасиловании против него было ложным. "Непросто примириться с мыслью о том, что ты можешь совершать какие-то действия, которые не оставляют никакого следа в твоей памяти, а также справляться с неизбежным чувством вины из-за этого. Он ведь даже понятия не имел, что сделал что-то не то в ту ночь. Он просто ничего не помнил наутро", - говорит Сара...есть способы предотвратить приступы в случае с сексомнией рекомендуется спать в одежде, чтобы избежать соприкосновения с кожей другого человека.
Том говорит, что старается избегать всего этого и видит позитивные изменения: раньше приступы случались у него раз в несколько месяцев, теперь - раз в несколько лет.
"Я могу теперь уверенно заявить, что проявления сексомнии теперь под надежным контролем. А за последние два или три года их вообще не случалось", - говорит он.

Инопланетяне давно присутствуют среди нас, но виртуозно маскируются

AliensAmongUs.jpg   AlienGray.jpg
Автор этой теории писатель и исследователь Иоханнес Фибаг. Идея этой гипотезы возникла у меня в рамках интереса к явлениям Девы Марии. В 1991 г. мы с моим братом Петером опубликовали книгу «Небесные знамения», в которой мы активно рассматриваем подобного рода явления и в которой нам — по крайней мере, мне хотелось бы надеяться на это — удалось доказать, что явление Девы Марии суть не что иное, как проявление инопланетного разума, адаптированное к сознанию и восприятию людей-
контактеров. Если сопоставить частые случаи наблюдения НЛО с упомянутыми явлениями Девы Марии, нетрудно заметить близость, которой отличаются оба эти типа феноменов...Представители инопланетного разума, способные посетить нашу Землю, обладали настолько высокими технико-технологическими («магическими») стандартами, что были в состоянии адаптировать свой интеллектуальный уровень к уровню людей, живших в разные времена и принадлежавших к разным, культурам. Наряду с этим они могли оставить будущим поколениям людей, способных осуществить космический полет (в данном случае — нам, ибо мы только что начали открывать их следы и готовиться к новым контактам), свидетельства своего существования, своих прилетов на нашу планету и своих высочайших возможностей. Примеры подобного рода поистине бесчисленны:
явления богов у индусов и других народов Индии (вимана, военные технологии и др.); наблюдавшиеся в Средние века небесные явления, которые всякий раз соответствовали кругозору представлений людей того времени («летающие щиты», «феи», «карлики» и пр.); сегодня же в них склонны видеть параллели с античными и современными контактами; феномен воздушных шаров, часто наблюдавшихся на исходе XIX в., явления Девы Марии начиная с далекого прошлого до сегодняшнего дня, которые в отдельных случаях влекли за собой случаи истерии, когда массы людей, придерживающихся католического вероисповедания; НЛО и связанные с ними контакты и «похищения» как нельзя лучше соответствуют нашим представлениям об инопланетных кораблях, их экипажах и образе их действий. В результате таких взглядов НЛО, как и явления Девы Марии, и видения воздушных шаров конца XIX в., и летающие щиты эпохи Средневековья и «боги» и «явления богов» в седой древности. Мир, который мы наблюдаем вокруг, это не реальный мир?
Сегодня существуют весьма и весьма интересные представления, усматривающие в мире, который мы считаем вполне реальным, лишь тень истинной реальности. Физик Давид Бом и биолог Карл Прибрам не так давно выступили с идеей «голографической Вселенной», легшей в основу модели мироздания, классически четкой по своим формулировкам. Согласно ей, наш мозг, как сказано у Бома и Прибрама, «на путях математического мышления создает объективную реальность путем интерпретации различных частот, которые представляют собой фактически проекции из других измерений, создает упорядоченность бытия, простирающегося по ту сторону пространства и времени. Мозг — это голограмма, окутанная голографической Вселенной».
Что такое голограмма, сегодня знает каждый. Это — мнимое трехмерное изображение объектов. Фотографируемый объект, снятый с помощью специальной камеры и лазерной техники, находится в плоскости, на которой, за исключением нескольких кольцевых кадров, ничего нет. Но как только на плоское изображение под определенным утлом падает луч от источника света, объект, запечатленный на голограмме, выходит из плоскости. Он становится трехмерным и материально осязаемым. Однако последнее — не более чем иллюзия, ибо стоит нам протянуть руку и попытаться взять предмет, изображенный на голограмме, наши пальцы коснутся пустоты. По мнению Прибрама и Бома, наша Вселенная структурирована примерно таким же образом. Наш мозг или, лучше сказать, наше сознание — это своего рода луч света, в котором мы угадываем иллюзорную реальность мироздания, состоящего из бесконечного множества крохотных, не воспринимаемых нашим сознанием частот. Эту «фотопластинку» и запечатленные на ней структуры истинной реальности мы не воспринимаем. Мы просто не способны ее воспринять, поскольку наш мозг не в состоянии сделать это. Это не просто некая иллюзия, окружающая нас и готовая в любой момент рассыпаться. Она заключена в некое безграничное, невероятно сложное и взаимопереплетающееся Нечто, которое невозможно сравнить ни с чем из доступного нашему уму. Как же — давайте, однако, вернемся к нашей теме — будет вести себя «продвинутый» инопланетный разум перед лицом подобной ситуации? Какими возможностями он обладает и как будет действовать в нашем мире, в нашей реальности? Предположим, он, разум, обладает не только познанием внутренних взаимосвязей между разными планами реальности, но и знает средства и пути, посредством которых можно повлиять на глубинные, незримые для нас, людей, структуры реальности. Уитли Страйбер, американский писатель, который, как и многие его сверстники, провел свое детство в беднейших городских кварталах, однажды написал: «Если бы инопланетяне нагрянули к нам, мы сразу же сочли бы, что они — чужаки, чужие в самом буквальном смысле слова, более чуждые, чем все, что мы только можем себе представить». Эта проблема как нельзя более актуальна и для нас. Мы и представить себе не можем, чего сумел достичь «продвинутый» иномирный разум, опережающий нас в развитии на многие сотни тысяч или даже миллионы лет, как он развивается и какими мотивациями руководствуется. А между тем многие из нас ни разу не задумались над тем, что такой разум действительно существует. Это как виртуальное моделирование в киберпространстве
Понятием «киберпространство» принято определять искусственно созданное пространство, целую Вселенную, существующую благодаря мощным компьютерным программам. Такое киберпространство и виртуальная реальность обладают тем преимуществом, что за ними можно не просто наблюдать извне, со стороны, но и «войти» в них. Надев специальные очки, воссоздающие эффект трехмерного пространства, перчатки-датчики или даже целый «скафандр», кибернавт может свободно перемещаться в этой Вселенной по собственному усмотрению. Он переживает в ней иную реальность, совершенно чуждую действительность. Трудно представить, чего мы сможем достичь при дальнейшем совершенствовании виртуальной реальности, если даже первые ее шаги выглядят более чем впечатляюще. Я убежден, что через считанные десятилетия очки и скафандры непременно превратятся в «старые железки», а мозг получит возможность напрямую «связываться» с компьютером, и впечатление, будто кибернавт оказался в ином измерении, будет абсолютно достоверным. Но что же такое «истинная реальность»? Неужто просто иллюзия? Американский математик и индолог Ричард Томпсон сравнивает мировоззрение древних индусов с тем впечатлением, которое производит сегодня виртуальная реальность. Способность богов, описанных в различных ведических текстах, создавать Вселенную, представления о «командных пунктах», разбросанных во Вселенной, — все это в принципе идентично концепции единой виртуальной реальности. Ни Томпсон, ни я никогда не утверждали, что наш мир существует в рамках некоего колосссального компьютера. Что же касается киберпространства, то его мы считаем весьма удачной аналогией того, как устроен и структурирован наш мир. Все то, что мы знаем о нем, это всего лишь поверхность — блестящая, сверкающая, зеркальная поверхность, не позволяющая нашему взгляду7 проникнуть под нее, вглубь. Американский астрофизик Тимоти Феррис в своей новой книге высказывает мысль о том, не установили ли представители инопланетного разума по всей нашей галактике грандиозную сеть взаимосвязанных и взаимоконтактирующих космических зондов. Если предположить, что много миллионов лет тому назад разумные существа действительно позаботились о том, чтобы инсталлировать в любой доступной для них Солнечной системе подобные зонды, которые будут собирать всю необходимую информацию и направлять ее на родную планету, в таком случае вся Вселенная сегодня пронизана паутиной таких зондов, обеспечивающих контакт между разумными существами.,Эти зонды, которые я для простоты назвал бы Феррис-зондами, разумеется, способны делать не только панорамные снимки и замеры в атмосфере наблюдаемой планеты, но получать всеобъемлющую картину параметров. В таком случае на родной планете (или на небесном теле, которое эти разумные существа считают своей родиной) эти данные обрабатываются и вводятся в обширную модель киберпространства. Возможно, там эти существа обладают весьма любопытной возможностью: они могут — если такой Феррис-зонд, к примеру, уже действует в нашей Солнечной системе — просто вносить свою лепту в искусственную модель киберпространства Земли. Вот так, совершенно безопасно и ничем не рискуя. Они, к примеру, могут прогуляться через Бранденбургские ворота в Берлине или отправиться в экспедицию, чтобы совершить восхождение на гору Эверест. А еще они могут побывать во всех горячих точках Земли или выслушать мессу на площади Св. Петра в Риме. И все это — сидя в своем кресле (или что там у них заменяет его). Следующий этап на пути развития таких зондов — это их использование в качестве передаточного устройства, направленного не на самих существ, а на их сознание. Это может создать для них возможности безопасно снизойти из своего мира в наш, земной, без всякой опасности явиться в «аспекте киберпространства» и попытаться понять, что же мы, собственно, называем своей реальностью. Физик Майкл Суорд считает подобный сценарий не только вполне возможным, но и тесно связанным с феноменом НЛО. Согласно его взглядам, роль микроминиатюрных Феррис-зондов выполняют имплантаты, вживляемые некоторым контактерам, живущим среди нас под контролем инопланетян, даже если истинная родина инопланетян находится на расстоянии многих световых лет от их родной галактики. За нами постоянно наблюдают
Наш мозг, вымуштрованный четырьмя с половиной миллиардами лет эволюции, вообще способен воспринимать лишь отдельные фасеточные точки реальности. Поэтому тот туннель реальности, в котором живет каждый из нас, оставляет какую-нибудь пару метров для обзора. И все, что находится за пределами этих двух метров, остается неведомым и недоступным для нас. Как правило, это не вызывает у нас никакого интереса. Однако ничто не является большей неопределенностью, чем та определенность, в которой мы пребываем. А столкновение с «невозможным» может обрушиться на нас куда быстрее, чем успеет закончиться это мгновение. Есть что-то такое, пребывающее рядом с нами. Это что-то оказывает мощное влияние на нас. Оно проявляется там, где мы и не ожидаем. Оно воздействует на нас и в лесах, и на пустынных проселочных дорогах, в облаках и тихих комнатах наших собственных жилищ... никакой реальности на самом деле не существует. Реальность — это всего лишь плод и порождение нашего мозга. Тот, кто проник в тайну подобного положения дел, способен свободно манипулировать тем, что мы именуем реальностью. Манипулировать, когда и как ему заблагорассудится. Некоторые из людей, «похищенных» инопланетянами, набравшись мужества и сил, чтобы перед лицом своего «похищения» задать вопрос о смысле подобных действий, по большей части получают стереотипный ответ: «Это наше право!». Ваше право? Но почему, с какой стати? Кто дал им подобное право?
В другом случае одна из «похищенных» поведала о еще более испуганной реакции существ на слова, которые она бросила им в лицо: «Вы — оборотни!». Да-да, очень точно: именно оборотни. Они на самом деле совсем не то, чем кажутся нам. Их способность к мимикрии позволяет надежно замаскировать их сущность. Но кто или что скрывается за внешностью?
Какие бы вопросы мы ни задавали, какие бы объяснения ни предлагали: все они неизменно оказывались ложными. Сам этот сценарий устроен так, что чем глубже мы пытаемся проникнуть в него, тем более сложным и запутанным он оказывается. Ясно одно: где-то что-то есть и где-то что-то происходит. Это происходило в далеком прошлом и совершается здесь и сейчас, это происходит среди нас.



There is some info about our Doubles below. To know more about your Double I would recommend "Tales of Power" by Carlos Castaneda, and this book (full electronic version) you can find on our site on this link  : Carlos Castaneda 3

"Do you know that you can extend yourself forever in any of the directions I have pointed to?" he went on. "Do you know that one moment can be eternity? This is not a riddle (perplexing enigma); it's a fact, but only
if you mount (fix on) that moment and use it to take the Totality of Yourself (your Total Self, means all of his Higher Selves together, LM) forever in any direction."
"Not actual physical marks on your body, but signs, indications in your Luminous Fibers, areas of Brightness. We are Luminous Beings and everything we are or everything we feel shows in our fibers. Humans have a Brightness peculiar only to them. That's the only way to tell them apart from other Luminous Living Beings."
"The Double is the Self; that explanation should suffice. If you would see, however, you'd know, that there is a great difference between Genaro and his Double. For a Sorcerer, who Sees, the Double is brighter...Well, a warrior starts off with the
certainty, that his Spirit (his Double) is off Balance; then by living in full Control and Awareness, but without hurry or compulsion, he does his ultimate best to gain this Balance...A Double is the Sorcerer himself, developed through his Dreaming" don Juan explained. "A Double is an Act of Power to a Sorcerer, but only a tale of Power to you. In the case of Genaro, his Double is indistinguishable from the Original... his (Genaro) impeccability, as a warrior, is supreme; thus, you've never noticed the difference yourself. But in the years, that you've known him, you've been with the original (physical) Genaro only twice; every other time you've been with his Double."
"Well, a Sorcerer can Double up," don Juan said. "That's all one can say."
"But is he aware, that he is doubled?"
"Of course he's aware of it."
"Does he know, that he is in two places at once?"
Both of them looked at me and then they exchanged a glance.
"Where is the other don Genaro?" I asked. Don Genaro leaned towards me and stared into my eyes.
"I don't know," he said softly. "No Sorcerer knows where his other is.
"Genaro is right," don Juan said. "A Sorcerer has no notion, that he is in two places at once. To be aware of that would be the equivalent of facing his Double, and the Sorcerer, that finds himself face to face with himself is a Dead Sorcerer. That is the rule. That is the way Power (of our Total Selves, LM) has set things up. No one knows why."
Don Juan explained, that by the time a Warrior had conquered Dreaming and Seeing and had developed a Double, he must have also succeeded in erasing Personal History, Self-importance, and routines. He said, that all the techniques, which he had taught me, and which I had considered to be empty talk, were, in essence, means for removing the impracticality of having a Double in the ordinary World, by making the Self and the World fluid, and by placing them outside the bounds of prediction.
"A fluid warrior can no longer make the World chronological," don Juan explained. "And for him, the world and himself are no longer objects. He's a Luminous Being existing in a Luminous World. The Double is a simple affair for a Sorcerer,  because he knows what he's doing. To take notes is a simple affair for you, but you still scare Genaro with your pencil."
"Can an outsider, looking at a Sorcerer, see that he is in two places at once?" I asked don Juan.
"Certainly. That would be the only way to know it."
"But can't one logically assume, that the Sorcerer would also notice, that he has been in two places?"
"Aha!" don Juan exclaimed. "For once you've got it right. A Sorcerer may certainly notice afterwards, that he has been in two places at once. But this is only bookkeeping and has no bearing on the fact, that while he's acting, he has no notion of his Duality...Think of this," he went on. "The World doesn't yield to us directly, the description of the  World stands in between. So, properly speaking, we are always one step removed and our experience of the World is always a Recollection (Recall) of the experience. We are perennially recollecting the instant that has just happened, just passed. We recollect, recollect, recollect...If our entire experience of the World is Recollection, then it's not so outlandish to conclude, that a Sorcerer can be in two places at once. This is not the case from the point of view of his own perception, because in order to experience the World, a Sorcerer, like every other man, has to recollect the act he has just performed, the event he has just witnessed, the experience he has just lived. In his awareness there is only a single recollection. But for an outsider, looking at the Sorcerer, it may appear as if the Sorcerer is acting two different episodes at once. The Sorcerer, however, recollects two separate single instants, because the glue of the description of time is no longer binding him...
"He's right," Genaro said. "We're always one jump behind...
"Is the Double solid?" I asked don Juan after a long silence.
They looked at me.
"Does the Double have corporealness (materiality)?" I asked.
"Certainly," don Juan said. "Solidity, corporealness are memories.
"Do you also have a Double, don Juan?" I asked.
"Of course!" he exclaimed...
"Tell me something, don Juan," I said, half in jest. "Are you yourself or are you your Double?"
"My Double," he whispered.
"Can I talk about don Genaro and his Double?" I asked..."Do you mean, that I will develop a Double?"
"No one develops a Double. That's only a way of talking about it. You, for all the talking you do, are a sap (depletion) for words. You get trapped by their meanings. Now you think, that one develops a Double through evil means, I suppose. All of us Luminous Beings have a Double. All of us!  A Warrior learns to be aware of it, that's all. There are seemingly insurmountable (incapable of being overcome) barriers protecting that awareness. But that's expected; those barriers are what makes arriving at that awareness such a unique challenge. "Why am I so afraid of it, don Juan?"
"Because you're thinking, that the Double is what the word says, a Double, or another you. I chose those words in order to describe it. The Double is oneself and cannot be faced in any other way."
"What if I don't want to have it?"
"The Double is not a matter of personal choice. Neither is it a matter of personal choice who is selected to learn the Sorcerers' Knowledge, that leads to that awareness...
"But you yourself told me, don Juan, that one can always fail."
"That's true. One can always fail. But I think that you are referring to something else. You want to find a way out. You want to have the freedom to fail and quit on your own terms. Too late for that. A Warrior is in the hands of Power and his only freedom is to choose an impeccable life. There is no way to fake triumph or defeat. Your reason may want you to fail altogether in order to obliterate  (wipe out) the Totality of Yourself. But there is a countermeasure, which will not permit you to declare a false victory or  defeat. If you think, that you can retreat to the haven of failure, you're out of your mind. Your body will stand guard and will not let you go either way...the Double, although it is arrived at through Dreaming, is as real, as it can be...
"Obviously the Double can perform acts," I said. "But can the Double act in behalf of the Self?"
"It is the Self, damn it!"
I found it very difficult to explain myself. I had in mind, that if a Sorcerer could perform two actions at once, his capacity for utilitarian (useful, practical) production had to double. He could work two jobs, bein two places, see two persons, and so on, at once...
"Genaro is a Man of Knowledge. The purest of them all. His actions are impeccable. He's beyond ordinary men, and beyond Sorcerers. His Double is an expression of his joy and his humour. Thus, he cannot possibly use it to create or resolve
ordinary situations. As far as I know, the Double is the Awareness of our state as Luminous Beings. It can do anything, and yet it chooses to be unobtrusive and gentle...A Man of Knowledge cannot possibly act towards his fellow men in injurious terms, hypothetically or otherwise...
"But, what if his fellow men are plotting against his security and well-being? Can he then use his Double to protect himself?"
"the Double begins in Dreaming" Genaro added, sighing, "Yes, Carlitos, the Double is a dream."
"Do you mean, that he's not real?" I asked.
"The steps, that we follow to arrive at the Double are the same, though. Especially the beginning steps, which are muddled and uncertain."
Don Genaro agreed and made a comment on the uncertainty, that a Sorcerer had at that stage.
"When it first happened to me, I didn't know it had happened," he explained. "One day I had been picking plants in the mountains. I had gone into a place that was worked by other herb collectors. I had two huge sacks of plants. I was ready to go
home, but before I did I decided to take a moment's rest.
I lay down on the side of the trail in the shade of a tree and I fell asleep. I heard then the sound of people coming down the hill and woke up. I hurriedly ran for cover and hid behind some bushes a short distance across the road from where I had fallen asleep. While I hid there I had the nagging impression I had forgotten something. I looked to see if I had my two sacks of plants. I didn't have them. I looked across the road to the place where I had been sleeping and I nearly dropped my pants with fright. I was still there asleep! It was me! I touched my body. I was myself! By that time the people that were coming down the hill were upon the me that was asleep, while the me that was fully awake looked helplessly from my hiding place. Damn it to hell! They were going to find me there and take my sacks away. But they went by me as if I were not there at all. My vision had been so vivid that I went wild. I screamed and then I woke up again. Damn it! It had been a dream!"
"Tell him where you woke up the second time," don Juan said.
"I woke up by the road," don Genaro said, "where I had fallen asleep. But for one moment I didn't quite know, where I really was. I can almost say, that I was still looking at myself waking up, then something pulled me to the side of the road and
I found myself rubbing my eyes. The place, where I had hid, was there exactly, as I had seen it," he said. "And the people, who had walked by me were down the road, a short distance away. I know it because I ran downhill after them. They were the same people I had seen. I followed them until they got to town. They must have thought I was mad. I asked them if they had seen my friend sleeping by the side of the road. They all said they hadn't."
"You see," don Juan said, "all of us go through the same doubts. We are afraid of being mad; unfortunately for us, of course, all of us are already mad."
"All of us are dense Beings," he said. "You're not the only one, Carlitos. I was a bit shook up by my dream for a couple of days, but then I had to work for my living and take care of too many things and really had no time for pondering upon the mystery of my dreams. So I forgot about it in no time at all. I was very much like you. "But one day, a few months later, after a terribly tiring day, I fell asleep like a log in mid-afternoon. It had just started to rain and a leak in the roof woke me up.
I jumped out of bed and climbed on top of the house to fix the leak before it began to pour. I felt so fine and strong,  that I finished in one minute and I didn't even get wet. I thought that the snooze I had taken had done me a lot of good. When I was through I went back into the house to get something to eat and I realized that I could not swallow. I thought I was sick. I mashed some roots and leaves and wrapped them around my neck and went to my bed. And then again when I got to my bed I nearly dropped my pants. I was there in bed asleep! I wanted to shake myself and wake me up, but I knew that that was not the thing one should do. So I ran out of the house. I was panic-stricken. I roamed around the hills aimlessly. I had no idea where I was going and although I had lived all my life there I got lost. I walked in the rain and didn't even feel it. It seemed, that I couldn't think. Then the lightning and thunder became so intense that I woke up again."
He paused for a moment.
"Do you want to know where I woke up?" he asked me.
"Certainly," don Juan answered.
"I woke up in the hills in the rain," he said.
"But how did you know, that you had woken up?" I asked.
"My body knew it," he replied..."It's an inner voice, that tells you what's what. And at that time, it told me, that I had woken up a second time. Of course, as soon as I woke up I became convinced, that I must have been Dreaming. Obviously it had not been an ordinary dream, but it hadn't been dreaming proper either. So I settled for something else: walking in my sleep, half awake, I suppose. I could not understand it in any other way."
Don Genaro said, that his benefactor had explained to him, that what he had gone through was not a dream at all, and that he should not insist on regarding it as walking in his sleep.
"My benefactor explained, that the dream, in which one was watching oneself asleep," don Genaro went on, "was the time of the Double. He recommended, that rather than wasting my power in wondering and asking myself questions, I should use the opportunity to act, and that when I had another chance I should be prepared. My next chance took place at my benefactor's house. I was helping him with the housework. I had lain down to rest and as usual I fell sound asleep. His house was definitely a place of power for me and helped me. I was suddenly aroused by a loud noise and awakened. My benefactor's house was large. He was a wealthy man and had many people working for him.
The noise seemed to be the sound of a shovel digging in gravel. I sat up to listen and then I stood up. The noise was very unsettling to me but I couldn't figure out why. I was pondering whether to go and check it out when I noticed that I was asleep on the floor. This time I knew what to expect and what to do and I followed the noise. I walked to the back of the house. There was no one there. The noise seemed to come from beyond the house. I kept on following it. The more I followed it the quicker I could move. I ended up at a distant place, witnessing incredible things."
He explained, that at the time of those events he still was in the beginning stages of his apprenticeship and had done very little in the realm of dreaming, but that he had an uncanny (strange) facility to dream, that he was looking at himself.
"Where did you go, don Genaro?" I asked.
"That was the first time, that I had really moved in Dreaming" he said. "I knew enough about it to behave correctly, though. I didn't look at anything directly and ended up in a deep ravine, where my benefactor had some of his power plants."
"What did you see in the ravine, don Genaro?" I asked.
"I saw my benefactor doing some dangerous maneuvers with people. I thought I was there to help him and hid behind some trees. Yet I couldn't have known how to help. I was not dumb, though, and I realized, that the scene was there for me to watch, not to act in."
"When and how and where did you wake up?"
"I don't know when I woke up. It must have been hours later. All I know is, that I followed my benefactor and the other men, and when they were about to reach my benefactor's house the noise, that they made, because they were arguing, woke me up. I was at the place where I had seen myself asleep. Upon waking up, I realized, that whatever I had seen and done, was not a dream. I had actually gone some distance away, guided by the sound."
"Was your benefactor aware of what you were doing?"
"Certainly. He had been making the noise with the shovel to help me accomplish my task. When he walked into the house he pretended to scold me for falling asleep. I knew, that he had seen me. Later on, after his friends had left, he told me, that he had noticed my glow hiding behind the trees."
Don Genaro said, that those three instances set him off on the path of Dreaming, and that it took him fifteen years to have his next chance.

"...I had then a unique moment. I held two images in my mind, two dreams. I felt, that something in me was deeply asleep and was waking up and I found myself lying on the floor of the ramada with don Juan and don Genaro shaking me. But I also was at the Power Place and don Juan and don Genaro were still shaking me. There was one crucial instant, in which I was neither in one place, nor the other, but I was rather in both places as an observer seeing two scenes at once. I had the incredible sensation, that at that instant I could have gone either way. All I had to do at that moment was to change perspective and rather, than watch either scene from the outside, feel it from the point of view of the subject..."
"Genaro came to see you to tell you something very exclusive," he (Don Juan) said. "When he came out of the bushes, he was Genaro the Double. There is another way to talk about this, that would explain it better, but I can't use it now."
"Why not, don Juan?"
"Because you are not ready yet to talk about the Totality of Oneself. For the time being I can only say, that this Genaro here is not the Double now."
He pointed to don Genaro with a movement of his head. Don Genaro blinked repeatedly.
"The Genaro of last night was the Double. And as I told you already, the Double has Inconceivable (unbelievable) Power. He showed you a most important issue. In order to do that he had to touch you. The Double simply tapped you on the neck, on the same spot the ally walked over you years ago. Naturally, you went out like a light. And naturally too, you indulged like a son of a bitch. It took us hours to round you up...I told you, that Genaro came to show you something, the Mystery of Luminous Beings as Dreamers. You wanted to know about the Double. It begins in Dreams. But then you asked, “What is the Double?” And I said the Double is the Self. The Self dreams the Double. That should be simple, except, that there is nothing simple about us. Perhaps the ordinary dreams of the Self are simple, but that doesn't mean, that the Self is simple. Once it has learned to Dream the Double, the Self arrives at this weird crossroad and a moment comes when one realizes, that it is the Double, who Dreams the Self...Last night Genaro guided you through the intricacies of the Double," don Juan went on. "Only he can do that for you. And it was not a vision or a hallucination when you saw yourself lying on the ground. You could have realized that with infinite clarity, if you had not gotten lost in your indulging, and you could have known then, that you yourself are a Dream, that your Double is dreaming you, in the same fashion, that you dreamed him last night."

Luminous Ball

Luminous Egg


Video links to Apple Player and Adobe Flash Player have been modified in order to solve the following problems:

1. Browsers on mobile phones generally have their own in-built ("native") video player made possible with the latest web programming language ("HTML5"). These browsers do not accept either Apple or Adobe Flash Players ("Plugins").
2. Early 2015, from its update 39, Google Chrome disallowed use of Apple Player Plugin, with recommendation that websites be upgraded to HTML5.

To solve the above 2 problems, both Apple and Adobe video links have been upgraded with HTML5. Either link will play the video in (so called) .mp4 format compatible with HTML5. HOWEVER, if a website visitor has an OLD desktop computer browser that does NOT recognise HTML5, the video will be played with Apple or Adobe Flash Player plugin (depending on which link has been clicked). You may be asked to activate (enable) the Player.

On a desktop computer, you may also view the video by the 3rd method- by clicking the link to the video file. At present browsers like Internet Explorer or Firefox would open a new window to play the video. For Google Chrome (probably from its update 39), it downloads the video into your DOWNLOADS folder- there will be a message on the bottom left of the screen showing the name of the video- if you left-click on a small arrow and then on "OPEN"- the video should play.


Click to Animation "Luminous Ball" on Adobe Flash Player

Mind Control is done with Moving Our Spirit's Assemblage Points! Our Perception is not in the Brain, as we were taught at schools, institutes and universities. Our Perception is in the Shiniest Point of our Spirits, called the Assemblage Point.
If you move this Point in the Luminous Ball of a Human (a picture of Human Luminous Ball is above), her/his Perception will change, because Universes and Worlds in them will change.
If before some of us could see mirages of Worlds of other Universes, soon all of us will see mirages of other Worlds - permanently. Assemblage Points of our Spirits will be moved to the Position of Silent Knowledge (the Third Point), we all will be able to Bi-Locate, it means being in two places simultaneously!
First Humans on Earth (but not all) used to do that, because their Assemblage Points were on the Position of Silent Knowledge (the Third Point) and we stayed in that World longer, than in today's World ! Then we started fluctuating between World (Position) of Silent Knowledge and Worlds of Reason (Point of Reason), eventually the Humanity's Position of Assemblage Points of our Spirits was deliberately moved to the Place of Reason permanently (Our Daily World) and we lost our abilities. Here are some extracts about the meaning of BI-LOCATION. BI-LOCATION is created by coming back to the Position of Silent Knowledge (like in old times) or at least, fluctuating the Assemblage Point of our Spirit between Place of Reason (Daily World) and Place of Silent Knowledge. From highly recommended - "The Power of Silence" by Carlos Castaneda:

"For instance, they (Shamans of Mexico) perceive Energy, as it Flows freely in the Universe, Energy free from the bindings of socialization and syntax (the system of rules in operation), pure Vibratory Energy. They called this act of Seeing.
Don Juan's prime objective (presented factually) was to help me to perceive Energy as it Flows in the Universe. In the world of shamans, to perceive Energy in such a manner is the first mandatory step toward a more engulfing (overwhelmed by), freer view of a different cognitive system (of getting knowledge)...To see Energy as it Flows in the Universe meant , to Don Juan, the capacity to see a Human Being as a Luminous Egg or Luminous Ball of Energy, and to be able to distinguish, in that Luminous Ball of Energy, certain features shared by women/men in common, such as the point of Brilliance in the already brilliant Luminous Ball of Energy. The claim of shamans was, that it was on that point of brilliance, which those shamans called the Assemblage Point, that Perception was assembled. They could extend this thought logically to mean, that it was on that point of Brilliance, that our Cognition (getting knowledge) of the World was manufactured...For the shamans of ancient Mexico, Intent (Law of Intent) was a Force they could visualize when they saw Energy (White Energy of Balance, LM) as it Flows in the Universe! They considered it an all-pervasive Force (spread throughout, permeate), that intervened (appeared) in every aspect of Time and Space. It was the Impetus (a Stimulus, an Impulse) behind everything; but what was of inconceivable (unbelievable) value to those shamans was the Intent - a pure Abstraction - was intimately attached to women/men. Women/men could always manipulate it. The shamans of ancient Mexico realized, that the only way to affect this Force was through impeccable behaviour..."

"...For example, as average men, we were blind to the most Crucial Piece of Knowledge, available to a Human Being: the Existence of the Assemblage Point (Assemblage Point of our Spirits, attached to the bodies, LM) and the fact, that it could move. For a rational man it's unthinkable, that there should be an Invisible (Assemblage) Point (of our Spirit, LM), where Perception is assembled," he (don Juan) went on. "And yet more unthinkable, that such a Point is not in the brain,
as he might vaguely expect...that Sorcery was not incantations (chanting of charms, casting of spells) and hocus-pocus, but the Freedom to Perceive not only our World, taken for granted, but Everything Else, what was humanly possible.
I asked him to explain again what Unbending Intent was. He said, that... Unbending Intent was also the Force engendered (brought into existence), when the Assemblage Point was maintained fixed in a position, which was not the Usual One. Don Juan then made a meaningful distinction - which had eluded (escaped) me all these years - between a Movement and a Shift of the Assemblage Point.
A Movement, he said, was a profound Change of Position, so extreme, that the Assemblage Point might even reach other Bands of Energy within our Total Luminous Mass of Energy Fields. Each Band of Energy represented a completely Different Universe to be perceived.

A Shift, however, was a small movement within the Band of Energy Fields we perceived as the World of Everyday Life..." Carlos Castaneda, "The Power of Silence", p. 220-221

"...The Nagual said, there had been another time, when Mankind had been on the Third Point, which, of course, had been the first point then. But after that, Humankind moved to the Place of Reason. When Silent Knowledge was the First Point, the same condition prevailed (we had our paranormal abilities, LM). Not every Human Being's Assemblage Point was squarely on that position either. This meant, that the True Leaders of Humankind had always been the few Human Beings, whose Assemblage Points happened to be either on the exact Point of Reason or of Silent Knowledge. The rest of Humanity, the old Nagual told don Juan, was merely the audience. In our day, they were the lovers of Reason. In the past, they had been the lovers of Silent Knowledge. They were the ones, who had admired and sung odes to the heroes of either position. The Nagual stated, that Humankind had spent the longer part of its history in the Position of Silent Knowledge, and that this explained our Great Longing for it..."
"Today you reached the Place of Silent Knowledge," he said with finality. He explained, that that afternoon, My Assemblage Point had moved by itself, without his intervention. I had Intended the Movement by manipulating my feeling of being gigantic, and in so doing, My Assemblage Point had reached the Position of Silent Knowledge. I was very curious to hear how don Juan interpreted my experience. He said, that one way to talk about the Perception, attained in the Place of Silent Knowledge, was to call it "here and here." He explained, that when I had told him, I had felt myself looming over the desert chaparral, I should have added, that I was seeing the desert floor and the top of the shrubs at the same time. Or, that I had been at the place, where I stood and at the same time at the place, where the jaguar was. Thus I had been able to notice how carefully he stepped to avoid the cactus spines. In other words, instead of perceiving the normal here and there, I had perceived "here and here." His comments frightened me. He was right. I had not mentioned that to him, nor had I admitted even to myself, that I had been in two places at once (next to jaguar and far from it, LM).
"In order to reach the Third Point of Reference one must perceive two places at once (BILOCATION)."
My Recollecting had put me in a strange mood - it was, as if I had lived the experience just a few minutes earlier. I was suddenly aware of something I had completely missed before. Under don Juan's supervision, I had twice before experienced that divided perception, but this was the first time I had accomplished it all by myself. Thinking about my Recollection, I also realized, that my sensory experience was more complex, than I had at first thought. During the time I had loomed over the bushes, I had been aware - without words or even thoughts - that being in two places, or being "here and here" as don Juan had called it, rendered my perception immediate and complete at both places. But I had also been aware, that my double perception lacked the total clarity of normal Perception. Don Juan explained, that normal Perception had an Axis. "Here and there" were the perimeters of that Axis, and we were partial to the clarity of "here." He said, that in normal Perception, only "here" was perceived completely, instantaneously, and directly. Its twin referent, "there," lacked immediacy. It was inferred (suggested, implied), deduced, expected, even assumed, but it was not apprehended directly with all the senses. When we perceived two places at once, total clarity was lost, but the immediate perception of "there" was gained.
"What you experienced was vital to you, because it opened the road to Silent Knowledge, but the important thing was the jaguar. That jaguar was indeed a Manifestation of the Spirit. That big cat came unnoticed out of nowhere. And he
could have finished us off as surely as I am talking to you. That jaguar was an expression of Magic. Without him you would have had no elation (sense of triumph), no lesson, no realizations.."
"But was he a real jaguar?" I asked.
"You bet he was real!"
Don Juan observed, that for an average man that big cat would have been a frightening oddity. An average man would have been hard put to explain in reasonable terms what that jaguar was doing in Chihuahua, so far from a tropical jungle.
But a Sorcerer, because he had a Connecting Link with Intent, saw that jaguar as a vehicle to Perceiving - not an oddity, but a Source of Awe...He had asserted, that only the Spirit could move the Assemblage Point... Sorcerers are more aware of their Connection with the Spirit, than the average man and strive (struggle)  to manipulate it. That's all. I've already told you, the Connecting Link with Intent is the Universal feature, shared by Everything There Is...being in two places at once was a milestone Sorcerers used to mark the Moment the Assemblage Point reached the Place of Silent Knowledge. Split Perception, if accomplished by one's own means, was called the Free Movement of the Assemblage Point. He assured me, that every Nagual consistently did everything within his Power to encourage the Free Movement of his apprentices' Assemblage Points. This all-out effort was cryptically called "Reaching Out for the Third Point (BI-LOCATION)."

"The most difficult aspect of the Nagual's Knowledge," don Juan went on, "and certainly the most crucial part of his task is, that of reaching out for the Third Point - the Nagual Intends that Free Movement, and the Spirit channels to the Nagual the means to accomplish it. I had never Intended anything of that sort, until you came along. Therefore, I had never fully appreciated my benefactor's gigantic effort to Intend it for me. Difficult as it is for a Nagual to Intend that Free Movement for his disciples," don Juan went on, "it's nothing compared with the difficulty his disciples have in understanding what the Nagual is doing. Look at the way you yourself struggle! The same thing happened to me. Most of the time, I ended up believing, that the Trickery of the Spirit was simply the Trickery of the Nagual Julian. Later on, I realized I owed him my Life and Well-Being," don Juan continued. "Now I know, I owe him infinitely more. Since I can't begin to describe what I really owe him, I prefer to say he cajoled (persuade by pleading) me into having a Third Point of Reference. The Third Point of Reference is Freedom of Perception; it is Intent; it is the Spirit; the Somersault of Thought into the Miraculous; the Act of Reaching Beyond our Boundaries and Touching the Inconceivable (BI-LOCATION)...To discover the possibility of being in two places at once is very exciting to the mind..."
I told him, that with me it was not a matter of being appalled or attracted by my experience, but a matter of being frightened by the Immensity of the Possibility of Split Perception. "I can't say, that I don't believe I was in two places at once,"
I said. "I can't deny my experience, and yet I think I am so frightened by it, that my mind refuses to accept it as a fact...
Don Juan remarked, that we do not have to be students of Sorcery to move our Assemblage Point. Sometimes, due to natural, although dramatic, circumstances, such as war, deprivation, stress, fatigue, sorrow, helplessness, human's
Assemblage Points undergo profound Movements. If the humans, who found themselves in such circumstances, were able to adopt a Sorcerer's ideology, don Juan said, they would be able to maximize that natural Movement with no trouble.
And they would seek and find extraordinary things, instead of doing what men do in such circumstances: craving the return to normalcy. When a Movement of the Assemblage Point is maximized," he went on, "both the average
man or the apprentice in Sorcery becomes a Sorcerer, because by maximizing that Movement, Continuity is shattered beyond repair."
With no preliminaries, and without stopping to think, don Juan then began to tell me a Sorcery Story. He said, that for an entire year he had been the only young person in the Nagual Julian's house. He was so completely self-centered, he had not even noticed, when at the beginning of the second year his benefactor brought three young men and four young women to live in the house. As far as don Juan was concerned, those seven persons, who arrived one at a time over two or three months were simply servants and of no importance. One of the young men was even made his assistant. Don Juan was convinced the Nagual Julian had lured and cajoled them into coming to work for him without wages. And he would have
felt sorry for them, had it not been for their blind trust in the Nagual Julian and their sickening attachment to everyone and everything in the household. His feeling was, that they were born slaves and that he had nothing to say to them.
Yet he was obliged to make friends with them and give them advice, not because he wanted to, but because the Nagual demanded it as part of his work. As they sought his counseling, he was horrified by the poignancy (affecting, touching)
and drama of their life stories. He secretly congratulated himself for being better off, than they. He sincerely felt he was smarter, than all of them put together. He boasted (bragging) to them, that he could see through the Nagual's
maneuvers, although he could not claim to understand them. And he laughed at their ridiculous attempts to be helpful.
He considered them servile and told them to their faces, that they were being mercilessly exploited by a professional tyrant. But what enraged him was, that the four young women had crushes on the Nagual Julian and would do anything to
please him. Don Juan sought solace (consolation, comfort in sorrow) in his work and plunged into it to forget his anger, or for hours on end he would read the books, that the Nagual Julian had in the house. Reading became his passion.
When he was reading, everyone knew not to bother him, except the Nagual Julian, who took pleasure in never leaving him in peace. He was always after don Juan to be friends with the young men and women. He told him repeatedly, that all
of them, don Juan included, were his Sorcery apprentices. Don Juan was convinced the Nagual Julian knew nothing about Sorcery, but he humored him, listening to him without ever believing. The Nagual Julian was unfazed (not bothered) by
don Juan's lack of trust. He simply proceeded, as if don Juan believed him, and gathered all the apprentices together to give them instruction. Periodically he took all of them on all-night excursions into the local mountains. On most of these excursions the Nagual would leave them by themselves, stranded in those rugged mountains, with don Juan in charge. The rationale (fundamental reasons), given for the trips, was that in solitude, in the wilderness, they would discover the Spirit. But they never did. At least, not in any way don Juan could understand. However, the Nagual Julian insisted so strongly on the importance of knowing the Spirit, that don Juan became obsessed with Knowing, what the Spirit was.
During one of those nighttime excursions, the Nagual Julian urged don Juan to go after the Spirit, even if he didn't understand it.
"Of course, he meant the only thing a Nagual could mean: the Movement of the Assemblage Point," don Juan said. "But he worded it in a way, he believed would make sense to me: go after the Spirit. I thought he was talking nonsense. At that time I had already formed my own opinions and beliefs and was convinced, that the Spirit was, what is known as character, volition, guts, strength. And I believed I didn't have to go after them. I had them all. The Nagual Julian insisted, that the Spirit was indefinable, that one could not even feel it, much less talk about it. One could only beckon (signal or summon by waving) it, he said, by acknowledging its existence. My retort was very much the same as yours: one cannot beckon something, that does not exist."
Don Juan told me he had argued so much with the Nagual, that the Nagual finally promised him, in front of his entire household, that in one single stroke he was going to show him not only what the Spirit was, but how to define it. He also promised to throw an enormous party, even inviting the neighbors, to celebrate don Juan's lesson. Don Juan remarked, that in those days, before the Mexican Revolution, the Nagual Julian and the seven Women of his group passed themselves off as the wealthy owners of a large hacienda. Nobody ever doubted their image, especially the Nagual Julian's, a rich and handsome landholder, who had set aside his earnest desire to pursue an ecclesiastical (related to church) career in order to care for his seven unmarried sisters.
One day, during the rainy season, the Nagual Julian announced, that, as soon as the rains stopped, he would hold the enormous party he had promised don Juan. And one Sunday afternoon he took his entire household to the banks of the river, which was in flood, because of the heavy rains. The Nagual Julian rode his horse, while don Juan trotted respectfully behind, as was their custom, in case they met any of their neighbors;
as far as the neighbors knew, don Juan was the landlord's personal servant. The Nagual chose for their picnic a site on high ground by the edge of the river. The Women had prepared food and drink. The Nagual had even brought a group of
musicians from the town. It was a big party, which included the peons (farm workers) of the hacienda, neighbors, and even passing strangers, that had meandered (walking around) over to join the fun. Everybody ate and drank to his heart's content. The Nagual danced with all the Women, sang, and recited poetry. He told jokes and, with the help of some of the Women, staged skits (comic theatrical sketch) to the delight of all. At a given moment, the Nagual Julian asked, if any of those present, especially the apprentices, wanted to share don Juan's lesson. They all declined. All of them were keenly aware of the Nagual's hard tactics. Then he asked don Juan, if he was sure he wanted to find out what the Spirit was.
Don Juan could not say no. He simply could not back out. He announced, that he was as ready, as he could ever be. The Nagual guided him to the edge of the raging river and made him kneel. The Nagual began a long incantation, in which
he invoked (call upon a Higher Power for assistance) the Power of the Wind and the Mountains and asked the Power of the River to advise don Juan. His incantation, meaningful, as it might have been, was worded so irreverently (disrespectful), that everyone had to laugh. When he finished, he asked don Juan to stand up with his eyes closed. Then he took the apprentice in his arms, as he would a child, and threw him into the rushing waters, shouting, "Don't hate the River, for heaven's sake!"
Relating this incident sent don Juan into fits of laughter. Perhaps under other circumstances I, too, might have found it hilarious (gay, merry). This time, however, the story upset me tremendously.
"You should have seen those people's faces," don Juan continued. "I caught a glimpse of their dismay (dread), as I flew through the air on my way to the river. No one had anticipated, that that devilish Nagual would do a thing like that."
Don Juan said, he had thought it was the end of his life. He was not a good swimmer, and, as he sank to the bottom of the river, he cursed himself for allowing this to happen to him. He was so angry, he did not have time to panic. All he could think about was his resolve (decide upon), that he was not going to die in that frigging (fucking) river, at the hands of that frigging man. His feet touched bottom and he propelled himself up. It was not a deep river, but the flood waters had widened it a great deal. The current was swift (with great speed), and it pulled him along, as he dogpaddled, trying not to let the rushing waters tumble him around. The current dragged him a long distance. And while he was being dragged and trying his best not to succumb (give in), he entered into a strange Fame of Mind. He knew his flaw. He was a very angry man and his pent-up (hidden) anger made him hate and fight with everyone around. But he could not hate or fight the river, or be impatient with it, or fret (agitate), which were the ways he normally behaved with everything and everybody in his life. All he could do with the river was follow its Flow. Don Juan contended (debated), that that simple realization and the acquiescence (acception without protest) it engendered (produced), tipped the scales, so to speak, and he experienced a Free Movement of his Assemblage Point. Suddenly, without being in any way aware of what was happening, instead of being pulled by the rushing water, don Juan felt himself running along the riverbank (BI-LOCATION). He was running so fast, that he had no time to think. A tremendous force was pulling him, making him race over boulders and fallen trees, as if they were not there.
After he had run in that desperate fashion for quite a while, don Juan braved a quick look at the reddish, rushing water. And he saw himself being roughly tumbled by the current. Nothing in his experience had prepared him for such a moment.
 He knew then, without involving his thought processes, that he was in two places at once (BI-LOCATION). And in one of them, in the rushing river, he was helpless. All his energy went into trying to save himself. Without thinking about it, he began angling away from the riverbank. It took all his strength and determination to edge an inch at a time. He felt, as if he were dragging a tree. He moved so slowly, that it took him an eternity to gain a few yards. The strain was too much for him. Suddenly he was no longer running; he was falling down a deep well. When he hit the water, the coldness of it made him scream. And then he was back in the river, being dragged by the current. His fright upon finding himself back in the rushing water was so intense, that all he could do was to wish with all his might to be safe and sound on the riverbank. And immediately he was there again, running at breakneck speed parallel to, but a distance from, the river. As he ran, he looked at the rushing water and saw himself struggling to stay afloat. He wanted to yell a command; he wanted to order himself to swim at an angle, but he had no voice. His anguish for the part of him, that was in the water was overwhelming. It served as a bridge between the two Juan Matuses. He was instantly back in the water, swimming at an angle toward the bank. The incredible sensation of alternating between two places was enough to eradicate his fear. He no longer cared about his fate.
He alternated freely between swimming in the river and racing on the bank. But whichever he was doing, he consistently moved toward his left, racing away from the river or paddling to the left shore.
He came out on the left side of the river about five miles downstream. He had to wait there, sheltering in the shrubs, for over a week. He was waiting for the waters to subside, so he could wade (walking through water) across, but he was also waiting, until his fright wore off and he was whole again. Don Juan said, that what had happened was, that the strong, sustained emotion of fighting for his life, had caused his Assemblage Point to move squarely to the place of Silent Knowledge.
Because he had never paid any attention to what the Nagual Julian told him about the Assemblage Point, he had no idea what was happening to him. He was frightened at the thought, that he might never be normal again. But as he explored
his Split Perception, he discovered its practical side and found, he liked it. He was double for days. He could be thoroughly one or the other. Or he could be both at the same time. When he was both, things became fuzzy and neither Being was
effective, so he abandoned that alternative. But being one or the other opened up inconceivable possibilities for him. While he recuperated in the bushes, he established, that one of his Beings was more flexible, than the other and could cover distances in the blink of an eye and find food or the best place to hide. It was this Being, that once went to the Nagual's house to see, if they were worrying about him. He heard the young people crying for him, and that was certainly a surprise. He would have gone on watching them indefinitely, since he adored the idea of finding out what they thought of him, but the Nagual Julian caught him and put an end to it. That was the only time he had been truly afraid of the Nagual. Don Juan heard the Nagual telling him to stop his nonsense.
he Nagual appeared suddenly, a jet black, bell-shaped object of immense weight and strength. He grabbed don Juan. Don Juan did not know how the Nagual was grabbing him, but it was hurting in a most unsettling way. It was a sharp nervous pain he felt in his stomach and groin.
"I was instantly back on the riverbank," don Juan said, laughing. "I got up, waded the recently subsided river, and started to walk home."
He paused then asked me what I thought of his story. And I told him, that it had appalled me.
"You could have drowned in that river," I said, almost shouting. "What a brutal thing to do to you. The Nagual Julian must have been crazy!"
"Wait a minute," don Juan protested. "The Nagual Julian was devilish, but not crazy. He did, what he had to do in his role as Nagual and Teacher. It's true, that I could have died. But that's a risk we all have to take. You yourself could have been easily eaten by the jaguar, or could have died from any of the things I have made you do. The Nagual Julian was bold and commanding and tackled everything directly. No beating around the bush with him, no mincing words..."
"At that time," don Juan continued, "I didn't appreciate his Art, and I certainly didn't like what he did to me, but now, whenever I think about it, I admire him all the more for his superb and direct way of placing me in the Position of Silent Knowledge."
Don Juan said, that because of the Enormity of his experience, he had totally forgotten the Monstrous Man. He walked unescorted almost to the door of the Nagual Julian's house, then changed his mind and went instead to the Nagual Elias's place, seeking solace (indulge in sorrow). And the Nagual Elias explained to him the deep consistency of the Nagual Julian's actions. The Nagual Elias could hardly contain his excitement, when he heard don Juan's story. In a fervent
(ardent, passionate) tone he explained to don Juan, that his benefactor was a supreme Stalker, always after practicalities. His endless quest was for pragmatic views and solutions. His behavior that day at the river had been a masterpiece of Stalking. He had manipulated and affected everyone. Even the River seemed to be at his command. The Nagual Elias maintained, that while don Juan was being carried by the current, fighting for his life, the River helped him understand, what the Spirit was. And thanks to that understanding, don Juan had the opportunity to enter directly into Silent Knowledge. Don Juan said, that, because he was a callow (immature) youth, he listened to the Nagual Elias without understanding a word, but was moved with sincere Admiration for the Nagual's Intensity.
First, the Nagual Elias explained to don Juan, that Sound and the Meaning of Words were of Supreme Importance to Stalkers. Words were used by them as keys to open anything, that was closed. Stalkers, therefore, had to state their aim before attempting to achieve it. But they could not reveal their true aim at the outset, so they had to word things carefully to conceal the main thrust (force into specific situation).
The Nagual Elias called this Act Waking Up Intent. He explained to don Juan, that the Nagual Julian Woke up Intent by affirming emphatically (boldly) in front of his entire household, that he was going to show don Juan, in one stroke, what the Spirit was and how to define it. This was completely nonsensical, because the Nagual Julian knew there was no way to define the Spirit. What he was really trying to do was, of course, to place don Juan in the Position of Silent Knowledge.
After making the statement, which concealed his true aim, the Nagual Julian gathered as many people as he could, thus making them both his witting (acknowledged) and unwitting accomplices (partners-witnesses). All of them knew about his stated goal, but not a single one knew, what he really had in mind. The Nagual Elias's belief, that his explanation would shake don Juan out of his impossible stand of total rebelliousness and indifference was completely wrong. Yet the Nagual patiently continued to explain to him, that while he had been fighting the current in the river, he had reached the Third Point.
The old Nagual explained, that the Position of Silent Knowledge was called the Third Point, because in order to get to it, one had to pass the Second Point, the Place of No Pity.
He said, that don Juan's Assemblage Point had acquired sufficient fluidity for him to be double, which had allowed him to be in both the Place of Reason and in the Place of Silent Knowledge, either alternately or at the same time.
The Nagual told don Juan, that his accomplishment was magnificent. He even hugged don Juan, as if he were a child. And he could not stop talking about how don Juan, in spite of not knowing anything - or maybe, because of not knowing anything - had transferred his Total Energy from one place to the other.
Which meant to the Nagual, that don Juan's Assemblage Point had a most propitious (favourable), natural Fluidity. He said to don Juan, that every Human Being had a capacity for that Fluidity. For most of us, however, it was stored away and we never used it, except on rare occasions, which were brought about by Sorcerers, such as the experience he had just had, or by dramatic natural circumstances, such as a life-or-death struggle. Don Juan listened, mesmerized by the sound of the old Nagual's voice. When he paid attention, he could follow anything the man said, which was something he had never been able to do with the Nagual Julian. The old Nagual went on to explain, that Humanity was on the first point, reason, but that not every Human Being's Assemblage Point was squarely on the Position of Reason. Those, who were on the spot itself, were the true Leaders of Mankind. Most of the time they were Unknown People, whose genius was the exercising of their Reason. The Nagual said, there had been another time, when Mankind had been on the Third Point, which, of course, had been the first point then. But after that, Humankind moved to the Place of Reason.
When Silent Knowledge was the First Point, the same condition prevailed (we had our paranormal abilities, LM). Not every Human Being's Assemblage Point was squarely on that position either. This meant, that the True Leaders of Humankind
had always been the few Human Beings, whose Assemblage Points happened to be either on the exact Point of Reason or of Silent Knowledge. The rest of Humanity, the old Nagual told don Juan, was merely the audience. In our day, they were
the lovers of Reason. In the past, they had been the lovers of Silent Knowledge. They were the ones, who had admired and sung odes to the heroes of either position. The Nagual stated, that Humankind had spent the longer part of its history in the Position of Silent Knowledge, and that this explained our great longing for it.
Don Juan asked the old Nagual what exactly the Nagual Julian was doing to him. His question sounded more mature and intelligent, than what he really meant. The Nagual Elias answered it in terms totally unintelligible to don Juan at that time. He said, that the Nagual Julian was coaching don Juan, enticing (attract) his Assemblage Point to the Position of Reason, so he could be a Thinker, rather than merely part of an unsophisticated, but emotionally charged audience, that loved the orderly Works of Reason. At the same time, the Nagual was coaching don Juan to be a true Abstract Sorcerer, instead of merely part of a morbid and ignorant audience of lovers of the Unknown. The Nagual Elias assured don Juan, that only a Human Being, who was a Paragon (model for excellence) of Reason could move his Assemblage Point easily and be a Paragon of Silent Knowledge. He said, that only those, who were squarely in either position could see the other position clearly, and that that had been the way the Age of Reason came to being. The Position of Reason was clearly seen from the Position of Silent Knowledge. The old Nagual told don Juan, that the one-way Bridge from Silent Knowledge to Reason was called "Concern." That is, the Concern, that True Men of Silent Knowledge had about the Source of what they knew. And the other one-way Bridge, from Reason to Silent Knowledge, was called "Pure Understanding."
That is, the recognition, that told the Man of Reason, that Reason was only one island in an endless sea of islands. The Nagual added, that a Human Being, who had both One-way Bridges working, was a Sorcerer in direct contact with the
Spirit, the Vital Force, that made both positions possible. He pointed out to don Juan, that everything the Nagual Julian had done that day at the river, had been a show, not for a human audience, but for the Spirit, the Force, that was watching him.
He pranced (moved about in a lively manner) and frolicked with abandon and entertained everybody, especially the Power, he was addressing. Don Juan said, that the Nagual Elias assured him, that the Spirit only listened, when the speaker
speaks in gestures. And gestures do not mean signs or body movements, but acts of true abandon, acts of largesse (generosity), of humor. As a gesture for the Spirit, Sorcerers bring out the best of themselves and silently offer it to the Abstract..."

And another story from the same book:

"...Returning to his story, don Juan said, that the Nagual used Tulio, the unsociable member of his household, to deliver a new Shattering Blow to his (don Juan's) psychological Continuity. Don Juan said, that all the Apprentices (but not the 7 Women, who were Sorceresses, LM), including himself, had never been in total agreement about anything, except, that Tulio was a contemptibly (despicable) arrogant little man. They hated Tulio, because he either avoided them or snubbed (behaved coldly towards) them. He treated them all with such disdain (despise, contempt), that they felt like dirt. They were all convinced, that Tulio never spoke to them, because he had nothing to say;
and that his most salient (striking) feature, his arrogant aloofness (indifference), was a cover for his timidity. Yet in spite of his unpleasant personality, to the chagrin (annoyance) of all the apprentices, Tulio had undue influence on the household - especially on the Nagual Julian, who seemed to dote (lavished with excessive fondness) on him. One morning the Nagual Julian sent all the apprentices on a day-long errand to the city. The only person left in the house, besides the older members of the household, was don Juan. Around midday the Nagual Julian headed for his study to do his daily bookkeeping. As he was going in, he casually asked don Juan to help him with the accounts. Don Juan began to look through the receipts and soon realized, that to continue he needed some information, that Tulio, the overseer of the property, had, and had forgotten to note down. The Nagual Julian was definitely angry at Tulio's oversight, which pleased don Juan. The Nagual impatiently ordered don Juan to find Tulio, who was out in the fields, supervising the workers, and ask him to come to the study. Don Juan, gloating (regard with malicious pleasure) at the idea of annoying Tulio, ran half a mile to the fields, accompanied, of course, by a field hand to protect him from the Monstrous Man. He found Tulio supervising the workers from a distance, as always. Don Juan had noticed, that Tulio hated to come into direct contact with people and always watched them from afar. In a harsh voice and with an exaggeratedly imperious (authoritative) manner, don Juan demanded, that Tulio accompany him to the house, because the Nagual required his services. Tulio, his voice barely audible, replied, that he was too busy at the moment, but that in about an hour he would be free to come.
Don Juan insisted, knowing, that Tulio would not bother to argue with him and would simply dismiss him with a turn of his head. He was shocked when Tulio began to yell obscenities at him. The scene was so out of character for Tulio, that even the farm workers stopped their labor and looked at one another questioningly. Don Juan was sure they had never heard Tulio raise his voice, much less yell improprieties. His own surprise was so great, that he laughed nervously, which made Tulio extremely angry. He even hurled a rock at the frightened don Juan, who fled. Don Juan and his bodyguard immediately ran back to the house. At the front door they found Tulio. He was quietly talking and laughing with some of the Women. As was his custom, he turned his head away, ignoring don Juan. Don Juan began angrily to chastise him for socializing there, when the Nagual wanted him in his study. Tulio and the Women looked at don Juan, as if he had gone mad.
But Tulio was not his usual self that day. Instantly he yelled at don Juan to shut his damned mouth and mind his own damned business. He blatantly accused don Juan of trying to put him in a bad light with the Nagual Julian. The Women showed their dismay (discouragement) by gasping loudly and looking disapprovingly at don Juan. They tried to calm Tulio. Don Juan ordered Tulio to go to the Nagual's study and explain the accounts. Tulio told him to go to hell. Don Juan was shaking with anger. The simple task of asking for the accounts had turned into a nightmare. He controlled his temper. The Women were watching him intently, which angered him all over again. In a silent rage he ran to the Nagual's study. Tulio and the Women went back to talking and laughing quietly, as though they were celebrating a private joke.
Don Juan's surprise was total when he entered the study and found Tulio sitting at the Nagual's desk, absorbed in his bookkeeping. Don Juan made a supreme effort and controlled his anger. He smiled at Tulio. He no longer had the need to confront Tulio. He had suddenly understood, that the Nagual Julian was using Tulio to test him, to see if he would lose his temper. He would not give him that satisfaction. Without looking up from his accounts, Tulio said, that if don Juan was looking for the Nagual, he would probably find him at the other end of the house. Don Juan raced to the other end of the house to find the Nagual Julian walking slowly around the patio with Tulio at his side. The Nagual appeared to be engrossed in his conversation with Tulio. Tulio gently nudged the Nagual's sleeve and said in a low voice, that his assistant was there. The Nagual matter-of-factly explained to don Juan everything about the account they had been working on. It was a long, detailed, and thorough explanation. He said then, that all don Juan had to do was to bring the account book from the study, so that they could make the entry and have Tulio sign it. Don Juan could not understand what was happening.
The detailed explanation and the Nagual's matter-of-fact tone had brought everything into the Realm of mundane affairs. Tulio impatiently ordered don Juan to hurry up and fetch the book, because he was busy. He was needed somewhere else.
By now don Juan had resigned himself to being a clown. He knew, that the Nagual was up to something; he had that strange look in his eyes, which don Juan always associated with his beastly jokes. Besides, Tulio had talked more that day,  than he had in the entire two years don Juan had been in the house. Without uttering a word, don Juan went back to the study. And as he had expected, Tulio had gotten there first.
He was sitting on the corner of the desk, waiting for don Juan, impatiently tapping the floor with the hard heel of his boot. He held out the ledger (debit-credit book) don Juan was after, gave it to him, and told him to be on his way. Despite being prepared, don Juan was astonished. He stared at the man, who became angry and abusive. Don Juan had to struggle not to explode. He kept saying to himself, that all this was merely a test of his attitude. He had visions of being thrown out of the house, if he failed the test. In the midst of his turmoil, he was still able to wonder about the speed, with which Tulio managed always to be one jump ahead of him. Don Juan certainly anticipated, that Tulio would be waiting with the Nagual. Still, when he saw him there, although he was not surprised, he was incredulous. He had raced through the house, following the shortest route. There was no way that Tulio could run faster than he. Furthermore, if Tulio had run, he would have had to run right alongside don Juan. The nagual Julian took the account book from don Juan with an air of indifference. He made the entry; Tulio signed it. Then they continued talking about the account, disregarding don Juan, whose eyes were fixed on Tulio. Don Juan wanted to figure out what kind of test they were putting him through. It had to be a test of his attitude, he thought. After all, in that house, his attitude had always been the issue. The nagual dismissed don Juan, saying he wanted to be alone with Tulio to discuss business. Don Juan immediately went looking for the women to find out what they would say about this strange situation. He had gone ten feet when he encountered two of the women and Tulio. The three of them were caught up in a most animated conversation. He saw them before they had seen him, so he ran back to the nagual. Tulio was there, talking with the Nagual.
An incredible suspicion entered don Juan's mind. He ran to the study; Tulio was immersed in his bookkeeping and did not even acknowledge don Juan. Don Juan asked him what was going on. Tulio was his usual self this time: he did not answer or look at don Juan. Don Juan had at that moment another inconceivable thought. He ran to the stable, saddled two horses and asked his morning bodyguard to accompany him again. They galloped to the place, where they had seen Tulio earlier. He was exactly, where they had left him. He did not speak to don Juan. He shrugged his shoulders and turned his head when don Juan questioned him. Don Juan and his companion galloped back to the house. He left the man to care for the horses and rushed into the house. Tulio was lunching with the Women. And Tulio was also talking to the Nagual. And Tulio was also working on the books. Don Juan sat down and felt the cold sweat of fear. He knew, that the Nagual Julian was testing him with one of his horrible jokes. He reasoned, that he had three courses of action. He could behave as if nothing out of the ordinary was happening; he could figure out the test himself; or, since the Nagual had engraved in his mind, that he was there to explain anything don Juan wanted, he could confront the Nagual and ask for clarification. He decided to ask. He went to the Nagual and asked him to explain what was being done to him. The Nagual was alone then, still working on his accounts. He put the ledger aside and smiled at don Juan. He said, that the twenty-one not-doings he had taught don Juan to perform were the tools, that could sever the three thousand heads of Self-Importance, but that those tools had not been effective with don Juan at all.
Thus, he was trying the second method for destroying Self-Importance, which meant putting don Juan into the state of being called the Place of No Pity. Don Juan was convinced then,
that the Nagual Julian was utterly mad. Hearing him talk about not-doings or about monsters with three thousand heads or about Places of No Pity, don Juan felt almost sorry for him. The Nagual Julian very calmly asked don Juan to go to the storage shed in the back of the house and ask Tulio to come out. Don Juan sighed and did his best not to burst out laughing. The Nagual's methods were too obvious. Don Juan knew, that the Nagual wanted to continue the test, using Tulio.
Don Juan stopped his narration and asked me what I thought about Tulio's behavior. I said, that guided by what I knew about the Sorcerers' World, I would say, that Tulio was a Sorcerer and somehow he was moving his own Assemblage Point in a very sophisticated manner to give don Juan the impression, that he was in four places at the same time.
"So what do you think I found in the shed?" don Juan asked with a big grin.
"I would say either you found Tulio or you didn't find anybody," I replied.
"But if either of these had happened, there would have been no shock to my Continuity," don Juan said.
I tried to imagine bizarre things and I proposed, that perhaps he found Tulio's Dreaming Body. I reminded don Juan, that he himself had done something similar to me with one of the members of his party of Sorcerers.
"No," don Juan retorted. "What I found was a joke, that has no equivalent in reality. And yet it was not bizarre; it was not out of this world. What do you think it was?"
I told don Juan I hated riddles.
I said, that with all the bizarre things he had made me experience, the only things I could conceive would be more bizarreness, and since that was ruled out, I gave up guessing.
"When I went into that shed I was prepared to find, that Tulio was hiding," don Juan said. "I was sure, that the next part of the test was going to be an infuriating game of hide-and-seek. Tulio was going to drive me crazy hiding inside that shed.
"But nothing I had prepared myself for happened. I walked into that shed and found four Tulios."
"What do you mean, four Tulios?" I asked.
"There were four men in that shed," don Juan replied. "And all of them were Tulio. Can you imagine my surprise? All of them were sitting in the same position, their legs crossed and pressed tightly together. They were waiting for me. I looked at them and ran away screaming. My benefactor held me down on the ground outside the door. And then, truly horrified, I saw how the four Tulios came out of the shed and advanced toward me. I screamed and screamed, while the Tulios pecked me with their hard fingers, like huge birds attacking. I screamed, until I felt something give in me and I entered a state of Superb Indifference. Never in all my life had I felt something so extraordinary. I brushed off the Tulios and got up. They had just been tickling me. I went directly to the Nagual and asked him to explain the four men to me."
What the Nagual Julian explained to don Juan was, that those four men were the paragons (model of Excellence) of Stalking. Their names had been invented by their Teacher, the Nagual Elias, who, as an exercise in Controlled Folly, had taken the Spanish numerals uno, dos, tres, cuatro, added them to the name of Tulio, and obtained in that manner the names Tuliuno, Tuliodo, Tulitre, and Tulicuatro. The Nagual Julian introduced each in turn to don Juan. The four men were standing in a row.
Don Juan faced each of them and nodded, and each nodded to him. The Nagual said, the four men were Stalkers of Such Extraordinary Talent, as don Juan had just corroborated (confirmed), that praise was meaningless. The Tulios were the Nagual Elias's Triumph; they were the Essence of Unobtrusiveness (not noticable). They were such Magnificent Stalkers that, for all practical purposes, only one of them existed. Although people saw and dealt with them daily, nobody outside the members of the household knew, that there were four Tulios.
Don Juan understood with perfect clarity everything the Nagual Julian was saying about the men. Because of his Unusual Clarity, he knew, he had reached the Place of No Pity. And he understood, all by himself, that the Place of No Pity was a Position of the Assemblage Point, a Position, which rendered (pronounced) Self-Pity inoperative. But don Juan also knew, that his Insight and Wisdom were extremely transitory (occuring briefly). Unavoidably, his Assemblage Point would return to its Point of Departure. When the Nagual asked don Juan, if he had any questions, he realized, that he would be better off paying close attention to the Nagual's explanation, than speculating about his own foresightedness (foresee, look into the Future). Don Juan wanted to know how the Tulios created the impression, that there was only one person. He was extremely curious, because observing them together he realized: they were not really that alike. They wore the same clothes. They were about the same size, age, and configuration. But that was the extent of their similarity. And yet, even as he watched them, he could have sworn, that there was only one Tulio.
The Nagual Julian explained, that the human eye was trained to focus only on the most salient (striking) features of anything, and that those salient features were known beforehand. Thus, the Stalkers' Art was to create an impression by presenting the features they chose, features they knew the eyes of the onlooker were bound to notice.
By artfully reinforcing certain impressions, Stalkers were able to create on the part of the onlooker an unchallengeable conviction, as to what their eyes had perceived.
The Nagual Julian said, that when don Juan first arrived dressed in his woman's clothes, the Women of his party were delighted and laughed openly. But the man with them, who happened to be Tulitre, immediately provided don Juan with the first Tulio impression. He half turned away to hide his face, shrugged his shoulders disdainfully, as if all of it was boring to him, and walked away - to laugh his head off in private - while the Women helped to consolidate (form into a compact mass, make coherent) that first impression by acting apprehensive, almost annoyed, at the unsociability of the man. From that moment on, any Tulio, who was around don Juan, reinforced that impression and further perfected it, until don Juan's eye could not catch anything, except what was being fed to him. Tuliuno spoke then and said, that it had taken them about three months of very careful and consistent actions to have don Juan blind to anything, except what he was guided to expect. After three months, his blindness was so pronounced, that the Tulios were no longer even careful. They acted normal in the house. They even ceased wearing identical clothes, and don Juan did not notice the difference. When other apprentices were brought into the house, however, the Tulios had to start all over again. This time the challenge was hard, because there were many apprentices and they were sharp. Don Juan asked Tuliuno about Tulio's appearance. Tuliuno answered, that the Nagual Elias maintained Appearance was the Essence of Controlled Folly, and Stalkers Created Appearance by Intending them, rather than by producing them with the aid of props.
Props created artificial appearances, that looked false to the eye. In this respect, Intending appearances was exclusively an Exercise for Stalkers. Tulitre spoke next. He said, appearances were solicited (seek to obtain by persuasion) from the Spirit. Appearances were asked, were forcefully called on; they were never invented rationally. Tulio's appearance had to be called from the Spirit. And to facilitate that the Nagual Elias put all four of them together into a very small, out-of-the-way storage room, and there the Spirit spoke to them. The Spirit told them, that first they had to Intend their homogeneity (congruous, uniform in composition throughout). After four weeks of total isolation, homogeneity came to them. The Nagual Elias said, that Intent had fused them together and that they had acquired the certainty, that their individuality would go undetected. Now they had to call up the appearance, that would be perceived by the onlooker. And they got busy, calling Intent for the Tulios' appearance don Juan had seen. They had to work very hard to perfect it. They focused, under the direction of their Teacher, on all the details, that would make it perfect. The four Tulios gave don Juan a demonstration of Tulio's most salient (striking) features. These were: very forceful gestures of disdain (despise) and arrogance (haughty, proud, self-important); abrupt turns of the face to the right, as if in anger; twists of their upper bodies, as if to hide part of the face with the left shoulder; angry sweeps of a hand over the eyes, as if to brush hair off the forehead; and the gait (particular fashion of walking or running) of an agile (active, nimble, alert), but impatient person, who is too nervous to decide, which way to go. Don Juan said, that those details of behavior and dozens of others, had made Tulio an unforgettable character. In fact, he was so unforgettable, that in order to project Tulio on don Juan and the other apprentices, as if on a screen, any of the four men needed only to insinuate (introduce subtly) a feature, and don Juan and the apprentices would automatically supply the rest.
Don Juan said, that because of the tremendous consistency of the Input, Tulio was for him and the others the Essence of a disgusting man. But at the same time, if they searched deep inside themselves, they would have acknowledged, that Tulio was haunting (recurring like a ghost). He was nimble, mysterious, and gave, wittingly (deliberate, ingenious, humorous) or unwittingly, the impression of being a Shadow. Don Juan asked Tuliuno how they had called Intent. Tuliuno explained, that Stalkers called Intent loudly. Usually Intent was called from within a small, dark, isolated room. A candle was placed on a black table with the flame just a few inches before the eyes; then the word Intent was voiced slowly, enunciated (announce, pronounce, articulate) clearly and deliberately as many times as one felt was needed. The pitch of the voice rose or fell without any thought. Tuliuno stressed, that the indispensable (essential, required) part of the Act of Calling Intent was a Total Concentration on what was Intended. In their case, the concentration was on their homogeneity and on Tulio's appearance. After they had been fused by Intent, it still took them a couple of years to build up the certainty, that their homogeneity and Tulio's appearance would be realities to the onlookers..."

Статьи на русском (Interesting articles about actions of Inorganic Beings in russian)

В семье жителей Житомира сами собой воспламеняются подушки, матрасы и даже нательное белье.

(In one family's flat in Zhitomir, Russia, Spontaneous Objects Combustion (like pillows, mattrasses, clothes and underware, furniture, carpets, electrical appliences etc.) has been taken place for some time!)

By the way SHC - Spontaneous Human Combustion did happen recently in the same city, but in another house (the article is below, LM).
Жильцы 13-й квартиры говорят, что 30 лет проживали здесь совершенно спокойно. Их многоэтажка расположена в центральной части Житомира, рядом масса похожих домов. С соседями проблем нет.
— Необъяснимые явления в нашей квартире начались осенью 2013 года и длятся до сих пор, — сокрушается 67-летний Юрий Плюснин. Сначала в спальне упал большой трехдверный шкаф. К счастью, рядом никого не было и он никого не придавил. Я подумал, что сломались ножки, заменил их, и мы поставили его на место. Однако через несколько дней шкаф упал снова. Нужно сказать, что он очень тяжелый, двум мужчинам его с места не сдвинуть. Мы не понимали, что происходит. Потом ни с того ни с сего в спальне дочери со шкафа упала антресоль. Мы установили ее на место, но к вечеру она снова свалилась на пол! Затем упал шкаф в прихожей… Наконец нас озарило: в доме явно завелся полтергейст. Иначе как объяснить все эти странности?
— Может, кто-то из членов вашей семьи таким образом дурачится?
В четырех комнатах нас проживает шесть человек, — рассказывает мужчина. — Одну занимаем мы с супругой Еленой, вторую — дочь с зятем, третью — 14-летний внук, в четвертой лежит моя 92-летняя теща. Старенькая женщина парализована, не встает с постели, поэтому на нее точно ничего дурного нельзя подумать. Но за другими членами семьи я присматривал. Признаться, подозревал, что так шутит с нами внук. Однако очень скоро мне стало понятно, что домочадцы не виноваты в происходящем. После перемещения мебели в квартире начались самовозгорания. Пламя вспыхивает мгновенно, это происходит без всякой причины и в самых непредсказуемых местах. Причину пожаров установить не удавалось. Я пытался выявить поджигателя, но когда на моих глазах на теле внука загорелась рубашка, окончательно убедился, что это не его проделки. Сдвинуть с места шкаф ему точно не под силу.
— Возгорания происходят в разное время суток?
Чаще всего с 8 до 10 утра и с 11 вечера до часу ночи. В это время мы стараемся быть максимально бдительными. В течение суток случается до тридцати (!) возгораний. Самое ужасное, когда вспыхивает сразу в нескольких местах, и мы не знаем, что в первую очередь тушить. Например, подушка, матрас и кресло возгораются сразу в трех комнатах. Хорошо, если в этот момент там кто-то находится и может сразу потушить огонь. Хуже, если комната пуста. Когда спустя время мы, учуяв дым, прибегаем тушить огонь, гасить уже нечего — вещь полностью испорчена. Таким образом, нам не удалось спасти кресло, диван и многое другое. Все члены семьи постоянно начеку. Дежурим днем и ночью, спим по несколько часов. Чтобы не допустить большого пожара, никогда не покидаем квартиру — здесь постоянно кто-то находится. В «опасные» часы дома стараются находиться все члены семьи. Никто из нас не знает, что, где и когда воспламенится. Кроме мебели, постели и вещей загорались даже стены. Очень страшно, когда воспламеняется одежда на теле. У меня сгорело три рубашки, в них выгорели дыры размером 20 на 30 сантиметров. На внуке сгорело две майки. Возгорание у меня и у него происходят, как правило, на спине.
— Вы чувствуете, когда начинаете гореть?
— Ощущаю внезапное сильное тепло. Здесь важно быстро сбросить с себя одежду, иначе можно получить ожог. Правда, сейчас мы приноровились… постоянно носить в руках опрыскиватели. Как только я или внук ощущаем сзади жжение, то сразу тушим друг друга водой. Благодаря такому методу удается сохранить одежду невредимой и избежать повреждений кожи. В квартире Плюсниных повсюду стоят наполненные водой емкости — ведра, миски и бутылки. На них можно наткнуться в коридоре, в гостиной, на кухне, в спальне и даже в детской. Кроме того, семья запаслась мощным огнетушителем. В семье жителей Житомира сами собой воспламеняются подушки. Сначала загорелся диван-кровать, потом кресла, — объясняет 65-летняя Елена Плюснина. Мы стали накрывать мебель тряпками, в результате они тоже стали вспыхивать. К счастью, все тушится без проблем. Как только что-то загорится, тут же накрываем рядном или заливаем водой. В основном вспыхивает тонкая ткань. Поэтому, чтобы уменьшить вероятность возгорания, со всех окон сняли шторы и тюль. Живем в постоянном страхе, спим по очереди: если засыпаю я, то дежурит муж, если спит муж, дежурит зять и так далее. А еще наш полтергейст не любит курящих. В квартире постоянно пропадают сигареты. То найдем пачку в морозильной камере, то плавающей в унитазе. Юрий Плюснин говорит, что все странности стали происходить с тех пор, как в их квартире поселилась теща. Мужчина подозревает, что это не совпадение.
— Раньше бабушка жила одна в своем доме, в селе, — рассказывает Юрий Васильевич. — После инсульта попала в больницу. Так случилось, что на ее глазах умерла соседка по палате. Похоже, что это отразилось на нашей родственнице. Она стала странной, замкнутой. На ее кровати мы сделали высокую перегородку. Так вот, парализованная старушка умудрялась перелезть через нее и свалиться на пол! После нескольких таких случаев решили положить тещу на пол, предварительно настелили множество подушек. Вы бы видели, как бабушку подбрасывало на этих подушках! Это было что-то ужасное. Мы, конечно же, не верим в то, что парализованная женщина в одиночку переставляет мебель и взглядом воспламеняет вещи. Но не исключаем, что в нее мог вселиться злой дух, который и безобразничает. К счастью, все возгорания обычно происходят на наших глазах. А если вдруг в квартире никого не окажется? Боимся сжечь весь многоквартирный дом.
— В вашей квартире живет собака. Наверное, животное должно чувствовать постороннее существо?
— Вы правы, собака действительно это ощущает, — кивает Юрий Плюснин. — Когда в доме начинает происходить что-то странное, она, поджав хвост, прячется под кровать. По совету друзей собираемся завести кошку. Нам сказали, что коты очень чувствительны к потусторонним объектам, но, самое главное, их не боятся.
— Вы обращались за помощью к специалистам?
— Обращались к сотрудникам МЧС, те ничего не нашли и посоветовали вызывать милицию. Официально пожарные классифицировали возгорание как неосторожное обращение с огнем. Говорили, что не понимают, что в квартире происходит, но официально признать это полтергейстом не могут. Был в квартире ученый, который с помощью специального прибора определил усиление энергетики возле нашей бабушки. Ученый признался, что раньше ему ни с чем подобным сталкиваться не приходилось. Посоветовал возле бабушки установить защитную сетку. Вот сейчас собираемся последовать его совету.
Случай, конечно, очень интересный, — замечает заведующий кафедрой физики Житомирского государственного университета имени Франко профессор Александр Ткаченко. — Энергия, которая действует на предметы в квартире и влияет на их возгорание, похоже, исходит от самой старушки. Во всяком случае, возле бабушки энергетика просто зашкаливает. Возможно, эти изменения произошли из-за перенесенного ею инсульта. Нужно вокруг пожилой женщины установить экраны, которые будут сдерживать распространение электромагнитных волн и, следовательно, энергию. Надеюсь, что после этого падение шкафов и возгорание в квартире прекратятся.
— Признаться, я всю жизнь был неверующим человеком, — говорит Юрий Плюснин. — До пенсии работал инженером гражданской авиации в аэропорту, моя жена трудилась на швейной фабрике. Всегда жили тихо, ни с кем не ссорились, с соседями отношения прекрасные. После того, что стало происходить в нашей квартире, пришлось поверить и в злой дух, и нечистую силу...
28 апреля пригласили двух священников, которые освятили нашу квартиру. Возгорания прекратились, мы обрадовались и стали постепенно забывать все эти ужасы. Однако через неделю все возобновилось. Несколько дней мы терпели и снова обратились за помощью к священнослужителям, только уже из другой церкви. Батюшка, узнав о нашей проблеме, весело произнес: «Не волнуйтесь, в Житомире вы не одни такие! Меня уже приглашали в квартиру, в которой мебель перемещается сама по себе». Он пообещал решить все наши проблемы. Похоже, священнослужитель действительно оказался опытный в таких непростых делах. Он обошел с кадилом все закоулки, кажется, заглянул во все щели. Может, в этот раз поможет.
Люди недоумевают, почему полтергейст выбрал именно квартиру Плюсниных.
— Мы тридцать лет живем бок о бок, — говорит сосед по дому. — Ничего плохого о Юре с Леной сказать не могу. Люди они хорошие, приветливые, честные. То, что у них в последнее время происходит, не укладывается в голове. И верить трудно, и не верить не получается.

В переводе с немецкого языка полтергейст означает «шумный дух». Во время его проявления отмечаются стуки, шумы, происходит спонтанное перемещение предметов, появление различных надписей. Наиболее опасный уровень активности — это самопроизвольные возгорания. Исследователи паранормальных явлений Майкл Гросс и Колин Вилсон создали антологию, в которую вошли известные науке эпизоды полтергейста. Документально зафиксированные случаи «огненного» полтергейста не так уж редки, однако они не дают однозначного ответа о природе этого явления."

Мистика под Житомиром: старушка сама по себе воспламенилась и - стала кучкой пепла ("спонтанное самовозгорание человека")


20 марта 2014
82-летняя Надежда Соловей из села Здвижка Коростышевского района сгорела 6 марта около 16.00 на веранде собственной хаты. Вернее, то, что она горела, никто не видел. Зато многие потом видели, что от бабы Нади осталось: две ноги по колено, в чулках и старых калошах и кучка пепла. Больше ничего! Даже кости сгорели дотла. Как такое может быть? "Уцелели только бабусины ноги"
 - Мистика, да и только! Пятнадцать лет работаю в пожарной службе и не сталкивался с подобным, - говорит начальник Коростышевского районного сектора ГСЧС Николай Романюк, который лично выезжал на место происшествия. - На веранде, недалеко от входа, я увидел прогоревшую дыру в деревянном полу диаметром чуть больше метра. В подполе, куда должны были провалиться обугленные останки, ничего не было, кроме пепла. Уцелели только бабусины ноги до колен. Да и на веранде почти никаких следов пожара: стена немного закоптилась да краска потрескалась. Чтобы человек сгорел дотла, должно было выгореть как минимум полдома!
Секретарь Здвижковского сельсовета Надежда Шкаврон видела и дыру в полу, и ноги, и тоже не может отойти от шока.
- Мы с семьей Соловей живем на одной улице, и я прекрасно знаю этих людей, - вздыхает женщина. - Хорошие, работящие. И никогда никаких происшествий у них не случалось, ничего странного. Надежда с мужем всю жизнь проработали в колхозе, вырастили двоих дочерей. Они часто приезжают к родителям из Житомира и Коростышева. Бабушка, говорят соседи, в последнее время плохо ходила - опиралась на две палочки. Тем не менее старики лишь недавно отказались от коровы, оставили в хозяйстве только курочек. Дед в тот момент спал в хате. А вот и дом, где все произошло. Старенький, но ухоженный. Во дворе - ни соринки. На той самой веранде меня встречает юноша - внук Надежды. Показывает место, где еще недавно зияла дыра. Пол уже починили и даже постелили линолеум.- Бабушка могла использовать солярку при топке печи, что и привело к пожару… - предположил Сергей.
- Но почему тогда не сгорела деревянная веранда?
- Не знаю…
- А что дед рассказывает? Он же был дома в тот момент?
- Был, но спал в хате и ничего не видел и не слышал. Не нужно его беспокоить расспросами - он и сам ничего не понимает. Какой бы мистикой тут не пахло, в милиции назначили ряд экспертиз - судебно-медицинскую, а также образцов, взятых с места "самовозгорания". А пока в медицинском свидетельстве о смерти Надежды Соловей написали: "Причина смерти не установлена из-за резкого обугливания тела". Останки похоронили в закрытом гробу.
В мире зафиксировано 120 таких случаев. В мире, если верить интернету, зафиксировано 120 подобных случаев самовозгорания людей. Почти все истории произошли в США в разное время и все - как по шаблону: человек ни с того ни с сего загорелся, от него остались руки или ноги и кучка пепла, ничего поблизости огонь не тронул. Один такой случай в 1951 году исследовали судебно-медицинские эксперты медицинского факультета Пенсильванского университета, но понять причину воспламенения не смогли. Лишь дали название феномену - "спонтанное самовозгорание человека".

Бесы Севера

(Actions of Allies or Inorganic Beings, giving smell of mould, smoke, rotten eggs to water, air and food stuffs! LM)
Весьма пугающая штука наблюдать человека одержимого бесами. Представьте, что вдруг ни с того ни с сего ваш знакомый начал разговаривать жутким инородным голосом, впадая в истерический хохот, то и дело выкрикивая нечленораздельные звуки. А теперь вообразите, что все люди вокруг стали вести себя подобным неадекватным образом. Жутко? Может показаться, что все вокруг сошли с ума, но на самом деле проблема возможно скрывается всего лишь в одном существе...На Руси говорили: бес вселился. И это утверждение недалеко от истины. Уже два столетия людям известно загадочное явление, которое народы Севера называют икоткой.
Известный советский писатель Ф. Абрамов писал: «Есть на Севере, а точнее сказать, на Пинеге и на Мезени, такая женская болезнь — икота, которая, правда, сейчас немного поутихла, а еще совсем недавно редкую работную бабу не трепала. Найдет, накатит на бедную — и мутит, и ломает, и душит, и крик и рев на все голоса: по-собачьи, по-кошачьи, и даже самая непотребная матерщина иной раз срывается с губ...»
Самое широкое распространение икотки наблюдалось до середины 50-х годов прошлого века в селе Пинега Архангельской области. В населенном пункте было настолько много заболевших женщин, что ученые заговорили о наследственности заболевания. В народе таких женщин стали называть «пинежскими икотницами», и по сей день многие опасаются их присутствия поблизости. Не удивительно, ведь болезнь, появившись у одной из жительниц села, буквально за несколько дней охватывает целые населенные пункты. Симптомы икотки могут бесследно исчезнуть через пару недель и вернуться вновь спустя год или два. Можно было бы предположить, что все это выдумки темных людей, живших два века назад, но современные описания болезни похожи на те, которые появлялись и сто, и двести лет назад. Впервые упомянул об икотке епископ Архангельский и Холмогорский Вениамин в 1785 году в своем письме к Синоду, который считал, что это особый вид порчи и одержимость злым духом. Вениамин связывал возникновение странной болезни с языческими верованиями местного населения, перешедшими к ним от жившего в тех краях древнего народа, называемого «чудь белоглазая», который по преданиям обладал паранормальными способностями. Вера в то, что икотку напускают колдуны и знахари, была настолько сильна в народе, что в XIX веке по этому поводу состоялось несколько судебных разбирательств: например, в 1815 году суд приговорил Ми-хайло Чукрая, жителя Пинеги, к 45 ударам плетью за наведение порчи на свою сестру. А в 1862 году в этих краях произошел народный бунт, во время которого жгли дома колдунов, подозреваемых в порче. Усмирить народные волнения удалось только с помощью войск и духовенства. Исследователи этого странного заболевания выделяют три разновидности икотки: «немая» — у больного происходит неудержимая зевота, текут слезы и дрожат конечности; «ревущая» — сопровождается спазмом гортани, голос меняется до неузнаваемости; «говорящая» — начинается продолжительным иканием, сопровождающимся выкрикиванием слов и фраз, чаще всего грубых и нецензурных. При этом икотка выполняет своеобразные посреднические задачи. Например, «говорливая икотка» прорицает будущее, находит пропавшие вещи, то есть сообщает ту информацию или особое знание, которыми ее «носительница» не обладает.


Считается, что икотка - это сущность, внешне похожая на плесень, которую колдуны при помощи магических практик выращивают на остатках еды или определенных напитков. После того как икотка зародилась, ее «подсаживают» человеку, в котором она будет жить. Происходит это, как правило, так: заколдованную плесень помещают в квас, морс или пиво и дают выпить жертве. Любопытен и необъясним тот факт, что икотку невозможно вырастить в крепких спиртных напитках: ну не любит она водку и самогон, потому они не подходят для магических ритуалов. После того как сущность попала в носителя, она может принимать разную форму: человека, насекомого, лягушки, черта и т. д. О своем внешнем виде икотка очень любит рассказывать устами своего носителя. С таким же удовольствием она сообщает свое имя — как правило, человеческое: Егорка, Павлик, Даша и др. Икотка растет внутри своей жертвы годами. И вещать она начинает не всегда сразу после порчи, иногда она долго молчит и лишь спустя некоторое время заявляет о себе. Самый длительный срок, зафиксированный этнографами, — 32 года (Егорка жил в носительнице 35 лет, а «говорить» начал только последние три года). Проникнув в человека, бес «поселяется» где-то в животе, но бывает, что и по всему телу — такие ощущения испытывает носитель. Первым признаком незваного гостя является постоянно появляющаяся икота, которую невозможно остановить. Одновременно в человеке могут существовать две икотки, которые редко уживаются друг с другом, поэтому одна из них должна быть «изгнана». Еще одна интересная особенность заболевания — это то, что ему наиболее подвержены беременные женщины или женщины, живущие в тяжелых семейно-бытовых условиях. Икотка всегда знает заранее, когда ее носителю придет срок умирать, и решает сама, уйти ли ей вместе с человеком или «переехать» в новое жилище (в родственника или знакомого)...


Иногда молчавшая годами икотка начинает подавать голос только после того, как носитель собирается ее изгнать или... напоить молоком кобылы. А до той поры сущность молча руководит «порченым» человеком, вынуждая его совершать совершенно несвойственные ему поступки: нецензурно выражаться, пить вино, есть вредную пищу и т. д. Кроме того, держит под контролем всю его жизнь. Для примера можно привести слова одной «икотницы»: «Егорка говорит: «Матка, пошли спать, я спать хочу». И вот мы с ним и спим». За столько лет тесного сосуществования с икоткой люди Севера смогли определить присущие ей привычки и предпочтения: любит темноту... пьет только красное вино (белое отвергает), не ест мед, не любит водку, чеснок, лук, перец, хрен, редьку и полынь... Особенно ей не нравится одежда и постельное белье красного цвета или с «колючим» рисунком, поэтому женщины в той местности, где это заболевание имеет массовый характер, предпочитают такие расцветки ткани.


Распространение заболевания не ограничивается только печально известной Пинегой. Об икотке знали карельские народы, мордва, вятичи, пермяки и другие северяне. Не обошла стороной эта участь поселения Урала и Сибири. Получается, что икотка предпочитает территории, где всегда жили финно-угорские народы. Староверы, живущие в глухих местах Сибири, строили монастыри, в которых лечили больных икоткой. Правда, приемы лечения, которыми они пользовались, были довольно жестоки: «порченых» морили голодом, били, пугали цепными медведями или собаками, держали на морозе, обливали ледяной водой. Иногда это помогало и люди (если выживали, конечно, после таких испытаний) возвращались домой полностью излечившимися..."

Cathy O'Brien and Mark Phillips

I am so glad that many Women started talking about their Sexual Abuse and Mind Control ! Here are recommended by me videos and book by Cathy and Mark "Trans-Formation of America" and "Thank you for the Memories", the book by Brice Taylor, both in full electronic form are on our site : Cathy O'Brien "Trans-Formation of America"  and  "Thank you for the Memories" by Brice Taylor

Cathy has 1-7 short videos on :

Mind Control & MKULTRA, Cathy O'Brien and Mark Phillips

Cathy O'Brien - Free Your Mind 2 Conference 2013
Published on Mar 14, 2014

Cathy O'Brien - Speech in California on MKULTRA (2001)

Published on Mar 9, 2012
MKULTRA victims speak out against the CIA mind control programs that have been destroying lives for many, many lives. These brave people, with the assistance of long time satanic abuse investigator, and former FBI agent, ted Gunderson, came forth to expose the truth of MKULTRA sadistic and evil nature.

Mind Control Out Of Control - MKULTRA - Cathy O'Brien - pt1 (lec...
Uploaded on May 31, 2011
Part 2

Cathy O'Brien: Ex-Illuminati Mind Control Victim

Published on Nov 2, 2012
Mark Phillips and Cathy O'Brien expose the Federal Government's involvement in Mind Control projects, research, and abuse of its' own people. This is the National Shame of the United States Federal Goverment. Mark and Cathy tell all and underscore the insensitivity and involvement of our national leaders, judges, doctors, and many others to this nightmarish horror it has inflicted upon millions of people in the United States. Mark touches on the sources and history of mind control while Cathy unveils publicly the horrors she and her family have been subjected to, horrors which continue to this day. Her story will not only infuriate you, but will educate you to the reality of US mind control.
Filmed 2006-7-21 in Edmonton Canada.

I consider her, Cathy O’Brien, to be my friend. She was in Las Vegas about 1995. I heard her on a radio talk-show while driving. I went to see her lecture. I heard her story. I wanted to further investigate her super-controversial comments. I bought 10 of her books so fellow investigators could be informed. I never met her husband, Mark Phillips. I do appreciate what he has done for her and their work together. I was always impressed with Cathy's demeanor, her confident, polite, realistic character. Cathy and I kept in touch by e-mail for a few years. Due to a computer virus, I lost my e-mail addresses, including hers. That was a few computers ago. Cathy O'Brien’s first book is: “Transformation of America”. The Book's "shocking" essence:
As a child, her father sexually abused Cathy. Her father sold her to Senator Robert Carlyle Byrd to become a White House / Pentagon sex-slave. Cathy was subjected to MK Ultra mind-control. She wrote that she had sex with Presidents: Ford, Reagan, George H. W. Bush - although Bush was more interested in her little daughter. Dick Cheney was "hung" and he broke her jaw to accommodate him. Hillary Clinton had sex with Cathy O’Brien. (Page 155)
She was "sport" hunted to be killed. Cathy O'Brien opened "Pandora's Box". Cathy O'Brien, assisted by CIA de-programmer, Mark Philips, wrote the books: "Trans-Formation of America" & "Access Denied"
Boldly, Cathy wrote how she was used by the White House as a "Mule" (carried illegal drugs) and as a "carrier pigeon" (carried top-secret messages to other world leaders). I've tracked her progress over the years and I do consider her to be a truly courageous friend. Her story is unbelievable to idealistic believers. They will not want to hear it. The religious, consertative Republican may not like it. Thinkers, who have the capacity to question, will more likely find her to be credible.

Brice Taylor

Brice Tailor and Ted Gunderson

Brice Taylor

Videos of Brice Tailor :

Brice Taylor and Ted Gunderson

Ted Gunderson Interview with Brice Taylor

Brice Taylor Exposes Mind Control & Her Handlers

Brice Taylor on Mind Control

Bases 30 Cathi Morgan MK Ultra in Britain Part One

Published on Aug 29, 2013
Cathi Morgan provides an update and full insight into MK-Ultra mind control in Britain. This is an update and compilation of her two main interviews and her Ammach presentation in one go.
The late T Stokes included Cathi's vital personal work on her own case in his material.
Her full lecture presentation from Sept 2012 in Nottingham, is in part 2.
The massive degree of mind control and the violation and harassment of millions of British citizens by a nonhuman parasitic few is a major hidden fact in plain site.

About Our Parallel Personalities

Columbus 200: The Many Minds of Billy Milligan
By Robert Paschen
Published June 1, 2012

Milligan's mother, Dorothy, grew up in Ohio farm country, and lived in Circleville, with her husband, Dick Jonas. They divorced, and Dorothy eventually moved to the Miami, Florida area, where she worked as a singer. There she began living with Johnny Morrison, a Jewish comedian who was still married. Dorothy and Johnny had a son, Jim, in October 1953. In February 1955, in Miami Beach, they had a second son, William Stanley, later known as Billy Milligan. Dorothy and Johnny had a third child together, Kathy Jo, born in December 1956. At this time, Johnny was 36 years old. According to biographer Daniel Keyes, "Meeting the medical expenses overwhelmed Johnny. He borrowed more, gambled more, drank more.... [He] was hospitalized for acute alcoholism and depression in ... 1958...." In what appeared to be an unsuccessful suicide attempt, according to Keyes, "[Dorothy] found him slumped over the table, half a bottle of Scotch and an empty bottle of sleeping pills on the floor." A few months after this attempt, on January 17, 1959, Johnny committed suicide by carbon monoxide poisoning. Dorothy took her children and moved away from Miami, eventually returning to Circleville, Ohio, where she remarried her ex-husband Dick Jonas. This marriage lasted about a year. In 1962, she met Chalmer Milligan (1927–1988). Chalmer's first wife Bernice divorced him on "grounds of gross neglect". He had a daughter, Challa, the same age as Billy, and another daughter, who was a nurse. Dorothy and Chalmer married in Circleville, Ohio on October 27, 1963. At his later trial, Chalmer was blamed for abusing Billy. Keyes claimed, that Billy had multiple personalities from a much earlier age, however; his first three alters (no name boy, Christene, and Shawn) appearing by the time he was five years old. Billy Milligan had 24 people living inside his head, and he couldn’t control any of them. These “alters” would take over, and not tell Billy what they had done. They would share things behind his back. He would wake up and not know where he was.
One of the most notorious cases in Ohio history is still shrouded in mystery 35 years later. Billy was dangerous. Or parts of Billy were dangerous. In October 1977, Billy was arrested for three rapes at Ohio State University. He had previously served time for armed robbery and sexual assault. But, Billy told police he had no knowledge of the rapes. One victim said that her assailant (Billy) had a German accent. Psychologists diagnosed Billy with multiple personality disorder, a diagnosis Franklin County prosecutors were skeptical of, until they saw Billy transform before their eyes. Allen, Ragen, Christene, Christopher. There were at least 10 personalities. Arthur was an English aristocrat, Adalana, a lesbian poet.
“Billy” was only one of the personalities. The Milligan case was unique and strange, and attracted national attention. His public defenders mounted the first multiple personality defense in history. A Franklin County Common Pleas judge finally found Billy not guilty by reason of insanity. Billy was assigned to the Athens Health Center in Ohio. Dr. David Caul worked with Billy to fuse the personalities into a whole. Psychologists had previously thought Billy had 10 personalities. Caul found 24. He also found a tragic story. When Billy Milligan was four, his father committed suicide. His mother Dorothy, a singer in Miami, Florida, moved Billy and his two siblings to her hometown of Circleville, where she remarried and redivorced her first husband. Dorothy then married Chalmer Milligan. Billy would later claim that Chalmer tortured and abused him. Growing up, Billy was suspended from junior high because he “went into trances and wandered around Lancaster,” according to a 2007 Columbus Dispatch story. He was later kicked out of a Hilltop mental institution, high school, and then the U.S. Navy – all for behavioral reasons. Billy had also become violent. In 1972, he was convicted of sexual assault, in 1975 of armed robbery, and in 1977 of rape. Twenty-four personalities were fighting for control of Billy’s mind, and his body. Billy was transferred out of the Athens Health Center as a flight risk. There were rumors of Billy partying, and buying a car. He was sent to Lima. He described it as hell. He then escaped various institutions, but was apprehended. He was the subject of a legal battle, messed with the cops, and managed to do several weird things, that kept him in the press. In 1988, psychologists said that Billy’s mind had fused back into one psyche. In 1991, he was released from all custody. He moved to California, and there were rumors of big stars interested in making his life story into a film, including James Cameron, Leonardo DiCaprio and others. The movie of Billy Milligan has not been made. And today, no one can find Billy Milligan. He could be anywhere. A statement recorded in 1996 by Astraea’s Web, a multiple personality resource website, gives a little enlightenment into the strange life of Billy Milligan: “Imagine yourself standing in front of a sink. You’re getting a glass of water. And the whole world around you instantaneously changes, and now you’re in a park, acting like you’re getting a glass of water. Out of thin air. And you just lost that time. That’s what it’s really like.”
All in the family. A look at Milligan’s alters

According to the definitive book on this strange case "The Minds of Billy Milligan", doctors and prosecutors were able to ascertain the existence of 24 distinct personalities, or “alters,” from a variety of social and cultural backgrounds, and even ages. Ten of them were considered acceptable to both Billy and the two most dominant alters, while 14 had been deemed “undesirable” and repressed, not to be discovered until after his trial, along with some insight into the choosing of the alter, that would have “the spot,” or the most command of Billy’s body at any given time.
1. Billy Milligan (William Stanley Milligan), 26 at the time, was the core personality, and, unfused, the conduit for the other 23.
2. Arthur, 22, was an extremely sophisticated and educated Englishman, an expert in science and medicine, with a focus on hematology. He was placed in “the spot” – that is, in charge of the shared body during times, that required intellectual thinking. Arthur was one of only two personalities, who could classify an alter in the group as an “undesirable.”
3. Ragen Vadascovinich, 23, was the “keeper of hate.” His name was a mash-up of the words “rage” and “again.” Ragen described himself as Yugoslavian, had a Slavic accent and could write and speak in Serbo-Croatian. He controlled the spot in dangerous times and could designate group members as “undesirable.” He confessed to committing robbery in order to support “the family,” but had no knowledge of the rapes.
4. Allen, 18, was a manipulative con man. His was the alter most commonly used to communicate to the outside world. Allen was also the only right-handed alter, and the only that smoked cigarettes.
5. Tommy, 16 was the escape artist; he was often confused with Allen. He played the tenor sax and was an electronics expert. He was also a painter, and specialized in landscapes.
6. Danny, 14, was afraid of people, especially men. He painted still lifes, and blamed Chalmer, who once forced him to dig his own grave and buried him in it, for his fearfulness.
7. David, age 8, was the “keeper of pain.” He would get the spot in order to absorb the pain of the others.
8. Christene, age 3, would take punishment for Billy during school discipline. She had dyslexia, but Arthur taught her to read and write. Ragen had a special bond with her.
9. Christopher, 13, Christene’s brother, played harmonica.
10. Adalana, 19, a lesbian, cooked and cleaned for Billy and the rest, and wrote poetry. Milligan’s attorney claimed, that Adalana had admitted to committing the rapes without the knowledge of Milligan or the other alters.

The Undesireables

These people were labeled “undesirable” after breaking the rules laid down by Ragen and Arthur. These alters were no longer allowed “on the spot” (i.e., to hold consciousness) and only revealed themselves after Milligan was sent to the hospital.
11. Phillip, 20, was a thug and took part in planning some small time crimes. Had a Brooklyn accent. Marked “undesirable” for being a criminal.
12. Kevin, 20, was a criminal planner; he helped devise a plan to rob a drug store. Labeled also, because he was a criminal.
13. Walter, 22, was Australian. He called himself a big-game hunter and had an excellent sense of direction. Was often used as a spotter. He was labeled because he shot and killed a crow.
14. April, 19, only had thoughts about destroying Billy’s stepfather. Declared an undesirable when she convinced Ragen to kill Chalmer. Luckily, Arthur was able to talk him out of it at the last second.
15. Samuel, 18, “the wandering Jew.” He was the only one, who believed in God. Was marked, because he sold some of the other alters’ personal paintings.
16. Mark, 16, was the workhorse. He was often referred to as “the zombie”, because he did nothing unless he was told, and would stare at walls when bored.
17. Steve, 21, was the impostor; he used impersonations for comedy. Steve never accepted, that he was one of multiple personalities. He was declared undesirable, because his comedy caused the “family” problems.
18. Lee, 20, was the prankster and his practical jokes often landed the family in trouble. He did not care about consequences for his actions. He was made an undesirable, because one of his jokes put them into solitary confinement.
19. Jason, 13, was the pressure valve. He was used at the beginning to release tension for the family, but he caused them to get into too much trouble and was marked as an undesirable.
20. Bobby, 17, always dreamt of leading some adventure or fixing some global crisis, but he had no ambitions and was thusly labeled “undesirable.”
21. Shawn, who was 4 and deaf, made buzzing sounds, so he could feel the vibration in his head. He was labeled an undesirable, because there was no benefit from being deaf later on in life. (Even though he was an undesirable, he was never cast into the shadows beyond the spot; he was just never allowed to take the spot.)
22. Martin, 19, was a snob, from New York. He wanted things just handed over to him without earning them.
23. Timothy, 15, worked for a florist, until he met a homosexual, who flirted with him, an encounter, that frightened him. He retreated into his own world afterwards.
24. The Teacher (Note: the teacher was not an undesirable.) The Teacher, 26, was by far the greatest milestone to helping Billy achieve fusion. He is the sum of all other 23 alters, put together, and had almost total recall of all the other alters’ actions and thoughts.
The book "The Minds of Billy Milligan" by Daniel Keyes

The strange case of Billy Milligan's jigsaw psyche

Billy Milligan's Alters

This story appeared in the February 1979 issue of Columbus Monthly. William Stanley Milligan paused outside the Franklin County Courthouse: the brisk December winds whipped around him. In subdued tones, he told reporters: “I’m not trying to make this sound like a sob story or anything . . .” But perhaps because of his case, he said, fewer parents would abuse their children. It was a tidy conclusion to a bizarre story. Franklin County Common Pleas Judge Jay C. Flowers had just
found 23-year-old Bill Milligan not guilty by reason of insanity on nine charges of rape, aggravated robbery and kidnapping. A few hours later, Probate Judge Richard Metcalf would commit Milligan, who would be sent to the Athens Mental Health Center. For the trial of a man accused as the locally notorious “university rapist,” in a case publicized nationally by the New York Times, the Washington Post, the Detroit Free Press, Time magazine, CBS and other media, the proceedings were remarkably low-key. It was a trial by stipulation, with written statements read uncontested by both sides. Attorneys read the statements in dry, sometimes almost inaudible voices. The prosecution didn’t contest the plea of insanity. The defense didn’t deny, that Milligan committed three of the four rapes he was charged with. What the defense argued was that Milligan is not your ordinary rapist/robber/kidnapper. The contention of the defense, unchallenged by the prosecution, was that the real Bill Milligan, called an artistically talented man with the I.Q. of a genius, had not been present during the crimes. Instead, according to the testimony of psychiatrists, Milligan had been “asleep” for most of the last seven years, and the crimes actually had been committed by two other personalities, who sometimes “take over and use his body.”
William Milligan, according to psychiatrists, has 24 personalities, spawned by alleged physical and sexual abuse during childhood. A male relative of one of the rape victims calls the multiple-personality theory “bullshit.” He sat quietly through the trial, then later grumbled, “The media is making a folk hero of this guy. It’s the Sam Sheppard case in reverse.”
Indeed, the case had taken such a spectacular twist, that the rape victims and the crimes against them were almost forgotten; the world was interested in Milligan’s psyche. The victim’s relative was not alone in his doubt, though a number of prominent psychiatrists expressed concern, both over the public’s perception of the multiple-personality phenomenon generally, and specifically over the fact, that this analysis had been used to have Milligan declared not guilty. Legally, Milligan could be set free—after some required conditions have been met, if, in the future, psychiatrists judge him to be sane. The law provides for a series of hearings in Probate Court on his sanity; the first one for Milligan was in March, 90 days after his initial hearing. The law mandates another review in two years, and further reviews at intervals of two years. If at any time, however, psychiatrists, where he is institutionalized, believe him to be sane, they can send notifications to Common Pleas Court. If they receive no response, they can release him; if the court desires a hearing, one will be held in Probate Court, with Probate Court-appointed psychiatrists examining him. If they also find him sane he will be released.
Students of the human mind do not always agree, and the Milligan case, indeed, multiple personality in general—is a subject of no little controversy within the profession of psychiatry.
Dr. Hervey M. Cleckley of Augusta, Georgia, popularized the concept of multiple personality when he co-authored a book "The Three Faces of Eve" about one of his patients. But Cleckley says he thinks the Milligan ruling could set “a very dangerous precedent.” The term “multiple personality,” he says, “may imply more, than we actually mean.” He maintains, that multiple personalities “should not be considered as separate people, but as fragments. The person, who displays such personalities is really just one. There is a temptation to avoid responsibility,” Cleckley says. “Often it’s like the little girl, who gets caught stealing cookies and says -"I didn’t steal them, my hand did.”
“It [the court’s decision] is really too bad in a way,” says Dr. Frederic Coplon, a Massachusetts psychiatrist, who has treated and supervised cases of multiple personality. “It shouldn’t be any different from someone, who commits a crime in a drunken stupor. It’s really the same thing. It [multiple personality] is just a dissociative state. But the personalities, that emerge are part of a person’s personality. He may not be conscious and he may not remember it. But if he’s committed a murder, he has a murderous personality inside of him.”
Szasz says: “Anyone, who excuses him [a defendant pleading insanity] is an accomplice. But the press is usually responsible, too. Look at that article in Time [on Milligan]. They wrote it as if he had cancer or something, like it was fact, rather than theory. Time and several other publications also wrote it as fact that Bill Milligan’s former stepfather Chalmer Milligan had physically and sexually abused Bill when he was young. It was his abuse, which psychiatrists see as the key to Bill’s later behavior; it therefore plays a pivotal role in the story of Bill Milligan and his insanity plea. At the trial, written testimony from his older brother James, his mother, Dorothy Moore, and his sister, Kathy Jo Morrison, backed up Milligan’s claims, that as a child he was physically and mentally abused by his stepfather. When interviewed by reporters, Kathy, who sat near Bill during the trial, seemed to fight for emotional control and said the years were “a horror.”
Chalmer Milligan, who lives in Lancaster and works nights at Western Electric in Columbus, maintains, “They’re just liars. I didn’t have time to do all those crazy things.” According to Time, Bill Milligan’s stepfather threatened “to bury him alive if he told” of frequent sexual abuse. Other accounts had him actually buried alive and being “hung up in the barn by his fingers and toes.”
According to most authorities, multiple personalities are developed as an extreme defense mechanism by a subject unable to cope with his or her life—in Bill Milligan’s case, psychiatrists believe his inability to cope with or escape from the alleged abuse at the hands of his stepfather caused a development of nine additional personalities, making a total of eight male and two females, ranging in age from three to 23.
One of the experts called into the Milligan case is Dr. Cornelia Wilbur of Lexington, who examined him at Southwest Community Mental Health Center. One of Wilbur’s previous patients, who displayed 14 female and two male personalities, was the subject of the book and the made-for-TV movie Sybil. Wilbur says, that in a two-hour period, she saw four alternate personalities and Bill himself. The last was a brief interview. Wilbur recalls, that the other personalities were worried, that Bill was suicidal. They had to be persuaded “to let Bill wake up.” When that happened, Wilbur says, “Bill scuttled across the room, I’ve never seen anyone so frightened. Wilbur says, that in multiple personality cases, “There is always amnesia.”
She says, that if before therapy the “core,” or original personality, remembers some of the acts of the other personalities, or is aware of their existence, then “something is fishy.”...Such shaping is always a danger with an unusual psychiatric disorder.
“The message comes across that this is very interesting,” says Dr. Frederic Coplon. Dr. Hervey Cleckley says that “hysterical personalities are like a child. When he does something that attracts attention, he tends to emphasize it.” Cleckley also says he thinks that “Many times, multiple personality is stimulated. The dramatics of the multiple personality tends to appeal to hysterical types. Many, who have claimed multiple personality, are not very impressive." Cleckley, who has received a number of letters from convicts, claiming to have multiple personalities, says that often it’s very hard to distinguish between true multiple personalities and fantasies such as those related by subjects suffering from hysterical neurosis. Of the
more complicated and numerous personality structures, such as Milligan’s, Coplon says: “They are really the same thing” as a person with one or two other faces. Coplon says that since everyone’s personality contains male and female elements, it’s logical, that some subjects would have personalities of the opposite sex. But Cleckley is also skeptical of anyone having five, 10 or 50 personalities. Although Eve later displayed another 19 personalities in further treatment with another psychiatrist, Cleckley says that he and Eve co-author Dr. Corbett H. Thigpen “were not familiar with those other personalities.” Almost 25 years since his famous case, Cleckley says, “I’ve never seen one with more than three personalities.”
The public story of Bill Milligan began in the Columbus press when Milligan was arrested on Oct. 27, 1977, in connection with several campus area rapes. Three of the rapes, all committed within two weeks prior to the arrest date, were remarkably similar. A woman would be approached near the OSU campus, taken at gunpoint to a rural area and raped. The rapist then forced the victims to use checks or credit cards to obtain cash. The victim would later be released without further harm, but the rapist would take her name, and perhaps those of some relatives. He threatened retaliation if he was reported. When police searched Milligan’s far eastside apartment on the 27th, they found handcuffs, a gun, a stolen Master Charge card and a jogging outfit. Those and other items linked him to several rapes. Milligan’s mental state, however, raised severe doubts as to whether he was competent to stand trial. Dorothy Turner, a psychologist for the Southwest Community Mental Health Center, examined Milligan seven times between Jan. 31 and Feb. 16. According to newspaper reports, it was with Turner and Sam Fia, a physician’s assistant at the county jail, that Milligan’s alternate personalities first emerged. According to Time magazine, this occurred when Milligan answered a question by saying, “Billy’s asleep, I’m David.”
Dr. Stella Karolin, a psychiatrist at the Southwest Community Mental Health Center, also examined Milligan on Feb. 16. Milligan’s mother and his current stepfather, Del Moore of Lancaster, were interviewed by Turner on Feb. 9, 1978.
A subsequent report based on their interviews found that “he [Milligan] has no genuine nor consistent understanding of his legal situation, nor of the charges against him. Moreover he is perceived as being unable to assist his attorney with his defense.”
The report also labeled the marriage between Bill Milligan’s mother and Chalmer Milligan as “stormy” and notes, that the elder Milligan “reportedly drank heavily and was intensely jealous of his wife. He was reported to be very cruel to Mrs. Milligan and the children.” On March 10, 1978, Milligan was seen by a large group, that included attorneys from both the prosecution and the defense and Dr. Wilbur. On March 14, Judge Flowers found Milligan not competent to stand trial. Two days later Milligan was admitted to Harding Hospital in Worthington, where he was treated and examined by Dr. George T. Harding Jr. Assistant Franklin County Prosecutor Bernard Yavitch says, that in accordance with court procedure, Harding initially “was appointed by the court at our suggestion.” Yavitch says Harding was skeptical at first of Milligan’s reported condition. Yavitch adds, “He took a great deal of time. It was three and a half months before he reached a conclusion.”
While Milligan was under treatment in Harding Hospital, it was reported, that his 20 personalities had fused. And on Oct. 6, 1978, Milligan was ruled competent to stand trial. For its work with Milligan, Harding Hospital received $2,500, which the court had previously earmarked for treatment. Harding, however, sent the court a bill for close to $9,000, but wasn’t successful in collecting more, than the originally authorized sum. More than a week before the Oct. 6 hearing, though, Milligan’s 20 personalities became news. Based on information from the defense, the press began to paint a sometimes unsubstantiated portrait of Bill Milligan. It was regularly reported as fact, for instance, that Bill had a genius I.Q. of 150. Yet, in the written reports of tests administered by psychiatrists, the highest full-scale I.Q. registered by any of Milligan’s personalities was 129. Arthur, the intellectual among Milligan’s personalities, declined to take the I.Q. portions of his psychological tests.
And although in many instances, psychiatrists were relying solely on the testimony of Bill, his versions of childhood incidents were repeated in print as fact. Everyone seemed dazzled by the magnitude of the story, taken by the uniqueness of what was happening in their midst, the drama, that was being played out in Southwest Mental Health Clinic, Harding Hospital and eventually in Judge Jay Flowers’s courtroom 9B. Then, on Oct. 9, three days after Milligan was placed in jail to await trial, his attorney, public defender Gary Schweickart, claimed that the strain of confinement had once again caused Milligan’s personality to fragment. One observer said later, “He still looked like the same person. But his expressions, everything about him was different. He was unnerved, scared.”
It looked like another competency hearing would be scheduled. But Milligan was allowed minor privileges in jail, and on Oct. 23, he was sent to the Central Ohio Psychiatric Hospital. A week later there was an abortive attempt to move Milligan to Ohio State University’s Upham Hall, a doctor at Upham had apparently agreed to treat Milligan. But officials demurred; they cited security problems, and were perhaps leery of housing someone labeled as the “campus rapist.” Milligan’s reported relapse added to the suspense surrounding the trial. Who would appear on that day in court? Would it be Bill Milligan or one of the alternate personalities?
That question and others were provocative enough to attract reporters from far-flung national media. The trial was first slated for 9 am in Judge Flowers’s courtroom 7B...Well before 9, cameramen hoping to photograph Bill Milligan or someone else associated with the trial milled in the ninth floor lobby...But just past 10, Flowers, who had been disposing of other court matters, entered the courtroom. Almost simultaneously, Milligan was quickly escorted to his seat, next to lawyers Judy Stevenson and Schweickart. Schweickart, a 1974 Capital University Law School graduate and a classmate of Stevenson’s, appeared born to the role of public defender, a stark contrast to the polished look of prosecuting attorneys Yavitch and Terry Sherman. Schweickart’s scuffed brown shoes looked suitable for hiking. His beard was full, if somewhat ill-defined, and his dark hair, which hung down unevenly over his forehead, rambled backward until it curled over his collar.
Somehow one ear had found its way to surface, as if to better hear the proceedings . . . which moved along quickly. After a couple of brief questions, Flowers ruled that Milligan understood the consequences of waiving his right to trial by jury.
A more important, but hardly unexpected ruling, followed. Milligan was ruled to be entitled to be tried under the law as it existed at the time the crimes were committed. A new law that went into effect on Nov. 1 has since changed some of the procedures for competency hearings, defenses and commitments in cases that involve insanity. Under the new law the defense must prove insanity by a preponderance of evidence. Under the old law, a greater burden was put on the prosecution to prove a defendant was not insane.
Yavitch says, “Yes, we could have found psychiatrists to claim he was sane. But all the defense had to do was to raise the question of insanity. The court had already indicated which way it was inclined to rule. The question was, do we fight a losing battle? Besides, I was impressed with the professionalism of the psychiatrists’ reports. And we had some witnesses [the rape victims] who were reluctant to testify if the trial was going to turn into a media event. I felt we had arrived at the truth, and that’s what it’s all about, isn’t it?” After about 15 minutes, Flowers called a recess to permit the stipulations to be typed...Although the defense didn’t deny that Milligan committed three of the four rapes, it did deny that Milligan raped a woman on Aug. 29, 1977. Schweickart read a statement saying, that none  of Milligan’s personalities remembered such an incident. In that case (count one of the charges), a woman was forced into a car near Naghten and North High streets and forced to perform oral sex. She later failed to identify Milligan positively in a police lineup, saying only that he “looked familiar.”
It was the uncontested rapes that brought up some disturbing questions. According to psychiatrists, the rapes were committed by Adelena, a curious lesbian. The robberies were the work of the sinister Ragan. The money was then turned over to Arthur, who paid the bills. But at least one victim made a point of stating there was no personality change during the rapes, and that the assailant did not speak with an accent (as Ragan does). In fact, the personality described didn’t seem to match any of those previously discovered by psychiatrists. On more than one occasion during the rapes, Milligan claimed his name was Phil, and made a point of telling victims, that he was Jewish.
According to psychiatrists’ reports, Milligan’s natural father was Jewish, his mother Catholic, and Chalmer Milligan was a Protestant, who forbade the practice of either Judaism or Catholicism. That restriction was supposed to have had a markedly adverse effect on Bill. Yet, according to Dr. Harding, none of Bill’s personalities ever mentioned a religious identity. Milligan also told the rape victims, among other things, that he was a member of the radical Weathermen, that he had just killed three people, that he was leaving for Algiers and that he had Huntington’s disease. According to one rape victim, he said he led a double life. In one identity he claimed to be a wealthy businessman, who drove a Maserati and who had a large house three miles from the sea. He also told one victim, that if she were asked, she should tell the police her assailant was Carlos the Jackal, the infamous terrorist, linked with assorted international incidents, including the massacre of Israeli athletes at the 1972 Olympics.
For Milligan’s defense, testimony from his brother, his mother and his sister backed up claims of physical and mental abuse by his stepfather. Bill, whose gaze often wandered to the gallery during the proceedings, seemed shaken and cupped his head in his hands when the incidents of sexual abuse were brought up. The defense did not produce any medical or school records to verify Bill’s physical abuse. It did include, however, statements from teachers and psychiatrists about Bill’s odd behavior. And there was a sentence completion test, that the school-aged Bill had taken. Schweickart read aloud a few ominous entries: “I can’t . . . do anything. My nerves . . . are bad. I hate . . . lots of people.”
And, of course, the defense case contained opinions of psychiatrists...A person with multiple personalities is not necessarily insane. In the book Sybil, Wilbur told her patient, “Yours is not the fragmentation of a schizophrenic, but of dissociation. Don’t ever call yourself crazy, you are sane.”
All the psychiatrists’ reports said Milligan was legally insane... Milligan was found not guilty by reason of insanity of the other nine. Under a revision of law, that took effect on Nov. 1, 1978, commitments of those found not guilty by reason of insanity are handled in the same manner as civil commitments. Hearings and hospitals are not a matter of public record.
Psychiatrists—some, at least—say there is a good chance Billy Milligan will be “cured.” One psychiatrist says, though, that the definitions of psychiatric “cures” are somewhat tenuous: “You can’t really tell unless you put him back in the same circumstances and see what happens.”
A troubled 23 years

Billy Milligan's Alters

William Stanley Milligan’s life got off to a bad start and just kept getting worse. Milligan was born on Feb. 14, 1955, in Miami, Fla. His father, John Morrison, was a comedian, and was 16 years older, than Milligan’s mother, Dorothy. According to a report filed by Dr. George T. Harding Jr., medical director of Harding Hospital in Worthington, Morrison at that time was married to another woman, and was unable to obtain a divorce.
Bill Milligan’s delivery was performed without complications. But on March 22, 1955, he was admitted to Mt. Sinai Medical Center in Miami for treatment of continuous crying and vomiting. In 1958, his father was hospitalized for severe depression. In October of that year, Morrison apparently committed suicide...In October of 1963, Dorothy married Chalmer Milligan, who adopted the three children. She was his fifth wife.
Bill was 8 at the time of the marriage. In school, Bill was a poor student, who behaved strangely. According to teachers, by the time he was 12 or 13 he sometimes appeared to be in trancelike states. Because of his odd and disruptive behavior, Bill was suspended from school. Dr. Harold Brown, who has since declined to comment on the case, examined Bill at the Fairfield County Mental Health Clinic and diagnosed him as having “hysterical neurosis with passive-aggressive features.”
Brown also recommended that Bill be admitted to the children’s unit of Columbus State Institute. Milligan was a patient from March 23 to June 23, 1970. In the spring of 1972, Milligan, then 17, dropped out of high school and enlisted in the Navy. He was discharged after one month, according to reports, because “he did not possess the necessary degree of adaptability for Naval life.”
In July of 1972, Milligan was arrested on charges of rape and sent to the Ohio Youth Commission. Milligan claimed the woman involved in the crime was a prostitute, who demanded payment for a sexual act he did not perform. After release, Milligan worked at Anchor Hocking and several other places, but couldn’t hold a job. According to Harding’s report, Milligan had a girlfriend at that time, but was unable to function sexually. On May 27, 1975, Milligan was sentenced on charges of robbery. One robbery occurred at a Gray Drug Store in the Plaza Shopping Center in Lancaster, the other at a roadside rest along U.S. 33. Milligan was sentenced from six to 25 years for the first offense and two to five years for the second.
He claimed, that in the rest stop robbery he was approached by two homosexual transvestites and that he panicked.
At the Lebanon Correctional Institute, Milligan had difficulty sleeping, vomited frequently and suffered from blurred vision. According to Harding’s report, while at Lebanon, Milligan exposed drug dealings there and had to be kept in protective isolation for nine months. According to Fairfield County Prosecuting Attorney James W. Luse, once released, Milligan quickly violated the terms of his parole by not reporting to a parole officer. However, Milligan did manage to land a factory job, which he soon lost. Following a reported argument between Milligan and his current stepfather, Bill jumped into his car and drove to Columbus, where he wandered about for almost a week before getting a job as a maintenance worker at Channingway Apartments on the far east side...Increasingly worried, according to Harding’s report, Milligan began to take three or four 20-mg Biphetamine tablets to feel more alert, combined with vodka, gin or rum to feel better.
On Oct. 27, 1977, police arrested Milligan and, in a search of his apartment, found numerous objects linking him to the series of campus-area rapes, robberies and kidnappings. Multiple personality, from Mary Reynolds to Billy Milligan
Multiple personality is a concept, that has traditionally aroused a great amount of popular curiosity and no small amount of professional controversy. The malady could probably be traced back to the days of evil spirits and oracles. But the first modern case is generally thought to be that of Mary Reynolds, a Pennsylvanian. Reynolds was discovered in 1815 and her case was reported in 1817. Reynolds displayed two very different personalities, which usually changed after extended periods of sleep of up to 20 hours. While psychology was still in its wild, formative years, a number of dramatically-named multiple personalities were recorded. That list included Mrs. X, Miss Dignity, Killer Burke, the artist, the tinsmith, Tookie, Star, My Dearest, Patience Worth and Mlle. X.
In the early 1800s, there was even a multiple personality with a criminal bent, a Bavarian youth named Sörgel. According to reports, Sörgel “in one personality was quite pious and industrious. In the other personality he was insane, often violent and assaultive and one time chopped an old woodcutter to death and drank his blood.”
Although he never discovered any cases quite that graphic, Morton Prince pioneered work in multiple personalities around the turn of the 20th century. One of his subjects, Miss Beauchamp, a Radcliffe student, who was diagnosed as having four personalities, was a particularly famous case. Her story also set the tone for future cases of multiple personality. It fascinated readers of the Ladies Home Journal, and served as the basis for a Broadway play. Prince, who founded the Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology in 1906, thought, that the study of multiple personalities might be the key to normal behavior patterns. But, perhaps, that was due to his own personality. In summarizing Prince’s work, a book published by Harvard Press noted Prince was “usually jaunty and assured,” but he “occasionally had bouts of depression.” Morton Prince also adopted the pen name Fiona Mae Prince to express feelings he could not attribute to Morton. Prince’s work with multiple personalities was, at that time, generally ignored or ridiculed. But a handful of cases continued to be reported.
In 1944, W. S. Taylor and Mabel F. Martin conducted an extensive search and found 75 cases, that had been reported in American and European journals. They speculated that about the same number probably were recorded in journals they were not able to obtain. Of the cases they did study, a great majority involved women. Forty-eight, or 64 per cent, had just two personalities. Another 12, or 16 per cent, had three faces. Fourteen had four or more personalities, with the most recorded being eight.
Then, in October, 1954, the Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology printed “A Case of Multiple Personality” by Corbett H. Thigpen and Hervey M. Cleckley. The story of their patient, “Eve,” was written up in Newsweek and Life. In 1957, Thigpen and Cleckley published the now-famous book, The Three Faces of Eve. The story also became a movie, that included an Oscar-winning performance by Joanne Woodward. One face of Eve was a quiet-suffering, almost saintly woman. Her opposite was a mischievous fun-loving flirt. A third face was a more mature synthesis of these two disparate parts. Cleckley, offering an informal interpretation, says one “was very straight-laced and needed to get out and have a little fun.” Cleckley says there can be no hard and fast rule about multiple personalities, but notes, that opposites seem to be the rule in the cases I have read about.” He says, that may happen because certain people, especially women, may need to “kick off their traces” and escape the social pressures and mores, that they feel trapped by. Since Eve, multiple personalities have by no means been common. They have been reported often enough, though, that psychological journals are
reluctant to publish case histories, unless they are part of an analysis of several multiple personality cases. But lately, cases of multiple personality have become much more complicated and spectacular. Take Eve, for example. After her “cure,” Eve (later revealed as Chris Costner Sizemore) became despondent over, among other things, her cut of the attention and royalties. Her recent book "I’m Eve", co-authored with Elen Sain Pittillo, details how she changed psychiatrists and manifested another 19 personalities. And Sybil, a patient of Dr. Cornelia B. Wilbur (who consulted on the Milligan case), revealed 16 personalities, two of them male. Sybil’s story became a book and a popular TV movie. Wilbur believes, that Sybil’s psyche fractured, because of the physical and sexual abuse Sybil allegedly suffered as a child. Since Sybil, Wilbur has seen about 25 cases of multiple personality, included cases, where patients had 29 and 52 personalities respectively. Wilbur says, the common link in all the cases was that all the patients had suffered abuse as children. But until Sybil, child abuse was seldom, if ever, used to explain multiple personalities. Wilbur says, that people with multiple personalities are almost always very bright and talented. They may also have their bad sides. Wilbur says “it’s not unusual” for male multiple personalities to be involved in even violent crimes. “We pick up a lot [of multiple personalities] in jail,” she explains. Females too may commit violent acts, but Wilbur says, that because of the chauvinism of our society, “I’ve never known a [multiple personality] woman to be arrested,” unless it’s for passing bad checks. She also thinks that each personality developed can be traced to a violent act in childhood, or an incident similar to such a traumatic event. In Milligan’s case, one event is thought to be an alleged beating of Bill’s mother by his stepfather Chalmer. But other psychiatrists aren’t so sure, that causes are that easy to find. Cleckley says that “finding causes is very speculative. It’s usually an accumulation of things over a long period of time.”
That’s not how it came across in the movie "The Three Faces of Eve", where the split was traced directly back to an encounter with death. But Cleckley says, “We didn’t mean to imply that kissing the dead grandmother was the cause, just a kind of a trigger.” Eve’s case also points out a rather discouraging aspect of multiple personality cases. Patients often keep on revealing new personalities. Dr. Frederic Coplon, a Massachusetts psychiatrist, who has treated and supervised multiple personality cases, says that sometimes, unintentionally, “rather than helping the person integrate, we [therapists] are actually furthering the process of disintegration.”
The development of even more personalities seems a distinct possibility for William Milligan. After the trial, defense attorney Gary Schweickart said, that one personality might not have come out during therapy. That is because the rapist used foul language when speaking to victims. With psychiatrists, none of Milligan’s personalities had shown a tendency to use harsh language...indeed they were repelled by it. There are, however, more barriers to treatment, than just additional personalities. Multiple personality patients may have severe, even suicidal relapses, when they are finally stripped of their alter egos and forced to face the world. But sometimes that day of reckoning can be long time in coming. By one account, Sybil’s therapy went on for 2,354 office sessions..."

Andrew Basiago is quite an interesting speaker, who seems to know a lot about Time travelling and Teleportation, looks like he experienced a lot of various things in life. Here are a few of his videos :

Time Travel and Teleportation - Andy Basiago's disclosure interview


Andrew Basiago - 2016: Police State

Time Traveller Caught In 1938 Film? 2013

HELP: Who is this man? timetravel? photos from USA 2016?

"Handbook for the New Paradigm" About Mind Control

There are some interesting Thoughts from "Handbook for the New Paradigm" by George Green, № 31-37.

"Earth is at the moment quite out of tune. Contemplate the resonance of the crystalline music of the spheres and then think of punk rock. That might be thought of as the resonant sound of the planned new galaxy. Would you want to live there all the time? Perfect resonance is attained through balance. This is the reason that rock music is so destructive to the balance of the young people. It is designed to be unbalanced and discordant in its basic construction. It reflects outward the inner imbalance of its composers and it enhances chaotic tendencies with in the psyche of those spending long and frequent time listening to it. The bridge for this phase from romantic sexually stimulating music was the Beatles. Their early music contained melodies with a lessor amount of distortion as is demonstrated by the orchestral versions. It did however open the door for the more destructive distortions that inevitably followed. Again all part of the plan to slow and hold down the human vibration.
It would appear that it is necessary to also remind you that the discussions of phase 2 must be conducted in places that are not likely to contain listening wires. It is suggested that you view the movie called "Enemy of the State" and listen carefully when the character Brill describes the capabilities of the electronics. He goes through the list at top speed and so you must be listening carefully. It was also given on TV when the filming process of the movie was reviewed. Brill, in the movie, reminds the hero that the capabilities he is listing were available many years previously, however the capability to apply them in a massive manner was not possible until recently, but the added sophistication’s since exceed what is demonstrated in the movie. All of you are being observed and when you gather, you can be sure your discussions are of interest. We would prefer that this project continue unnoticed for as long as possible. If this sounds melodramatic, so be it. Ask for discernment and then view the movie and you will understand....
As our arrogant planners flaunt their methodology before your eyes assuming that sleeping minds have little discernment between programming and entertainment, there is no reason we cannot use this information to our advantage. When you ask for discernment within our purposes, the ability to interpret and to envision ways of applying the Laws given you will provide avenues avoiding their entrapment techniques. As all encompassing as they appear, they are inventions of opposite focus and thus contain the elements of self-destruction. Just as Divine purpose contains within it the impulse for self-expansion the opposite contains the tendencies of self-destruction. When the negative polarity is expanded, then its innate tendencies are magnified, just as the opposite is true within the positive polarity. It is within the path between the two that the spiral of evolution exists... Keep in mind the vibratory level of the mass consciousness. No inhabitant of Planet Earth could survive a Shift to 4th dimension at this time (about 10 years ago, LM). No amount of meditating and listening to channeled entities has accomplished this feat. It must be a shift in self-perception and focus of the purpose of this incarnation in great numbers to accomplish this, as the flow is downward in vibratory rate into disease and death. To halt this movement and change its direction will require a shift of major proportion. The normal vibratory rate of a human body has been determined to be between 62 and 68 MHz. The brain functions optimally between 72 and 90 MHz. When the body vibration lowers to 58 MHz it can "catch a cold"; at 57 MHz the flu; 55 MHz candida, 52 MHz Epstein Barr; 42 MHz cancer and at 25 MHz death begins. By considering the health problems of your friends and family, you can begin to get a true picture. Our interesting negative planners simply lower the MHz of someone they would like to eliminate through their recently devised methods. Within a short period of time, the body either develops a fatal disease or if lowered enough, death occurs and whatever disease already present is the excuse. Allopathic medicine (a misnomer), chemical prescriptions, lower the MHz of the body. Radiation from TV and computer screens lower the MHz, and consuming processed and canned foods, which have 0 MHz to support the body, continue the process. Starvation is the least subtle of the ways to lower the MHz and bring on the lowering of the mass consciousness before each die, in that way these make their contribution to this descending cycle. The human body has amazing adaptive abilities, but the onslaught of ways to bring down the vibratory level to tie you to this planet has reached a critical point. The good news is that the shift in focus of purpose by the critical mass within the encompassing planetary consciousness can go beyond removing a few critical dominos as placed by the interesting planners. It could reverse the way they fall thereby releasing the lowering process and allowing the MHz of the bodies to increase. Now that is an interesting supposition to consider! The picture as it is at the moment is beyond discouraging; it is appalling. However, in playing out various scenarios in holographic possibilities it is not at all hopeless. The keys lie in the cards held by the "ground crew". How these are played will determine which of the scenarios are available to ensure success. Keep playing! The last Game has just begun and the Creator never gambles. He only plays the sure bets. After all HeShe made up the Game and HeShe never forgets the rules. You can rely on that! Her/His turn to shuffle and deal is about to come up. Don’t wait for it to happen elsewhere. Be here now!
...There are many levels involved in the process of bringing forth the accelerated change in the Consciousness of Earth inhabitants/Planetary Awareness... Every quark, atom and molecule is pulsing with Thought and Movement. Nothing is truly flat or solid. You cannot walk through walls in your manifested body at the density of 68 MHz or less. This should not be a mystery. When your brain vibration is 90 MHz or less, you are unable to tune your radio like brain to the universal flow and receive the keys to the mysteries of galactic intentional focus. The possibilities of adventures leading to these experiences are encompassed within these lessons..."

Picture worth thousands words!

There is/was a Sun Conspiracy in the Media. You can hardly find the genuine picture of our Sun on the Internet, TV, movies/documentaries/catoons, on video/video games, DVD's, newspapers, magazines, books/brochures/paintings. Even, amateur's made, pictures of the Sun don't last on Internet (like Youtube) long. The genuine pictures are systematically being replaced with the same pictures, but not the same Sun on them (artificially looking Sun or without the Sun). Even Astronomy films/literature/
websites are heavily censored and don't show the genuine pictures of our Sun and yet it is in front of our nose! I've been researching our Sun for some time now, made hundreds of genuine pictures of it and I've made the abovementioned conclusion, though before I thought that the framing was another, parallel Sun. After more careful examination of close-up pictures, I've changed my mind and now I am in the process of correcting my mistake in the explanation of the pictures I posted on this website! I have about 800 pictures (but not all of them on this site yet) and some of them I have to correct. As you can see: it is a big job and it'll take time! Bear with me and I correct them all on all links. Thank you for your patience!
I can also  prove my findings with pictures of Close-Ups of the artificial holographic framing consisting of White Rays and Pentagons of another frequency and all colours, which (framing/pentagons) are constantly being superimposed on our Sun and on the pink energy coming from it. It is done deliberately, so we would not  see the right picture of ours, of our Earth's and of our Sun's Evolution. Our Sun is a live proof of the existence of the Creative Force, it is a piece of it! That's how the Creative Force and our Souls look like!
This is a Crime to cover our Sun, which is done by our governments and those, who are behind them! Have you noticed on the pictures of the Sun, posted on this site, that, sometimes, there are white regular symmetrical rays coming out of it, but sometimes not?
Natural Sun will have either no Rays at all or irregular Rays, the position of which nobody can predict! That means that when you see our Sun or an invisible Energy Ball of Advanced Thoughts with regular white rays (on the picture), that is not the true picture of our Sun or of the Energy 'Ball' of our Advanced Thoughts!
The Energy 'Ball' of the New Consciousness of the Sun and of Advanced Human Thoughts is constantly being shielded. An alien artificial holographic framing, consisting of symmetrical White rays (which looks like fluorescent light tubing) and pentagons of another, slower frequency, than this invisible New Consciousness' Energy 'Ball' has, were there to make sure that you would never see the difference!
I posted a Close-Up of this structure on  Home Page for you to see what I am talking about. I am sure our astronomers/astrophysicists noticed this alien framing on the Sun long ago, having such powerful telescopes. I am not an astronomer or someone of that nature, I have no technology at my disposal, except my camera, my eyes and my brain, and yet, I could prove it and say it, but why they never said it?!
Natural Sun would never have symmetrical rays, like you would see on most of the official pictures. Natural Sun's rays are unpredictable: mostly they are not visible (all you would see is just a Huge Shiny Ball), but if the rays appear, they can show up in any number (even just one), at any length/width and on any side of the Sun! The rays of the natural Sun would never appear at equal intervals and equal brightness! It's very unnatural! Have you noticed, that the shape of the invisible Energy 'Ball' of Advanced Thoughts (on my pictures) looks different to the shape of the natural Sun? It doesn't really look like a Ball, it has uneven shape and that is a very good clue!

Lydia Monroe

White Energy Beam with holographic frame of artificial white rays and pentagons, glued to it is in my study room, 22 Feb. 2010.

White Energy Beam with holographic frame of artificial white rays and pentagons, glued to it is in my study room, 22 Feb. 2010.

My Personal Experiences with Mind-Control

I took the photos of their eyes out! 3 years ago I visited Townsville in North Queensland and went to the information centre there. A young Jewish guy met me there to give me som info. I looked at his eyes and was astonished to see that the pupil in his left eye was square, instead of being round and I thought how could he see with a square pupil?
Just recently I noticed, by chance, that on one of the pictures of I have the same thing: the pupil in my left eye was square!!! I noticed for the last couple of years a peculiar thing with my right eye: it was itchy and it was flickering like a mirror reflecting the light, esp. at night! Someone put some implants into my eyes without my permission, so I wouldn't be able to see, to write and to take pictures of the changes around me! The same thing they have done to Robert, our son, and to George and I took the pictures of their left eyes to show you those inserted implants (without them being aware of it)! They don't wear contact lenses and Robert doesn't wear glasses at all! And I suspect that most people in Russia have such implants without their knowledge and that makes them not being aware of what is really going on! You can check your eyes by making a close-up photo of them separately from each other and look at the pictures on your computer! I tried to take photos of my eyes, but found nothing this time, but the problem with my right eye didn't vanish (something else is there)! What these implants do: they are of a mirror type and reflect all the Sun Rays, Gamma-Rays and other Energies back and these Energies are carring the new information! So, instead of going through the pupil of the eye into the brain for evaluation, all these beneficial energies are reflected back like a car mirror would do! That explains why people are so letargic, so into the Planetary Game and have no interest to read and to explore the Unknown! Robert, George and the Russians, I know, are like that!
The left eye is connected to the right Hemisphere, which is responsible for the processing of the Universal data and if the left eye is blocked, a human would
already be Mind-Controlled! But apart from that there are numerous other implants, which are inserted into us without our permission to make us docile!

There are many old and new movies made, which would portray the subject and the people, which I am going to tell you about! And here is some interesting incident , which happened to me today (23 Jan. 2010). These things are happening to us every day in many different ways!
I was given a present last year (January): 2 females- puppy dogs (I had no dogs as pets in Australia before). At 10 months one of these dogs had 4 puppies and now I have 5 dogs (one was given away as a present)! You know who (government controllers with neg. technology or Neg. Low Astrals), often manipulate the owners of dogs/cats and other pets into a fighting between each other sometimes, by creating violent behaviour in the owners/passers by and the dogs/cats themselves. This is easily done from the underground/aboveground stations (inc. police stations) with the technology the Negatives have (the governments and those who are behind them). And that creates a lot of Fear and a Separation between people, inside people and between people and pets.

My 5 beloved dogs

I found that those, who doesn't like animals/birds/fish, don't like humans as well !

Often my dogs would disappear for a day to another Parallel Earth from Elliott Heads rivermouth. That made me upset first, but now I am kind of got used to it, knowing that they will always come back to me. These, almost 4 month old puppies and their mother are such good swimmers (like ducks) and are capable to swim over Elliott Heads river with me!
I often try to take my "gang of 5" to different locations not to get bored with the same one. One of the locations is the beautiful village next to Elliott Heads village is Riverview (also an Anomalous place) with a nice forest along Elliott river and 2 boatramps for people with boats (the only boatramps in these areas). On the picture below you can see the beginning of the Riverwalk in the forest. This beautiful place has a lot of negative energy and you can feel it by the quantity of mosquitoes, sunflies and midgets, esp. after the rain or fog. This is where one of the boatramps is (to the left). Each time when I approach this place my dogs become agitated to a different degree. Animals can sense better than humans do. It is here where the negative energy has been directed and not just here, but all along the picturesque Elliott river. I had a few incidents with my dogs before. Sometimes, at some moment they become unmanagable when you give them a bit of freedom away from people and other dogs. But there are also days when they are all right. This time again I decided to give them a bit of freedom running in the forest and in the water: they are so happy when I do it! 

Riverview village, 2010

Right here on this spot on the picture, I was returning to my car with my dogs, when all over sudden all 5 dogs turned into a big ball and have been thrown to the feet of a passer by with a loud, angry barking. I didn't put them on the leash and felt hopeless, because they were not listening to me and continued barking and frightening the woman. When I came up to her, she looked extremely angry and started shouting at me. I wasn't silent too. Then I realised that the whole thing was staged by you know who. They are good at doing nasty things to you behind your back. I put the dogs on the leach and walked to another boat ramp of this village. Then I noticed approaching police car and thought that that woman called the police. That made me laugh: I doubled over almost to the ground. That always happen when I see police tricks. It was impossible to get to this village within 10 min., because the nearest police station is 20 min away from that village. The police car parked in the parking lot not too far from me. The policeman
was propably using some, hidden in the car, device on me to change my frequency and insert me into another Parallel Earth with another Riverview village, while watching me laughing, then left without talking to me.
I decided to see that angry female again in 10 min. at the same place. I found her and her family at the other boat ramp ready to move their boat to their house nearby. Still laughing I asked her if she called the police, she said :"No!" In front of me there was another Alter of this woman, much more pleasant. Then I gave her our website address and recommended her to go on Internet and find a lot of truthfull info on it for her own benefit. We parted as friends.
Quite often when you (mostly your soul) are moved to another Parallel Universe/Earth, your vacant physical body is occupied either by Neg. Low Astrals (Walk-ins) or by another scout from the group of your Higher Self, even if it only lasts for a few minutes. You, on the other hand,  would also occupy someone's vacant body in another Parallel Earth, even if it only lasts for a short time. That would be enough to mix your energy with the energies of others in another place.
And on these pictures you will see how Negative Low Astrals (mostly reptillians and sirians) have been attacking me, George and our son Robert for so many years and not just us, but the whole world. I have seen how Robert would be pushed out of his body and this same body would be used by reptillians up to the point that it would take a shape of a reptillian. And I heard the reptillian speech as well.
But on the other hand, to start living fully in the non-Physical 4th Density, we all need to get through a very negative layer/belt of Negative Low Astrals around Earth and having experience with them here on Earth is a good practice!
Robert Monroe portrayed these kind of Beings and this negative belt in his books. I posted this extract, but it has been taken out from the link by you know who. If you are interested, you will find this info in R.Monroe's books yourself.

R.Monroe portrayed the subject of insanity very well in his "Journeys Out-of-the-Body", p. 77- 80:

"For every known, there may be one million unknowns, but at least here (in Locale 2, where non-physical 4th Density the starts, LM) is a starting point.
In Locale II, reality is composed of deepest desires and most frantic fears. Thought is action, and no hiding layers of conditioning or inhibition shield the inner you from others, where honesty is the best policy because there can be nothing less. Under the basic standards described above, existence is indeed different. It is this difference that creates the great problems of adjustment even when attempting to visit there while in the Second Body
(Second Body is your non-physical body in which you travel in 4th Density. On higher Densities you mightn't need any body, physical or non-physical, and become just a Ball of Light, LM).

The raw emotion so carefully repressed in our physical civilization is unleashed in full force. To say that it is overwhelming at first is a massive understatement In conscious physical life, this condition would be considered psychotic.
My first visits to Locale II brought out all the repressed emotional patterns I even remotely considered
I had - plus many
I didn't know existed. They so dominated my actions that I returned completely abashed and embarrassed at their enormity and my inability to control them. Fear was the dominant theme - fear of the unknown, of strange beings (non-physical), of "death," of God, of rule-breaking, of discovery, and of pain, to name only a few. Such fears were stronger than the sexual drive for union, which, as noted elsewhere, was in itself a tremendous obstacle. One by one, painfully and laboriously, the exploding uncontrollable emotional patterns had to be harnessed. Until this was accomplished, no rational thought was possible. Without rigorous consistency, they begin to return. It is much like a slow learning from unsanity to calm objective reasoning. An infant learns to be "civilized" in its growth through childhood to adult status. I suspect the same thing occurs all over again in the adaptation to Locale II.
If it doesn't happen during physical life, it becomes the first order of business upon death. This implies that the areas of Locale II "nearest" the physical world
(in vibratory frequency) are peopled for the most part with insane or near-insane, emotionally driven beings. For the most part, this seems to be true. They include those alive but asleep or drugged and out in their Second Bodies, and quite probably those who are "dead" but still emotionally driven. There is evidence to support the former, and the latter seems probable. This near area, quite understandably, is not a pleasant place to be. It is a level or plane where you "belong" until you learn better. I don't know what happens to those who don't learn. Perhaps they stay there forever. The moment you disassociate from the physical via the Second Body, you are on the fringes of this close-by section of Locale II. It is here that one meets all sorts of disjointed personalities and animate beings. If there is some protective mechanism for the neophyte, it was not apparent to me. Only by cautious and sometimes terrifying experimentation was I able to learn the art or trick of passing through the area. I still am not precisely sure of all items in this learning process, and so have presented only the obvious. Whatever the process, I happily have not encountered trouble in these passages for several years. Aside from the tormentors and the several outright conflicts noted in the following reports, the principal motivation of these near inhabitants is sexual release in all forms. If considered as the product of recent civilizations-including those both "alive but sleeping" and "dead". It is quite simple to understand the need for release from repression of this basic need. The key is that all those in this near section attempt sexuality in terms of the physical body. There is no recognition or knowledge of the sex drive as it is manifested in more distant parts of Locale II. With the lingering conditioning of our own society, it was difficult to avoid participation at times, as response was automatic. Hopefully, one learns to control this factor. Like attracts like...
Only when you have passed the "raw emotion" stage do you move into the innumerable various but evidently organized activity clusters of Locale II. It is impossible to convey to another the "reality" of this nonphysical eternity. As stated by many in centuries past, it must be experienced. Most importantly, in many of the places visited, the inhabitants are "still" human. Different, in a changed environment, but still with human (understandable) attributes."

Negative Low Astrals' Attacks on Robert and George or rather on their Alters in our house have been happening for many years. Most of the time George and Robert are replaced by their souless Clones, but the rest of the time replaced by their other Alters, so I hardly ever deal with the genuine Robert and George and that is not easy. The constant exchange of their Alters and Clones by you know who, would make you confused. In this case a very good indicator to find out who is in front of you is to talk about subjects, which are posted on this site. The same situation is happening in many families. Pay attention on the bright Light on the ceiling: it is not always like that, but only at the start of the opening up the Portal in the kitchen of our house-Centre causing distortion in visibility!

Negative Low Astrals attack
Negative Low Astrals' attack (one of many) of us all,
of our home and our Centre, apart from numerous electronic attacks of everyone in our house for many years, causing distortion in visibility. As a result our modern (20 years old), strong cyclone-resistant house-Centre started showing cracks.

Negative Low Astrals' Attack on Robert and on George (lower picture) or rather their Alters in our house, 26 Jan. 2010. On this picture a negative Low Astral Reptilian walked into Robert's body and creating a huge scandal, braking dishes, furnuture and attacking George. Most of the time George and Robert are replaced by their souless Clones (or Low Astrals), but the rest of the time with their Alters, so I hardly ever deal with the genuine Robert and George and that is not easy. The constant exchange of their Alters and Clones by you know who,
would make you confused. In this case a very good indicator to find out who is in front of you is to talk about subjects, which are posted on this site and if they have no interest, then they are either Clones or their negative Alters. The same situation is happening in many families. Pay attention on the bright Light on the ceiling: it is not always like that, but only at the start of the opening up the Portal in the kitchen!

Our kitchen. this is how it usually looks like, 22 feb. 2010.

Our kitchen. This is how it usually look, 22 feb. 2010.

The Building up of a Portal in our kitchen, March 2010

The Building up of a Violet Portal in our kitchen causing distortion.
Look at the black spot in the left upper corner, the same spot in the same left upper corner is in the lounge room. It shows negative black Low Astrals' presence. To see the Violet Portal you need to stand up and look at the screen (in a dark room using LCD big monitor, not small I-pad and the like)!

Negative Low Astrals Attack on Robert and George, 26 Jan

George is in our kitchen at the time of the start of opening the Portal in the ceiling. The light on the ceiling is becoming much brighter, the Energies are changing and Robert is disappearing! Pay attention on black spot of negative alien energy of Low Astral Being, which covered George!
To see the Violet Portal you need to stand up and look at the screen in a dark room preferebly on LCD big monitor FLATRON w2242т (not small I pads)!

Negative Low Astrals Attack on Robert and George, 26 Jan
Robert is gone!

Negative Low Astrals Attack on Robert and George, 26 Jan

The presence of Negative Low Astrals' Energy in our house opening the Portal for Robert' and George's
parts of the soul to move out someplace else causing visibal distortion! But later everything would come back to normal and shadows from ceiling lamps too.

our lamps

Our lamps in lounge room, the way they look when the Portal is closed! As you can see: there is not much light on the ceiling!

our lamps

our lamps

our lamps

our lamps

The start of the building up of another Portal in our lounge-room. Pay attention on the light on the ceiling: it is not always that bright!

The Portal is open! Pay attention on the light on the ceiling: it is not always that bright and visibility is distorted! Normally the lamp is dim.
To see the Violet Portal you need to stand up and look at the
(in a dark room using LCD big monitor, not small I-pad and the like)!

The start of the building up of another Portal in our lounge-room. Pay attention on the light on the ceiling: it is not always that bright and the brightness is growing!

The start of the building up of another Violet Portal in our lounge-room causing visibal distortion. Pay attention on the light on the ceiling: it is not always that bright and the brightness is growing and visibility becomes distorted!
To see the Violet Portal you need to stand up and look at the screen (in a dark room using LCD big monitor, not small I-pad and the like)!

The start of the building up of another Portal in our lounge-room. Pay attention on the light on the ceiling: it is not always that bright and the brightness is growing!
The start of the building up of another Portal in our lounge-room and causing visibal distortion. Pay attention on the light on the ceiling: it is not always that bright and the brightness is growing, while the frequency/waveform of the place is changing!
To see the Violet Portal you need to stand up and look at the screen (in a dark room using LCD big monitor, not small I-pad and the like)!

The opening of Violet Portal!

The opening of Violet Portal !

The start of the building up of another Portal in our lounge-room. Pay attention on the light on the ceiling: it is not always that bright and the brightness is growing!

All the surroundings become distorted and the brightness of the light on the ceiling had reached the peak. The body of Robert is here, but not the same part of his soul or even left with no soul at all (his clone). The change of frequencies in the room at the time of opening the Portal  in our lounge-room is shown below.
To see the Violet Portal you need to stand up and look at the screen in a dark room and you wouls see what is on the picture below!

The opening of Violet Portal!

The opening of Violet Portal!

The change of frequencies in the room at the time of opening the Portal in our lounge-room is shown here.

Distortion is created by Negative Low Astrals (Inorganic) Beings when Robert is being attacked. These attacks are also done electronically from the underground/aboveground stations to distort your or your pet's Energy body. On some picture Robert doesn't seem to have arms at all and his legs and arm are distorted. There will be plenty more pictures of how much of negative, alien energy our house, myself and my family and our pets are exposed to. And not just us alone, but the Earth and the whole population on/in it. That drives many people crazy. And in this case the best I found is either to send a firm, calm energy to the people/animals or take a picture of them and to show it to them later.
When you take a picture of a violent person or just people quarreling with each other with a digital camera, you would see that the person's face and figure becomes distorted beoynd recognition, even pieces of the body seems to tear off. That is an indication that he/she is being attacked by Low Astrals or by the operators from the undergroud/aboveground stations (like police) watching everyone and doing their job, whom you or others can't see, esp. those who quarrel. They have the technology!  The use of picture taking can stop violent people, because Negative Low Astrals or police don't like to be pictured, but it can also ignite their fury.
R.Monroe was also writing about some of his experiences with Low Astrals and his own Phasing States in his books.
I portrayed a curious staged case, which just happened to me and my dogs (but it is happening to you all the time). I posted it on this link for everyone to read. I came to conclusion that making us violent is also to do with us building up very strong emotions for creating our own Portals in order to move through them to the needed by our Higher Selves locations to do some work in the Cosmos, like the astronauts do! I had tried to picture Robert (my son) a few times before (when he was violent), but each time either he would brake my camera or fight me or picture would later disappear. But this time it was easier to take pictures of a violent Robert, but George (though he was tired of the scandals) would not cooperate.
He was against me keeping the pictures of negative energy Beings (Low Astrals), or of violent Robert or of negative electronic energy being sent to attack Robert and George himself. He was also against posting the pictures on our website for others to see, who is attacking us everywhere and whom we cannot see yet (but we will). George erased the pictures and I insisted on him restoring them. I told George that each time you start quarreling with each other, I will be taking pictures of both of you, for me to analyse them later and to show them to you (he understands it better now!)

I wish you could see how both Robert and George became suddenly very tired, ran away to their rooms and locked the doors! That made laugh! And now I chase both of them with my camera with various success!
Negative Low Astrals' attack (one of many) of us all,
of our home/Centre, apart from numerous electronic attacks of everyone in our house for many years.
As a result our modern (20 years old), cyclone-resistant house/Centre started showing cracks.

Some Beings (invisible to my eyes, but not to my dogs eyes) are in the garden at night. Look to the left side's white columb, please. Picture is taken by me in Feb. 2010.

Some Beings (invisible to my eyes, but not to my dogs' eyes) are in the garden at night. Look to the left  side's white column, please. The color of these Beings on the picture below is not Violet, but orangy-yellow (very low level of Consciousness) when I stood up and photographed this picture from the screen!
Picture was taken by me in Feb. 2010. It is rare that I can take a photo of them.  Now 'they' started disabling my camera at night.

the picture of the Beings

the Building up of a Portal

George and Robert at the time of the Building up of a Portal. Pay attention on the ceiling light and interference in the distortion of visibility!
To see the Violet Portal you need to stand up and look at the screen in a dark room (in a dark room using LCD big monitor, not small I-pad and the like)!

George at the time of the Building up of a Portal
This ceiling lighting is still abnormally lit up and no pattern of the lampshade could be seen (normally it is seen when lit up)! Heated argument with a lot of emotions helped to open this Portal and distortion is visible! And if you stand up and look at this photo again  (in a dark room using LCD big monitor, not small I-pad and the like), then you will see what is on the picture below!

Cooling off period

Cooling off period. Mind-Controlled George is shouting at me for taking pictures! Ceiling lamp is still not back to normal and the Violet Portal is still active! If you stand up and look at the screen again in a dark room you should see what's on the picture below! All this is a very rare thing these days!

Violet Portal is opened in our kitchen!

Violet Portal is opened in our kitchen!

This is how normally the green lamp lit up in the kitchen

This is how normally the green lampshade looks when it is lit up in the kitchen

The start of the building up a Portal in the kitchen

The start of the building up a Portal in one lampshade in the kitchen! The Portal in the green lampshade is not active yet (not enough emotions)!
To see the Violet Portal you need to stand up and look at the screen in a dark room and you woulds see what is on the picture below!

The start of the building up a Portal in the kitchen

Strange Phenomenon: the light from this lamp usually lit up all kitchen, but not on this photo. Why?

The Portal is just starting to open up, if you stand up you would see a bit of Violet in it. But on the picture below the Portal is fully activated!

And this is how the same lamp would lit up when the Portal opens

And this is how the same lamp would lit up when the Portal opens causing distortion; another lamp is also abnormally bright! Pay attention at the distortion of the vision, the distortion of the wavelength of the room and distortion of the vibration of the people in it!
To see the Violet Portal you need to stand up and look at the screen in a dark room and you would see what is on the picture below!

Violet Portal is opened in our kitchen!

And here Violet Portal is opened in our kitchen! Both lampshades are showing it!

And this is how the same lamp would lit up when the Portal opens

The green lamp is slowly coming back to normal, but not the other lamp yet and
distortion is still visible!

One (or both) of the lamps becomes abnormally bright when a Portal is opened.

One (or both) of the lamps become abnormally bright when a Portal is opened
, causing distortion.

Close up of one of the lamp when a Portal is opened.

Close up of one of the lamp in the kitchen, when the Violet Portal is opened there,
causing distortion. To see the Violet Portal you need to stand up and look at the screen in a dark room and you would see what is on the picture below!

Violet Portal is opened in our kitchen!

The Portal in the kitchen has been opened!

The Violet Portal in the kitchen has been opened , causing distortion! Both lamps on the ceiling are abnormally bright!

The Portal has been opened in the kitchen! Robert is trying to get away from my camera!

To see the Violet Portal you need to stand up and look at the screen in a dark room and you would see what is on the picture below!

Violet Portal is opened in our kitchen!

The Violet Portal has been opened in the kitchen! Robert is trying to get away from my camera!

The Portal has been opened in the kitchen! Portal has been opened and I am interfering!

The Violet Portal has been opened in the kitchen! Portal has been opened and I am interfering with my camera!

The Portal has been opened in the kitchen! Close-Up of both lamps!

The Violet Portal has been opened in the kitchen! Close-Up of both lamps! To see it you need to stand up and look at the screen in a dark room
on flat big LCD monitor!

The Portal has been opened in the kitchen! Both lamps are too bright!

Cooling off period. The Portal is closed!

Cooling off period. The Portal is closed for the green lamp, but not for the other one! Robert is still hiding!

The Portal is opened on this picture and Robert is hiding!

The slow cooling off period is on this picture and Robert is hiding!

The slow cooling off period for the Violet Portal is on this and the picture below!
To see the Violet Portal you need to stand up and look at the screen in a dark room and you would see what is on the picture below!

The Portal has been opened in the kitchen!

Close-Up of abnormally bright light in the laundry and the distortion of the visibility are the signs that a Portal is opened up.

Close-Up of abnormally bright light in the laundry and the distortion of the visibility are the signs that a Portal is opened up. Normally the light much dimmer.

The Close-Up of abnormally bright lamp in the laundry,the Portal is opened in the laundry!

The Close-Up of lamp
in laundry, light of which became abnormal, the Portal is opened in the laundry causing distortion!
Pay attention to distortion of the surroundings!

Below you can see the building up of a Portal in my bedroom at night to get me through that Portal, when I am in bed! I never remember where they are taking me and what I am doing. I have to rely on my Higher Self: Heshe knows better what needs to be done! Usually the only lamp on the ceiling in my room would look dim, showing a colorful floral pattern (see below).

That's how the lit up lamp looks in my room

That's how the lit up lamp normally looks like in my bedroom !

Normal looking lamp when it's switched on

Normal looking lamp when it's switched on !     

Portal is opened in my bedroom

Light of the lamp became abnormally bright! The Violet Portal to other Levels of Consciousness is opened in my bedroom; the brightness and the shade from this lamp has changed!

To see the Violet Portal you need to stand up and look at the screen in a dark room!

Portal is opened in my bedroom

Pay attention to the light of the lamp on the ceiling: this is how it usually looks like, more like a Sun, not a lamp when the Portal in my room is activated! The ceiling becomes extremely bright!

Distortion (esp. the face) is created by Negative Low Astrals (Inorganic) Beings when Robert is being attacked. These attacks are also done electronically from the underground/aboveground stations to distort yours, the people's you live/work with, or your pet's Energy bodies. On some pictures Robert doesn't seem to have arms at all, on others his legs and arm are distorted. There will be plenty more pictures of how much of negative, alien energy our house, myself and my family and our pets are exposed to. And not just us alone, but the Earth and the whole population on/in it. That drives many people crazy. And in this case the best I found is either to send a firm, calm energy to the people/animals/Earth or take a picture of them and to show it to them later. That might have a positive effect on them.
When you take a picture of a violent person or just people quarreling with each other with a digital camera, you would see that the persons face and figure becomes distorted beoynd recognition, even pieces of the body seems to tear off. That is an indication that he/she is being attacked by Low Astrals or by the operators from the undergroud/aboveground stations (like police) watching everyone and doing their job, whom you or others can't see, esp. those who quarrel. They have the technology!  The use of picture taking can stop violent people, because Negative Low Astrals or police don't like to be pictured. I wrote about a curious staged case, which just happened to me and my dogs (but it is happening to you all the time) and posted it on this link for everyone to read.
I had tried to picture Robert (my son) a few times before (when he was violent), but each time either he would brake my camera or fight me or picture would later disappear. But this time it was easier to take pictures of a violent Robert, but George (though he was tired of the scandals) would not cooperate.
He was against me keeping the pictures of negative energy Beings (Low Astrals) or negative electronic energy being sent to attack Robert and him and post the pictures on our website for others to see, who is attacking us everywhere and whom we cannot see yet (but we will).
George erased the pictures and I insisted on him restoring them. I told George that each time you start quarreling with each other, I will be taking pictures of both of you, for me to analize them later and to show them to you.

I wish you could see how both Robert and George became suddenly very tired, ran away to their rooms and locked the doors! That made laugh! And now I chase both of them with my camera!
If you look at the picture below, you will see how negative Low Astrals are manipulating the Assemblage Point of a human at the right shoulder blade, to trigger or to make to come out the necessary (for them) Alter (another personality) of that particular human (usually a negative one) to do a job for them.
In old days sorcerers knew certain positions of the Assamblage Point to manipulate them and help them and their apprentices to get to other Universes or to some places on Earth or our Solar system. These days it is done mainly through a sophisticated technology at a distance to control the position of your Assemblage Point or rather Tuning Point.
This has been done to me, to George, to Robert, our son, to that angry woman and to millions of other humans.

Reptilians portrayed in "The Biggest Secret" by David Icke

Reptilians (Negative Low Astrals) portrayed in "The Biggest Secret" by David Icke

The fight between young people in one of the cities in Australia. You can notice the involvement of Low Astrals and the change of frequencies.
The fight between young people in one of the cities in Australia. You can notice the involvement of Low Astrals and the change of frequencies. Low Astrals are very active during football/soccer/basketball and similar games, where they feast on the energies generated by us!

 Heat Wave or ADS?

From reading about  microwave" Active Denial System " ( ADS) is not difficult to make a connection to forests/city fires in modern/ancient times , all kinds of fires at all wars and at the time of "Peace", since Atlantis . This technology has been also used from the underground and from planes/drones a lot. Fires are engulfing the whole world.

More than 400 "bush" fires were reported by the weather people in Siberia and Far East last April alone ( with + 27C), which is hard to reach without the use of ADS in cold places in spring. Australia is famous for " bush" fires/"heat" waves and flooding/strong winds and that's about all natural/technology made disasters you'll find in  Australia. Seems like a favorite destination of you know who, especially Pine Gap. And now is the same in Florida, China, California, Greece. Almost every "natural disaster is accompanied by "fire", sometimes " bush" fires in  the snow . Human spontaneous combustion could happen when a person is sitting in a chair and leave nothing else burned except the living body and it's caused by ADS. That has been happening for thousands of years and not a secret anymore. Microwave  ovens have been used for years to cook the insides of a chicken faster than a conventional oven . Active Denial System tends  to  be  used more in  summer (no surprise ), which is what Northern Hemishpere experience now. Maybe "Global warming" is an excuse for ADS attacks ?
 I personally found that  the best way to get through ADS attacks ("heat wave") is to wrap a wet cotton sheet around the body inc. head or to wear wet clothes even in bed/couch overnight (preferably no telephone/computer/tv use at the time of the attack). I used icy water from the fridge for the sheets/clothes and showers and survived at +45C for a couple of weeks without airconditioner. Here are some extracts from websites on Mind blasting Active Denial System:
".. Often " Active  Denial  System" used on large masses of people (whole cities or Targeted Persons )..driving  millions  people crazy";
   "the  imbalance  occurs, a  fundamental change in a person's psyche, he loses self-control and becomes easily led.. either  from Earth or from a command centre lost in space ." What it  does:  " ..It produces enourmous pain by  allegedly boiling the  molecules of  water in the human skin  from  sudden heating  of  the  skin without damaging the skin itself ." A shortage of  breath and  panic could occur !

Some info in  Val's online journal     

and     from about ADS (Aug. 2018 update- these 2 links now fail to connect to its website! In Russian: Эти 2 Адреса видео или сайта не работают больше!)  " ..directed-energy weapon ..directs ,or pulses frequency of 95 GHz towards all  the  Graduates who are  targeted persons. We all are on the  list as Alex Collier said.

Remote Viewers on Youtube (a part of Mind-Control)

Ed Dames EXCLUSIVE Interview - Part 1: Remote Viewing

Ed Dames EXCLUSIVE Interview - Part 2: Psychic Invasion

Ed Dames EXCLUSIVE Interview - Part 3: Consciousness

Ed Dames EXCLUSIVE Interview - Part 4: Movie Plot Points (Bob Monroe is mentioned)
Remote Viewing Terrorist Attacks (Ed Dames)

Ingo Swann is consided one of the most gifted remote viewers and intelligent man, the author of a few books, one of them is "Penetration", which is worth reading and here are some interviews done by Art Bell with Ingo Swann:

Ingo Swann

Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 1
Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 2

Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 3

Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 4

Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 5

Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 6

Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 7

Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 8

Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 9

Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 10

Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 11

Remote Viewing Program - Ingo Swann Part 12 (last part)

Hemi-Sync and Remote Viewing #1
Hemi-Sync and Remote Viewing #2
Hemi-Sync and Remote Viewing #3
Hemi-Sync and Remote Viewing #4
CIA Uses Psychics To Surveil and Control Americans
Using Psychic Abilities Wisely & Well 1/3
CIA Remote Viewing Program, Mind control, precognition
How Remote Viewing Works: Dr. Simeon Hein Pt. 1
An OBE or Out-of-Body Experiment with a PSI Component
Hal Puthoff pt.5 of 5- Remote Viewing and Consciousness
An OBE or Out-of-Body Experiment with a PSI Component
What Remote Viewing Tells Us About UFOs and ETs (Part I)
Remote Viewing (1)
Remote Viewing: What is remote viewing?
What Remote Viewing Tells Us About UFOs and ETs (Part II)
Predicting headlines using Remote Viewing
Remote Viewing - Joe McMoneagle interview
Joe McMoneagle, Remote Viewing Workshop
Michael Shermer Remote Viewing Experiment Part 1
How Remote Viewing Works: Dr. Simeon Hein Pt. 1
Hal Puthoff pt.5 of 5- Remote Viewing and Consciousness
What is Remote Viewing?
CIA Remote Viewing Program, Mind control, precognition
The Remote Viewers -part one
Remote Viewing Pt.1
Remote Viewing Pt.2
Remote Viewing Pt.3
Remote Viewing Pt.4
Remote Viewing Pt.5
Remote Viewing Pt.6
Remote Viewing Pt.7
Remote Viewing Pt.8
Remote Viewing Pt.9
Remote Viewing with Russell Targ and Alan Steinfeld
Remote Viewing 1 of 2
Joe McMoneagle, Remote Viewing Workshop
Michael Shermer Remote Viewing Experiment Part 1

Art Bell - Ed Dames was RIGHT! (The Killshot)

Remote Viewing the Future: GRIM PREDICTIONS

Australian Psychic Of The Year 2008 - Jason Betts

Blackwater "Psycho Killers"

Hal Puthoff Pt. 1 of 5- The Search for Zero Point Energy
Hal Puthoff Pt. 3 of 5- Levitation and Quantum theory
Hal Puthoff pt. 4 on Spaceships and Wormholes of 5

Hal Puthoff pt.5 of 5- Remote Viewing and Consciousness

CIA Uses Psychics To Surveil and Control Americans
Using Psychic Abilities Wisely & Well 1/3
CIA Remote Viewing Program, Mind control, precognition
How Remote Viewing Works: Dr. Simeon Hein Pt. 1
An OBE or Out-of-Body Experiment with a PSI Component
What Remote Viewing Tells Us About UFOs and ETs (Part I)
Remote Viewing (1)
Remote Viewing: What is remote viewing?
What Remote Viewing Tells Us About UFOs and ETs (Part II)
Predicting headlines using Remote Viewing
Remote Viewing - Joe McMoneagle interview
Joe McMoneagle, Remote Viewing Workshop

Michael Shermer Remote Viewing Experiment Part 1
How Remote Viewing Works: Dr. Simeon Hein Pt. 1
Michael Shermer Remote Viewing Experiment Part 1
Remote Viewing Terrorist Attacks (Ed Dames)

What is Remote Viewing?
CIA Remote Viewing Program, Mind control, precognition
The Remote Viewers -part one

 Vibration creates matter


 Speakers about Mind-Control (on Youtube)

This is some information on youtube given by the people who went through horrific mind control experiments (highly recommended) :   Project MK-ULTRA  MKULTRA Victim Testimony C:   CIA Brainwashing Experiments - MKULTRA   CIA Brainwashing Techniques (Cathy O'Brien)  Torture: Training Video for Junior CIA Trainees   Re: MKULTRA Victim Testimony C:   MKULTRA Victim Testimony B:    CIA MIND CONTROL EXPERIMENTS   Welcome to the Jungle: US Military Psychological Operations  Cathy O'Brien - Day In The Life (GNN)  Mark Phillips on Mind Control   Preview of Interview with Mark Phillips  Preview of Interview with Cathy O'Brien  TRANCE Form America - 1of7 Child Prostitution, Satanism, & The CIA - 1of7 Arizona Wilder on Government Mind Controlled Slaves, pt1  Who is telling the truth?  Confessions of a mother goddess, David Icke.  David Icke- Humans transform to Reptiles

Non-Physical Mind-Controlling Devices for Crown Chakras

Mind-Controlling non-Physical Device for Crown Chakra

Mind-Controlling non-Physical Device for Crown Chakra
They are invisible to the eye and this is what I often feel is above my head to block the Universal information coming to me through the Crown Chakra. This phony holographic device looks like crown giving the name of the head chakra as "Crown Chakra" . As you can see they didn't just framed our Sun up , but they also framed our Chakras up!

More info on:

*** Jan 2020 update- TWO links below now fail to connect to its website! In Russian: ДВА Адреса видео или сайта внизу не работают больше!***




Interesting information about  inmanned  flying  cameras of all shapes and sizes called Drones you can find on this website :

"New Instruments of Surveillance and Social Control: Wireless Technologies which Target the Neuronal Functioning of the Brain"



Appropriate articles from Internet

'World's greatest illusion'

The Indian rope trick is often described as the 'world's greatest illusion' - yet a man in the slums of Delhi claims he can do it.
In fact, not just one man but two.
First, the trick: it involves a rope being made to rise upwards and then once rigid, a young boy is encouraged to climb to the top.
In Indian folklore he disappeared at the top only to reappear after being called by the magician.
In the more elaborate versions, the magician himself climbs the rope after the boy and also disappears.
An array of severed limbs are then thrown down, the magician returns to earth, collects the limbs in a covered basket and the boy magically reappears unharmed.
Most magicians believe the trick to be impossible and back in 1934, the Magic Circle offered several hundred guineas to anyone who could do it.
Now, in a deprived area of the Indian capital, at least two men claim they can do the infamous trick.
The first and possibly the most well known is a man called Ishamuddin Khan.
There are pictures of him performing the trick on the internet and he first got noticed when he baffled an audience in 1995.
When we met him in Katputli, the puppeteers' colony in Delhi, he demanded some ninety thousand rupees (about 1,200) to replicate it for us a figure which was out of our budget.
Instead we found Hasan Khan apparently no relation who offered to do the trick for the much more modest fee of 460.
We turned up at the scrubland near his one-roomed home to find a crowd had already gathered.
A table was set out and he warmed up his audience by making eggs disappear, as well as producing water from apparently nowhere.
A bamboo frame was then produced and Hasan announced he was going to make himself disappear inside it.
It was placed on the ground, Hasan climbed in, his head was covered and his father Anardin shook a traditional Indian musical instrument called the dumru and played the flute.
Minutes later he dropped the cloth and plunged his hands into the apparently empty bamboo frame. It would appear, no Hasan.
But this was a show like no other my colleagues or I had ever seen.
It seemed to teeter on the brink of chaos all the way through with various male assistants having to continually beat back the youthful onlookers with bamboo sticks.
Not usually a tactic known for enticing your audience to return.
Next Hasan's father produced a bunch of fruit from a basket only to trigger an almighty scrum as the watching children dived for the pickings.
Hasan's father thwacked and hit them repeatedly. Obviously, this was one tough audience.
Finally, the Indian rope trick. From out of a wicker basket Hasan appeared to coax the rope while playing his flute.
It looked rigid enough and rose about 10ft to 12ft in the air.
Hasan and his assistants had to hold it steady as a small boy climbed his way to the summit and saluted rather proudly once there.
He did not disappear, but as soon as he was back on terra firma, the rope collapsed.
It was all rather impressive to our untrained eyes. Hasan told us: 'This trick has been passed down through generations of my family.
'My grandfather learned it from his grandfather, who learned it from his grandfather.'
Indeed he went even further and claimed it was his family who had created and invented the trick, which is mentioned as far back as the 17th century by the Indian emperor Jahangir.
He has a certificate from the Guinness World Records for magic and it takes pride of place in his one-roomed home.
'I can't tell you how it's done,' he said.
'This is a family secret and my skill but it's magic and some hypnotism.
'I hypnotise the crowd but I am not going to tell you how I do it.'
Sunday, December 20, 2009 » 10:51am


'Werewolf' patients follow the moon

The main place from where the Mindcontrol of the population on Earth is done is the Moon. And when the Moon is facing us fully (full Moon) the exposure to negative mind control is 100%. Men are more vulnerable to it than women, LM.

A study in an Australian hospital has identified a spike in out-of-control 'werewolf' patients when a full moon is out.
There were 91 emergency patients rated as having violent and acute behavioural disturbance at the Calvary Mater Newcastle hospital from August 2008 to July 2009.
Leonie Calver, a clinical research nurse in toxicology, said almost a quarter of the cases (23 per cent) occurred on a night of full moon and this was double the number for other lunar phases.
The patients all had to be sedated and physically restrained to protect themselves and others.
'Some of these patients attacked the staff like animals biting, spitting and scratching,' Ms Calver said.
'One might compare them with the werewolves of the past, who are said to have also appeared during the full moon.'
Ms Calver said werewolf mythology included reports of people rubbing 'magic ointment' onto their skin or inhaling vapours to induce the shirt-rending transformation from man to beast.
The main ingredients were belladonna and nightshade, she said, both substances that could produce delirium, hallucinations and delusion of bodily metamorphosis.
Ms Calver said it appeared the 'modern-day werewolf' preferred alcohol or illicit drugs, as more than 60 per cent of the patients reviewed in the study were under the influence.
'We don't know if its more fun to use drugs and alcohol under a full moon or if their behavioural disturbance is directly influenced by the moon,' she said.
'Our findings support the premise that individuals with violent and acute behavioural disturbance are more likely to present to the emergency department during ... full moon.'
The research is published in the pre-Christmas edition of the Medical Journal of Australia.
Sunday, December 13, 2009 » 09:47am


 The Introduction

There is a big difference between out- of- body experiences and Remote Viewing. My inability to perform an OBE consciously has been constantly interfered with by human Remote Viewers of all kind: Russian and Americal Intelligence, from TMI, from Castaneda Tensegrity Groups, Brasilian Sorcerers and all kinds of Shamans, Sorcerers, Magicians from different countries apart from non human watchers-interferers whom you can't see like Inorganic Beings.
Remote Viewers are paid to do revolting jobs and they love it, they have no morals. The job of spying and interfering with other people's lives gives them pleasure and a feeling of power over people, who can't see them. Majority of them are/were males! 
The abitity to Astral Travel we all have and with things like Hemi-Sync and with all the rest of the equipment of TMI (Monroe Institute) Astral Travel becomes even easier these days.
Remote Viewers
(or their Alters) are not Spiritually Advanced people , like Bob Monroe.
Highly evolved individual would never agree to make a buck this way, but these 'people' can sell their soul for money, pleasure, material things and power over people remote viewing gives them. They are power addicts! Some of them eventually give up this profession after maturing and acquiring higher morals like David Morehouse. They are a negative part of us, our negative Alters. You'll read a lot about their activities on this page. They've done a lot of horrific things to me, to my physical and emotional bodies
over the years, they raped and bashed me many times. The same they've done to my son, my ex-husband George and my friends. They are constantly interfering with my computer, my website and my life and they are humans! 
R.Monroe and Nancy, deep inside, didn't trust them, their noble nature was always against espionage and similar activities, but, unfortuately, Bob's Institute started getting invaded by Government Intelligence people with their Remote-Viewing courses and by Remote Viewers.  

That was the reason why Bob often felt lonely and didn't trust many people, esp. after Nancy died. After Bob's transition the Government took over the Institute and they made Remote Viewing to look like a 'beneficial', 'exciting' activity, 'promoted' by Bob Monroe (at least I had that impression from watching the videos posted recently on Youtube by TMI personel. Even the book I'm reading now "The Journey of Robert Monroe" by Ron Russell, written in 2007 (though it's a very interesting book), writes about Bob and his 'frequent guests', reseachers from the US Army's Remote Viewing program at Stanford Hal Puthoff and Russell Targ, who were introducing remote viewing to Bob.
One thing is interest and another thing is to make a living out of it.
Robert's dream has always been that Hemi-Sync is for everyone, who is interested, for beneficial things. In 1996 I bought Gateway series and Metamusic on CD's and many other cassettes from Monroe Institute. I tried them for more than 2 years, did all the instructions: nothing worked. I never had a single OBE and
I don't know whom to blame:
people from Monroe Institute for selling me the faulty product or Australian Post or CIA agents. Hemi-Sync signal on all the CD's and cassettes was either too weak or was never on them or destroyed on the way to Australia/in Australia. Over the years the same complaints I've heard from many people and it doesn't surprise me: look who is running the Institute! The CIA agents, who doesn't even hide it. Take, for instance Skip Atwater, who produced a video of his meeting R.Monroe and who doesn't hide his Intelligence involvement. In his book he is constantly bragging about 'his achievements'. In 1977 he 'joined the army's secret counterintelligence operation at Ford Meade, Maryland. This very small and select unit was investigating the possibilities of remote viewing and Atwater was searching for information on organizations and techniques that might be relevant'
(p.107 "The Journey of Robert Monroe"). I've seen Atwater at TMI in April 2007, he didn't impress me as a highly spiritually evolved being. They are still using R.Monroe's name, his books, his ideas, his equipment, his Institute, his friends to attract more readers for Remote Viewing Courses. For those people and their teachers, Remote -Viewers and for remote viewing studies Hemi-Sync will be always available.
No wonder that Robert and Nancy sometimes could not stand some people. 

 I remember when I came to TMI in April 2007 and talked to people who met Bob Monroe and even participated in his seminars, the only things I heard from them was how dishonest Bob was in selling blocks of land of his "New Land" Estate, and not a word about his achievements! I started boiling up.
I couldn't understand why these people were so ungrateful and so posessed by material things: blocks of land were more important for them than Knowledge. Bob gave all his money for this project and it wasn't enough. He was constantly preoccupied where to get more money to run the Institute. Noone in the world wrote such books, gave such materials, his energy and experience to Humanity, sacrificed everything for spiritual awakening of Humanity.
In "The Journey of Robert Monroe", p.74, Ron Russell writes that by 1976 Bob "had received more than 15000 letters  from the readers of his first book "Journeys out of the Body", who had similar experiences. This was the result of his efforts. And, certainly, it pleases me.
I know now that hundred eyes of magicians, shamans, remote viewers have been watching every my move since the day I was born and I wasn't aware of it.
I've made tonnes of mistakes, but I learned from it and progressed and am still amazed at such unusual progress: from a little poor girl with no normal parents and normal childhood to what I'm today. I never had a servant in my life, me and George had to do everything ourselves.
It's not important who you were yesterday, but who you are today and today! Today I am not what I've been in my childhood. This is Known for me, not a belief and, of course, not without an enormous struggle and constant help from my Total Self.  If I never experienced constant pain of all kinds
, I doubt that I would ever achieved what I achieved today. But, at least, like Bob Monroe, I was natural.


Stephanie and Michael on Remote Viewing
This is a very appropriate extract about Remote Viewer activities:
they are not very noble (from "The Mars Records: Pat's Story" by Stephanie and Michael Relfe).

Page 37
"Session 4: Remote Viewers Interfere (just some parts)
26th September 2001
Summary: We start to look at an incident related to a certain Military Cadet Program and visiting a famous CEO’s house. We are continually interrupted by a remote viewer who wants to stop Pat from remembering.
(We run through the preliminary questions about food and sleep etc.) Note the rock slam.
Pat: I feel a presence around me 
Stephanie: Contact it.
Pat: I get “no contact”
Stephanie: Well, when they communicated that to you, that was a contact.
Pat: I get it’s a remote viewer and his boss
(We try a few things which don’t
work. Eventually):
Stephanie: Pray for the remote viewer. Put up a blue bubble around you. It is flexible and everything sent to it bounces off.
Start of Session
Stephanie: What’s happening?
Pat: Someone is whispering in my ear “come”
Now what is happening is that someone, in present time, is interfering with the session. She is referring to something happening right now, not in the incident.
Pat: I ask “come where?” They say “with us”. I ask “where?” They say “You don’t need to know”.
This refers to what the Remote Viewer and his boss were saying to her.

Stephanie: Who is it?
Pat: A man in a suit
Stephanie: Where is he?
Pat: Here in Norfolk. He’s in the same building as the remote viewer. It’s the same room. Someone’s saying “it’s not
Body jerks. Now she is reporting on what is
happening as we speak.
Stephanie: Pray for the boss
Pat: They’re mad (“Mad” in this case means “angry”)
Stephanie: Put the blue bubble back to protect us (Pat had forgotten about this, which allowed the attack to come through and cause the jerking).
Pat: The remote viewer went out of the room. They said “This is not supposed to be two-way”
Stephanie: Is this an incident in restimulation? 
Pat: No It’s happening as we speak. I see myself walking between two men. Now I believe we’re in an incident from some time in the past.
Stephanie: Move through the incident telling me about it as you go.
Pat: I’m walking between two men. It’s night. The sky is moving like it’s fluid. The sky is moving to the right in a circle. There’s something inside – it’s light. We step through. We’re someplace else. It’s a building complex We’re outside
The remote viewer says “It’s just your imagination”
(Body jerks) The remote viewer who is listening to us tries to interrupt the session again

Stephanie: Say “thank you” to him

Pat: One of them says “it’s breaking down” (Body jerks)
Stephanie: What happens next? I try to get Pat’s attention away from the remote viewers and back to the incident we were looking at.
Pat: It’s stuck 
Stephanie: Repeat “it’s stuck”
It’s stuck, It’s stuck etc.  I’m walking toward a building. It looks white or adobe brick. It looks southern. This is the same stuff that came up with the psychiatrist.
Before Pat came to see me she had gone to a psychiatrist and asked him to acknowledge whatever she said,
while she tried to do a clearing session on herself, by repeating things like “I can’t remember” and seeing what came up. Note: This is NOT be recommended! One cannot do clearing on oneself, until one has done many hours with another, and been trained.
Pat: We’re inside. I pass through a room. I’m blocked from seeing.
Stephanie: Repeat “I’m blocked from seeing”  I’m blocked from seeing, I’m blocked from seeing I don’t know why. It’s not that unusual. It’s a lobby to a building. We go into the elevators. We don’t go up. We go down. They’re interfering again – saying it’s your imagination (Note the read. This is from the remote viewers who want to stop this session)
Say “thank you” A good acknowledgement has a lot of power in it to stop unwanted attention.
Pat: Thank you. We’re still going down. We are back in the incident.
Stephanie: How far do you go?
Pat: Twenty four floors (F Note the read) I begin to feel scared. One says to the other to do something to put me back into the state where I wasn’t feeling or reacting. Something is pressed against my arm. I feel spaced. They move me forward out the door, I feel really as if I’m asleep (body jerks. Note body reaction) I feel sick. I may have gagged. It’s in my throat or stomach. I feel cold, like it’s air conditioned. I’m laid down. They want to wait till the drug wears off
Stephanie: Make this room sound proof and thought proof. (I get this idea to tell Pat, to stop the remote viewer eavesdroppers). (She) laughs. (Note the read & Pat’s laugh). She is reacting to what she is ‘seeing’ the remote viewers do.
 Pat: They called you names. (She is referring to the remote viewers)
. Gasp! That makes so much sense! I’ve woven an energetic cocoon around us. It’s thought proof and sound proof. When I was younger I watched “Bewitched” and “I Dream of Jeannie”. I always felt inside that I could do that. When I was doing Polarity Therapy I felt I was destined to manipulate energy. I just wove that cocoon. I couldn’t do that before. I didn’t even think it. The remote viewers are very upset.
Pat is back to looking into what is going on right now with the remote viewers.
Pat:  They’re planning what they’ll do. “Will take other measures”. “We can’t let this happen”. “I told you this would happen”. “We can’t let her develop”. “Then think of something”
(stop for ten minute break)
Page 40
(When we come back from the break, I have started to get a headache. 5.2 TA has suddenly gone up, since we took the break)
Stephanie: Move to the incident, to the part you were up to
Pat: I’m getting interference from the
remote viewer.
Stephanie: You have your abilities back – stop him. (she does so)
Pat: I put him to sleep  (4.7 Note sudden drop in TA)
(My headache has now gone) Note the disappearance of my headache as soon as Pat put the remote viewer to sleep.
Two guys are wondering what happened to the remote viewer. They’re trying to wake him but can’t.
(Back to the incident):

Pat: I’m sitting on the table, looking around (Back to the remote viewers): I still feel under attack from the two men.
Stephanie: Acknowledge that, block it and continue. What’s that? (referring to the read)
Pat: I’m weaving the cocoon, making it stronger (Back to the incident): I see an instrument. It looks long and cylindrical. A woman has it. She presses it against my arm. I feel floating. My head feels really light. They’re talking to me. They ask, “When did it start?” “What do you feel?” I told them I felt connected as if stepping into a stream or linking to a link. They don’t leave me alone.  I’m getting a headache (in the incident). The drug gave me a headache. (Back to the remote viewers): I can still see the remote viewers. They’re listening. They look as though they’re losing something. They’re shaking their heads, as though there’s nothing they can do. (Back to the incident): I’m sitting on the table now. I can’t quite get this.
Page 41
Stephanie: Repeat “I can’t quite get this”
Pat: I can’t quite get this, I can’t quite
get this... There’s more than one man and a woman. They’re all human.
The woman is holding a clipboard.
The men are talking to me, and to each other and to her. They’re putting stuff into action. They’re questioning me about my childhood. About when I first do something (SF Note the read). Something
 I did that was psychic.

Stephanie: What did you do? (Back to the remote viewers):
Pat: The
remote viewers are upset that I’ve connected with this I can’t remember
Stephanie: Repeat “I can’t remember”
Pat: I can’t remember, I can’t remember... What comes through is something to do with the space-time continuum.
I can influence it...

Pat: No (Back to the remote viewers):
They’re talking with each other, asking how they can handle this. (Back to the incident): I’m looking around the room...
Stephanie: Is something blocking this session?
Pat: Yes
Stephanie: Is it wernicke’s commands? Remember that these things are like layers of an onion. Each layer shows up only when the previous layer has been peeled away.
Pat: Yes
Page 43
We stopped and did kinesiology. I looked for wernicke’s commands that were blocking the session. As so often happened when I worked on Michael, there were ten commands. Some of these were the same that Michael has had.
guess there are only so many ways you can say “you won’t remember this”.
1. “You won’t remember this”
2. “If you remember you will feel pain”
3. “Forget everything that you have seen”
4. “This didn’t happen”
5. “You can’t remember this”
6. “This is just your imagination”
7. “You remember nothing about this”
8. “This is all a dream”
9. “Forget all about this”
10. “You weren’t here”


Session 11 p.37, "Mars Force: Pat's Story"by S&M. Relfe, part 2, p. 33-53
 (the full Session 11 is on Truth about Women Page, LM).

 Torture to Suppress Psychic Abilities, Sep. 5th 2002:

Note from Stephanie Relfe:

 Some of the following will be very disturbing to many people. Note that it took a lot of bravery for Pat to confront and talk about these awful things. I repeat, Pat is a very gentle, ladylike, kind person and would normally never imagine even half of the horrible things that were done to her and which were removed from her conscious memory.
Start of Session ( St. is for Stephanie, P for Pat)
St: What's been happening?
P: I have Montauk on my mind.
St: Where were you yesterday, with things on your mind?
P: Mars
St: Move through the incident telling me about it as you go
P: It's easier to do this with eyes open. Underground. I'm going down. I'm taken there in the abduction. I'm in a hallway (Grief, tears, note body reactions).
There are a very few people in this hallway (Shudder). I'm getting emotionally upset. I see someone who made me upset - a doctor (Tears, note the body reaction). There is almost a hate to it. It's something he did with his hands. Some kind of trigger (body jerks again). That's not from there (the jerks).
 We just got hit. (That's Pat and I right now in the room got a psychic attack).
St: By a remote viewer?
P: Yes. Put up your shields.(Laughs). They are saying "no you're not". (Pat puts her shilds up while I put up a rainbow colored shild around the apartment).. 
I'm on a table. The doctor I dislike is there. I'm angry because he is the one who keeps taking me for programming. This is after Mars. After I've been time shot back . I get a feeling I've gotten rid of the connection to the machine before. That is very right...

P: They pull me out of the chair. The men are not weak. They keep saying "Stop me from doing this. Use your abilities". But I'm not in my psychic Alter . They hit me.
St:  Where?
P: They push me first. I go flying. They hit me across the face. They don't let me to get up. They rape me. I feel sick to my stomach. I throw up. There is blood. I feel there - broken bones. I go mentally away so I don't feel this. It's a repeat of that. Until I'm unconscious. They rape me one after another, till I'm bloody there too. This is very unpleasant.
(F, F 3.4  Good! We are getting more reads now).  I don't want to look. There is an electrical device. They shock me with that. They keep saying that I can't stop them, that I can't do a thing with my psychic abilities. I'm crying. I'm throwing up. I'm spitting blood. I'm shrieking. I'm hating them more and more and what they stand for. I'm unconscious.
I'm being moved out of the room. I'm on a table. Doctors step in. They assess me. The drug is given at this time...
So I associate danger, abuse and torture with psychic abilities...
He is talking. He is placing or inserting all the physical conscious memories of what happened. He is using the Alters to store them. The memories of pain, terror, hopelessness. He wants them to stay on an unconscious level in my normal personality. So I will react on an unconscious level with an aversion to psychic things. He wants me to remember where and by who (torture was done, LM)...
Pat later commented that she craves a cooling wind all the time and keep a fan blowing on her when one is available.
(I noticed the same thing with me and my son : we often have hot flashes and that is the sign of big number of Alters each of us have, the sign of Multiple Personality Disorder many people have; not men-o-pause creates flashes in middle aged women, but a huge number of Alters, LM).
...Normally they (psychics) produce a lot of heat...
P:  Upper bone (note the read). I don't want to do this. The jerking is also because they are taking off my jumpsuit. They don't give a damn what is happening to me. They keep saying "You can't stop us. Try to stop us." They taunt
(remark intended to hurt) me to try. And then they will use it as an example that I can't stop them. At one point one of them puts his hand over my mouth, with finger and thumb and blocks my nose. I can't breath - I think he'll kill me. He holds till I almost lose consciousness, then he lets it go. I feel pressure to my head , as if he has his hand around my temple, crushing me. Telling me they'll kill me, that I can't stop them. I'm so hot.

On Mars. This is odd - because I have memories of being tortured and raped so many times...
At this point I explain to Pat that we have to go over this again and again until she doesn't care about it any more. That is when the charge is gone.
P:  When I was being tortured, I vomited and defaecated. And they used that as part of it. I was such a mess. They...
shouldn't do that to me! (Tears. Note read and body reaction). Every time they did something to me, they used it psychologically. They took away completely my control - of breathing, everything. They reduced me to a hideous (very ugly)... I hated them for it (Tears). They did perverse things. They urinated on me. They made me eat my own shit. They rubbed it on me. All I wanted to was destroy them (Tears. Grief). They annihilated me - every respect. It was as if they were doing this, the real psychological thing - the taunts - the threats. They were going to kill me. One said "Let's cut her clothes open - let's cut her deep." There was no safe heaven. One was going to gourge out my eyes. Animals. At one point they said they were going to set me on fire. Anything that would make me afraid...

St:  Raped. Tell me about being raped.
P:  These were big men. When they raped me, my face came just to their chest. I could't breath. They did everything to make me think it was my last second of life. Like when raping me, they would press against me so I could not breath. One choked me almost right to the brink (end) and then let go. I couldn't connect to any of my abilities. Finally I couldn't take it at all in.
St:  When they were raping you, did it hurt?
P:  Yes. It felt like I was being torn apart. They used all openings. They use the anus as well. And mouth. And when I went unconscious, they would hit and shake me till i woke (note the read). They also doused me (put into water) - told me it was gasoline. I can feel the fear from that (Note the read). There wasn't anything left. There was no way I would touch psychic abilities. They wanted me to associate psychic abilities with such terror and  endangerment of life, that
I'd never do it, ever (Tears. Grief)...
P:  If I win, I can wipe out their system (on Mars) without injury to anyone (Laugh)."

These materials are also on S&M.Relfe page with a full explanation:

"...Women are sluts

She’s to blame
Girls cause problems
If there’s a way to mess up your life, a woman will find a way (from a guy in the Navy)
Women are trouble
Girls are trouble
Women cause problems
Only men should command
Only men should give orders
Women are irresponsible
Women screw up things
Women are crazy
Women are insane
This list may seem extreme, but if you do enough wernicke’s commands on enough people, I think you will get to see, as I have done, that most people have dozens of similar commands in their brain. That is a major reason why there are so few happy, long lasting marriages these days.

I started a clearing session on the biofeedback meter with Michael, but got no results.
Then we looked for Wernicke’s commands and got the jackpot. We found and removed the following nine wernicke’s commands:
"Zap those you love"
"Zap your friends"
"Don’t zap your comrades"
"Suppress your loved ones"
"Suppress your friends"
"Don’t suppress your comrades"
"Swat your loved ones". (It took a while to find this one. We discovered that the term ‘swat’ is jargon which is used on Mars to mean ‘psychic zapping’).
"Swat your friends"
"Don’t swat your comrades"

The commands he (Stephanie's husband Michael, who is a remote viewer apart from other things, LM) had been given which related to relationships included:
“You can't trust anyone” (given by the doctor).
“You have no friends”
“Women are sluts”
“You don't need anyone”

I began to come to the realization that many people I knew who had great problems with relationships were also the ones with the most metaphysical abilities. I had always presumed that somehow having metaphysical abilities made having a relationship difficult. I began to see this differently – having metaphysical abilities means that one is highly likely to have been abducted, and also to have been given commands to keep one on one’s own."


Robert Monroe's attitude towards Remote Viewing

"The Journey of R.Monroe" by Ronald Russell, p. 267-9:

"Since his early twenties, Monroe had never lived alone for more than a few months and now, with no one to make the coffee or drink it with him, and only the dogs and cats for company - sadly, his favorite cat Fusby had died just three days before Nancy (transition) - he found it very hard. George Durrette came up the mountain to chat with him from time to time and Ed Sturz brought him catfish from the lake, but he (Bob) had no close neighbors and, apart from Rita and Martin Warren and his agent Eleanor Friede, few friends of his own generation. He joined the Warrens for dinner once a week, usually driving to the café in nearby Lovingston, and sometimes had lunch with Rita on a Saturday, while on Sunday mornings he might visit Ed and Ruth Sturz for breakfast at their home on Rainbow Ridge. When the lack of company became hard to bear, he would drive down to the Warrens and sit in their living room, talking with anyone who happened to look in. He would call Cindy once a week, conversations that brought them closer together than they had been when Cindy was living on the New Land. A.J. and his wife Sharon moved in to the lower floor of the Gift House and did their best to keep him on a healthy diet. While he was grateful for their presence, they had little in common, especially notions about food. “Have you ever heard of pesto?” he asked Mark one day. “It’s green! Doesn’t make sense to me to eat green,” a remark that accords with his distaste for most vegetables. One positive move he made was to buy an adjustable bed he had seen advertised on television, and he appreciated the ease with which he could raise or lower either end to make himself comfortable.
Having alienated himself from Scooter and thereby also from Joe, Monroe had no one nearby to confide in.
When Joe had moved to the New Land he had become a close personal confidant to Bob, meeting with him most days, acting with power of attorney when required, and helping him also with various personal matters. That relationship was now over, with no prospect of it being renewed.(Joe McMoneagle was the best Remote Viewer working for CIA and Scooter is his wife), that was the reason for alienation between him and Robert Monroe, LM).
However, there was one employee with whom he felt he could share at least some of his concerns, and whom he did not suspect of angling to take over the Institute when the time came. This was Mark Certo. Moving into a nostalgic frame of mind, he asked Mark to digitize and catalogue hundreds of reels of tapes of the radio shows, such as High Adventure and Nightmare with Peter Lorre, which he had produced in the 1940s and 1950s. Since the move to Roberts Mountain these reels had been stored in a barn on the New Land, slowly deteriorating in an old chest covered with dust and rodent droppings. For Mark, working on these recordings provided entertainment of the highest order, especially those orchestral interludes in which Bob could be heard interacting with the musicians and conductor. The whole experience, he said, provided a fascinating journey through the history of broadcasting in America. For Monroe, listening to these tapes provided a relief from his unhappiness and he especially enjoyed answering the questions that arose as they listened to these recollections of times long gone by.

Another source of entertainment for Monroe and Mark Certo were the Wednesday evening sessions, when Martin Warren, A.J., and occasional visitors from the neighborhood - strictly men only - joined them in the dining hall to play poker (last couple of years of his life, LM). For Monroe, a longtime poker player with handful of tricks as well as the ability to read his opponents’ minds, this was a special pleasure. Away from the loneliness of his cabin he could forget his responsibilities and the concerns of the Institute and enjoy the challenges of the game and the jokes of his companions.
A special bonus at this difficult time was the success of the revised Guidelines program, which was received with acclamation by both staff and participants. Many of them thought it was the best work that Monroe had done."


Psychic Warrior by David Morehouse

This extract is showing a meeting David had with his 'dead' friend he loved most and things he taught David. And also the experience of going forward and backwoods in Time David had and described.

From “PSYCHIC WARRIORS” by David Morehouse

"Concentrate on the movement. It's no different from the others you've done. Concentrate on moving forward or backward in Time until you see the surface below you."
Straining, I tensed my neck, rolled my head backwards, and closed my eyes. I began to feel something moving through me, like an energy fluid or an electrical charge (that's how Time energy feels like, LM).
I rocked my head foward and opened my eyes to see Time peeling of the Earth day by day, the picture beneath me changing with each passing moment. "...that's unbelievable!"  I shouted.         
 "Concentrate. You have to stop quickly when you get the picture you want."
I watched in amazement. The terrain below me remained unchanged, but the cloud patterns flickered and strobed their way through Time, changing like a rabbit-fire slide show. I noticed the cloud cover beginning to dissipate, slowly chiseled away at its outer perimetep. Focusing carefully, I waited for the exact moment. “Okay, I got it! It’s clear!”

I thought I heard Mel laughing at my novice enthusiasm, but I couldn’t help it. This was like my first solo flight in an airplane- I was in control, but out of control.
“All right, start your movement to the surface. Go back to the coordinate site and tell me what you see.”
In an instant I was standing in a small clearing maybe thirty feet in diameter, surrounded by triple-canopy jungle. The trees towered around me in every direction, but through the undergrowth I could see another mountain in the distance. In the strange apparitional way one moves in the ether, I moved to the break in the undergrowth. My gaze fixed on the distant hills and rock formations; I lost track of the ground beneath me. At a break in the dense foliage, I paused to see what was around me. For some reason I looked down at my feet, only to find that I was floating in midair, hundreds of feet above the next level of the jagged rocks. With my eyes locked on the distance, I had walked out of the jungle and straight off a ledge into thin air. “Shit!” I exclaimed, startling Mel.
“What? What’s wrong?”
“I’m okay... I’m okay. I just scared the hell out of myself there for a second, but I’ve got it now.”
“I want you to go to the crash site. Get control of yourself and concentrate; go to the crash site.”
“I’m moving there now- at least, that’s where I think I’m going. I’m beginning to move pretty quickly.” The trees and undergrowth were flashing past me in an iridescent green blur. I began to experience vertigo again, that sickening feeling in my stomach boiling up until I thought for sure I would vomit.
Mel watched in amusement as my physical body grew pale and clammy. He had seen viewers bilocate to a target like this before. He had also seen them get sick before. “Concentrate on slowing down, Dave. You’re moving too fast... Slow down.... Keep your bearings.”
I tried as hard as I could to slow my progress, but it was like trying to stop a train. I kept moving at the same speed. My phantom body passed through anything that got in its way. When I hit small stuff, nothing happened; but when I hit bigger stuff, like trees and rocks, I felt as if a flat puff of air was hitting my face. It was the oddest thing I’d ever experienced. Everything I was perceiving began to darken, as if the sun were setting, but there was no longer any color, only gray and black. “Something’s wrong!” I shouted. “Something’s really wrong!”
“What? Tell me what you see.”
“Everything is turning dark.... Everything is....” I lost consciousness. My physical body lay there suspended between reality and the world I’d found in the ether. Mel left me to the silent world. He knew where I was; he’d been there.
I opened my eyes as the shroud of darkness slowly withdrew. It was an eerie feeling standing there in some other world at some other time. I couldn’t tell if I was dreaming or not; the images before me were there, but not there.  If I looked at them too hard, they turned into something else. I could see the ground beneath my feet, but I couldn’t feel anything. A light mist surrounded the place where I stood, thickening as it snaked back into the surrounding jungle.
A roughly triangular object caught my attention and I approached it in the darkness. It was about a foot across and maybe two feet wide at the base, with jagged edges as though it had been ripped from where it belonged. I reached out to touch it, and gasped as my hand passed through to the other side. “Damn!” I looked at my hand to see if it was intact.
Mel asked, “Would you like to tell me what happened?”
“I’m sorry. I tried to touch something, a piece of something, but-“
“Your can’t touch anything. There’s nothing physical there. Don’t waste time trying, it only confuses you. Look for your target, but also search within yourself; focus on the event you came to witness. Think about-“
“Wait!” I said. “Something’s moving. Over there, near the edge of the jungle, where the trees get thicker.” I moved to where I thought the noise came from, where I saw something down low, glistening in the eerie light. It was an object much like the first one, only bigger. I stared at it, trying to make it out.
“That’s all that’s left,” said the voice from the mist.
“Who’s there? Who said that?”
“The Indians carried most of it away. It took them about a year. Anything useful to them is gone now. Just as well... it served its purpose.”
A gaunt young man appeared in the mist some ten feet away from me. I could make out only his silhouette; nothing else was visible in the drifting haze. “Who are you?” I asked, squinting.
“Has it been that long for you, David?”
“What are you talking about? Been that long-?” And then it struck me. “Mike? Mike, is that you?”
“I wondered what it would be like again.... I’ve come to you so many times, but you just don’t remember.”
“I do remember- it’s the dreams, right? You’ve come to me in the dreams, haven’t you?” I moved closer to the figure. I stopped about three feet away from him, but he was no more clear than he had been at ten feet.
“It won’t help you to get any closer. This is as perfect as we get to your eyes.”
“I can’t see your eyes or your face.”
“That’s because you haven’t yet learned to see in this world. But you will. Those who came here before, they know how to see. They watched us die. I felt them. I felt them in me and around me; they were very comforting. They helped me understand what had happened.”
“What did happen?” Boy, I felt stupid asking that. I’d walked into it just as I always did when he was alive. I could almost feel him grinning.
“Well, I died, of course.”
“Of course. But what happened- I mean, what happened to the chopper?”
“None of that is important anymore.” There was a long pause.
“What’s important is for us to say good-bye... and I love you. And thank you for taking care of Sharon all these years.”
“We see everything here. Forward, backward... everything. I watched you cry. I even watched your second daughter come into your world. I knew her before you did.”
Eight years of emotion welled up inside me, and I felt tears streaming down my face. “Oh, Jesus.” I wept openly, overcome by grief and happiness.
“It’s okay, David. It’s okay. Don’t weep for me.”
“I’m not crying for you, you big ass. I’m crying because I miss you. You were my brother, and I miss you.” Mike stepped closer to me, and as he did I felt a warmth I cannot explain. He stood there close to me, watching me weep, and everything around me became lighter than before. It was as if there were unseen light or energy around him, and his being close to me let me inside its protective glow somehow. I looked up at him, and I could see his face, his wonderful loving face, just as I had seen him eight years ago.
“How are you?” he asked.
I choked on my words, trying to be funny. “Well, better than you.” I tried to smile.
Mike smiled back. “Oh, yeah? Who’s getting old, and who’s not?”
“Yeah, you’re right about that.” I paused, trying to sort out the ten thousand things I wanted to say. I wanted to catch up on the void that eight years had brought to my life. “You know, I never got over your leaving me. Neither did Debbie or Sharon. You just couldn’t be explained, or accepted, or forgotten.”
“Good- not being forgotten, that is. It’s kind of a status thing here.” He glanced around. “But acceptance- you need to feel that. You need to understand that I’m dead, but not gone. I’ve moved on to other things, things I can’t explain to you. You don’t have the eyes for it yet, but you will. That other guy with you now, what’s his name?”
“Mel Riley.”
“Yeah, that’s him, Mel Riley.” Mike sighed. “Well, he’s got the eyes, and I’ve seen him before. He’s a gentle man with an honest and giving heart. He wept when he found us. Listen to him and he’ll get you through all this. He’ll give you eyes and the gift. I know you’ve seen others. They told me you were given a message in the desert. Listen to what you’re told, David; it’s important. Not just to you, but to all humanity.”
I shook my head. “Now wait a minute-“
Mike interrupted me. “It’s time to say goodbye, Dave. I have to go; our business is over for now. You tell Debbie I miss her, and tell Sharon I’m happy for her as well. Tell her I said she should marry him.
I didn’t know what he was talking about, and it must have showed.
“Just tell her that. She’ll understand.”
I knelt there looking up to him as if he were a god. The tears came again as the warmth in me intensified. Mike reached out for me with his hand, touched my shoulder, and moved to brush my cheek. I was grateful for what I’d seen. I was filled with something I’d never known existed, something I couldn’t explain. I watched as Mike’s image paled in the light. “Don’t go,” I pleaded. “Please, don’t go.” I reached for the place where he had been only an instant before.. and there was nothing. As the darkness crept back around me, a voice pierced it from somewhere: “Get your eyes, Dave.” And then there was nothing. I felt numb, kneeling there.
“Time to come back, Dave,” said Mel’s calming voice. “You’re done for now. Break it off and come on back.”
I did what I’d been taught, and the cycle began to reverse itself. Over the years, the process of accessing a target was to become easier for me. I eventually became one of the best viewers Mel had ever trained. But it wasn’t really anything I did. Mel was the teacher; he was the watcher and I was to learn from him as a son learns from his father.
I never forgot what Mike told me. Four years passed before I saw him again, there in the ether. But things were different that time; my life had changed and a new destiny was confronting me. This is the story of how I arrived at that destiny, and how I became the Watcher."


 Fritz Springmeier and Cisco Wheeler on Mind Control

Deeper Insights into the Illuminati Formula

I don't have all of this book by Fritz Springmeier and Cisco Wheeler on pdf, but only part of it:


Page 314

When our system first began doing collages as therapy, the third collage we did of our system was this one of the Gems, the Grand Druid Council hierarchy, the daisy chains and the fairy, and yet it was one of the last to be understood. When our deeper alters got done with the collage, our front alters didn’t understand what they had done. It took several years to learn what all the pieces in the collage meant. What the picture shows are the deeper workings of the system, which are run by early splits. In the background is a veil. In front of it are gems, and diamonds. There are two kinds of gems. One are the gems which link to the computers, and the other are the diamonds in the rough, the clean slate alters which have yet to be programmed. A diamond in the system (pyramid) acts as a radio crystal to receive direction and energy from Satan. The energy is then distributed via the crystal and the gems to the system. This diamond is encapsulated within a gold womb-shaped crystal.

The gems in the system (ruby, diamond, topaz, onyx, emerald, sapphire, opal, amethyst, obsidian, turquoise, etc.) are linked to the book of Revelation’s Heavenly City. The 12 gems send out signals according to their color coding, which are then transmitted by the correct color of ribbon to the correct colored coded alters. Their messages, the scripts, are acted out on the stage of life, which is portrayed behind the erect gold or platinum statue (AntiChrist figure). Gold represents divinity in the Illuminati. In front of that is the clock with the hierarchy. The clock is a crystal pyramid representing the pyramid in the middle of the Grand Druid Council (aka Executive Control Board). It’s 12 hours are the 12 positions of the Grand Druid Council which link to their 12 job responsibilities or characteristics and the 12 colors. The 13th number is Satan’s, and it is color coded platinum. The Grand Druid Council like the Knights of the Round Table sit around a circular table. The pyramid is meant to have 13 stairs to it. The daisy chains were used to link our early parts to their master. Our Daddy would make daisy chains for us.

Most people would never suspect something like this being mind-control reinforcement. These daisy chains were delicate and very sensitive to touch. We were not to break or touch the daisy chains. Our internal daisy chains link to small 3 year old child alters. The daisy chains represent soul ties and the artificial programmed love they wanted us to have toward our master. A severe pain in our head, like a hole being drilled into our head, was refrained by the programmers as being a hole for the sun to shine through to raise daisy flowers for Daddy. Flowers are important family links in the programming.. The bud protects a daughter. The root and stem the mother figure. The soil ceremony protects the grandparents, and is grounded in the earth. The Fairy alters are involved in the hour glass and are the creative force within the system. Here Whisper (Tinkerbell figure) sprinkles Star dust on the light side. The yellow brick road, like a whirlwind that pulls the vehicle, leads to divinity, a mother goddess figure. A gold crown rests upon this stone statue. A tree runs through the entire situation. Those who are familiar with the trees in the system, realize that they are used to hang all the programming. The willow and oak roots run through the collage. Although it is somewhat difficult to notice, off to the right side of Satan are 9 chambers, which represent the various chambers on the Cabalistic tree of life. Interconnected bubbles are interconnected worlds and galaxies in the system. The numerous butterflies are a ring of light that lay at the base of the neck.

Page 315

Page 316

Page 317 ...

The Daisy World (previous page)

We have a special world of devotion to our master called the daisy world. An entire world of alters who love him make up this world. The picture looks some what reminiscent of some of the Fantasia scenes. The unicorn takes us into this magic world. The waterfall cleans our minds of the trauma memories.


One of the traumas is to take a child, put him in a trunk and dump him into water. The trunk fills up and the child passes out, and then is rescued in the nick of time before it dies. This is a common programming trauma. It is this type of trauma that is attached to programming. Feelings come in all shapes and sizes, and it is O.K. to have feelings. When the system did this an alter wrote, "The way I feel, locked and sinking, red sails in the moonlight."

The ROLE of a BETA-DELTA TEAM OF ALTERS. p_beta-delta.jpg  (overleaf after next page 319)

The hour glass controls the system. It’s balance in relation to the clock and compass is crucial. The robots stand in military ranks ready to serve their national leaders. The piano cords at the left are codes for some alters. Maybe the reader will be able to figure out what some of the images mean on their own.

Insert Table of Contents ....................... 320
Page 321

Page 322 ...


WHY should we bother struggling to save victims of mind-control?

Why should we bother with working with victims of mind-control? We can think of a number of excellent reasons. First, if we as a people do not stand up to the World Order’s mind-control, then we are giving them a green light, a free ticket to keep on doing it. And if victims of mind-control do not see people wanting to rescue them, then they will not fight the mind-control, and if they do not fig/it they will not get free. It’s that simple. Each of us by only trying to rescue one or two persons is opening the door to freedom for all victims of mind-control. Do we want the door left open, or the door to freedom shut? It is our choice. Second, the person you save from mind-control may have been someone who would have been used in some secret operation to seriously hurt someone else or to seriously damage the fabric of a free society by smuggling guns, or dope or laundering money. By helping victims of mind-control you are making life a better place. Third, by helping a mind-control victim you will learn who you are, what gifts God has placed within you, how the human mind functions, as well as having your own weaknesses exposed so that they can be worked on. There is nothing more powerful than watching God Almighty answer prayers of desperation with miracles. Bottom line, you will be a better person for helping those who are in such desperate need. Fourth, by learning how the mind-control operates and exhibits itself you will be able to prevent others from infiltration by damage agents, and to prevent parents from unwittingly allowing a day-care center or other institution to program their children. In other words, we will be in a better position to prevent the myriads of harm that come from the wide-spread customs of mind-control. Intellectual awareness of how the mind-control is done is not the total solution, but it does act as a buffer to help us fight this mind-control madness.

We still have much to learn, but we hope to pass on what we have learned to others that we might all make the soonest use of the best help available for mind-control victims. If you know Almighty God, then you know that His strength is perfected in our weakness. He will take our few loaves of understanding, and multiply it.


‘Be not deceived: God is not mocked: for whatsoever a man soweth, that shall lie also reap. For he that soweth to his flesh shall of the flesh reap corruption; but he that soweth to the Spirit shall of the Spirit reap life everlasting." Galatians 6:7-8

The mind-control that has been carried out secretly in this 20th century on such a vast scale has left us with a harvest of weeping. The children of this dispensation cry after the virtues and the oneness within the family unit. Their hearts have become broken through the lack of knowledge, and instability of not knowing the security of a father’s love. Within this rising generation, many c/iildren walk in a famished land where there is no real love. They receive only the remnant of broken homes and relationships, and overworked parents.

Page 323 ...

When the heart has gone out of the family, broken lives become as fragments of broken glass. For many children feel as though their hearts have been washed away in the silent tears of their incompleteness. Having no voice within the kingdom to say "peace be still,, they suffer from the scars of emotional abandonment. In bondage they are unable to see their way through the journey of life. Where do they go when they feel there’s no place to turn? Who do they talk to, when there’s nobody who wants to listen? Who do they lean on when there’s no stable foundation? The Spirit of Darkness soon covers this generation with shattered dreams. In this pool of contamination, parents rise against parents. Brothers and sister become pulled between their loyalties within the family, causing a severing within thie heart of the family unit. In the turmoil of confusion and uncertainty comes a brokenness wit hun the hearts of the offspring, which causes the soul to bleed with the emotion of inner loneliness. Through a grieving process, the scars of neglect turn in rebellion, screaming with a voice of ‘PLEASE SOMEBODY LOVE ME." In planting of a bad harvest, come the reward of "I looked that I should bring forth grapes, but I broughut it forth with wild grapes." For when the kingdom has fallen and the hedge is gone, the harvest will be overtaken and trodden down. The landscaping and cultivation will be a thing of the past. There will be briers and thorns in the vineyard and the harvest will cease to produce fruit of quality. Woe unto the man thiat has rewarded evil unto his children. As the extortioner is in the land, so the young will turn in sorrow and in anger and know him not. He made me not, he had no understanding, I do not love him. As the children of yesterday and today were overthrown in the wilderness, so will come the weeping for the fathers, for man’s glory becomes his shame. Our leaders have planted pain and sorrow, and now we have a harvest of weeping. We think of the countless child victims who waited for the parents to come, who waited for love and acceptance, but were never good enough for the programmers. I want to weep for the humaness that hias been stolen from so many child victims of mind control. I weep for every scream that was never allowed, and for each child that could no longer fight for themself or their own mind. I weep for the silent tears that were not allowed. And I grieve when I think of how grieved Almighity God must be. I grieve that the cycle continues, and that there is no voice for the new cycle of victims, the new generation of victims who are receiving sophisticated high-tech mind-control that has been perfected over centuries and in the Nazi concentration camps, universities, hospitals, labs, and secret underground facilities. This book is meant to be a voice for those victims who have no voice.

But this book is not only concerned about what has been stolen from the victims of mind-control, but also about the sacrifices that sincere therapists and support persons have endured. This next section is written in hopes that it will help therapists in their struggles. We make no claims that this information will work for therapists, we are merely passing on what we have learned from one friend to another friend. Best wishes, and may God bless your work

Page 324

An overview of what the support team faces

When the victim first comes into therapy it will typically be for some other problem, such as an eating disorder. An astute therapist will notice the clues which signal that mind-control is very probable, & then will follow up. There are four areas of therapy that should not be neglected:

a. safety issues
b. helping the victim get to know themselves,
c. building positives such as love, care, the Word of God into the recovering victim’s life.
d. dismantling the PDE (the primal dissociative experience), along with the programming foundations.

As a little method to remember these things, we came up with the word S-I-N-C-E-R-E, which stands for Safety, Information, and, Creating positives, Ejecting, erasing, expelling, the PDE & internal computers, R realizing, Emancipation. Each of these areas are essential for success. What do we mean Realizing Emancipation? When we are talking about mind-control, freedom is a state of mind. The victim must free their mind from the control of the world and realize who they are as God intended and planned. It is not enough to erase the bad, one must realize one’s identity and birthright in God that was stolen. In fact, as our book points out, a mind-control victim will not let loose of their mind-control unless something better is adopted. We sincerely pray that those victims who want out will find Jesus Christ, and realize the emancipation that is found in Christ Jesus. Let us recap the four essential areas of work. If the victim is not totally SAFE, then very little work of substance will take place, even though the client might display a great healing (which is a cover program.) If the victim, does not get to know who they are, what has happened to them, and what mind-control is all about, they will likely go into denial and leave therapy.

If the programming is not worked on, and dismantled, it will torment the person until they are too beat down and too tormented & intimidated to continue. If the victim is not given positives and positive reasons to live, if they do not experience love, they will not value themselves, and will not be motivated to work through the horrendous work that must be done. They need to have positive worthwhile goals to work toward. This book is not the final word on this subject. This book will give the reader the most indepth look into the therapy of trauma-based mind-control to date. There are only a few therapists who have worked with PDEs. These are dangerous, & it is hard to present the successful techniques on how to break the deeper programming without giving the other side the knowledge on how to prevent such therapeutic work. May God grant the strength & courage you need.

Page 325 ...


Before the support team and the victim can work on accessing issues, they need to understand HOW a mind-control slave can be accessed. Allow us to give a summary of some of the more usual methods of accessing, that is making contact with a mind-control slave. (In fact almost all of these were standard methods used on the author.):

MEDIA: access codes/colors/story schemes/pictures in the newspapers, television, Christian television, ads, radio, and news events that are broadcast in all fashions.

PERSON TO PERSON: Eye winks, eye blinks, hand signals, body gestures, clothing, colors, words, karaoke song selections sung, other victims of mind control, taps such as 3 taps, and the arrival of particular persons, one’s children, one’s boss, one’s relatives.

TECHNOLOGICAL: Sounds in morse code, break lights done in code, head light flashes, gunshots in area such as 3 gunshots, blank telephone calls, recorded messages left on answering machine, telephone tones, late calls from master, airplanes flying certain patterns in area, helicopters flying certain patterns, and lights on helicopters.

ITEMS: Keys, business cards, certain tokens or certain bills, letters such as chain letters, colors on cars, statues at sites, signs, houses, and colors on houses, buttons.

SPIRITUAL: Astral projection, telepathy.

(Students can refer to our other books for more information on accessing methods and codes.)

As the casual reader of the above will realize, it is almost impossible for a victim of mind-control to be isolated from being accessed. This is why it is essential to remove the victim from their ordinary environment and get them to a safe place where they are secure and can be worked with, without interference. Up to now, only a handful of victims in history have ever received this, and then only temporarily.

Because it is so difficult to isolate the victim from everything that might be a code, a few knowledgeable sincere therapists have resorted to desensitizing the codes, and putting safety mechanisms that cause the victim to get angry if someone tries to access them, and allows them to block out the codes. However, this is only part of the answer, because if they physically get a hold of an ex-victim, they can traumatize that part of the mind that is resisting the codes and destroy it so that they break the safety mechanisms. The first step in desensitizing the codes is to look at them with the alters, to go over it consciously and know that it is a trigger. Once the conscious mind knows something is a trigger, it is harder for it to work. Most of the triggers, codes and cues work at the subconscious (or unconscious mind). I write unconscious--because they hit the mind at a very deep level. These codes are not something sitting close to the front of the mind. A skilled victim that is undergoing therapy, may want to play along with the abusers so that the Illuminati do not have a clear idea of where the system is rather than bucking the system cold turkey. Again each situation for each victim is unique & calls for some clever responses. Running from the abusers rather than confronting them when they publicly try to secretly access the victim may send the wrong signal that the victim fears the abusers. The abusers love to see fear; fear only encourages them. Hopefully, the support team can develop their own strategies, without us having to spell it all out, & then having someone mechanically "do it by the book." As a final note, we encourage readers who want to understand the subject of accessing better to review various related parts in our books. For instance, there is also some information in our twinning article that might be helpful.

Page 326 ...


Because the therapists speak a special language, and are recognized as experts, they have exercised a monopoly on providing information on mind-control. People want to believe that the experts have answers, and therapists have played the part. The public may have underestimated how much they have wanted their image of their therapists to be true, and how reluctant they are to admit the shortcomings of their experts. We are calling for a re-evaluation of the treatment of programmed multiples, and suggesting the formation of support teams to assist programmed multiples in gaining their freedom from mind-control. Dr. Frank Putnam, one of the most famous psychiatrists who is recognized as an expert by the psychiatric community and who worked as part of the DSM-IV Work Group on Dissociative Disorders, wrote in his book Diagnosis & Treatment of Multiple Personality Disorder, (1989, pp. 133-134) "Very few of us have had any formal training in the diagnosis and treatment of MPD. Although some therapists become ‘instant experts’ upon seeing their first case, most feel that they do not have the skills necessary to treat these patients." While having self-doubts about their abilities, the professional therapists have been very resistent to admitting to nonprofessionals their shortcomings. For instance, in 1995, one of the leading professionals told our co-author, who wanted to share the material of our Vol. 2 and this book with the therapeutic community that "you have absolutely nothing to teach us." Maybe a good place for all of us to start is with humility and a spirit of teachableness. It is probably safe to assume that if you are reading this book, you already have the desire to learn. We believe that the climate for learning has changed, and that the initial frosty reception that our material received many years ago will not be repeated by those who are sincerely interested in helping victims. This section contains some valuable suggestions on how to begin working with a programmed multiple. Some therapists/ministers are under the misconception that they do not have to work with "alter personalities" to help these victims of mind-control. What they do not comprehend is that the person they know and see (who is the host alter) IS also only an alter. They generally work under the misperception that the host personality IS the person, and that other alters are "the alters" (which these misguided therapists/ministers perceive as "the problem"). So rather than work with any alters, they work with the host alter. Their misperception, which leads to such unwitting contradictory behavior on the therapists’ part, would be hilariously funny, if it were not for the gravity of the situation. Host alters can be extremely resistent in admitting that they are multiples. In fact, rather than argue and debate the issue with host alters, skilled therapists come in the back door, by simply relating matter of fact, what all the other alters have been doing during therapy. The accumulation of evidence over a long period of time will eventually convince the host alter through the back door that they are part of a multiple system. On the flip side, many less visible alters may carry anger toward the host for the host alter’s denial of their existence. Do not expect straightforward

evidence of a transcript of a session where several alters of a multiple appear, or a camcorder tape of a session showing different alters to automatically convince a host alter that he/or she is a multiple. Host alters will often study the available literature about DID (MPD), and will often challenge the therapist to debates to prove to the therapist that they are not a multiple. Even though the

Page 327 ...

therapist has witnessed the multiplicity, it will be hard to "prove" anything to the doubting host alter. Remember the doubting philosopher who after long thought finally realized "I think, therefore I am"--if a person is emotionally invested in doubting something, the mind has an amazing ability to think up reasons to doubt obvious facts. The support team for a multiple will need to be skilled in getting the multiple to see things via "back door" techniques rather than head-on debates. It is a traditional therapeutic practice to establish contracts with Multiple Systems. Generally, therapists attempt to establish a contract with as many alters as possible. They will endeavor to explain in the language that the child alters understand what is being agreed upon when a contract is negotiated between the child alter and the therapist.

The primary area that the therapist is concerned with is "hurt" by the Multiple to anyone else or the Multiple System’s own body. The American Psychiatric Association’s contract reads at one point, "I will not hurt or kill myself or hurt or kill anyone else, internal or external, on purpose or accidently, now or in the future." The other major area of concern is setting limits regarding the treatment. Traditionally, the therapists have limited the client’s time to their help, the number of phone calls they are allowed to make, etc. This works fine for the therapists. However, the therapeutic community is in denial or under its own delusions that it is making significant progress with the programmed multiples that are coming in for therapy. By and large, the therapists are simply working with the front worlds of very deep and complex systems of alters. The cults are continuing their use of essentially all slaves that are undergoing therapy today. The time has come to turn that situation around and get genuine help for these suffering slaves. The therapist will become the parent image for a mind-control victim’s alters. Is this good or bad? Should the therapist fight this transference issue? Please understand the dynamics. 99% of the alters in an Illuminati system are child alters. Granted, that some professionals report working with alter systems that they claim are 100% adults, but this only shows the limits of their understanding of their client’s alter system. These child alters have NEVER had a parent. They have had cult figures who oversaw their mind-control. They have had big giant adults in their life who have manipulated and used them, but they have not had a genuine parent. The therapist can and needs to perform the role of a loving parent for these child alters so they can grow to maturity. The intense desire of many therapists/ministers to integrate all alters again shows their limited understanding of the situation. Hopefully this book (along with our other books), by providing the details of what is going on, will encourage relatives and outsiders to have more patience with therapists who are not coming up with instant micro-wave-speed answers. Most of the heavy programming traumas are done to the victim when they were a child. Obviously, thousands of dissociated pieces of the mind which have had no chance to experience life day-to-day as the host alter(s) has, have had no chance to grow up. Integration of an entire system of child alters who have not grown up is only asking for problems. Integration of the real core with child alters is asking for problems. The overall situation that trauma-based mind-control places the victim and therapist in, is extremely complex and difficult. The victim will transfer their feelings for their abusers to the therapist and support team. What else can they do? As past traumas are uncovered, the victim may even hallucinate during a drug memory abreaction and see the therapist as the programmer. The therapist may say or wear things that also

Page 328 ...

trigger transference. Depending upon how the various alters handled abuse, may determine how the different alters then act when they perceive the therapist as another abusive person. Again, this presents another reason why support teams are worthwhile. Traditionally, therapists have set spoken and unspoken limits to the time they will give the victim. Therapists have limited time in two ways, one is the amount of time per week, and the other is the length of treatment that the therapist will devote to the victim before dropping him/her as a client. If the client perceives that the overall treatment time is limited, they will not raise the deeper issues. Because most clients with mind-control only see their therapists for short periods of time, they also can get by with letting the therapist only work on surface issues. After having interacted with numerous mind-control victims and therapists, the authors of this book have seen firsthand that most therapists do not see a clear picture of what they are dealing with DURING THE THERAPY TIME. Putnam admits in his book Diagnosis & Treatment of Multiple Personality Disorder, (1989, p. 149), "I have discovered, much to my chagrin, that many of my patients are very different out in the world than they appear in my office." In fact, the real secret sides of their clients are far more profoundly shocking than most therapists up to now have been willing to imagine. The therapists encourage the superficial approach mentioned above, because many of the best professional therapists will not deal with anything except the issues that the host or presenting alter brings up in the therapy session. In other words, many professional therapists REFUSE to guide the therapy. The client is then double-binded. The client is somehow supposed to know the issues that they are programmed not to know. It’s a "patient-diagnose-and-heal-yourself approach". Amazing result do occur, because the mind doesn’t want to face its problems. The mind comes up with superficial solutions, declares itself better and moves on. (Unfortunately, the mind-control continues, only now it is simply better hidden.) A great deal has been written about how clients sabotage therapy and double-bind their therapists. The books that have covered this subject have not even begun to cover this subject. Books could be written about this. But an even less understood problem, is how the traditional therapeutic methods double-bind the client. The traditional therapeutic/& ministerial methods are double-binding the clients from escaping the mind-control. For instance within the Christian deliverance approach, if a client fails to get an instant miraculous healing during a deliverance, then they are told they lack faith, and they are told that without faith they cannot heal. In other words, they must deny the problem if they want the solution. Are the therapists (or support teams) willing to put as much effort & attention into the victim as the Illuminati or other programming cult? Except for minor exceptions, therapists have NOT been willing to spend the same amount of time as the cult spends. The Illuminati have Grande Dames that continue ongoing guidance for the adult slaves. They also are willing to have their best programmers fly in from Europe and other locations to reprogram a slave with the best equipment and technology available. The commitment level by the Illuminati to their slaves has up to now been many times greater than any of the professionals. Don’t kid yourself that the slaves don’t recognize this. That is why only superficial issues are being dealt with. That is why so many slaves appear to be getting better from the professionals, but the professionals are not being eliminated from practicing. The original Mother-of-darkness who works as a programming assistant with the head male programmer is putting in trees

Page 329 ...

internally that are designed to last for the entire life of the slave. That’s a long term commitment on the part of the programmers and their programming. The fruit (programs) that are placed upon the trees (which are used as programming file systems), are to last the life of the slave. The slave knows that the fruit has been given his internal worlds for his lifetime. An example of a healthy productive role the therapist can take would be the following: The therapist assures the mind-control victim that they will have as much commitment to examining and taking off the fruit, as the other side has of keeping the fruit in place. The victim doesn’t know what the issues are, so the therapist uses the back-door approach to let the victim learn about themselves. The therapist asks, "What do you think about trees? Would you spend the next week(s) drawing trees, talking to me about trees, and going out and talking to trees. Please journal what you talk to the trees about." The client may come back and say, "Trees are very important to me. I don’t want to talk to anyone about trees. Trees are very sacred to me, and they are deeply rooted in my mind, I am their caretaker?" Then the therapist continues the backdoor exploration, "What do you mean you are their caretaker?" Eventually, the mind begins to unravel. The journaling can be an important vehicle to track the unravelling of the mind. Due to the heavy infiltration within the therapeutic community, some disinformation has been assimilated into the beliefs of therapists. One of these is that victims of mind control (who they call "survivors") shouldn’t spend time together. Actually victims are able to understand each other and trigger important information. They can be very helpful to each other, once the host alter has done some basic stabilizing. Another myth that the therapists hold to, is that the therapist will be perceived as a benevolent caretaker by the victim and the Illuminati will be perceived as abusers. Generally, it is quite the opposite. The Illuminati have the ability to give pain, but they have the ability to take it away. The therapist has the ability to give pain, but seldom the ability nor the time to take the pain away. There often is little closure to the mess therapists start, and most victims are very silent about the struggles they go through, in part because they blame themselves for problems. The master or handler is generally seen as a benevolent dictator, a wonderful god, and a friend all rolled up into one. The therapist, in order to maintain their aloof therapeutic role, does not want to be a friend to the victim. They like to stay emotionally distant, perhaps puffing on their pipe. The therapists are still missing an obvious given, which is that most multiple personalities have parents who are multiples.

Page 330 ...


Communication issues come in all shapes and sizes. The first that must be dealt with, and which will never fade away, are the issues between the victim and their therapist. The victim and therapist do not start this marathon to communicate at the starting point. They must work hard just to get to where most people begin. This is because the victim has been betrayed by every important person in their life. Trust is the foundation for communication, and before the therapist can establish a shaky trust in the victim’s mind, little deep communication will occur. The victim must establish internal communication lines. This is equivalent to trying to get a city of people to all like and talk to each other. The answers to how a multiple can communicate with so many diverse people should be used to help society at large. The same answers that multiples have been discovering for their internal work, could help society at large. Along with developing better internal communication is the task of developing common goals and learning how to control a system’s internal switching. Common goals and control over one’s switching are major positive steps. Initially, an alter system will not have these. To develop cooperation in switching will also relieve some of the tension that comes from alters competing for the body. The next area of communication problems is in the area of what alters present themselves when the therapist wants to work, and which alters does the therapist work with. The temptation is to get rid of troublemaking alters, but sometimes the troublemaking alters are the ones the therapists really needs to work with. The standard hour-long therapeutic session does not promote communication with an alter session. Traditionally, alters will appear as the session is closing, perhaps subconsciously hoping that their important appearance will force the therapist to extend the therapy time. Many therapists stick to their time schedules, and simply advise the alter to appear at the next session. Many opportunities to develop lines of communication are lost due to the limitations of the traditional one hour session. Many alters only show up at special occasions, so a support person who is around the system for long periods of time is in a strategic position to really facilitate some good communication developing. The programmed multiple’s system will almost overwhelm the therapist when they find out that they have a listening ear. The therapist will have an entire city of people wanting to give their opinions and to voice their concerns. The needs of the alter system are so great, that it is no wonder that many therapists have terminated their clients because they feel overwhelmed at the system’s need to be heard. What is breaking is a dam that has held back in silence decades of severe abuse. In the best interest of the overwhelmed therapist and the overwhelmed victim, we suggest support teams deal with programmed multiples, because the issues really demand that much help.

Page 331 ...

DENIAL, how to deal with the therapists or ministers

A popular question with ministers who have not worked in the area of programmed DID’s is, "Why doesn’t God have an instant miracle for these people?" There are many parts to the answer, but before getting into the answer, perhaps these ministers should ask Almighty God why he has not chosen simplistic answers to so many things in life. If a room full of smokers are prayed for by any minister, how many will no longer be smoking in a month’s time? Smoking is a trivial mild addiction compared to the programmed of a complex programmed multiple. Those ministers who ask this question need to ask themselves if God is so powerful and they know how to pray, why haven’t they themselves cleared out this nation’s hospitals. The traumas that have put people in hospitals are generally mild compared to the programming traumas. While most licensed therapists are in denial that the systematic programming of thousands of infants is going on in this nation, and that SRA exists, if they look at history every element of the programming has been carried out and historically documented. Should we automatically dismiss any suggestion that those in authority may occasionally conspire to obfuscate the truth? Consider this, most people can barely make it through the day at work without engaging in what are effectively low grade conspiracies. Perhaps they tacitly agree with another coworker not to report the co-workers misbehavior to the boss. So why should we expect things to be different in the corridors of power? addresses and locations) and think to ourselves how many millions of people are practicing witchcraft today--doesn’t it seem incredible that the FBI doesn’t believe any of these witches are capable of killing someone for their religious beliefs. Christians, Moslems, and Jews are capable of killing for their religious beliefs, but somehow the FBI thinks witches are incapable? Doesn’t that smack of a cover-up? The victim doesn’t have time to deal with bull-headed counselors who are in denial. The denial could be a sign that the therapist are mixed up in the world-wide satanic conspiracy him or herself. The victim should not try to convince the therapist about what is happening, the victim should find a listening ear, and take their needs for help somewhere where they will get real attention. Every major and most minor religious group in history have had members that have killed other humans. And yet the FBI officially claims that SRA doesn’t exist. If we look at the list of thousands of covens (and our co-author Fritz has many of their

Page 332 ...
DEPRESSION (initial client complaint)

Depression is mentioned, because the original complaint of many victims of total mind-control is a depression that they can’t figure out. Depression comes in different types. What the therapist wants to identify is a. what kind of depression is occurring and b. what are the causes of the depression and c. what kind of treatment modalities can be applied. Often depression will be experienced as a feeling of defeat, or a feeling of a loss, or a feeling of no hope. Sometimes depression is a symptom of programming going off of a total mind-controlled slave. If this is the case, unless the client is well into therapy for his or her DID (MPD), the client will rarely have a clue about the real source. Some drugs have the effect or side-effect of causing depression. These include codeine, high-blood pressure medicines, indomethacin, steroids, and tranquilizers. The client should mention what medicine they are taking, and the side-effects of these noticed. Sometimes clients with depression can get involved in physical activities and get involved with others and this will clear up a depression. Sometimes clients can determine the underlying spiritual problems and significantly help their depression by working on root spiritual problems or doing a deliverance. A few proper questions will soon discover if there are root spiritual problems causing the depression. If the person had a breakdown of communication with their parents, this will eventually if not corrected lead to open rebellion, and then several steps later this will lead to a suicidal depression. The original sequence of events was created by the lack of trustworthy communication by the person’s parents and needs to be addressed at that level to pull it out by the roots. Sometimes depression is simply a reaction to a sad event. This is not likely to cause someone to come to a therapist, but such a triggering event should be ruled out if other causes are to be treated. One of the most effective ways of dealing with depression is to realize how it is a lack of faith and a selfish self-focus and a sin toward God, who will provide just what we need in life. If the client is open to seeing that depression is a sin, then this sin can be confessed, and all spirits attached to it delivered from the person. If the client is a total mind-controlled slave, the front alters may get some relief from such a miniature deliverance, but will still need to address the deeper problems. The therapist can administer to the client a dissociation test, to determine if the client may have been a candidate for total mind-control. If the client tests positive, then the therapist will need to do follow up work. Causes for this depression may be very deep rooted & take some serious long term investigation and work. The therapist can also serve in the role of listener. If the client gets some of his pent-up emotions & problems out, he may feel some relief. If the client sees that someone cares, that can also have a positive effect. The client can also be encouraged to talk about the situation to another trusted person. The therapist will want to find out what kind of support system (team) can be used to help the client.

Page 333

Page 334 ...


The therapist, the victim and others have several avenues they can use to detect mind-control. One avenue in diagnosing mind-control which has not been touched upon by the professional psychiatric literature is to look at the subject’s role in life. The reason that the professional literature is unable to discuss this avenue, is because the professionals have had very little understanding about how the World Order is constructed and ran. In fact we were thankful that God brought into our life, one of the few outsiders that had a grasp of how the Illuminati controls the world. An understanding of how the Illuminati uses front organizations, what those organizations are, how they interlock, and how control over the various sectors of life is managed by the Illuminati would greatly help therapists identify people who have to be Illuminati members. It is an extremely high chance that Illuminati members are multiples, and an even higher chance that they are under some form of mind-control. Even John DuPont, who recently was head of the DuPont family, was plagued by implants. To identify people under mind-control see if they are people with specialized training. Next, identify if they are in a highly structured job, where there is no room for grey--everything is black or white. Multiples do very well in positions that call for black or white, structured thinking. Look for educators in principal positions, reform schools, catholic and military schools, boy and girl schools. These are places that the Illuminati control in order to use them for auxiliary programming centers. Many of your porn stars, some of your movie actors, almost all of your brain surgeons, some of your CPAs, many of your politicians, all of your CIA field agents, and most of your religious leaders are under trauma-based mind-control. If you actually have the subject come in for an interview, ask questions about the person’s personal history. The host alters of multiples have some very typical methods of handling personal history questions. Don’t expect the host to make it easy for you to determine that they are a multiple. What you can expect is that you will have a difficult time with most multiples of getting a coherent history of their life. You may discover contradictory information in what they tell you. For instance, one multiple that we interviewed said his father was a. a nazi submarine captain, b. a jewish scientist that worked on the Montauk project from 1941 onwards. The information was obviously contradictory and contradicted what his ex-wife said about his father. The personal history contradictions of many multiples won’t be this dramatic, but they might be. When the host personality remembers the details of their life they may say, "they tell me that... Frequently, a person won’t remember if a detail happened before or after another event in their childhood. If you find chronological problems and frequent inconsistencies, then you can highly suspect DID. But you must continue. The MPD really is apparent, when there are lots of specific differences between the therapist and the subject in how they remember what the client has said. The different episodes are hard for the multiple to remember although they are confident of their perception of the event. The dissociative thinking makes it very difficult for the multiple to see the differences, and they will be very convinced that the therapist is trying to deceive them. The experience can be frustrating for both parties, but it is one more red flag that indicates that mind-control is likely present. Multiples will frequently explain their

Page 335 ...

lack of detailed memories on having a "poor memory". They will often say, "I don’t remember", which is truthful, and is better than the occasional situation where some multiples try to invent something to say to hide their lack of personal information, or to placate the wishes of the interviewer. They are also great at saying nothing but sounding like they have said something, and another trick multiples have is saying something that appears to be one thing but is another. Some multiples have figured out their multiplicity, but are secret about it, in fear that others will think that they are crazy. Over the years, probably many more times than not the professional psychiatrists and psychologists have misdiagnosed MPD. Some of their favorite disorders to use when misdiagnosing are: Adjustment, Affective, Anxiety, Bi-Polar Affective, Borderline, Drug Abuse, Eating, Histronic, Organic Mental, Paranoid Schizophrenia, PTS, Psychosis, Schizoaffective, Somatization, and Transient Amnesia. When multiples takes an MMPI, they have historically answered the same way a schizophrenic answers on items 156 & 251. (At least 3 studies have documented this.) These two questions elevate the Sc scale which has been taken to indicate schizophrenia. Some of the tipoffs that a person is misdiagnosed in a mental hospital is that the interact a lot with the staff, but have erratic behavior, that generally leads to the staff being upset. They may be responsible for a while and then surprise everyone by not being able to function or handle a responsibility. Typical questions that help the therapist expose the programmed DID include questions about whether their school grades were erratic, whether they have gaps in their memories of school days, if they remember getting test results on tests that they don’t remember taking, and a grade-by-grade year-by-year history of their life. Bear in mind, that the programmers are trying to fine-tune the programming by layering in cover memories. Still an experienced therapist should be able to see through the shallowness and the confusion of cover memories. Mind-control comes in many appearances. With the more recent victims, implants are being used to distract victims from realizing their DID (MPD). The detection of MPD (DID) underneath the incessant manipulations and voices of the implants is a challenge. The "noise" created by the implants is a strong dissociating mechanism. There are strong natural defenses of the mind that the programmers count on to keep the mind-control hidden. For instance, the victim has been bonded to the programmer/master. To admit mind-control is to experience abandonment, and even death (because many alters’ self-identity is wrapped up with the perpetrator.) It is not easy to kill oneself, which is often the mind’s perception of what admitting mind-control is. Detection of trauma-based mind-control by the therapist will usually encounter strong denial mechanisms by the victim. The therapist should ask about flashbacks. If the client reports flashbacks that are not drug-related flashbacks that is a good sign that MPD may be present. However, most flashbacks do not begin suff acing until the programming and dissociation begins crumbling. Some undetected adult victims of mind-control, when they are having sex with their spouses get intrusive flashbacks and images that scare them. This is another red-flag that the person may be a victim of mind-control. Victims of mind-control will often have all kinds of issues around relationships and sex. Another red flag is when a person reports abilities or information that they have no idea where it has come from. For instance, all of a sudden one day they could

Page 336 ...

understand someone speaking German, or all of a sudden they got the words to a song, or all of a sudden they just intuitively knew how to play a piano, etc. The opposite of this also hits DID mind-control victims. They may have an ability that somehow strangely disappears. It takes time to realize that these are co-conscious alters. Victims of mind-control have great survival mechanisms. They are experts at changing the conversation to hide what they don’t want to talk about. If the therapist has the skill at being gently but firmly assertive in getting what they want, the ability to be gently persistent can pay off.

The therapist needs to become acquainted with detecting alter switches. This involves eye shape changes, eye color changes, eye movement changes, blinks, body posture changes, voice pitch changes, word usage changes, perception and value changes, mood changes, etc. Upon detection of this, the therapist may gently ask, "Do you ever feel that there is another part of yourself that comes out and does things that you would not do?" "Do you ever feel that when you are alone, someone else or some other part of you is watching you?" Any answer except a definite "no" is a red flag, that reconfirms the switching clues, and other clues that the therapist has assembled. Not all victims of mind-control have extensive alter systems. In our previous books, we have covered situations when this does not occur. Another way that therapists can determine mind-control would be to interview people close to the victim, and to visit the victim’s work place and home. Some victims of mind-control surround themselves with objects that pertain to their programming. For instance, the therapist may find a man who has a passion for Mickey Mouse objects, or a woman who loves white rabbit figurines or star trek objects.

Page 337 ...

EATING DISORDERS (as an Initial problem, and as a Deeper Issue)


Eating disorders exhibit themselves as initial problems for victims coming in for therapy. For instance, they may find themselves having an irresistible urge to overeating followed by vomiting or purging, or they may be starving themselves, or have phobias around certain foods. Eating disorders also may develop as problems as the system of alters work through their memories and programming. These eating problems do have the possibility of becoming life-threatening. Many victims of mind-control suffer from eating disorders. There are certainly many factors which cause mind-control victims eating disorders. The more difficult disorders which resist treatment are often created by multiple factors. This section will make an attempt to provide the therapist some of important factors behind eating disorders of mind-control victims. Eating disorders are not limited to victims of mind-control. However, many individuals who are referred or on their own come in to therapists for bulimia or anorexia, are actually suffering from the severe effects of trauma-based total mind-control. For some therapists, the first primary complaint of mind-control victims will be their eating disorder. They will be totally oblivious that anything else could be wrong. Researchers who like to work with statistics have noticed that there is a high incidence of people with eating disorders who have problems with abuse, depression, and self-identity. Since mind-control will bring with it abuse, depression and self-identity problems it is a given that the mind-control victim will have some eating problems at some level of their being. Modern American culture as well as many of the slave handlers are obsessed with females being thin. The pressure that females feel from society and their handlers that they are "a "dog" unless they...." makes many slaves identify thinness with overcoming their self-esteem problems. Unfortunately, if the host pursues starvation thinking that it will overcome low-self esteem, they almost always are disappointed that it doesn’t help, and if anything, starvation, only exacerbates the original low self-esteem. On the flip side, in order for the host alter to feel that she has some control over just one thing in her life, she may resort to starving herself to regain some sense of power over her own body. When striving for freedom, the mind may think that starvation gives at least a fraction of power over their body, after it has been stripped of choice, beaten, and raped, and electroshocked. One reason why some bulimics and anorexics have eating disorders is that they have difficulty identifying their feelings, and have little confidence in their ability in relationships. They feel they must do the right thing to avoid disapproval and rejection. They have an artificial idealized image of what they should be. For instance, one teenage girl was frightened that she was changing from a girl to a woman. Others due to their abuse have a hatred of their body, as well as a fear. There are some young altars that may not want to have breasts and hips. Another person felt that they were naughty if they ate, and she became increasingly disgusted with herself as she ate.


One way victims come in to therapy is that they are referred by someone for their eating disorder. Anyone who gets a referral should explain clearly why the person is in for a consultation. If the client is living at

Page 338 ...

home, it goes almost without saying that the support team should explore with the client the possibility of someone supportive from the family participating in the consultation phase of things, so that a more complete evaluation can be obtained. Another frequent scenario is when a female mind-control victim is raped during the normal course of life and it triggers their mind to remember previous sexual trauma. This may kick off an eating disorder, which may drive the person to come in for therapy. Because the problem is not really an eating disorder, the person doesn’t have a clue as to what they are stepping into by asking for therapy. If someone is trying to trick a person into coming in for treatment, experience shows the tricking will quite consistently backfire in the long run. Rather, than scheming behind the victim’s back, the therapist should see if there are good support groups in the area. After the victim or the victim & their family experience a support group, they are often more willing to come into therapy. Depending on the situation, getting the victim in to work on their eating disorder may even be perceived by the slave’s handler as a positive, rather than a threat to his control, because it may be helping to stabilize a problem within the slave. The patient with an eating disorder is often going to be resistant, embarrassed, and apprehensive. The therapist can establish rapport by being warm, acceptable, honest, empathetic, and interested. Different people will click with different therapists, for instance, teenage girls often prefer female therapists. This is where teams are beneficial, where one person can act more as a consultant, which the therapist who has rapport can deal with the person on a longer basis. (Therapists can establish report by using the language of the person, mirroring where they are at, etc.) If the therapist is going to try dealing with only the eating disorder, there are several approaches that can be taken. However, whichever path the therapist goes down, it would be advisable to gather an understanding of what is going on. Whether it is bulimia or anorexia, the therapist will ask the person to describe their eating patterns both during the week and the weekend. There are ways to get information from people which use the "back-door" so-to-speak. For instance, if the person has been referred for binge eating but won’t openly discuss it, the therapist might ask, "When people go on a diet to lose weight, they sometimes feel so hungry that they are tempted to eat a whole lot. Have you experienced that?" If the person is not forthcoming about vomiting, a gentle back-door approach might be, "Have you ever tried to lose weight by any other means?" It is important to track the details around the episodes--such as how often, when, the most common times they occur, how long they last and the types and amounts of food eaten. It is also important to note what thoughts and feelings were attached to the various episodes. Don’t be surprised if the person doesn’t say, "I don’t know why I did it." The therapist can ask, "How do you view that particular food?" It could be that the cool-aid triggers the mind to think of blood. It could be that raw meat triggers the person’s mind to think of sacrifices. It could be that certain smells relate to certain traumas. Vomiting may have a cleansing effect on the mind of person coming in for therapy.

The therapist may also ask the person about their thoughts and feelings related to sex, and whether they are interested in sex. This may provide some significant clues as to what one is really dealing with.

What is the image of the person

Page 339 ...

concerning her or his body? Later, as one deals with more than the host personality, this will continue to be an issue. With initial clients suffering mind-control, the therapist will need to ask the full range of questions, such as asking about symptoms of depression, low motivation, panic attacks, sleep problems, feelings of suicide and hopelessness, and feelings of being trapped or worthless. The full range of initial intake questions will need to be dealt with such as levels of dissociation, compulsive behaviors, addictions, psychotic thoughts, etc. Therapists can save time if they want by using some of the standard evaluations that other professionals have developed for interviews. For eating disorders there are for instance:

· Garner & Garfunkel’s Eating Attitudes Test,
· Johnson’s Diagnostic Survey for Eating Disorders
· Structure Clinical Interview according to the DSM’s section on eating disorders. Therapists may also want to use such interviews as
· Diagnostic Interview Schedule for Children by Costello et. al.
· Beck’s Depression Inventory

It almost goes without saying that Eating Disorders come from a complex array of factors, including such possible problems like structural brain illness, an infection, or endocrine malfunction. It is not possible for this book to provide detailed information on these other possible causes. The therapist needs to get a feel for what is happening, for what the therapist is qualified to do, and if need be, get the client to someone who specializes in what the client needs help in. What this section can help with is in providing insights into eating disorders as they relate to mind-control victims, and their programming, their programming-traumas, memories, and the general side-effects of a life-time of abuse.

Page 340 ...



Evaluation forms are nice crutches in some situations. In a formal therapeutic situation where time is of the essense, forms can be given that will decrease the time that the therapist needs to begin gaining a feel about the new client’s situation. We have provided an excellent form on the next page that will take approximately 5 minutes to fill out. It is a non-threatening "Getting to Know You Better" form, which can help lead into deeper discussions. The therapist could make a cup of tea for the client while the new client fills it out. Another way that forms might help is where a non-professional counsellor or friend is trying to get some better clues as to what the subject’s problems are. Another benefit of forms is that it desensitizes questions that otherwise might make the subject feel defensive, because the subject’s mind can see that the question is simply a standard question on a standard form, and not a personal attack. In dynamic counselling sessions, a good therapist will be sensing and asking questions in a dynamic manner that is responding to the cues and clues that the subject is providing. Obviously, the dynamic approach when done by an experienced person who knows what he is looking for is much quicker, much more appropriate, and better tailored for the victim’s situation. If you were interrogating a P.O.W. which would be more effective? to go by a list of questions in a book, or to ask questions in a dialogue between the interogator and P.O.W.? Likewise, an interview on television by Barbara Walters will be well thought out, but will still have an element of dynamic interaction. Likewise, there is no substitute for a live dialogue between a therapist and their new client. In a dynamic evaluations, the entire procedure is a skill. However, there are several areas that will be probed.


· For instance, "Have you ever lost time?" The counsellor is careful not to define time, and will see how many examples the person provides. If the person doesn’t provide examples, the counsellor might say,
"By losing time I mean to look at the clock at 9 o’clock and the next thing you realize is that its 4 o’clock." During periods of boredom or extreme concentration most people will lose track of time, but in the case of multiples they often have frequent lost periods of time. However, we want to remind the reader that back-up amnesia (you forget that you forgot) will cover much of the time lost.
· "Do you remember calling yourself other names or having other people call you other names?"
· Another area that can be probed are questions around depersonalization and derealization, such as "Have you ever had the feeling you were looking at someone else in your place [or at yourself from a distance]?"
· Another area is to ask specific questions about their family history, such as "Tell me about the first five years of your life, the significant things you remember such as your home life, your friends, your relatives, and starting to school. Be very thorough and give examples of how you interacted with the important people in your life." This is to determine how fragmented their memories are. The Illuminati are trying to give people cover memories but these cover histories are still not as tight and real as most people’s.
· "When do your memories become continous?"
· Inquiries can be made to see if the person has been connected to any of the groups who were exposed in Vol. 2 or any of the bloodlines exposed in Vol. 1. "Did anyone in your family ever belong to a government agency, or the Freemasons?" "Do you know your family’s background or genealogy?"
· "Do you sometimes hear voices in your head, or does someone answer you when you talk out loud when alone?" Such questions are so direct that the host alter may deflect them, rather than open up.
· "Are there certain times of the year which feel unsafe for you?"


Some of the better therapists, when they suspect MPD, like to make their initial question and answer session lengthy, in order to wear the host alter down and make switching a sure thing. An alter system can prevent switching over a short period, but over a several hour session, the skilled therapist will work with the system enough that switches will begin to occur. After getting some history from the client, the skilled therapist can teach the client how to put memories on a screen and then can go back to a significant early point in the person’s life and begin working dynamically with the event.

Page 341

NAME ___________________________________________________

Address ___________________________________________________

Fill in circle on items that pertain to you

o Abused as a child
o Adopted
o A failure
o Anxiety attacks
o Army brat
o Auto accident
o Bad habits
o Black & white thinking
o Blackouts
o Class President
o Compulsive activities & behaviors
o Depressed
o Erotic dancer
o Ex-member of a cult
o Extrovert
o Feelings of being choked
o Feelings of being isolated
o Forgetful
o Flashbacks
o Genius in family
o Good grades in school
o Great faith in God
o Have a twin
o Have an imaginary playmate
o Have several close non-sexual friends of the opposite sex.
o Headaches
o Inability to believe in God
o Insomnia
o Intelligent
o Interest in the occult
o Irrational anger
o Knew what you were going to be as a child
o Little trust in other people
o Love Disney movies
o Love Star Wars
o Love to collect (or hoard)
o Loving
o Minister for a father (or mother)
o Moody
o Multiple Sclerosis
o Never dishonest
o Nightmares
o Panic attacks
o Participant in a religion
o Perfect father
o Phobias
o Physically attacked
o Premature sexual development
o Restlessness
o Rich parents
o Secretive
o Serious Health problems
o Single
o Skipped school
o Strange clothes in closet
o Strange pains with no explanation
o Strange voices
o Sudden attitude changes
o Supernatural experiences
o Tonsillectomy, emergency
o Tried narcotics
o Trouble learning in school
o UFO abductions
o Unable to enjoy sex
o Unexplainable things in personal life
o Visions
o Very vigilant
o Work for the Government

Page 342 ...

FEAR, how to handle

Fear can be triggered by senses, such as smelling smoke. There is a powerful spiritual dimension that works with the mental dynamics. Thoughts are powerful things, if -thoughts of fear are allowed to take root they will grow and spread. The spirit of Fear paralyzes many victims and many support team members from dealing with what needs to be done. Fear can be compared to dandelions in a yard, they spring up everywhere and they are so hard to weed out and to dig up by the roots. Fear clouds the mind of person, so that the higher areas of thinking shut down. Before long, the victim of fear is making unwise decisions and becoming a wimp. One of the best reasons for a person to dump their fear is that the enemy watches for fear and tries to give exactly that thing that the person fears. The fear becomes a magnet attacting the very thing that the fearful person is dreading. (The abusers are trained to key in & identify fears.) The Spirit of the Lord brings boldness and a sound mind (cf. 2 TIM 1:7), but the Spirit of Fear brings a curse. Fear has at its foundation, the preservation of life. But we are warned in scripture that if we attempt to save our life we will lose it, but if we give to God what we can not keep to gain what we cannot lose, then we have made a wise choice. In other -words, fear has at its foundation death. The ancient wisdom of Prov. 18:2 1 says, "Death and life are in the power of the tongue; and they that love it shall eat the fruit thereof." Some people choose death and call in the spirits that support an agenda of death. Fear is on that death team. Fear creates a mental bondage. Fear is often the underlying reason behind many of our bondages, such as cigarettes, drugs, overeating, and stealing. People think, "If I don’t do this, then such and such will happen to me." "If I don’t steal, I’ll starve." "If I don’t do drugs, I won’t be able to mellow out and face life." "If I don’t smoke cigarettes, I won’t stay calm and thin."

Secular therapists do not want to hear that fear is a spiritual problem. But recognition that it is a spiritual problem is important, because the answers to fear which is hope and trust are spiritual answers. What gave the shepherd boy David the courage to face Goliath without fear? Was it because he was hypnotically worked on by a therapist? Did he visualize and through self-hypnosis convince himself that he could beat Goliath? No, he defeated Goliath because he had a spiritual reason to confront Goliath, "...For who is this uncircumcised Philistine, that he should defy the armies of the living God." 2 SAM 17:26

The cold hard facts of the matter is that Fear is a lack of trust in God. God certainly cuts us a great deal of slack. But if you are "in Christ" you are in His protection, and He has promised that "I will never leave or forsake you." HEB 13:5 Doubts about God lead to fears. Because fear is a lack of faith, Fear opens a portal, a legal foothold for Satan to bring what we fear into our life. God must respect this free will choice on our part to doubt His grace. God can spiritually protect us, but when we fear, we remove by our own free will God’s protection because we have called into question His Word. We can see this spiritual law working clear back in the oldest book of the Bible, Job 3:5, "For the thing which I greatly feared is come upon me, and that which I was afraid of is come unto me." When Job feared, Satan used that to go before God and petition for the right to torment Job in those ways. God was only respecting Job’s freedom of choice, when He allowed Satan to torment Job. But God did turn that negative into a positive, because even though Job had some fear, he was a righteous man. Each person must resolve not to be in bondage to fear again. It is one thing to be have foresights and concerns, but when we speak of fear, we are speaking of when the survival part of the brain clicks in, and the higher parts of the brain start shutting down. Understanding how deeply God wants to help us, the magnitude of His abilities & promises to help us, will help us refuse the Spirit of Fear.

Page 343 ...

FEAR, what f. issues do victims have? (f. is an initial issue for victims)

Traumas are applied as a base to lay in the programming. They work because of the victim’s fear. The more types of programming, the more types of fear. Victims, who have the older programming or excessive programming will exhibit more phobias than the normal person. Victims of mind-control will, for instance, often fear water (drowning tortures), heights (torture over cliffs, & down wells), fire (fire tortures & traum-as), noises (from programming tortures), black birds (from their programming significance), red kool-aid (from ritual programming events), etc. The victim must also fear their abusers. These fears concern issues such as: being reaccessed, being reprogrammed, receiving a traitor’s death, losing someone close as punishment, being publicly defamed & losing their occupation. The victim will quite often fear losing the approval or "love" of the abuser if he/she faces the truth about the abuse. The victim will also fear their own mind: the fear of the unknown, the fear of knowing the truth, the fear that they won’t differentiate between tricks, cover programs, false memories laid in by programming and what actually happened, and the fear of the never ending pain. The victim’s alters who want to move toward health will fear the internal programs, the mazes, the vortices, the traps in the mind, as well as alters who are abusive to the body & alters who have internalized the roles of the abusers, such as judge alters. The victim will also fear the heavy demonization that controls their lives, as well as experiencing the heavy fears that the demons instill within them. The victim will fear their support team, because they have only experienced betrayal from their past significant people. The victim will fear that he will not be believed, that he will not be loved, that he will express too much fear, anger, or strange happenings and be rejected. He may even fear that the therapist will lock him up if the truth comes out. Because of the way a system of alters is created, the front alters may be able to dissociate from some of these fears, & put on a very good front. Once the therapist scratches below the surface, he will uncover lots of unresolved issues & tidal waves of fear that roll through a system of alters. Many victims of mind-control fear there is no hope. This fear incapacitates them. This fear has been developed in the victim’s mind by programming scenarios where the Network makes the slave feel they are always being watched, and that any thought or action of betrayal will be immediately known by the abusers. FEAR robs the victim of moving toward freedom, working on issues, learning from their internal world, working with their support team in a positive manner, and of enjoying life. Perhaps the largest thing FEAR robs from victims is HOPE. While God & His perfect love cast out fear, fear has a way of driving away the work of God in a person’s life, incl. an unhealthy fear of God. Fear is the opposite of faith & trust in God. To deny one’s problems does not equal faith. Neither fear of problems, nor denial of problems is faith. Both are a lack of faith. Faith means to believe that there are answers and to continue pressing on until answers arrive or are discovered. Faith is directly connected to our trust that God is good and will reward good things to His creation. God will prove Himself to those who trust Him. "Oh, taste the Lord and know that He is good." In the previous article fear was dealt with as a spiritual issue, which it is primarily. However, it can be treated from other angles too. For instance, the book Kicking the Fear Habit by Manuel J. Smith (Dial Press, NY:NY, 1977) treats fear as a Behavior Mod, problem.

Page 344 ...

1. ASSOCIATIONS with BAD MEMORIES (TRIGGERS) which could include fear of: water, heights, fire, noises, animals, foods.

2. Things the ABUSERS might do, which could include the fear of: rejection, reprisals, reaccessing, and reprogramming.

3. Things the VICTIM will do to him or her self, which could include: falling into internal mind----traps, failing to get the truth, finding out the truth, never getting rid of the pain or guilt, having to be subjected

to demons, having to go into the unknown.

4. the SUPERNATURAL, which could include: Almighty God, demons, aliens, & what they consider to be their destiny.

5. the FUTURE, which could include: the coming New World Order, that there is no hope, that there are no answers, & the fear of an alien takeover.

6. the SUPPORT TEAM, which could include: the fear of not being believed, the fear of not being understood in the complexity of a programmed multiple, the fear of betrayal, the fear of rejection, and the
fear of hurting others.


1. INCAPACITATES the Victim to work on issues.

2. MAKES IT DIFFICULT for the support team.

3. ROBS the victim of the joys and pleasures of life.

FEAR interlocks with many other issues that will be discussed in this book. It is a pervasive problem that interlocks with many other issues. It is not a single issue that can be easily cast out like a trick knot that can be undone by a clever pull, but is a serious series of emotional knots that will take persistent undoing. There are so many fear issues, that this is one reason it is impera-tive to get the victim to a safe place to reduce their fears to a working level. Along that line, a safe place is best which has the minimum of fear triggers in their life. Sometimes it is helpful for clients to understand the dynamics of fear. There are fear reduc-tion therapies that can be applied to specific phobias which may allow the victim to function freer.

Page 345 ...


"How can I get better?" It’s the common question. Even deeper is the question, "Can I get better?" There are plenty of people who are willing to offer false hopes. If we are to discuss HOPE, we must also be willing to be honest and frank, and not offer placebos. Victims of mind-control have been lied to --enough, they don’t need to be given false hopes. There are two types of mind-control victims, those who have their humaness totally snuffed out and are simply robots that function in order to survive, and those who have a tiny spark of their original life still tucked away somewhere within themselves. For us that tiny spark or original humaness would show itself when we secretly prayed to God that he would save the victims we were assigned to program. We gave tiny mustard seeds to those that we helped program in hopes that that mustard seed of faith would free them some day. We tried to weaken the programming with those who were strong minded enough to possibly break free someday. We did our job, but quietly within us, was still a spark of humaness (or one can also call it hope). It is that spark of hope that the Illuminati try so hard to snatch. If they can accomplish killing that residual spark of hope, then they will work hard to keep their victim alive, because they know that they now have a robot. The humaness (the hope) has died, or at best is totally apathetic. The child himself becomes apathetic, and quits looking for hope. It only functions in order to survive. In our experience in the Illuminati, there is no doubt that God was there with some children. Most everyone is aware that Jesus Christ came to destroy the works of the devil (1 JN 3:18). Our life is testimony that the power of Christ to perform miracles is not dead, no matter how much the Illuminati scoff at it. With some children it seemed God had drawn a line, and Satan could not go past that line. Some child victims had as much as three God-given guardian angels. God has kept a spark of hope alive in some of the mind-control victims out there, in spite of the incredible amount of sophisticated torture and mind-control that they have had to endure. Our system would define hope for a mind-control victim this way: hope is when a piece of the child has not sold out to the Illuminati. God will take that piece and even though the victim is in darkness, God will take that spark of life and He will work with it. If there is any light, God is in a position to raise that light up. When God brings a person into a victim’s life who sincerely cares, and loves and is committed to helping the victim, somehow an appreciation for that love and committment reaches down deep into the person’s mind, and helps that spark of hope grow into a flame. Even though the victim does not understand what is happening, they will grab ahold of that help with a strangle hold. The person who wants to help can encourage the victim to tap into that survivor instinct, that strength that they have to survive, that survivor spirit that they had to have to endure the brutal trauma-based mind-control, and apply that spirit of survival to their fight for freedom. Go back to the hope that kept them alive. Without hope, the victim is not going to fight the pain and the programming to get free. The victim has come from a world with little hope. If the victim can not consciously see hope, the support person can keep their hope safe for them, and help them to see that there is a tunnel and the tunnel has a light at the end of the tunnel. We can pray that God will reveal to us the roots of our slavery. We can pray that Almighty God’s spirit would breathe the life-giving medicine of His Spirit of Life into us.

Page 346 ...

We know that God can seem awfully distant and aloof. We know the fear that comes from looking in the mirror and on one hand seeing an old person and on the other seeing a young person. Reality seems such a drag. All the trivial headaches add up to one big pot that is boiling over. This is where a prayer for an inner transformation of joy can bless a person. The realization that God does care, can lift a great deal of the burdens of reality. This is where a walk out in the sunshine through a park, where we experience the beauty of creation can remind us that life does contain many beautiful things. If a person is in a pitch black room, groping for the door handle in total darkness, it is very easy to panic and believe that one will never get out. Once the person has reached the door handle, even though they do not have it opened, there is a way for that door to open. If the mind-control victim has reached someone who cares and understands how to help them, then they have reached befudled therapist is going to help them. There is a creative power for good in this universe, call it what you want, but know that this power comes from a good Creator that loved His creation, and that He has put time limits on how long evil can exist. There is coming a time when evil will be abolished. Until that time we can know that Almighty God has the power to turn any evil into good, and one of the proofs of this is the life, death and resurrection of Christ. God has high hopes for us. His disciples were so excited about this good news, they were willing to die for it. We are excited about giving hope to others, enough that we are also willing to pay that final price. that door knob. They need to hang on and know that when that door swings open, it will surprise everyone. The door seems stuck, but it can open. When we are in the dark, let us call out to the God of Comfort who can see us in the dark. A victim of mind-control when he or she regains freedom has a noble and powerful ministry available to them. Who else can listen to and look at another survivor of mind-control abuse and convey deep empathy without saying a word. God has great things that He wants to do with your future. We must not let the enemy steal our hope, as he has tried so hard to do over the years. We spoke up before a conference of therapists and gave our testimony that Jesus Christ brought us freedom. We want to encourage therapists to see that a victim needs to have a hope that a power stronger than themselves and stronger than the

Page 347 ...


Does the client have?

a. dissociative behavior (see checklist pg.
b. intrusive thoughts
c. physical complaints with no medical reasons
d. relatives in any intelligence organization
e. relatives associated with perpetrator groups (see list Vol. 2 pg.) -------- IF NO TO ALL OF THESE, LOOK F0R SOMETHING ELSE
f. memory lapses unexplained by ordinary forgetfulness
g. UFO or alien experiences
h. the presence of childhood trauma’s in one’s life
i. feelings like there is more than one person (or voice) inside


Has the client?

a. ever lost time
b. found strange items in their closet
c. heard words by others associated with mind control
d. uncontrollable behavior despite strong efforts to control it
e. relatives who belong to Illuminati or elite bloodlines
f. unexplainable scars (when examined under a black light)
g. heard voices
h. a feeling of being possessed by some power, or a living, dead or evil person.
i. unexplainable bruises
j. been adopted, lived in a foster home or orphanage

Are there?

a. strange reactions by what seem to be total strangers
b. unexplainalbe fluctuations of skills and abilities
c. intelligent parents with a wide disparity of abilities between them & the client
d. times the client feels suicidal


Is the client?

a. missing most of his/her childhood memories
b. engaged in espionage, professional sports, exotic dancing, psychic activities,
Delta forces or any other profession that might link the victim to mind-control
c. a member of the Catholic Church, Jehovah's Witnesses, Mormons or
Charismatic Movement


Suspect Total Mind-Control & Implement Actions for Mind Control

Page 348 ...

The issue of insomnia is a major issue in terms of deprogramming. Therapists have typically neglected the impact that lack of sleep has on the victim, as well as the positive impact a well-thought out program to provide sleep & to create new improved sleep habits. We can’t tell you what will work for you, we can only tell you what has worked for others. A good sleep will help counter the effects of mind-control, unfortunately good sleep is a rare commodity for victims of trauma-based mind-control. It is very common for their support person to have to hold them and comfort them night after night as the programming breaks down & the horrible memories begin surfacing. Good sleep will also have a domino effect on improving other areas of your life, such as personal relationships and productivity. Victims of mind-control have a terrible time getting decent amounts of sleep. The reasons for this are many, including heavy programming not to sleep more than 3 hrs/night, body pains, chemical imbalances, anxiety, panic attacks, & surfacing memories. For such a difficult problem, the most powerful over the counter medicine that some victims have successfully used is a combination of ibuprofen and Chlorpheniramine Maleate. Ipuprofen can be obtained in - 200 mg. caplets and Chlorpheniramine Maleate can be obtained in 4 mg. tablets (or 8 mg.-time release tablets.) The combination of 400 mg. of Ibuprofen with 6 mg. of Chiorpheniramine Maleate taken together is the most powerful (yet surprisingly gentle for the power it packs) medicine we know of. Those who have used this found that after a period of time, like with all drugs the effects begin to wane, and they would up the dosage slightly. Perhaps what is most effective program over the long haul is to have more than one method to get a good night sleep, and to intermix the various methods so they all remain viable and healthy methods. The liver produces lysozyme to protect itself against all foreign chemicals. The increasing presence of lysozyme enzymes is how the body increasingly destroys the effectiveness of any foreign chemical. The high rates of lysozymes in the liver are very hard on it. After about 3 weeks, a person taking a chemical has pushed the liver to about the maximum that is prudent. The person must then back-off from the chemical intake in a slow withdrawal lest they trigger a reaction in the body-mind. However, the extreme sleep problems that victims of mind-control have, usually seem minor to the side-affects of drugs to help them sleep. Medical science warns that a long-term use of any drug for insomnia will eventually intensify the problem it initially cures. This is why we advocate an attack against insomnia from several different directions, and that the different solutions be intermixed at different intervals. A prudent practice is to consult a reference book such as Drug Handbook (pub. by Springhouse Corp.) in order to find out the interactions, the nursing considerations, and the contraindications of a particular drug. Pregnant women are especially limited in what they can and can’t take. The therapist and the support persons should be aware that the victim may well be programmed not to accept any meds, and it is counterproductive to scare the victim about the dangers of drugs, because that will only play into the fears that are already there. People react differently to meds and the goal is to calmly and wisely find what works for the victim without increasing their programmed resistance. In terms of herbs, Calms Forte (valerian, aka garden heliotrope) can be helpful to relax a victim. Valerian even comes

Page 349 ...

in tea-bags. Some of the over-the-counter newer sleep meds are gentle, and have been effective for some victims. The advantages of taking something that induces a mild gentle (not drugged) sleep state is that it gives the victim a chance to recuperate and to begin to pull out of what’s called the "alpha state" that their minds constantly exist in. An alcohol-induced sleep prevents REM sleep from occurring, and some of the symptoms of hangovers are simply the direct result of REM deprivation. (See below where REM sleep is discussed.) Bensodiazepines such as Valium are sleep-inducing drugs that should be given under a doctor’s supervision. They will only provide a short term solution, but again as many victims of mind-control will agree, the severity of the crisis is often such that such meds are welcome even if they are only going to be temporary relief. Any short R-and-R is better than no R-and-R in the battle for freedom. The body produces it own chemicals to induce sleep. These are released by the body is relation to how much physical work the body does. A good day of hard physical work will certainly assist in the body chemically putting its own brain to sleep. When the victim remains in their normal highly aroused state of fear, with its high production of endorphins) it is hard for the body to relax and sleep. Young or physically active victims of mind-control can do aerobic exercises to counter the chemical arousals in their bodies, to improve their bodies’ natural ability to sleep. This is one of the safest long term approaches, if the recovering victim has the physical makeup to safely exercise. The victim should try and pick a comfortable position to sleep in, because the less one moves around in sleep the less the brain is stimulated and the better one sleeps. If no position is comfortable, pick the best choice, and lay as quiet as possible. The fear of insomnia is as dangerous as other fears in preventing sleep. Self-acceptance and acceptance of life are positive ways to relax better and to get to sleep. The support person can talk to the victim prior to the time they retire and let the victim experience acceptance and love. This will encourage the victim to let their mind dwell on unconditional self-acceptance, which will encourage the mind to relax and sleep well. A great deal of mischief can happen during sleep hours. Cult-loyal alters will wait until the other alters have gone to sleep, and then they will snatch the body and try to contact their master, or "go home" to their master. As the trauma memories surface, hundreds of new dissociated pieces of the mind float to the surface. If a young new child alter finds itself in a strange environment, their instinct is to run. If the support person is there to simply say, "its O.K., everything’s going to be O.K., relax...", then the support person may greatly prevent small alters from running out of the house as they look for something safe, and actually getting the system into trouble. A great deal of therapy can actually be done at night, and in relation to the sleep state. This again is an area that is greatly missed by the traditional hour at the therapist. In fact, experience has shown that most DID clients who initially go into therapy will not open up and explain to the therapist why they get poor sleep. The therapist needs to be competent enough to draw out this information. Initially, before deprogramming, the victim will most likely be able to get to sleep, but will sleep only three hours, and will have reoccurring "nightmares" and flashbacks. Once the victim begins deprogramming and working on issues, they will often like to sleep in because they sleep best in the early morning hours. Again, we have seen this to be common among recovering victims of mind-control all over the U.S. Many alter systems have a few alters who specialize in sleeping well. For instance,

Page 350 ...

Presidential models as they fly to foreign countries to deliver messages may have an alter who is proficient at sleeping during the flight. During time periods when good sleep is needed, the system may be in a position to pull up alters that sleep well and let them hold the body, so that the body gets rested. During periods of intense deprogramming it is good for the system to get good sleep. Poor sleep weakens the victim physically and mentally. Poor sleep inhibits the problem-solving abilities of the mind, which is the very thing that victims need to resist the handlers. It will also over a period of time deteriorate the victim’s health, (but understand the people who use slaves could care less about their health, they often use people like they would a straw from a fast food restaurant. The handlers also know that a healthy slave means a higher risk that the slave will rebel.) Normally, a sleeping person goes through 5 sleep patterns (called stages) in sequence and then the sleeping patterns repeat themselves (although stage 4 may drop out after the first cycle, and the person goes through the progressively deeper stages of sleep 1-2-3-5.)

These stages are

STAGE 1: about 5 minutes
STAGE 2: the first stage of deep relaxation, lasts about 45-50 minutes.
STAGE 3: a short stage where the brain waves slow down
STAGE 4: the stage where the brain produces delta waves, sleep walking and nightmares occur in this stage.
STAGE 5: REM (rapid-eye-movement) sleep, most normal dreams occur during this time, which in a normal sleep pattern would last 15-30 minutes, the body doesn’t move, but there may be sexual arousal during this period of sleep, the muscles in the ear act as if they are listening intently. The REM dreams are mainly a right-brain product. The mind protects the body from acting out the dreams, by shutting down the body. Knowing this will help the victim realize that when they are thrashing about in a memory in bed, they are not in a REM sleep dream.

This process will then recycle once or twice again as the night proceeds. Interestingly, the mind develops sleep habits, just as it develops habits for other habitual tasks. If a person develops poor sleep habits as a fretful child sleeper they tend to carry these habits with them into adulthood. This means that victims of mind-control are having to break long-term habits. Readers can refer to what Fritz wrote on ‘‘cognitive demon processes’’ in Chapter 4 in order to understand how the mind develops relationships in its "cognitive demon processes in order to relegate repeated tasks to unconscious mental processes (habits). The therapist may also have to do some work around fear of sleep. Victims of trauma-based mind control are very fearful to lose control of their minds by going to sleep, and they have a fear of nightmares and other horrible things, such as ghosts appearing etc., that all add up to create a terrible fear of sleep. The victim wants to remain vigilant to protect themselves against whatever might happen at night. This is why an alert support person is needed in the vicinity to help calm the victim, so they can relax at night from their fear that something terrible is going to happen. This also means the support person must be vigilant during the night to help protect the victim. If the victim can begin to break down the irrational automatic thought processes that have been programmed into the mind, by using and strengthening the rational logical parts of the mind, they can begin to regain control over their own lives. Automatic thoughts that have been programmed into the non-rational part of the mind will attempt to control the mind. Gradually, the hierarchy of irrational thought processes will be challenged and their power taken away. This will give the

Page 351 ...

mind a chance to regain its natural composure, and will help the victim regain their own mind so that they can relax and begin to have healthy sleep habits. The use of journals, where the rational parts of the mind can be brought to bear on the irrational thought processes, can be a help in regaining self-control. This will also help the victim regain the ability to have proper sleep. Some victims have had success in reducing their mental stress by journaling for 30 minutes prior to attempting to sleep. Worrying doesn’t resolve itself if left to rattle around in the brain unattached to anything solid, but once our worries are put onto paper, they have been dragged through the rational part of the brain and can be organized and challenged. When disturbing thoughts surface, the outline that can be used for journaling is this:

• What are the WHO, WHAT, WHERE & WHY, & HOW?
• What are RATIONAL THOUGHTS ASSOCIATED with these thoughts?
• What are the FEELINGS ASSOCIATED with these thoughts?

WHERE did these thoughts come from?

One little known fact, is that the fear of not being able to sleep can create such a strong fear pattern that a five-second arousal during the night, that would normally not threaten a person’s sleep, causes the fearful person to wake up and stay awake. If you do wake up and are fearful of not sleeping (or fearful of going to sleep)--the best advice is to leave your room, do some other quiet activity until you feel sleepy again and then go back to sleep. Don’t lay in bed and allow your mind to fuss and to internally fume. This will create a negative association in the mind between the bed and fussing and fuming in fear of sleeplessness, and will only aggravate the long term situation. Dealing with spiritual problems, not just surface issues but deep issues will also help a person’s sleep. Learning to let go of issues is also beneficial.

L-Tryptophan is an amino acid that aids the brain in the manufacture of serotonin, and serotonin is used by the brain to reduce the brain’s feeling of stress. Bedtime fats and milk actually reduce the amount of L-Tryptophan in the brain. Food does cause blood to go to the abdomen, and reduces blood in the brain. Vitamin E causes restlessness in some people if eaten within short periods before sleep. Saltine crackers have been found to be the overall best snack to encourage L-Tryptophan levels. Each individual is a complex array of processes. It may be that a nice snack calms a person down, even though it subtracts from the L-Tryptophan level. In review, we have suggested a multi-pronged assault on insomnia. This assault can take the form of: direct temporary drug intervention by over the counter or prescribed meds, specific tasks that a support person can perform before & during the sleep period to help the victim deal with a variety of issues, specific tasks that the victim can perform spiritually, in terms of diet, in terms of attitudes, in terms of dealing with internal fears, in terms of which alters sleep and which stand guard, in how to journal so that issues are resolved for the mind to rationally relax, and a number of other positive suggestions. If these suggestions are followed in a concerted fashion, they will reduce the problems with insomnia, and help the victim destroy one more aspect of the mind-control.

Page 352
This artwork by author Cisco Wheeler from the 1980's portrays images that came when we began to get parts of a memory protected by demons. In the centre of the picture is a tree upon which the child is connected. The tree is a standard programming image upon which programs are attached. The tree itself has strong roots, and feels like death. The mind wants to go further but the demonic comes to the foreground and blocks the memory.
This author's artwork shows how boxed in a victim feels. Observe that the house and the environment is trapped in a girl which feels like a fence boxing the trauma-based mind-control in. The house is breaking up. Things are drawn shattered and in fear. The light would like to come out but it is blocked by spiritual darkness. The home is shattered, and is off any foundation, just like most typical abusive family situationsare where such mind-control takes place

Page 353 ...

Multiplicity, understanding

When an entire alter system is looked at, it appears very much like a city of people. A city of people will divide itself into different tasks. If a city lacks a plumber, someone will fill that nitch. If a city lacks a judge, someone will fill that nitch. Joe may know everything about Charlie, but Charlie may know little or nothing about Joe. Sue and Sally may converse and share their lives with each other. Some people in a city will know each other well, know of someone else, but by and large most people will be strangers. An altar system is structured. In many countries, such as Russia, a city is also very structured. The people do not change jobs very frequently. A therapist may observe a particular job and behavior pattern of an alter and forty years later observe the same behavior. Alter systems have families of alters and generations of alters, just like a city of people would have families and several generations. In fact, as most readers already realize, a structured multiple will have teachers, libraries, castles, rivers, houses, jails, airports (runways) and many other things in their internal worlds that correspond to what a city would also have. If an alter itself could be examined under these two authors’ "psychological-processes microscope", it would be possible to see how an individual alter before therapy is a complex set of mental processes that responds to life- as it was designed. After therapy, the alter begins to reflect some mental processes that the person’s brain has chosen to incorporate on its own. If the brain is thought of as a machine, it is a machine that has billions of pieces and is incredibly intricate in its capabilities and design. The brain makes complex machines look very simple in comparison. If survival of the mind means compartmentalizing trauma memories so that these memories don’t interfere with everyday life, the mind is quite capable of the task. It is quite capable of attaching memories and trained behavior patterns and habits to those dissociated parts of the mind. The programmers work with the mind. They program alters according to their natural bent during the trauma process. In order to function, the brain automatically develops several items. First, the brain develops K-lines of processes (which are called habits). The brain also develops a self-image(s). When the mind is fractured, each piece can be given its own self-image and its own habits. But it is important not to lose track of the larger picture. Just like a person in a city is not an island unto himself, an alter is part of a system. A person in a city may find himself called for jury duty, drafted, taxed, monitored, spied upon, and other things. Likewise, an alter will have to function within the larger context of the alter system and its programming. Even the front alters will be tainted in how they perform in their daily lives by the side effects of multiplicity and their own programming. A multiple will not know anything but the world that they have been programmed to see and the role they have been programmed to function in. But therapy will begin to break down the programming. Yes, alters can learn and can change. The mind can change the programmed "habits" of action and thoughts of an alter, just like it can change the habits of any person. The difficulty lies in the fact that habits take time to change unless hypnosis is used to by-pass the mind’s natural build-in mechanisms of stability. An alter can learn a new behavior. The therapist should know the history of an alter so that he or she knows the platform and scripts that the alter works under. Then the therapist can change the way

Page 354 ...

that alter works within their role. For instance, a sexual alter can be given a new way of looking at sexual boundaries so that the alter changes its behavior within that sexual role. In other words, modify a habit of thought or action, rather than rebuilding from scratch. "You can take the boy out of the farm, but you can’t take the farm out of the boy", is a common expression about how hard it is to completely remake the thinking of a person. It will be difficult to remake the thinking of an alter. The foundation (the platform) upon which they were created will continue to serve as the framework of that alter. Either that framework is painstakingly collapsed by joining (integrating) that part with another part that it was associated with, or the framework is built upon to change the ways that alters acts and thinks. To make an analogy, it is harder to get a man or woman to quit thinking like a man or woman, than to recognize a behavior and modify their behavior in more productive direction. This is what successful marriage counselors are doing, for instance in the book Men are from Mars, Women are from Venus. Perhaps someday someone will write a book Gatekeepers are from Uranus, and Mothers of Darkness are from Saturn. Rainbows are important, for many alters only live over the rainbow in a world of make believe. These alters were created with a foundation of imagination and psychosis. In this case, these alters need deep therapy. They live in trance, and it is silly for Christians to think that these alters should not have hypnotic help, when their thinking is always hypnotic thinking. Some alters because they are a special purpose alter come out and take the body with "exaggerated" behavior--they are very shy, or very aggressive, etc. It makes only good sense that if a particular alter is dangerous, the people who live around the multiple should identify how that dangerous alter is triggered and then refrain from triggering it.

Page 355 ...

Panic attacks, suggestions

Panic is when one loses control of one’s fear. The brain must struggle to regain control, so that reason prevails rather than an out-of-control response. During a panic attack, the mind-body-and soul are all living in the panic attack. The therapist might experience the client having a panic attack by a series of numerous repeated calls. The victim might experience a panic attack as the need to cut themselves to feel pain to prove to themselves that they are real. For recovering victims of trauma-based mind-control, panic attacks bubble up into the conscious mind on their own. They may even surface during the dream state. So what do you do? If the panic surfaces, remind yourself that it has always been there, nothing has changed, its just surfaced into the conscious mind. Relax, its always been there, waiting to be triggered or pulled to the surface. Nothing has changed but a person’s awareness of the panic. Next, remind yourself that panic represents knowledge and that knowledge represents understanding. Panic represents an awareness, whether physical or mental, that something has taken place. If we want to understand that awareness, we can’t stand in it. We must encompass that panic. We must take our control back. We don’t run from it, we address it. If we address the situation, we stand a better chance not to reshatter. How can we address the situation? If it is a memory, put it up on a screen. (Go to the section on avoidance of abreactions.) If the panic concerns a real life situation, the mind must be prepared that anytime an emergency triggers panic, that the rational mind must be given back its driver’s seat. The mind should be trained to give the rational part of the mind control, if panic begins. This is the training of the mind. Perhaps a logical alter can be found to hold the body during such times, while others work with that logical alter to help keep things calm. If one knows that one will be approaching a situation in life that will panic certain alters, place them in protective sheltered rooms, or put them to sleep. In fact, fear of an upcoming situation can be a trigger for a panic attack. Support persons need to realize that panic attacks which begin with one alter can spread through a system. An activity that a front alter thinks is going to be fun, may trigger panic in little child alters. The panic will be so overwhelming as it leaks back into the awareness of the front alter, that it distracts from the fun of the activity. Panic is not always programming going off. Panic attacks commonly occur when the victim finds out that they are a multiple, and when they have to face "You mean someone abused me?", "You mean someone carried out mind-control on me?" Another aspect of panic, is that the alter which is panicked may likely switch. One of the common tricks of deeper alters and internal programmers, is to panic an alter with coded memories that surface upon a code being thought internally. This is an easy way to move alters that are holding the body out of the way, when deeper cult alters want out.

On the flip side, a good Illuminati programmer never allows the slave to have uncontrolled panic. He will allow controlled panic. The programmer will watch for splits from panic, because the survival fear that goes with such splits will make a good warrior alters for ceremonies.

Page 356 ...

Understanding programming


It almost goes without saying that the commitment by the members of the support team (therapist, guard, deliverance minister, friend, etc.) has to be that the victim is the center of concern, and the center of importance. We of the support team must endeavor to make the cure less painful to the victim than the problem. A Christ-like commitment to lay down one’s own life for another person needs to be felt. This does not mean that the support team must destroy themselves to save the victim, on the contrary, by being Christ-like and employing their skills the members of the support team can find great joy, satisfaction and purpose in life. Programming has gone on for centuries, and it’s only been in the last few years that significant progress has been made to deprogram, so let’s not lose hope just because the evil side continues to progress.


In dealing with mind control as a support team member it is important that you understand there is a variety of mind-control techniques, for instance DID, implants, and skull manipulation. Because there is such a wide-variety to mind-control and programming, nothing is routine in delivering a person from mind-control. For many years, due to the heavy infiltration within the fields of psychiatry and psychology much of the information put out in this area has been disinformation. The support team needs to erase any myths they have picked up from the mainstream of these professions, and focus on what they discover from the client. Hopefully, some of the guidelines and criteria provided in our 3 books on mind-control, especially this section, will be helpful to obtain the correct diagnosis. When a therapist has used only one approach and reports consistently getting 100% success-rates, that may be a tip-off that this therapist (or minister) is exaggerating his/her success rate. Until you can watch a victim 24 hours a day, 365 days out of a year for several years, and you can confidently say the person has fully integrated and has no alters working on the astral plane, nor any alters involved in any other way with the controllers, then there is no sure way to pronounce a victim fully recovered from the mind-control. And even then, if the victim has implants, it may simply mean that the implants are temporarily not being used. When the reader has studied this book and the Vol. 2, he will have discovered that some mind control is done via a variety of techniques such as: ELF waves, some by implants, some by genetics, some through peer pressure, some by skull manipulation as well as other techniques. Common sense will tell you that one method can not provide the solution to such varied techniques. This is why this book’s co-authors are stressing the need to assemble teams of people to work with victims. Some victims of mind-control during initial therapeutic screening have had their memories, mind control, & programming rejected as being false because it didn’t fit with what the therapist had already encountered. The victim endures a great deal of pain to have their lives and programming probed, so it is beneficial if the therapist is aware of some of the various types of mind-control and their combinations that the therapist may encounter. As the therapist picks up tell-tale signs of one particular type of programming or another, it will make it easier to understand what the overall situation might be. There are similarities between the programming of the 1940’s and ’50’s and even

Page 357 ...

into the ’60’s, but as time progressed the programming sophistication has grown by leaps and bounds. One change over the years has been the level of specialization which the programmers have developed. When a particular type of personality is identified within a child, the programming has become very specialized and sophisticated to work within the natural makeup of that mind-set. The last few decades has also seen the introduction and perfection of sophisticated mind-control technologies that allow the trauma-based mind-control to be fine-tuned and then hidden behind more obvious technologies such as implants. There seems to be a trend, at least for some types of professions, that less splitting of the mind is carried out today than was done in the ‘50’s and more fine-tuning and high-tech used. This appears to be done because it results in more stable individuals, which due to the improved superior abilities of the more modern programmers, are still just as reliably responsive to orders. The goals are to produce slaves that produce better results with less maintenance and supervision by the handler. Computers are believed to be the key to modernization. Still there are principles that define how the mind works and hopefully therapists that understand those principles can continue to discover ways to help the more recent victims.


At the lower end of the victim-caste-system are victims who are brought into this nation from South or Central America and who are programmed to be expendable slaves. They are only treated as slaves, and never experience a good life. Beautiful white women taken to Saudi Arabia at times fall into this category, where they are kept hidden in slave conditions and are as expendable as a piece of furniture. The victim may not even know who they are, they may be "Dorothy" all the way down the line. The next level are victims who are not members of the Illuminati, who are allowed to function in everyday life as common people. They suffer greatly, but often have what appears to be a common life, albeit somewhat strange to those close enough to them to notice the strangeness to their lives. These are people used as guinea pigs, as spies, as assassins, and sexual slaves. Often their abusers are branches of the government. The top level slaves are going to have their pride attached to the Illuminati. They will be allowed to share some power, they will have an elaborate belief system that makes them feel superior to those on the outside of their elite special group. They will be given peers and "twins" who are programmed like themselves to make them feel like they belong to this wonderful group which has some wonderful charismatic leader. The group will validate their identity that comes from being a member of this elite group. The leadership may wine and dine this slave. The leadership will share some power (actually delegate, they hold the final strings) with the victim. For instance, the victim may have a magic wand and a staff. The victim will be allowed to merge with the great leader through sexual rituals. The group dynamics will alleviate the guilt that an individual might develop on their own. This is the description of someone who has been part of the Illuminati hierarchy. You can expect your Illuminati victims to have pride in their elite status. You can expect them to tell you about banquets, and limousines, and masked balls. Their abuse will be covered over by manipulative love, status, and pride. The Illuminati are skilled in knowing how to cover abuse with love. The loving parent that is reported by a child to be "able to do no wrong", may well be the child’s primary abuser in the worst way. The foundation for all the "good benefits" for a hierarchy slave is PURE DECEPTION. The charismatic leader will

Page 358 ...

only be a image, a fantasy. If the victims will stop to remember the details, they were coerced on threat of the penalty of death to join the group of people they belong to, they are not allowed to really have real relationships to their sisters or brothers in the cult, and the cult’s supposed new light and deep teachings are simply a collection of ancient babblings of lost and confused people that have been repackaged as powerful new revelations. In review, it might be said that the expendable non-hierarchy mind-controlled slave is held in place without the trappings of grandeur that are given to the hierarchy victims. The Illuminati lay great stress on the victim’s joining of their own free will. Sometimes that does occur, but often the victim has been so stripped that they no longer exercise free will. You as a member of the support team can point out that the victim’s support for their abusers has been constructed on a foundation of deceit by the abusers. Rather than denying that the slave was wined and dined, show how everything was done for purposes of manipulation. Every gift came with a price tag.


The idea of consciousness vs. subconscious are difficult to describe but are fundamental to how the programming works. What mental activity is occurring in the mind of an individual? Most mental activity is unconscious. Many of our activities in life are done unconsciously. If our attention is directed somewhere else, we can perform an activity without a conscious awareness. Some mental activity surfaces from the subconscious. Day dreaming has been recognized as beneficial in a person’s well being. Delinquent teenage boys have been found to seldom daydream. The mental activity of thoughts, emotions, perceptions and memories are all embedded into the mind. The structures of the mind are built by thoughts and emotions. A chaotic jumble of impressions is organized by the mind into something cohesive and useable. Our minds fabricate a reality from our thoughts and emotions. The programmer steps into the picture and makes that reality designing a team activity. Emotions, hallucinations, moods, phobias, sensory perceptions, trances and visions are not part of cognitive conscious data-based knowledge, but are more like the ROM memory that runs a computer which is permanent and untouchable. These are important foundational structures of thinking. They lay in the subconscious. The subconscious mind is like a cess pool. The subconscious mind accepts whatever has been allowed by the mind to reach it. Once something is accepted in, the subconscious mind doesn’t evaluate it. That is why hypnosis and illusion are so powerful. Using hypnosis, the programmer can place an idea into the subconscious that would take long periods of time for the mind to naturally screen and then accept into the subconscious. Briefly described, thoughts and emotions create the mind’s reality. The programmer wants to be able to tamper with how the mind’s reality is created. The front alters, who hold the body day-to-day, will have to face the shortcomings of whoever is their system’s programmer, cult leaders, or handler. For some slaves, say for instance, Anton LaVey’s or Michael Aquino’s, their programmer is their cult leader and their handler-- all three wrapped up in one individual. The victim’s front alters will experience the shortcomings of their controller. Rather, than fight against what the mind will see and hear, the programmer will reframe it. They want the front alters to see the human aspect. They want them to see the "faults", but accept the weaknesses as a normal function of the humanness of the person. The faults are refrained as merely human frailty

Page 359 ...

and negative external circumstances. Let’s give an example:

The victim is encouraged to think: Yes, he drank, but so what? He was a social person and of course he had to drink.... Yes, he made a mistake, but it was someone else’s fault. The negatives of the programmer are refrained as natural positives by the programmer. The victim’s mind will feel very comfortable with these rationales. This is an example of how the programmer has tampered with the mind’s perception of reality. This tampering is part of the subtle hypnotic programming. Do the programmers do this type of subtle programming? Yes, it is a standard thing to place this refraining in to protect the father "Daddy" and Mother Programmer images. As Illuminati programmers, we were taught to use thoughts, emotions, comfort and discomfort to mold the mind’s reality. (The mind decides if it is in a state of comfort or discomfort. At some extreme point, the mind can do a reversal and decide that pain is pleasure. In such a reversal, the mind will move in the direction of comfort, i.e. pain. In our example, we are not describing such an extreme situation. It is quite normal for the mind to whitewash its image of an authority figure; this is an in-born natural comfort zone.) Now let’s say that a therapist wants to tamper with that programming. The therapist can attack the programming head on by saying, "Your programmer was an evil man." But this approach plays into the hands of the programmer, whose manufactured reality will resist such a head on approach. The therapist may want to use the back door approach to side step the resistance. The backdoor method prevents triggers. A backdoor approach might be:

THERAPIST: "What would you have liked to have seen in the life of [controller’s name]?

SLAVE: "I wish he would not have drank so much?"

THERAPIST: "How did that affect you?"

SLAVE: "I didn’t get taken care of."

The backdoor approach frees the victim from having to make a judgment call that the controller was right or wrong, good or evil. It makes the issue into an "I issue", "I would have liked..." The victim doesn’t have to step out too far from the mind’s comfort zone.


At the point the victim begins to fear is where the victim gives the programmer power. This is a basic principle well known by Illuminati programmers. The programming is built upon this. Some children actually intuitively grasp methods to not fear the programmer. If the child does this, the child becomes harder to program, because A Person’s POWER Ends Where FEAR Begins. At the point of powerlessness and fear, the world around the victim becomes more like a dream. Eventually, fear becomes a comfort zone for the victim. A visual representation of powerlessness is the teddy bear, who has no genitals, no hands, or feet. (The Teddy Bear finds its way into our Illustrated Guidebook. Some therapists have found the visual images of the Illustrated Guidebook helpful.) In the previous example, the victim at first will feel strange and uneasy to question their life. They are moving out of their comfort zone of simple existence into the life of choices. Many alters need help as they take their first wobbly steps toward freedom of thought and action. When FEAR enters the mind, perceptions of reality are altered. Fears can be conditioned into the mind. The programmers know how to introduce fears. FEAR taps into the death circuits of the brain and activates "death related reflexes". The programmer is like the conductor of a symphony of fears, at one point orchestrating one area, at another

Page 360 ...

point bringing another fear to a crescendo. The programmers know how the mind protects itself. The free will of the brain is orchestrated out of existence to the "tune of dependence upon the programmer". The natural flow of how the mind perceives reality is drowned out under the influence of fear. The programmer can interrupt natural perceptions of reality by introducing fear. The fear creates fragments in the mind, and denials in the mind. In the end, the victim of programming has pieces of reality that appear out of nowhere and seem unconnected and like a dream. Is fear bad? When a person is stripped of trust in God and man, where do they turn? Fear seems comfortable to the victim, who cannot say "nothing ventured, nothing gained, I’ll walk right through this situation." The instinct of the brain is to run toward its image of comfort, fear. How does the victim rise above the fear? There are ways, but they generally involve the victim getting outside help. The therapist will want to stay one step ahead of FEAR. Different people will have different kinds of fear. Males are born wanting to be protective and strong. They are designed to face the outside world and lovingly protect. The programmers break their male identity. They are stripped of it when they see that they are powerless to protect other children and powerless to protect themselves. They further feel unprotected by their mothers when they are tortured as infants. This brings in a strong sense of rejection. They know they are weak and helpless. Their in-born desire to want to lovingly protect is destroyed, because they develop the subconscious attitude that love can’t protect. Because LOVE CAN’T PROTECT, these men become hardened. At the root of their hardness, is the fear that they can’t love (accepted by the subconscious through their inability to lovingly protect) nor are they worthy of love (built in by their feeling rejected of their mom’s loving protection). Once the subconscious attitude is accepted that they can’t love nor be loved, they die emotionally. They run from emotions because of a subconscious awareness of the trauma. When men run from their emotions, they find it natural to tap into their intellect. In summary, the male is born to have strength to protect what it loves. When traumatized, the male feels helpless, and develops a fear of love and emotion. Love becomes a negative to subconsciously run from. The programmer only needs to tap into the mind’s own methods to protect itself. The mind will protect the programming much better than the programmer ever could. After FEAR is well established as a foundation, the programming team will layer in with repetition the NO TALK, NO SEE, NO HEAR messages over and over. They will repeat "DO NOTHING TO HURT THE FAMILY [family means the Illuminati, or at times another cult]." If left to its own devices, the mind has the ability to sort things out, and right itself. The programmers are fully aware of how the mind might right itself, and pull itself out of the programmer’s lies. The Illuminati teach their programmers "not to let the conscious become conscious, not to let the intellect become intellect, and not to let love become love." What this means is that what consciously happens in external reality, is not permitted to be internalized as conscious reality. The programming tricks to prevent this could fill a book, and many are mentioned in our Vol. 2 Formula book. Love becomes love when the self knows the true self. Therefore, the task of the programmer becomes to HIDE THE TRUE SELF FROM THE MIND. Some of the greatest philosophers have said that the greatest goal of life is to KNOW THYSELF. The goal of the programmer is to make sure of just the opposite, that the victim does not know themselves. They are trained in

Page 361 ...

techniques to do this.

If we understand that the programmer is trained to program the mind TO FORGET ITSELF, then of course it is clear that the therapist needs to help the victim to REMEMBER who they are.


Countless therapists and ministers have trapped mind-control victims within their programming by advising them to let bygones be bygones, let the past and the skeletons of the past be buried, forgive and forget, etc. etc. This traps most of the victim’s mind in their programming. Of course this feels safe for the front alters. After all, who wants to discover the horrors underneath them, that their mind has forgotten? It would be helpful if ministers would remember that God encourages self-examination in numerous scriptures. "Whoso loveth instruction loveth knowledge, but he that hateth reproof is brutish." PROV 12:1. "The spirit of man is the candle of the Lord searching out the innermost parts of his being." PROV 20:27 "If we would judge ourselves we should not be judged." (1 COR 11:3 1)

In other words, if we want to be more than animals, we need to examine ourselves and love to learn. It is God’s candle for a man to examine his own innermost parts. And when we find problems with ourselves, we are to deal with them, and then God won’t have to. The therapist needs to reverse what the cult has done. Give the victim his or her identity back. Equip his or her consciousness with what a person’s mind would normally be conscious of. Give the person back the intelligence that belongs to their entire mind. Equip the person with a love for God’s plan for their life and an appreciation for God’s design of things. Give the person their life back by letting them know themselves, and if possible, by letting them join into the whole person they were intended to be by the real God in heaven. Interestingly, the programming is not able to snuff out the person’s original personality entirely. The programmers prefer to work within the natural abilities of a mind. This is just good common sense. Horse trainers do the same. The trainer uses a standard bred horse which has been bred to pull carriages to pull carts & buggies, a draft horse to pull farm equipment, & a pinto to ride. If the victim has abilities, he can rightly take ownership of those abilities. It is much more likely that the programmers have suppressed many of the victims abilities in order to control them. Rather than creating the slave’s abilities, the programmers have simply exploited their natural abilities.


· to tamper with the senses: to confuse or stop the senses, make the senses feel like they are in some drugged state, to destroy one’s sense of balance, cause pain, a sense of hot or cold.
· to tamper with the spirituality of the victim, to relieve their guilt, to destroy their humanness, to get them to subscribe to occult or atheistic philosophies, to hate God, to lock demons into place,
· that are codes using alpha-numeric words, colors, music, rhymes and sounds.
· that tamper with memory, cover programs, false histories, hypnotic surgeries,
· that control with the emotions, so that they can be triggered to be happy, sad, angry, tired, guilty or afraid.
· that control actions, such as anorexic no-eat programs, no-talk programs, assassination programs, mute programs, no-cry programs, return-to-cult programs, sexual programs, specific assignment programs, suicide & self-mutilation programs, trigger other slave programs.
· that control the mind, such as memory flooding, phobias, go insane program, be confused etc.
· that control the body: such as heart rate programs, body temperature programs, to prevent helpful medicine from working programs.

For a good list of the different programs see the Universal Function Codes on page 80 of our Vol. 2 Formula book.

Page 362 ...

These programs can be triggered several ways, from both internal and external triggers. By learning that an emotion, thought, or action is a program, the victim gains conscious control over what is happening. The cue may still cause the subconscious desire to fulfill the program, but the victim is beginning to take back his/her life. It becomes harder and harder for the programs to work, when the conscious mind is aware of what they are, and the conscious mind does not want to submit. Memory work on how the program was laid in, and desensitization work will also assist the victim to regain some power.

Charting (notetaking) about everything that can be observed about the victim, will assist the support team in the long run. This is nothing more than what was done while they were being programmed. The doctors and programmers during programming expect every little detail to be charted. Charting will also assist with mapping, which is discussed later. Charting will assist the therapeutic team to build - a frame work to the puzzle they are working on. Don’t expect the victim to be able to explain their programming. The mind-control programming team has traumatized a child victim enough that by the age of 3 1/2 they will cease asking "why?" Instead they are taught that everything outside of fantasy is bad, the outside world is bad, they are only to do what they are allowed by the programming team to do. From then on, most of the victim’s alters (if not all) will lack the freedom to ask and discover the complexity of what has happened to them. As the reader has seen, programming is designed to manipulate the actions, the body, the emotions, the memory, the mind, the programming, the senses, and the spirituality of the victim. This is why we have decided to call it "total" mind-control. This type of trauma-based total mind-control will cause shattering and much damage to the soul (mind, will and emotions). The therapist will have to deal with lots of distortions and fragmentation in this area. It will cause lots of medical damage to the body, for instance weak bowel and bladder control. The medical damage can only be addressed by trained medical persons who are sensitive to the needs of a victim of mind-control. Considerable damage is done to the spiritual life of the victim, and the victim will have to take a bath in the redeeming blood of Christ’s atoning blood. Many of the words and symbols of Christianity will be difficult for the victim to hear. For instance, the words sealing, blood, and Jesus may have totally different meanings and emotional content to the victim than to non-victims. This can be worked around by experimenting with workable terminology. They will have to relearn who the real God in heaven is, rather than the cult’s imitation god that the cult talked about, as well as their misrepresentations. Finally, the support team will have to deal with whatever structured and programmed DID is present in the victim. Is it easier to see why we are advocating support teams rather than a lone individual to help the victim? If the spiritual part of the programming, which is the most secret part, which we referred to as Gamma programming in our Illust rated Guidebook, is not addressed, then complex MPD systems will not make much headway against the programming. Many complex MPD systems have worked hard for years and then give up hope due to the slow progress and the lack of any end in sight.

Page 363 ...

Other complex systems have seen dramatic results when deliverance methods freed the deeper sections from demonic bondage. The new freedom allowed them to progress on the other issues that they had gotten bogged down in and made no progress on prior to the deliverance. Obviously, not all programming is the same, it is determined by what group is programming, who their programmer is, what the dissociative abilities of the victim are, and what talents the programmers are wanting to create or exploit. Sometimes a programming cult does not get all the time they desire to carry out the programming. In this case, the programming will be limited. However, in most cases the programmers have as much access to a victim as they want, especially if both parents are in the cult. In cases where the victim does not hypnotize & dissociate easily, their systems will be far less complex. It has been correctly determined by various researchers that a person’s ability to be hypnotized is a gauge to determine how much a person will dissociate. However, front alters will be heavily programmed not to allow themselves to be hypnotized, so the gauge will not always work for determining how much splitting the programmers have done. The two abilities, dissociability and hypnotizability, are simply different aspects of the same thing. It does hold true that if the victim is predisposed to dissociate, that the programmers can build more complex structures. If a skilled therapist can get some handle on how dissociative his client is, he can- get an early guesstimate on how much splitting and structuring the Illuminati or Illuminati front group may have done to the mind-controlled slave.

Protection, spiritual

Page 364 ...

Before one can see the value of spiritual armor and those things that would protect a person spiritually, one has to be able to understand what is being protected. This book has dealt with how Satan builds his structures within his mind-controlled servants, but what does God build within His people? Satan is a corruptor and an imitator. Knowing that will give the reader a clue that what Satan has designed is a corruption and in part an imitation of the structures God builds. The spiritual armor that God directs godly people to employ are designed to protect the structures that God creates paradise out of.

At this point it would be worthwhile to display the basic structure that God builds within both a person and His Body of Saints, in comparison to the basic structure that Satan builds within a person, as well as society. These structures are basic patterns that reproduce themselves at different levels, the macrocosm and the microcosm of the spiritual world. The programmed multiple will have a justice system (judge alters), it will have values (satanic and occult knowledge and wisdom), it will have possessions (such as its birthright, their illusion of health, their titles, etc.), and it will have its false truths (the programming). The leadership of a system will provide a miniature state with a hierarchal structure run by Lucifer and his internal Grand Druid Council. - Within God’s children, He builds Truth and Life. God’s true ministers are life-givers. That is why Christ said he came to save people, not to judge people. By building consistency in a person’s life, God is fashioning that person not to be double-minded, not to be a hypocrite, not to be wishy-washy, not to be undependable, but to be more like Himself. God is unchanging. He is the same yesterday, today and tomorrow, and therefore he treats all people equal, it rains on the just and the unjust; or in other words God is EQUITABLE. He doesn’t really play favorites, but because He is God, He doesn’t explain what seems like arbitrary decisions to us. God will build order, justice, life, truth and equity into His servants. These elements (diagrammed out for the reader on the next page) make up the elements of Paradise and the attributes of God as described in the Word of God. These are the elements, the spiritual structures, that the armor of God described in Ephesians 6 are designed to protect.

Some people think that spiritual protection comes from prayer. But if we look at the word of God--and also learn from great spiritual warriors, we discover that the spiritual armor that God describes--TRUTH, FAITH, SALVATION etc. are great tools to protect us. For instance the truth does set a Monarch victim free. But it isn’t enough to have "the Truth", the Word of God says only the love of the truth will protect us. (see THES.) For a mind-control victim to know that they have salvation, gives them great leverage to defeat the attacks of the enemy. If a victim has a alter or alters who can have total faith in God, and can move forward in that faith, that faith will literally become a force-field around them that will move the enemy out of the way, and cause them to back off or surrender. Prayer is not the answer in itself--but prayer built upon the structures that God builds in a person, prayer built on love, prayer built on faith, and hope and life and truth--these prayers will have power. From the great reluctance of many church going people to learn the type of truthful information that our books are revealing, in spite of the horrible truth that these issues affect their lives in big ways, shows that many people do not realize the spiritual protection that truth gives its holder. We are born into a world full of deceptive symbols. It takes a conversion to begin to break away from the deceptions that trap humankind, but many of the churches take their people right back into the same mind-traps.
Page 365

Elements of the world-system & its satanic inspired quest for Utopia.
Ordo Ab Chaos
Pyramids even with 3 equal dimensions have a bottem and a pointed top. Top rules bottem; bottem supports/protects top
Pyramid with a mirror image = basic satanic structure
p_365-1.jpg  p_365-2.jpg
Elements of God's paradise are the attributes of God which sustain the Universe
Four true offices are pillars to this structure

- God is the Spirit of Truth (He serves as the light of New Jerusalem)
- God is the Life-Giver (the water & trees of fruit of New Jerusalem)
- God is the Law-Giver (The New Jerusalem has a great wall & order)
- God is Love, our Friend (the New Jerusalem has its own glory , warm sun and worship)
- God is a consuming fire, a Judge, (The Great White Throne of the New Jerusalem)
- God is unchanging, the same yesterday, today, and tomorrow, treats all equal, it rains on the just and the unjust, in other words, He is equitable.

STABILITY (a cube is solid and balanced)

Page 366 ...

The Belt of Truth mentioned as spiritual armor in Ephesians 6:3 is like a girdle that pulls and holds things together. Belts or girdles held things together for the ancient warrior, as well as holding the scabbard. The Word of God says, ‘Gird up your loins..." which means to pull yourself into the wholeness and integrity of God. The Belt of Truth is more accurately described as the Belt of Integrity. Integrity means being stable, without being double-minded. Satan divides and conquers. He uses division everywhere to defeat the godly person. Integrity means an individual’s private life lines up and equals his public image. There is no duplicity, no division of purpose in this Belt. It means the wearer of this belt is solely one-minded toward God. The Belt of Truth defends God’s ORDER of things. The Sword of the Spirit is the Word of God. The Spirit reveals to us truth, both the truth of God’s scripture and the truth about other things of God’s creation. The Sword of the Spirit protects the Bible from being misunderstood. We are to pray that the Spirit of God reveals and teaches us TRUTH. The Sword of the Spirit then protects TRUTH. God is truth, so if we seek God, we will find Him where truth is. No wonder it says that the Truth shall set you free!


In any type of bondage, if the full truth could be understood by the right persons who need it in that situation, it would make us free. In Romans 1:16, Paul states, "The Gospel is the power of God unto salvation to the Jew first and also to the Greek". "Salvation", and being made "free", basically have to refer to the same condition of deliverance from bondage. Jesus Christ is "The Way, the Truth, and the Life, no man cometh unto the Father but by Him." The "Truth" and the "Gospel" that says "Jesus saves to the uttermost, those that come unto Him by Faith," are mutually inclusive and if you really know one, you will also know the other. Is the truth impossible to find? In Romans Ch. 1 we are told that we are all without excuse because God has given us in nature enough evidence of His power and Godhead that we are automatically responsible for the way we seek after more light or hide in the darkness. The Word of God says that men hide from the light because their deeds are evil. Living in the dark makes it easy for the "enemies" of God to capture the servants of unrighteousness who have yielded their bodies in one way or another to the desires of the fleshly nature with which we were all born. If we didn’t die to our old life when we were born again, we are like Mary’s brother Lazarus who was raised from the dead, but had to be loosed from the grave clothes in order to walk and carry on life. Some people are still bound in grave clothes and need to be set free. It takes obedience to the Gospel to be set free, and it takes some people months or years to understand and accept all the terms of their pardon as purchased by the precious blood of Jesus, and they live in bondage to the extent that they fail to claim all of their spiritual inheritance, and the gifts that come with them. When they learn the whole truth, they find they are set free.


This article has just touched briefly on two of the spiritual armors that the Word of God says will protect us, the Belt of Truth and the Sword of the Spirit. The Shield of Faith will protect the victim of mind-control from the worship of idols, from worshipping the wrong things in

Page 367 ...

our life like our handler, and will protect our true love for Almighty God, our real creator. The Helmet of Salvation will protect the victim, when the accuser of the brethren tries to heap guilt and insecurity upon us. It will also help the victim to protect their birthright given to them as a child of God. Each victim as a child of God has a wonderful birthright to some great things, but the enemy will steal it if they don’t protect their godly birthrights. Some victims ignorantly given their birthrights away like Esau. As a born-again believer the victim has a legal position IN CHRIST that makes the person a joint-heir to the resurrection (ROM 6:3-11, EPH 2:1-5) and a joint-heir to reign with him (2 TIM 2:12, COL. 3:4). The Breastplate of Righteousness will protect the victim’s relationships with their support team, and the world in general. It will mean that they will treat their fellow man correctly in financial dealings, legal dealings, and any other dealing where fairness is involved. The Breastplate of Righteousness will defend justice and equity. Equity, which is fairness, means treating people equally. This will encourage the programmed multiple to treat people in the same fair way that they want others to treat their system.

We have just briefly touched on these spiritual protections. We hope that this will stimulate the reader to search and learn more about these spiritual weapons and how they can protect the victim from the attacks of the enemy. Now for instance, if the reader listens to a sermon where he is told that spiritual warfare calls for him to reject false values, repent of sin, and resist deception, he will realize the minister is managing to hit upon 3 of the substitutes for the 5 elements that make up God’s structure.


· As internal work is done, spiritual protection will be needed to protect the system from the warfare and counterattacks of the internal forces.
· The victim of mind-control will also need protection from astral projections of their master. This protection is provided for, by a support person using the principles of the spiritual world to slam the astral
body back into its physical body.
· Spirits of fear, mistrust, contention, suicide and despondency will try to attack the victim on a regular basis. The victim and the support persons need to be aware of these daily attacks and develop a mind-set and a determination to spiritually refuse these spirits. The support person should be gentle but firm in assisting the victim to dislodge and cast out such demonic attacks. All prayer should be grounded upon the structures of God, which are life, order, true love, justice, equity and truth.

God is the life-giver, the creator, the healer, the savior, the father, the peace-maker, the consoler, and the sustainer. Our prayers to Him should be grounded in the reality that He is all these LIFE-GIVING ROLES. This may help you understand what it means to ground our prayers in the structure of LIFE. We are called to imitate God & also be life-givers in the fullest sense of the word.


The enemy will send in false teachers (1 TIM 4:1-3), or he’ll try to give a false reputation to the world by slandering the person before men & before God (JOB 1 & 2 as well as other scriptures), he will attack the person’s confidence, their beliefs, their relationships, and their walk with God. In other words, if one looks at a cross, one spoke is prayer to God, one spoke is our walk (righteousness) before God, one spoke

Page 368 ...

is our witness to others, and one spoke is our fellowship with others. Satan will attempt to weaken anyone of these 4 arms of the cross. He and his forces (demonic and human) will generally look for and attack the weakest link in our defense. If we think things through it makes sense that if Satan were to attack God’s people the best place to attack them is in their churches. A fierce war is being waged in the churches today to destroy all true believers. This war is very well conceived and well coordinated. It is not happening by accident. One of the major weapons that the enemy uses is religious spirits of judgement. Judgement brings death. It is one thing to expose evil, so that healing can occur, that is godly. But the religious spirits that judge are out to hurt and destroy. These judgemental religious spirits are out to divide, so that Satan can conquer. We feel safe in saying that until our books came out, including this one, the Christian churches were totally ignorant about multiplicity and what it entails. We have watched many multiples suffer from judgemental spirits in the churches. These religious spirits are not from God, so don’t let them hurt your relationship to God. But why can Satan attack? There are a number of spiritual reasons WHY. First, is that the programmed multiple is traumatized and programmed during their life time to create footholds (legal loop-holes) that give Satan the legal right to attack. Eph. 4:27 says, "And do not give the devil an opportunity." The word opportunity in the greek is Topos, which literally means "foothold". These footholds are also referred to as strongholds in the mind (2 COR 10:4) which are like fortresses that Satan keeps operating in enemy territory that allow him to attack vulnerable lines. They are like secret holes that serpents can live in to crawl out of into your nice garden.

The spirit that crucified Jesus was the religious spirit of judgement. It will attack you with a vengeance. The victim and the support team must not allow themselves to become subject to these religious spirits. The judging religious spirits are trying to provoke the person who is the target of their attack. These evil spirits want a reaction from their target. The godly person can do exactly what Jesus did, let these judgemental spirits rant and rave and after all these antics keep one’s peace. The reaction will be, aren’t you going to do something about this? Just say, its a moot point, it’s not relevant. I don’t give it credence and move on. Each victim must seek life-giving answers for their own situation. Don’t let the religious spirit of judgement steal you of your chance for life. Just remember Jesus’s words, "Woe to you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! For you shut up the Kingdom of heaven against men; for you neither go in yourselves, nor do you allow those who are entering to go in." The Pharisees of today will find all the right answers to justify their position. You as a victim must seek truth, you must seek life, you must seek love. Forget these religious men that bind big burdens upon people and strain at gnats. You as a little child, and what programmed multiple isn’t mostly a child, are what the kingdom of God is made of. If you retaliate against the Pharisees then you have lost, because that is what these religious spirits want, is to get you into a battle on their territory. Even if you win that battle, you’ve lost, because you had to leave your territory--the peace of God, to enter back into Satan’s domain. Don’t fight religious spirits, they are a sly trick of Satan to get you to step back out of God’s domain into Satan’s boxing ring. At that point, you will participate in the lie that the boxing match is the real contest. Don’t trust in yourself, even if you can win in that boxing ring. If you know that God is with you, stay with Him in peace.

Page 369 ...


This section is an attempt to coordinate information scattered in many different articles and chapters, as well as discuss ideas that come under safety that are not addressed in other places, such as how to work with child victim’s of mind-control. Other articles that pertain to safety include:

· The Accessing article deals with safety from the abuser’s contacts.
· The Triggers article deals with safety from all the programming & memories that activate irregardless of whether the original abuser is around or not.
· The Self-inflicted harm article deals with safety issues that derive from the victim’s own threats to themselves.
· The Communication & Trust articles deal with the safety of the therapist-recovering slave’s relationship.
· The Deliverance & Salvation articles deal with the spiritual safety issues.
· The Surveillance article deals with safety issues concerning harassment and continued cult interference in life.
· The Mazes and Mirror articles deal with the safety issues of tackling particular programming.

Safety tips will be discovered scattered through all of our books on mind-control. The abuse of a victim is ongoing, unfortunately it was not just yesterday, but is here today. That is why this book’s two authors have made a point of referring to victims of mind-control as VICTIMS, and not as "survivors". The word "survivor" is very popular among therapists, and the word "victim" will cause some therapists to go into convulsive uncontrollable rage. The word is not popular. But the word "survivor" comes along with all the denial and whitewash of the establishment therapeutic community, that somehow this abuse happened to a poor helpless child and now that the child is an adult, they have survived this abuse. First, this ignores completely that the Illuminati continue to access and use essentially all mind-control victims that are trying to get therapeutic help, and it also ignores the fact that 99% of the alters have no concept that they are an adult, but if anything still see themselves as children. The high percentage of child alters is never realized by novice therapists, because the adults protect and hide them. A safe house is a place where a victim can go to stay from dusk to dawn in safety or even better a safe place to live. Generally, when safe places have been discussed it has been the goal to keep plans discrete and only on a need to know basis. A safe house will not take the place of a hospital, but the option of placing victims in hospitals is a very risky last resort. It would be great if safe houses could be set up with qualified therapists and trained volunteers who recognize the unique safety needs of victims. This would give recovering victims an opportunity to gain strength as they fought the internal lies and the dissociation. Such issues as How much does it cost?, What does the victim bring?, How does on keep a victim from acting out programs?, Do you force the person to stay if they want to leave, Do you have inhouse rules?, Who handles the medication? Can the victim receive visitors? and who and when? What kind of special dietary needs does the victim have? A safe house can not possibly cover all the safety needs of a victim. The Illuminati have traditionally threatened their families, their pets, their reputations and their jobs. The author has seen the Illuminati make good on some of their threats, but generally they threaten and intimidate more than actually act. A major issue is feeling abandoned and alone. A support person will achieve the best calming effects if they can maintain a constant

Page 370 ...

presence with the recovering victim. When the support person or therapist is absent, life becomes a terrifying experience, and the fear the victim lives in while alone can make a few hours seem like eternity.


Fritz & this author Cisco have had to resist the opportunity to help some young victims of mind-control because we knew that helping them would put their lives at great risk. There are certain ages that if the child or teenager has not progressed to the point that they are expected, they will be killed by the Illuminati. Children who are multiples have treatment needs that are different than adults. The first problem that must be faced is that the child’s parents or caregivers should be involved in the treatment, but the odds are extremely high that they are dirty and part of the abuse, no matter how well or to what extent they deny it. It goes without saying that the therapist needs to be able to handle the emotional trauma of helping child abuse victims. It may be harder than working with adults, because the therapist is face to face with the helplessness of the child, who is confronted with a powerful evil system of enormous magnitude. The skilled therapist will study the child’s interaction with others, on the playground, with other children, at home, and when the child is alone. They will watch for strange aberrant interaction between the parents and the child. The therapist will also watch the child’s eyes to see how they interact with other people, or if the child tries not to look at adults. The child may have a dull apathetic dissociative look to their face, or simply a blank look, or a glazed look. Check to see if they have puffy bags or dark eye circles. When the child has suffered the abuse of the trauma-based mind-control hallucinations, a desire to hurt themselves, and disturbed responses to heat, cold, pain and enclosures. A multiple will have erratic grades and abilities, their grades may be low compared to their 1.0. And they may be tired or hyper in school. Popular cover stories to cover programming sessions for children are tonsillectomies, esp. emergency tonsillectomies. Also sending the child to specialists may be a cover, or taking the child to a "funeral". The child will be shown funeral pictures and told that it was there. They like to isolate the child from playing with other children too. The poor child victim of mind-control will not have the words to sort out the coexistent feelings of love and hate for the victim’s abusive parents. They also do not have the language capabilities to describe their feelings and emotions. Guilt may simply be expressed as, "It just doesn’t feel good." If the therapist is going to help a child victim of mind-control they need to communicate to the child that as a big person they will be gentle but that they have the unchangeable strength to protect the child and care for the child. "I will help you be O.K., and I will protect you." The therapist should also convey to the child that "I know it was not your fault." "I am able to hear what you have to say without being wiped out or shattered." "We will do this together." "I know you are going to be O.K." If the child realizes that he or she can be safe with the therapist, the child may begin to warm up to others too. As the child feels valued, it will feel safe enough to talk about things a little.

Page 371 ...

SAFETY ISSUES, of support team

During the many years that your author Cisco has observed people trying to help programmed multiples, we have seen a range of counter-attacks by the World Order.


Find out how the Network operates and what organizations are part of it. Fritz has some excellent information on this. Do not trust law enforcement. We have seen victims get conned by seemingly "well intentioned" law enforcement people who deal with cults as part of their job. If you feel like our warning is hysteria, then you are welcome to "reinvent the wheel." An example of how victims of mind-control will be treated is told in the front of Mark Phillip’s and Cathy O’Brien’s book Transformation of America. In the front of their book they provide the business cards of some of the law enforcement people who were dirty and stabbed them in the back as they attempted to get her daughter free and to get justice. Cathy and Mark travelled all over this nation in search of justice--it isn’t there. We will not provide a long litany of horror stories, for no amount of proof will convince those who are still trapped in their own mind-control that the our judicial system still works for the people. The Illuminati’s Network is victimizing America at will. Do not trust the establishment media. They are great at manipulating stories to discredit the truth. The institutions that America has trusted in have long been subverted by the Illuminati.


Typically, the Network (what the abusers call themselves) will try to publicly discredit anyone who opposes them. Today, a popular way to do this, is to infiltrate a programmed multiple (who is programmed with an ulterior agenda) into therapy and then take the therapist down with the cry "false memories were implanted". The victim needs to be worked with in such a way that they recover their own memories and the therapist has this validated. Several conferences around the country have gone into detail about the ins and outs of legally protecting oneself. Fritz & this author provide our assistance to victims gratis. We suggest that others might consider simply doing this. The therapist may get their office files broken into, and in a few extreme cases the therapists have actually been murdered. Some support people (incl. therapists) have had their personal lives disrupted. Their spouses leave them, they are poisoned (such as what happened in L.A. as well as other places), their automobiles break down (sometimes with obvious signs of tampering), and they find opportunities in the world shutting in their faces.


The persecution of good people exposes to the world what is going on. Recently, a person who only half believed our material showed it at the university where they taught. The immediate & overwhelming negative persecution that came was so obviously an overreaction if the material had been false, that the persecution made a believer out of this truth-seeking person. Every time the enemy exposes himself to persecute our side, he exposes himself. In a war, the enemy exposes his position when he shoots at you. You can fool some of the people some of the time, and some of the people all of the time, but you can’t fool all of the people all of the time.

PROCEDURES for an Assassination The Illuminati members must get the

Page 372 ...

Grand Druid Council’s approval for an Illuminati assassination of one of their slaves, etc. Therefore, the Illuminati handlers often get other groups like the Mafia to do the dirty work. In other words, the Illuminati is not just running wild wiping people off the face of the earth. Their control is very planned out and systematic. Up until recently, they had never lost a slave to freedom, so they still don’t really consider our side to be a viable threat. While our side painstakingly rescues an individual here or there, they continue to program tens of thousands. They have stayed ahead of their opposition, and even created much of their own opposition. They will take advantage of a person’s weak points. They will put a great deal of study into where a person is weak, and take him or her down at that weak point. They will also look for routines. A routine is something that is a natural setup for exploitation. They will also try to divide and conquer. If they can separate a person out and isolate a person, they will go in for the "kill."


The support team needs to develop a strong spiritual walk where they are not a leaf in the wind to every scare tactic the Network carries out. The Illuminati’s Network thrives on scare tactics and fear. On the other hand, the support team needs to have a well-informed understanding of the capabilities of the other side. There is nothing to be gained from being reckless. Prudent precautions are worth a great deal. The saying a ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure is very accurate. If the support team is negligent or sloppy just one day out of the year, it will be that day that the victim is reaccessed. The Illuminati will watch for months, waiting for their chance to grab the victim. Most people don’t realize that they will exercise that much patience. The therapist & victim figures if they haven’t been bothered for a while that they are out of the woods. The support team needs to realize that all victims have been stripped of their ability to see danger from their abusers. This is so important it bears repeating: The support team needs to realize that all victims have been stripped of their ability to see danger from their abusers. Those on the support team should not let their guard down simply because other victims don’t seem to have to protect themselves. First, the few victims that are public may not be telling what happens to them. And second, if victims are not telling about constant surveillance, constant harassment, and constant attempts at reaccessing and reprogramming, then please draw the obvious conclusions.

Page 373 ...

First, it should be recognized that every victim of mind-control has to make a choice whether to fight for freedom or not. If they do not make this choice at some level, they will not have the commitment to try and counter the powerful self-destruct programs that are layered in. Freedom for a mind-controlled slave can only result from total commitment to the slave’s freedom by the therapist and a strong commitment on the part of at least a few alters within the system. Neither the slave nor the therapist can do all the work. Therapists are often totally surprised at how intense self-destructive system-persecutor alters will hate the host alter and how determined and intensely they will inflict harm upon the body. This is because they are still not realizing how almost all DID victims are programmed structured MPD (DID) slaves. Nor have most therapists come to grips with how intense the programming is that created these "system persecutor" alters. The "system persecutor" alters believe that they are protecting from greater harm, and in that sense they are more accurately described as "protectors’’. Most protectors are simply frightened children who are filled with rage. They may also surface with obnoxious belligerence, for instance, they may spit in the therapist’s face. The therapist or support team member must simply stay calm. Try to "bore the protector alter to death" with your calmness. The therapist needs to dig deep into their surplus of love and compassion and realize that this is just a wounded, hurting programmed child. The therapist needs to validate their role, and their feelings. They are not designed to hold the body for great lengths of time, and will get tired holding the body for long lengths of time. Many protector alters if they are allowed to surface, and ventilate their thoughts, and work through their feelings, fears and programming can return to the internal world with their destructive programmed behavior defused. If the therapist makes the mistake of trying to lock such an alter up, rather than negotiate and work them through their programmed destructive misbehavior, then a serious power struggle and a bigger mess could result. Sometimes if they are allowed to act out, for instance, a cutting alter is allowed to cut--but with dull plastic scissors, they can feel like they have done their job and go back inside. The protector alters believe that they are doing their job by protecting secrets. This lie can be exposed when working with them. Because they may have strong demonic elements attached to them, they will usually need some spiritual deliverance. Many therapists have asked their systems to make contracts "I will not hurt myself..." It is important that the therapist establish groundwork, a platform upon which to work from. Contracts have been more successful than not having contracts, but the therapists need to go beyond simply making contracts. Contracts only work with the front of a system, and the host alter is usually very dissociated from the deeper part of the system. First, the therapist needs to work with the front, the host personality, to make them aware of the self-inflicting-harm programs that will go off. It is important that the host personality learns his or her triggers, learns how to help identify protector alters within the system, and to help creatively discover methods to negotiate with the protectors. The host or therapist might ask, "Do you really think you need to inflict harm? Are you really bad or have you just been told that? Do you know that even [clowns, rabbits, kittens, horses...] do not hurt themselves?" Try to find the human part of the person. It is always there - even though it may be very remote. Work with the survival instincts of every alter. "Did you know that kittens don’t hurt themselves?" Try to get them NOT to act like the cult, but to have new behavior. Try and reframe the abuse cycle,

Page 374 ...

so that they see it in another light. The little protector alters may present a hard outer shell, but deep down are just fearful little special purpose fragments that are doing the job they have been trained by behavior modification to do. The entire support team as well as some of the alters can cooperate in repeating triggers so that they can be defused. It is important that triggers are not found out the hard way. What will be automatic triggers? Across the board, the programmers have put in heavy-duty protector alters and self-destruct programs to protect the victim from dealing with all past mother and father issues, in other words from really seeing their childhood. As long as the host alter stays in the here and now, they are "fine" in terms of not triggering the self-harm programming. This is so that the host (front) alter will not go down through the layers. Two other important areas that have lots of protectors are the core, and the no-talk programs. Of course, the abuse will create many of its own natural "self-hate" problems for alters. One way to defuse the self-destruct programs is for the therapist to take the victim down to a level 4 trance or deeper and use the Universal Codes that were given in Vol. 2. Those are the actual universal (standard) codes, but they only work if the therapist has the alter deep enough into trance. The programmers have built in a wall that will bounce the codes off, if the alter is not deep enough into trance. (As far as we know, these universal codes haven’t been changed. This is part of the problem with giving answers, is that before the therapeutic community picks up on the answers, the other side has had time to react.) The programmers create jokers and scrambling alters to insure that code words said above a level 4 trance never have effect. The code words become merely garbled words, that bounce off the system. When triggers do go off, they trip off a domino effect, so that soon whole groups of alters are immersed into all kinds of self-destruct programs. The therapists need to understand that when a single trigger goes off, there is likely to be several self-destruct programs triggered. Most therapists are not aware of what happens deeper in the system. Internal and external abuse is often triggered on a regular basis by the work that is being done, and the therapists and the host personality are generally oblivious to it all. The host may be so dissociative they do not know why their leg or foot hurt. They may not realize why it hurts to urinate. Female slaves often cut their vagina up. Male slaves often simply shoot themselves. There are few male slaves that survive the suicide programs, due to the cold logic of their programmed minds. Front alters may not know there are suicidal parts, they then fall asleep, out pops a suicidal alter and the system may die of a heart attack. The potential for self-inflicted harm is present across the board in everything the victim tries to do. The victim will sabotage their credibility, their therapy, the love and trust of others, and their own successes. The therapist needs to be prepared for such things happening and not let them side-track the therapist from what needs to be done--WHICH is to show love, and care toward the victim. The therapist may feel like this is calling for superhuman endurance, and sometimes it does, so the therapist needs to learn new behavior--how to endure in the face of repeated failure, and keep on keeping on. When fresh memories surface, and when new alters surface, the programming has the same fresh power as when it was originally put in. The stronger alters need work done with them so that they will be prepared to handle the burden of the power of new self-destruct programs hitting the system when new material and new alters are revealed. The few strong front alters can create safe places internally where they can nurture

Page 375 ...

more vulnerable "weaker" alters. These safe places must be deep enough so that they don’t trigger whoever is holding the body. (To get to this point, pre-supposes that the therapist has a few strong front alters that can help out in therapy.) The feelings of abuse and anxiety of the new alters can be placed into a box while they are in the recovery room. The recovery room system can be similar to how hospitals take the person out of surgery into monitoring rooms, and then finally to their hospital bedrooms, and then finally they are let out for outpatient observation. The internal recovery room can have pillows, and other gentle things within it.


There are numerous Spiritual issues that confront the victim, and many of these issues may be the most critical factors in the improvement and healing of the victim. However, it has been hard for most people to separate religion from spirituality. One of the most powerful tools of the Illuminati for controlling people are the various religious fronts that they have created. The mainstream religious groups are but fronts to control people. Within religion you will find controlling spirits, judging spirits, spirits of denial, spirits of guilt and shame, and spirits of obesity. Not all obesity is from a spirit of obesity, but obesity (gluttony) seems to be the sin that is used to substitute in for the other things that are rejected as sin. God’s creative force works within the universe. We are meant to be like God. He gave each of us some creativity. We can creatively take responsibility for our own lives and our own walk with God and our own spiritual growth. God gave each of us free will. Sad to say, but these important gifts, are often surrendered by religious slaves to whatever organization controls them. They give up their creativity and free will. They seem to think God wanted them to be a little puppet. The puppet mentality likes black & white orders, and black & white thinking, because it removes responsibility for the puppet’s actions away from the puppet. Again God made it clear, He was going to make each person accountable. There is no one else who can answer for you, when you face God. Religion can be one of the best covers to hide the stench of trauma-based mind-control. Under the guise of religion, the pressure to look good--to look like the organization’s "approved solution" conspires to cover up the truth, real feelings, failure, and sin. Religion can be so stiffling it becomes a pressure cooker. In order to make reality fit the religious mold a great deal energy is put into fantasy and denial. A great deal is done in the name of God that has nothing to do with Him. A great deal of how the Illuminati keep their slaves in place under their control is that they overlay the deeper levels of mind-control with the absolute control over the front system by one of their numerous religious denominations, such as the Catholic Church, the Mormon Church, the Watchtower Society, many Pentecostal groups, authoritarian New Age groups, and other religious groups too numerous to mention here. These groups emotionally strip their victims, and create a dependence within their members upon their church hierarchy. Christ came to set the captives free, and from his ministry it is clear that many of the people he set free were captives to religion. One of the greatest spiritual steps is to take back what God gave you and use it like He intended. Many mind-control victims can’t move forward toward freedom, because the religious group that controls them won’t give them their basic God-given freedoms, abilities, and free-will. The Illuminati doesn’t have to depend solely upon the mind-control programming, their religious groups will do the day to day work for them all in the name of God.

Page 376 ...

STRUCTURING, how it is done, its consequences and its treatment (an intermediate issue for helpers)

It is important that the people helping a victim of total mind-control understand that the slave has had his or her mind and thinking totally structured. Structuring means that the person’s mind is complex. Illuminati slaves usually have thousands of alters. Usually, therapists play around with the surface alters of a front world, who even after a decade or two of therapy will have very little idea of the full story of how their body and mind is being used. Structuring is the bracing that holds the programming structure in place. If the programs are the plywood, tile, shingles, and the other material, then structuring is the engineering, the design, the bracing that puts the materials together in a firm workable manner. Another article "Multiplicity, understanding it" will deal with aspect of understanding the parts that build the house. Structuring means that each alter has its script or way of thinking. Everything is cut and dry, black and white. If life challenges the alter’s thinking it will either a. dissociate the information it can’t reconcile with its script, or b. switch to another alter who can deal with thoughts. The switching is so ingrained within the mind, that it is hard for the mind to prevent it, but the mind can be trained to stay in place; not dissociate and learn material outside of its script, but it takes effort and time. This is why is good to journal, map the system, and keep other written records because the mind of an alter of a slave has a powerful tendency over time to continue dissociating whatever is not part of its script. The black and white thinking makes it difficult to deal with complex issues. An example of that would be for instance, a critical comment by a therapist on one tiny aspect of work which may be interpreted by the victim as rejection of their work. Structuring means the victim (the victim’s alter system) is not allowed to know or see anything but what they are to know and see. The concept of Multiple Personalities is difficult enough for the therapist to manage, let alone the puzzle of a labyrinth system of alters who are entangled in thousands of secret scripts that all work as one vast interconnected machine. In understanding the structuring, therapists should be aware of dual and triple functions. The external function of an alter will not coincide with the internal function. The alters will relate to each other in a complex way, similar to the complex ways a city of persons relate to each other. Each system will have its own internal political setup, and sometimes internal politics as alters begin trying to change the structure. Everyone hates to be stereotyped, even alters. Even though alters are programmed and structured, so are most people in the external world, and no one likes to be told they are programmed and structured. But just as a mother acts like a mother, and a prostitute acts like a prostitute, different alters which are common features of all systems will be recognizable. And although the host alter will quickly be known, often the host alter is actually several co-conscious alters, who will emerge with their own identity during treatment. The host may be one of the hardest alters to get to admit to the MPD (DID). One of the primary bracing devices used in structuring is FEAR, for instance,

Page 377 ...

fear of being found out and considered insane or a criminal, fear of remembering the traumas, fear of the pain. Another primary bracing material is the dissociation from one’s emotions. Without the emotions around a memory, the memory is a stale fact with no more impact than some statistic about Outer Slavakia, and the programming remains intact. When the affect (the emotions) return to the alters when they do memory work, it re-humanizes them. Humans have emotions, and that is what the alters need to regain. Emotions make the memories real. During the structuring, alters that had to have special responsibilities in the outside world, or had to have special cult responsibilities have had to have special programs tactics done so that they will not have emotions. The mother cats will have special shadow alters that take their emotions. The alters that take the affect of the trauma, are not but to sleep, because they need to be handy to continue siphoning off the emotions of any new experiences. The emotions must be kept separate by the Programmers so that there are no weak links. The spinners will have absolutely no emotions. Deep down in the spinner area each cat family will have some emotion alters carefully hidden. The alters systems are structured not to have emotion. Logic (luciferian logic) is a great stabilizer. Much of the beginning structuring to remove emotions from the alters begins in the cages, where the dehumanization starts. The child in the cages (this trauma is described in several places) is deprived of everything, isolated, whipped, shocked, prodded, raped, etc. After that period in the cages, the child moves on to the next stage where they are caged near animals (such as cats) which are treated wonderfully. The child is encouraged to act like a cat. The child is behavior modified to become a cat. This early part of the programming is designed to split off the emotions and take the alters back to their animal survival instinctual level of thinking (that means thinking with only their reptilian brain.)

In order to regain their emotions, memories may have to be seen with their emotions from a great distance, and reviewed on an ever-closer screen many times, until the alter(s) are desensitized enough to the memory to look at it close up. To get in touch with one’s emotions, will cause alters to be suicidal. The therapist will have to separate out mirror images, and the false memories that have been laid in. (Unfortunately, memories usually surf ace with a lot of baloney.) Then the therapist will have to encourage the feeling parts to come up. The feeling parts weep, sob, have broken hearts and much suffering. They may have anger, fear, and panic. The hurting part may be a screamer. It may not have a name, or might even be called screamer. It is probably a small child stripped of its identity. This small child has never had a chance to express itself. It probably feels that if it expressed itself. it would drown the world in tears. The structuring is designed to incorporate anything that will help create a feeling, an atmosphere of helplessness. If the therapist can give power back to the alters, this will help them take responsibility for themselves rather than looking to the master.

Page 378 ...

Without a doubt, people who have been subjected to Illum./govt. mind-control have suffered and continue to suffer. It’s no surprise to find suffering in these people’s lives; they are masters at suffering. They often have very high pain tolerances. The fact that they are continueing to suffer, creates a multitude of spin-off problems for the victim. Rather than deal with the spin-off problems, the therapist or helper may want to deal with the issue of suffering itself. The Word of God says, "Many are the afflictions of the righteous." PS 34:19. Therapists & ministers should be careful not to blame the victim’s problems on victim. Ministers need to be reminded that not all suffering is the result of personal sin. Much of what happens is simply the result of living in a fallen world. In real life, many of life’s stories do not have a happy ending. Bitterness toward God is dangerous, because it leads to all types of problems emotionally. The therapist & victim should avoid blaming God. If the client wants to delve into having a deeper understanding of why evil & suffering exists, then they should by all means be encouraged to find a book that answers this, or to contact this book’s authors. In the beginning God described everything as "exceedingly good", but the fall of man has echoed down the centuries. A deep understanding of God’s justice will explain why suffering exists. A deep understanding of God’s love explains why God allows suffering and pain. We can not assume to know the answer to each tragedy or pain, yet we can still help alleviate the suffering. Today, pain clinics teach people ways to cope with pain, and so does this page.

First, dear therapist, treat the person who is suffering as you would want to be treated if you were undergoing what they are experiencing. Unfortunately, few therapists have had much inkling of the extent of the trauma & suffering that their clients who were victims of trauma-based mind-control continue to experience. This is very evident, because until recently, therapists have had little concern for the safety of their clients once they have stepped outside the therapist’s office. Ongoing victims of mind-control have been popularly labelled "survivors of SRA" by the therapeutic community, and yet so far neither Fritz nor this author, Cisco, has ever seen someone who is past having to suffer. These are not "survivors" of some past abuse, they continue to be ongoing victims, and not of their own choice. The helper should evaluate the suffering, its causes, its purposes & benefits. Although all things work together for good to those who love Almighty God, not all things are good. It is not wise or benevolent to lecture the sufferer on the edification he will receive from the pain he is experiencing. In the long run perhaps the victim will see that the suffering can bring joy, enhance one’s future glory, yield greater wisdom, produce true humility and true comfort. If the victim is a devout Christian, they may already be able to see the silver lining to the cloud. However, the helper/ therapist wants to find ways to alleviate the emotional suffering & lesson the pain. Ignoring or belittling it, or heaping more shame or guilt upon the person is like rubbing salt into the wound. Once the suffering is identified, the therapist should free the victim from their shame. After Adam & Eve sinned & got their lives into trouble, God still made clothes from skins to hide their shame.

Page 379 ...

SUFFERING (client complaint)

Allow client to express his pain.
Treat the client as you would want
to be treated in similar circumstances.

Let the client confront their own pain.

DO: a. allow people to express their pain. b. let people confront their
own pain, c. be with the sufferer in silent caring. d. be a cheerful heart,
give kind words for the health of the body, mind and spirit, e. free the
client from the shame of suffering.

DON’T: a. assume you know the answer to every tragedy or pain,
b. lecture the client about the blessings they will receive from the
suffering, c. shame the client.


Point the person to the goodness and strength of God, for: IF THE
LORD DOES NOT BUILD THE HOUSE, THOSE WHO LABOR BUILDING IT LABOR IN VAIN. No client can resist the suffering in their own strength, they need the strength and consolation of a higher power, God.

Page 380 ...

SUICIDAL THOUGHTS (early client complaint)

Suicide is an ongoing threat to ALL victims of total mind-control. All victims of total mind-control have strong suicide programs that are activated if they learn or talk about anything that has gone on in their life, except what the programmers want the victim & world to know about. Therapists have greatly underestimated how suicidal victims of mind-control are once they begin moving toward freedom. Most alter systems are designed to have a calm front. The front alters can be very calm and stable, while all hell is breaking lose on the inside. Nor do the front alters have the ability to see what is happening behind/under them. Threats of suicide can be broken down into immediate threats that require immediate intervention, & long term therapy. Because all victims of total mind-control are suicidal 24 hours a day once they begin work, therapists should assume that ALL VICTIMS are always a few thoughts & seconds away from suicide. This is why a support person should be around a mind-control victim 24-hrs a day to support the client & to protect the client from his own suicidal tendency. Suicidal thoughts & suicidal alters are programmed into a slave. These pose an ongoing threat. BUT there is another threat that can overwhelm the victim. This is the accumulation of all the horror & trauma that the mind is dealing with. The victim must also deal with his own guilt, with the abuse cycle which kicks in & says, "It’s all your fault." Suicide may a fear of living, a feeling of hopelessness. When it comes to suicidal thoughts, sometimes mind-control victims display the same clues as non-victims. These clues might be the verbal clues such as "life is not worth living", "I’m in the way", and "I would be better off dead." Indirect talk of having a friend who wants to commit suicide might also be a clue. They might also have the behavior clues of being depressed, buying a gun, drugs, or a rope. Another clue might be writing a will while depressed. The victim of mind-control will also display in their handwriting a number of clues showing depression and suicide, such as a higher than norm frequency of "x’s" throughout the letter formations. The immediate response of some therapists is to place the mind-control victim into a hospital, but hospital settings usually back-fire & trigger even stronger suicidal behavior, due to many programming/memory issues involved. The hospital should be a place of last resort, and then only under the most ultra-extreme cases. Hospitalization has its own set of considerations to be taken into account for the victim. During an immediate crisis, a suicide alter can be given something in which to act out their suicide desires, such as a plastic gun to do russian roulette, or they can be dealt with so they feel they have done their job well enough without actually killing the body. The therapist/support person needs to have the love to listen to the victim, & show genuine concern. The support person can determine what pressures (prog., emot., work, financial, memories, etc.) have built up to cause the suicidal tendency & see if some of these can be diffused. If a non-suicide alter is contemplating suicide, they can be temporarily distracted until the crisis is over by asking them to genuinely help the support person with something. This alters self-esteem should be encouraged, because the alter is probably tapping into all the negative images they have had drilled into the system’s head.

Page 381 ...

SUICIDAL THOUGHTS (early client complaint)

Genuinely listen to the person with love and concern.

Is this a suicide alter or a despondent non-suicide alter thinking about suicide? ®YES®
   Deal with this special purpose alter by getting it to restrain from killing the body and to return inside the body. Be sure to praise this alter, who is most likely a highly programmed child purpose alter.


Size up the situation:

· Listen for verbal clues to suicide
· Look at how much agitation & stress exists
· Watch the person’s communication for goals, for feelings of rejection, or guilt
· Ask about behavioral clues to suicide, such plans & equipment
· Ask about pressures that could have built up to cause the suicidal thoughts, incl. med. pressures and drugs.
· Brainstorm how you as a support person can bear this person’s burden (GAL 6:2) & how others might help relieve some of the pressure driving the person to suicide.
· If inspired pray, if nothing else give HOPE.


· Hope & emotional strength & praise
· Positive encouragment
· Positive distractions, such as ask for help from the victim.


Work on:

· Dealing with hurting, rejected or crying parts
· Learning how to cope with what’s been done
· Seeing what is behind the suicidal depression
· Untangle the confusion of feelings
· Pace the disclosure of traumatic material
· The no-talk messages and the no see messages.
· Seeing programs and memories via journaling, art, etc.
· The many fears, esp. the fear of one’s own anger.
· Rage issues, trust issues, denial issues, spiritual issues.
· Realize that the suicide thinking can be helped more by one’s attitude than hoping to change the external situations of life.
· Find the positives, "It’s a positive that I’m taking this little step." Live minute by minute.
· Don’t worry about tommorrow. If you make it thru today, then its a. good chance you’ll survive tomorrow.

Page 382 ...

SUPPORT TEAM, organizing one


S Safety
I Information
N And
C Creative
E Eject, erase, eliminate, expel the PDE/computers
R Realize
E Emancipation

T Together
E Easily understood goals
A Attainable but challenging goals
M Measurable goals
G Good solutions
O On the spot rewards
A Applied creativity & risk taking
L Loytalty to team & goals

The slogan "If you want to get something done right, you have to do it yourself’ reflects the independent spirit of Americans. In some situations, the rugged Rambo is the best solution. The overwhelming needs of a programmed multiple who has not just cities but worlds of alters are too much for a single support person. The overwhelming needs of the multiple to stay safe 24 hours a day are too much for a single support person. The skills needed to tackle the challenges soon wear out a single person. There is great wisdom is setting up teams (whether formal or informal) to work with programmed multiples. Fritz and I have done this quite a few times in therapy. The rewards have been extremely gratifying. We still have a great deal to learn. Fritz and I are working as a team on this book and on this article. Other people have assisted us too. Fritz brings his skills and I bring my skills and together our contributions are worth much more than if we each worked separately. Teamwork brings varied experiences and complementary skills together. The mix of skills and insights enriches the therapeutic process, and adds flexibility to the process. Teams can respond to a changing situation far better than an individual. Over and over we have seen that one person catches a clue to what a victim is trying to say, while another team member is mentally distracted or fails to catch the clue. A team is not created to create a team. A team is created as a means to an end. A team needs a goal and needs to perform. A team can handle one victim at a time. One thing that we have seen work well was to make a large banner of the goal for the victim during a particular session. For instance, when work was done with our gatekeepers who were locked up in heavy programming the goal was "To discover the true self." When goals are chosen they need to be results, not activities. The victim and the team will perform best if they have goals. When working on a goal, seek quality rather than deadlines, because the foundation of the team is performance. If the team performs, it will build everyone up, and foster more team spirit. If the team doesn’t perform its very reason for existing is in question. When setting goals, perhaps the goal can be defusing a particular type of programming. Or perhaps the goal is to uncover the multiplicity of the victim. The team members need to be given a chance for personal growth. The team should share ideas. The team should have fun together. The team can switch roles, or help each other learn. Each person on a team needs to be given some status. The alters of a system also are part of the team. Each individual is valued for what they can contribute. Don’t forget to assign each team member a significant role, and to assign meaningful significant goals for the team. Divide up job responsibilities so that success can only result if everyone pulls together. As time goes on responsibilities can be rotated so that personal growth between

Page 383 ...

various specialists occurs. One person on the support team can reward the alter system when they achieve a goal. A trip to an aquarium, or to a park, or something special that the alter system has never been able to do may be a significant reward. The therapy should be fun. When teams work around the clock, they need to be very wise & careful about how hard they push, and when stopping is too soon. (When one is in the middle one has to continue to a breakthrough.) An alter system can only process so much so fast. After several days to accomplish a goal, and a day to reward the goal, then a break should be taken before hard work again. The recovering victim may also be able to find a situation where they show to themselves their new growth. At present some therapists are working several days alone to achieve major breakthroughs, at least this is what has been reported. However, we have never heard of any follow-up for these victims. Without proper followup and long term protection and long-term work, we seriously doubt that much will really be accomplished beyond an impressive yo-yo effect. The Mungadze Association (817-354-1389) & Care, Inc., are 2 groups using Christian principles & support teams & safe houses to help programmed multiples. The two groups are some of the best examples of what has been done. Who is qualified for a team? The most important criteria is commitment to the goal. If someone is seriously committed to contribute toward a common team goal, then they are worth having on the team. But Americans (including the American churches) tend to want short term answers. Short-term patchwork jobs just do not hold up in deprogramming slaves. We need to have concern for the long term for anything effective. That takes commitment. A programmed DID does not want to "expose their guts on the operating table if the doctor and nurses are going to walk out in the middle of surgery." If a team member is seriously committed to the goal, they will work harder to overcome the barriers and obstacles in working with other team members. When the team overcomes an obstacle, a natural outgrowth of that is team spirit. Team spirit isn’t artificially made, it is a by-product of a successful team. To focus on "building a team" is the wrong goal. The commitment (strongly willed) is to the therapeutic goal. Teams that are highly committed to each other personally are the best high-performance teams. Too often we have focused on the head (talents), or the hands (work produced) and not seen the heart (spirit). The love and good spirit of a support team are really the best leadership qualities that can be brought to a team. Don’t misunderstand, a team will invest in creating an ongoing committed well-skilled group, but they don’t make the team an end in itself. Bring together team members who have deep trust and respect for each other. Bring together a female mother-figure therapist and a male father-figure therapist. At some point team members must have some type of discipline and accountability. There has to be some type of structure. (A team member can’t do a job half-way and then decide that they are finished. Nor should other members try to push other team members off the team before the goal is achieved.) That doesn’t mean the structure can’t be flexible. A team should be what is needed for the job. Numbers are not important, commitment is. Of course the therapeutic team needs to take into account that the spiritual dynamics, the psychological dynamics and the safety needs of the client need to have specialists who will be committed to these jobs. The most successful team will be one where there is no rule "Don’t do anything wrong." Everyone on the team will make mistakes, but that is O.K. because those mistakes can be learned from and can promote personal growth. The team needs to promote

Page 384 ...

the personal growth of its members too. The team should not waste time on small risks, but go for the gusto. Be creative. Create an informal environment where everyone is relaxed. Take risks, but don’t be foolhardy daredevils. The team needs to be committed to new innovations. Pride in what a member knows will go before the fall. Programmed multiple systems are full of surprises. What if team members argue? Get them together immediately and ask them how this conflict is going to help the victim? "Let’s work together. The victim needs to see the people she looks up to being committed to the victim’s freedom, and not some non-relevant viewpoint." Competition between the team members will be counterproductive. The team is not being assembled to win a contest or a race. The victim will contribute lots of ideas, and a great deal of sensitivity and patience needs to be forthcoming from the support team to allow the recovering victim to be the center of the teamwork. However, an alter system is not set up to help itself, and it will need some external input. Devote time to what is successful. Brainstorm alternatives. Ask team members how they feel they can contribute to a goal. Ask the client, "What would you like to do that we aren’t doing?" If the place to work provides a nearby spot to relax, it will provide the client and the rest of the support team a chance to relax and diffuse some of the tension. The means creatively looking for good safe houses or good offices to use for therapy. Treat each other on the team with equality. This doesn’t mean that a person’s skills are not to be respected, it means that all have a shared sense of mission and all are important. The example of team work and cooperation will also be beneficial for the alters. It will give them examples to build on, that they can apply to creating internal cooperation. Somehow the team needs to give space so that members can vent their concerns. Some of the problems therapeutic teams can develop is when concerns are stifled. This means others must be restrained from interrupting. Practicing a forgiving spirit between team members will also give alters a good example to draw from. The team needs to be as open as possible without any secret agreements between people. The recovering victim needs to see that they are part of the process. In many cases, it is very difficult to speak about particular therapeutic paths, when that will only trigger resistance and programming prior to the onset of a session. For this reason, goals can be stated but particular methods are best devised as the process unfolds. It is not productive to make the recovering victim feel powerless. On the flip side, some alter systems will entertain a spirit of control, and this spirit will have to be firmiy and gently rebuked. As the team works on their goal, they will have to navigate through the following rapids, how do we deal with differences of opinion?, What do we do when one is upset?, What do other team members like? How does one handle feelings? In the end, these are all issues that alter systems have to work out amongst themselves too in order to succeed. Remember the four essential areas of help: Safety, the Victim getting to know themselves, Building the positives, and dismantling foundation programming & the PDE. The support team needs to determine how the victim can establish safety 24 hours a day, 365 days out of the year. Make sure that all the helpers in this area are very aware of what the safety issues are. One victim had the Illuminati come directly into a Christian safe house and take the victim out with them, without being stopped. Fritz & I hope that we have stimulated you to investigate forming a support team for your general geographic area. We welcome your comments and questions in this area.

Page 385 ...

TRAUMAS, FOUNDATIONAL TRAUMAS, How to master understanding what has been done to your mind-controlled client

An Olympic athlete wants to learn every detail about his sport he or she can. There is a fine line difference between success and failure, and each understanding we gain brings us closer to the expertise we want. There is a big difference between playing war or watching war on television and being on the front line. There is a big difference between hearing about the birthing process and giving birth to a child. There is a big difference between reading about an eskimo and being one. Numerous therapists have commented that they were totally unprepared by their training for the depth of horrors that their programmed DID (MPD) clients have experienced. How does one bridge the gap? Most mothers will tell you that you can read all the books you want on giving childbirth, but experiencing a childbirth as the mother is the only real teacher. This book (and our two previous books) have laid out the horrors of the programming for several reasons. One is to help you get in touch with the victim you want to heal. While this book can not transmit the full depth of the horrors of trauma-based total mind-control, only a survivor of that trauma has the possibility of knowing--and in most cases it was too horrible even - for them to remember--this book (and particularly this section) can GIVE YOU THE UNDERSTANDING to prevent clumsy therapeutic mistakes that stem from a shallow understanding. One principle of success in life is to plan ahead. If a carpenter were going to take out a wall in your house, he would know how to use his tools, he would know what the wall was made of, HE WOULD SHORE UP THE REST OF THE HOUSE so it didn’t all crumble when he took out that wall. Time and time again, programmed multiples find their therapists "experimenting" on them. In other words, the person whose hands they have placed their life into, doesn’t know the tools, what the situation is, nor how to shore up the other parts of the house before they do major destruction on their programming structure. Many clients are irrevocably damaged. The last two decades of therapeutic work with programmed multiples is littered with the failures of "experiments". We shouldn’t make excuses for these failures, nor do we need to brood with guilt, life is full of failures; we simply need to come out of denial about the high percentage of failures, and make the corrections needed to succeed. Generally, the victim, who has been victimized by the experimenting is further victimized by being blamed for the experiment failing. So the therapist had best plan ahead, and this section is written to help the therapist do just that.

Two foundational pillars upon which the programming works is dissociation and fear. In order for the traumas to work they need to be as severe as possible. The worse the trauma, the better the dissociative walls needed for programming. These traumas are so severe that they splinter the mind, they are not ordinary traumas. Such traumas are so severe that to describe them creates automatic denial mechanisms within the listener. In fact, most victims prefer to live in denial too, which is more comfortable. Going back to our carpenter analogy, there are issues that the carpenter must know about and other issues that aren’t important. For instance, "is the insulation in the section of wall being pulled out good or not?" is not an important issue. Likewise, too much emphasis is put on whether the trauma memories were real or staged, or put in with hypnosis. Unfortunately, most of these disturbing memories are

Page 386 ...

probably actually took place. But whether they took place exactly as remembered or not is not an important issue. The issue is that they exist as reality for the victim, and they need to be dealt with. We are dealing with the mind and its programming--that we can change, we can not change what historically happened. We must identify what the mind thinks and deal with that; and remind ourselves we are can not tamper with the past no matter how it happened. If the therapist has a hard time coming out of their denial, perhaps they are not suited for this work. The therapist needs to work with the reality of the memory in the mind--rather than trying to make a judgement call on what happened. There is a place for making historical judgement calls, but it is not the important issue in working with a victim. Those who have suffered the traumas know that others can not understand them. Only by living the birthing process does the mother fully know the experience. Only by being on the front lines does the soldier know the horror and stench of death. So the therapist is going to help the client work through repressed memories. These memories are like BOILS OF THE MIND. They rise from the subconscious to the conscious and then they are "lanced" so-to-speak so they can heal. The root of that boil is FEAR. When the trauma is embedded, it is covered over by love. This is intentional on the part of the programmers. It creates the double binds that they are so famous for. REJECTION OF THE PERSON feeds the boil, that is rooted in FEAR and hidden by the DOUBLE-BIND OF THE PROGRAMMER’S LOVE. (If the reader feels unsure that he or she totally grasps this, no problem, it will be clearly explained as the reader progresses through this section.) The mind-controlled slave’s mind is like a deep vault holding information and

trauma memories. The victim’s soul carries intense deep grieving, and their body carries body memories of trauma. The deep vault of the mind goes back to the traumas that took place before the child victim was verbal. The fears and dissociation which provide the foundation for the mind-control, were responses by the mind to PROTECT itself. Some Christians are trying to cast out alters as demons, when the fracturing and dissociation was a gift from God that allowed the victim not to lose their mind when faced with overwhelming trauma. The little child to protect itself from the threat and fear of death, the lies, the double-binds, the guilt, the shame, and the confusion of drug states guards its mind by building its structure of dissociation. When the therapist sees a structured DID (MPD), he/she should equate that with "intentionally done." At some point, the victim needs to see their structuring as something INTENTIONALLY DONE. It was an intentional crime against everything they were - an intentional crime upon their entire being, body, soul and spirit. A little child is born pure and clean. The betrayal of what that child was, is embedded deep in its thinking. No child can withstand the full impact that comes from realizing the extent of the betrayal of that child by humanity. After years of protecting itself by dissociation, there is no way that a programmed multiple can face the COMPLETE AND FULL IMPACT of a trauma memory without resplintering the mind. Before the dissociative wall is pull out, the therapist needs to place in methods to allow the victim to bring up memories without the full impact. Journalling, art work, mental television screens holding the memories at safe distances, etc. are some of the bracing equipment that successful therapists put into place to prevent the full impact of the memones. DEATH speaks to everyone. No one is an island to himself (themselves) when it

Page 387 ...

comes to the subject of death. It is an undeniable fact of life, that most people try to stay in at least partial denial of. The MYSTERY OF DEATH reveals itself in many forms. The therapist needs to understand that he/she is facing multiple kinds of death. A study of Trauma-based mind-control could be renamed a study of Thanoteros. In fact, the man reported to be the world’s present-day best programmer has a degree in Thanoteros. After experiencing several types of death, many victims of mind-control prefer death over the reality of life. Your job as a therapist is almost that of a resurrection. You must give life, where there is only death. This is why we believe that victims need life-giving godly people in their recovery. The mind-control victim may experience death in a grave. The victim may find it in a death, burial, and resurrection programming ritual. It may be experienced in the cages where the mind was split, it may be found in the isolation of a well or closet. It may be found when a child is setup to watch another child or pet that they identify with, and then be made to feel responsible for its death. Death may be for the godlike programmer to die, or for the programmer/master, to whom the victim is trauma-bonded, to turn his back on the victim and walk out of the room. Death may be to find oneself in a strange hospital room with white masked strangers and a strange doctor hurting you. When the important people in a child’s life reject its life as important--howls the child to value itself. It is taught to value only that life that the master gives. The therapist needs to show the victim the value of life, so the victims will want to take back what was devalued by the programmers. Death brings GRIEF. The survivor is dealing with different kinds of death which are shrouded in mystery. The therapist is not dealing with normal grief. The therapist will be dealing will overwhelming grief when the memories are birthed. The programmer has worked to take the child victim to a place beyond restitution. He has also built in a base of fear with layers of fear, shame, guilt and grief. The therapist can save herself and the client difficulties if the client isn’t put onto the defensive. Don’t attack what the client is saying and make the client’s parts defend what they are saying. This will only result in them avoiding the issue. Whether the therapist agrees or disagrees, a judgmental attitude will insure that the deeper alters will go into hiding. They will close up tight, and these alters will take the path of least resistance and they will stay silent. Silence is what their programming is demanding that they do. And the programming will feel safer than challenging both the therapists skepticism and the protective suicide/confusion programs that will trigger when they talk. The programmers have programmed many alters to believe no one would listen to them, and a skeptical therapist reinforces that programmed conviction. If the therapist can begin to understand that the hours of programming traumas ran into days, and the days ran into weeks, and the weeks ran into months, and the months ran into years, they will begin to get a sense of how the programming has been layered in. It took lots of hours and money to put it in. Its going to take the client and support team as long or longer to deal with the issues and to resolve them. To hurry is not better. The therapist and the victim will have repeated problems with denial. The therapist will have to accept and work with the victim where they are at. Neither the victim nor the therapist will want to believe that trauma-based mind-control has taken place, but both need to accept where they are and where the therapy is going. That’s the reality of life. The survivor of the mind-control will run basically two tracks. During Illuminati

Page 388 ...

programming these are referred to as the right hand path and the left hand path. The left hand path is the path of the satanic cult, and the right hand path is the outside world, which has been portrayed in the worst way by the programmers. The mind of a trauma-based mind-controlled slave will naturally think about the thoughts that have been repeatedly drilled into its mind, via all kinds of programming methods and reinforcements. The mind-control is basically a type of death--the human has died and a robot has replaced it. Humans were designed to have meaning and purpose in life--not to follow orders without purpose or direction. The programmers use fear of death to motivate the slave, but fear is based on death, not life. Fear does not give true life. However, the human spirit is almost impossible for the programmers to kill. If the do break the human spirit, they risk eventually losing the slave to apathetically losing interest in life. The human spirit will fight to live and breathe. It will fight to overcome what it doesn’t understand. It will fight to live and to have a life of meaning. It is important for the support team and therapist not to underestimate the power of either of these two tracks. The programming is extremely powerful. And surprisingly the human spirit is extremely powerful. What results is an extremely intense, overwhelming tug-of-war. The client’s actions will not coincide with a single plan. The client’s actions will lack harmony. One minute they may sabotage therapy, the next they may give a key to help unlock the programming. (Because this author lived through being programmed, and in turn learning to program others, I am in the unusual place to understand the consequences of the various types of programming situations that victims are subjected to. I hope to take what Satan meant for evil, and use this knowledge for the benefit of humanity. Please allow me to share some my insights.) An example of one of the standard programming traumas will provide many lessons about the nature of programming and deprogramming. By going over just this one example, it is hoped that the mechanisms that drive the programming will be exposed, and that the therapist will see how to curb the power of the programming trauma. This programming trauma is based upon Genesis 37 in the Bible. In this Bible chapter the patriarch Israel loves his son Joseph best. He makes for him a coat of many colors (vs. 3), but this special act of love causes his brothers to become jealous. His brothers then strip him of his coat of colors and throw him in a well which had no water. The Illuminati like to carry out this standard programming trauma when the victim is three years of age. They will place a coat of many colors on the child, but this is to familiar the child with programming colors. Their robe is not described as a robe of pride, but a robe of shame, and the child is told "you’re bad", "look at what you did" and is rejected by a group of people and made to feel alone and shamed. Once the child has been clearly rejected by the group carrying out the programming, then it is lowered into a very deep well. They are trying to build a foundation of guilt and fear for the programming. The well is deep and either hot or cold. A lid is placed over the well and the child is left in isolation after being shamed and made to feel guilty. Occasionally the group may throw down body parts and feces, urinate, and make noises from the top of the well to continue the shame and rejection. For three days the child is left in the well totally naked. The programmers want to make sure the child feels no worth and rejected by mankind. It is important that the child feels alone and stripped. That isolation from mankind, will help insure the programming isn’t tampered with. It helps insure that the child won’t

Page 389 ...

develop self-value. The well experience teaches the child FEAR and that IT IS ALONE. The child feels the fear of being alone. It knows that it is nothing except what the cult wants it to be. In fact, more specifically, it knows it has no life nor value in life except what the programmer wants it to have. It has been stripped emotionally and physically. After tormenting the child for 3 days with no food and no water and occasional verbal abuse, the child is in shock and at a crisis point. The group raises the child up. At this point it is critical to the programming, that ONLY the programmer/handler be the person to bring the child out of the well and tend to its needs. The programmer will give the child water to quench its thirst and food to feed it. The programmer will pick up the infant and calm it. This programming experience is to build upon the traumas in the womb and the original fracturing (which is referred to as splitting the core) trauma. In other words, if we were to number the sequence of traumas we get, 1. womb traumas, 2. splitting the core trauma(s) 3. the well trauma. The coat of many colors-well trauma is very severe. Many children are lost during the trauma. Some children go inside and become autistic. A medical team is present so that the child is kept alive when it is brought to the surface. The child will be in what is called a vegetable state when it is retrieved. After the programmer gets the child to the surface and calmed, the child will be nurtured by its mother or mothers-of-darkness. The child will be left alone after the well trauma for 3 to 6 months. The child needs this time before it is tampered with. After it has recuperated, the programming team will begin working with the child. They will build a chronology of how it felt during the entire sequence. This chronology will define for the programming the sequence of dissociation, so that the programmers can identify what types of pieces the mind has developed out of the experience. Those different dissociative pieces each have different characteristics, and those characteristics will be important to determine what that dissociative piece will be used for. For instance, if the child spends some time in fantasy that it’s parent really loves it even though the reality of the well experience contradicts that fantasy--those parts of the mind can be used to build alters whose love is based on fantasy. It is difficult if not practically impossible to dissuade these alters that their love does not line up with reality because the foundation is a trauma where this part of the mind survived on fantasy. It is also important for the therapist to realize that often the Illuminati (or other cult involved with the programming) will separate out the parts of the mind from the splitting the core trauma (remember this core trauma often includes a rape by Satan/& a rejection by someone pretending to be God, i.e. a black mass), and make sure the pure positive parts of the mind are put to sleep via drugs and hypnosis before the well trauma. When the mind (the core) was split part of the mind remained positive and in love with the Lord. That is the part that is the most dissociated from the trauma. That part is preserved and usually not subjected to the well trauma because they want it to develop into the Christian front. It will experience only the original shattering of the core trauma, and then in some cases be left basically trauma-free. They realize that once this part is indoctrinated into Christian doctrine it will be almost impossible for it to ever deal with the mind-control. That is because Christian doctrine from most mainline denominations will teach that part to forgive and forget the past. That part of the mind--which will be used to front the system will live in the pleasant atmosphere of Churchianity--where nothing un-nice is allowed in. It will not want to look

Page 390 ...

at what has happened to other parts of the mind-because its attitude is forgive and forget and move on. Remember, this front part derived its separateness from the rest of the system precisely because it was the part of the mind that stayed in denial of the seriousness of the trauma, and held onto its polyanish thinking in spite of the overall reality of what happened. The mainline denominations will continue layering in teachings that will make it difficult for this front part to participate in freeing the rest of the mind from bondage. This is why it is important for the churches first to realize what is going on when trauma-based total mind-control is carried out, and second how to divide the Word of God correctly so that people realize that the Bible’s warning that a double-minded man is unstable in all that he does--needs to force the church to revise their teachings so that their teachings apply to the reality that encompasses programmed multiplicity and the healing of programmed-multiplicity. Now that the three trauma periods have taken place (fetus, core split, and well trauma) and a recuperating period of time has occurred, the programming team can begin structuring. The structuring will involve ‘‘moving’’ parts around so that they are "positioned" to carry out their role in the grids and systems that are to be built. This is similar to how files in a computer can be move from directory to another without changing the file. When the programming and structuring begins, the child will be questioned so that the programmers know how the mind split during the trauma. The programmer will then take the child’s parts deep into hypnosis and instruct them to forget the well experience. They are only to remember the good part of the experience--the worthwhile lesson that the programmer loved them. They are to forget everything except "YOU’LL NEVER FORGET HOW MUCH YOU WERE LOVED". The final split of the mind that was in fear will be found and developed into a protector. This part of the mind which lives in fear, will never allow the love part to remember. The FEAR parts are left intact with their fear, they will insure that the memory is dissociated. There is a point during the well trauma when the child’s mind will fall asleep but continue splintering. When the child is sleeping the mind finds it difficult to discern whether its thoughts are dreams or real. Have you ever had a dream that was hard to separate from reality? The splintering during this period produces dissociative parts which can be used for gatekeeper alters. Gatekeeper alters are often the most deceived and most programmed, and have difficulty knowing reality. This is because they have been built from this dream state during the well-trauma.

Page 391 ...

If the therapist has a very strong logical front alter, that alter can be used to provide a protection for the system. This alter can receive hypnotic alarms that will make the system angry if anyone tries to use codes on the system. This strong alter can also train his or her mind to have enormous thick concrete walls behind them, so that the rest of the system is blocked off from hearing anything through this alter. In this way, a system can be protected from a verbal access code. However, there are ways to get around such a defense. When alarm systems and blocking walls have protected a system, the Illuminati will physically abduct the victim, and take the victim to a nearby site where that strong alter will be "destroyed"-shattered by electro-shock and hypnosis and put out of commission. We suggest that if defensive mechanisms are put in, don’t advertize this fact, because it only escalates the battle. The actual codes and triggers are generally buried deep in the subconscious, and the support team is going to have an extremely difficult time ever getting to any of these. We have tried to greatly help people out by publishing what we can in this area. Because the codes are buried so deep, it is really difficult to erase them from the mind. The mind is trained to switch automatically upon certain cues. Perhaps the most effective way to protect a victim of mind-control is to have a knowledgeable support person with the victim, 24 hours a day. The co-authors have heard a number of therapists say that having someone assisted 24 hours a day is impractical, and we reply that trying to free someone (mentally & physically) without 24 hour/day protection is impractical. There are prayer strategies and powerful prayers that can be made to receive supernatural help to overcome the triggers. There is certainly power in prayer, we have seen this first hand. Over time some of the codes can lose their power through desensitization. It always helps when alters are aware of what the codes are so they can be alert to them. But the power of the codes should not be underestimated, and to tell someone they are protected from the codes by prayer, is similar to telling soldiers that bullets can’t hurt them because they have been prayed for. While we do not discount the power of prayer, we also recognize that prayer needs to be grounded in reality. If we pray for a house, we can imagine that the house has magically appeared, but that is not faith, that is merely self-deception. Some victims have been told incorrectly that codes will not work with their system anymore because they were prayed for. Who wouldn’t want to believe this, and yet we feel compelled to warn people that in the case of programmed multiples, there are seldom easy answers. On the flip side, positive triggers can be put in, such as a cue word that will call up a helpful front alter in case the system and the therapist needs help. Sometimes this can simply be the alter’s name.

Page 392 ...

As the alters of a victim of mind-control go through life, they will inadvertently trigger programming and memories. Initially, there will be fear around the activation of triggers. The novice therapist may think the victim is setting off triggers just for attention. Actually, that is not a major issue for therapists to worry about, even though on the outside it may appear to be an issue. However, it is true that a slave may be programmed to trigger their own programming as a macro-program goes off to get the slave to do things to activate so many triggers that the system self-destructs. It is no exaggeration to say that life is one big trigger for victims of Illuminati mind-control. The programmers have intentionally linked the external environment of the slave to their programming in order to manipulate the external world into becoming one more reinforcement for the mind-control. The programming traumas have taken place over in so many different geographic locations for most slaves, under so many different circumstances and with so many different programming props that there is not much left in life that doesn’t trigger emotions of fear and horror. After reading the Illustrated Guidebook, the Vol. 2 Formula book and now our Deeper Insights book, readers should be aware of why airplanes, animals, birthing issues, blood, caves, colors, crying by children, death issues, fire, foods, heights, holidays, insects, lightening, masks, occult paraphernalia, snakes, sounds, and harsh weather such as tornados, and zoos will trigger a recovering victim of mind-control. Phobias can be mentally linked to certain items, or may simply be free floating. For the victim to get in touch with their emotions is in itself very triggering. Any time the victim tries to touch things at a personal or emotional level, they will trigger him or her self. The harder the victim works, the more they trigger themselves and the more fragile they become. In working toward freedom, pain becomes gain. But the victim and the therapist are not going through the pain for sadistic reasons, but because part of the power of the mind-control is to separate pain the consequence of pain from the sources of pain. Trauma memories are so abundant that abreactions lurk in the background, ready to spring to life as the victim tries to go through live. When the victim tries to shower, eat a meal, or have a pet or visit with a little child, the alters may well abreact. The traumas and abreactions do weigh down a person, but many recovering victims, simply run two tracks, one for the world to see, and the other which is full of pain and confusion. This happens too frequently in therapy. It allows the therapist to fool him or her self that the victim is doing much better than is actually the case. Sometimes an alter can be put in charge of the body, while the rest of the alters are busy trying to deal with all the pain and emotion that the trigger has generated. Only by gaining the trust and knowing how programmed DID’s think, can the therapist begin to get a more accurate picture of how the slave has been triggered. Many therapists mistakingly think that if their client who is a programmed multiple will not experience victimization if they don’t refer to themselves as "a victim". It is a fad to blame victims for their own victimization. The thinking goes like this: Somehow the person set himself up--&/or---it must have been bad karma. This is the pop psychology of the ‘80’s and 90’s, that is not grounded in reality. The origins of this thinking are also suspicious. This quack thinking reflects the human’s mind’s need to have things make sense. Many times life is senseless. Many

Page 393 ...

times people suffer senselessly. They do not set themselves up as victims, and all the word games in the world aren’t going to stop what going on. To pretend that the multiples that are coming into therapy are "survivors of abuse" is just one of many ways that the therapists deny that they are not dealing with the real issue, the client’s safety--which is not something in the past, but the most important issue in the present. Therapists have most victims conditioned to call themselves "survivors". How many people on a ship that continues to sink call themselves a survivor? The pitiful health conditions that so many victims of ongoing mind-control have described to the two co-authors, and their desperate cries to have this ongoing abuse stopped make the word ‘‘survivor’’ a mockery of their ongoing desperate attempts to hold onto some kind of life. Every time the victim of mind-control accidently triggers a trauma memory or programming they are being victimized by their past. Of course, some therapists and ministers have managed to hide the MPD, because they have mistakingly informed the victim that the MPD (DID) is the problem. The DID is NOT the problem--but abreacting trauma memories or trying to prevent a suicide program from actually taking place is a major problem, and one that most survivors are going to have to deal with by themselves, because the triggering will take place so quick and frequently. The therapist needs to give the victim the mental and external resources to at least cope with these challenges. The greater the trauma, the greater the amnesia wall. When trauma memories break through those walls into awareness, the distress to the victim can be overwhelming. The victim will be frightened, ashamed, depressed, fearful, suicidal, and have feelings that they are going crazy. No patient is eager to discover that he/she has been violated by people they loved and trusted. The false memory people are not portraying the way the mind works to the public. The mind tries to protect itself, and it is inclined to deny harsh memories, rather than latching onto trauma memories because of some therapist’s suggestion of abuse. Uncovering a victim’s history, does not depend on a single memory. New memories are blended with old ones and new explanations for what has happened reconsidered, until a verifiable more accurate chronology begins to present itself. At the onset of therapy, if the victim doesn’t know, the therapist can warn at the onset of therapy that hand gestures, hypnotic patterns, lights and codes words will trigger the subconscious mind of the victim. The field of what might be called "aromic therapy" is still in its infancy, but has great potential. The sensations of smells are closely linked with emotions in the mind. If a therapist is trying to trigger a particular memory and emotional content, smells associated with the memory will work better than anything to pull up the emotional content. This is because of the way smell is processed by the mind which first perceives it by the smell setting off a combination of "detection codes" in the olfactory bulb that are then relayed through the limbic system. The memories of smells are very closely attached to emotional memories. This only makes sense in a way, because smells are used by a newborn child to identify its mother, they are used by lovers, and in other situations where the sense of smell plays an important role in our emotions toward something. The use of smells to trigger and to heal multiples is wide open for exploration.

 Page 394 ...

We believe that we may have some new slants on the Issue of trust which might help both support teams and their client. In order for the therapist and support persons to work with a programmed multiple system they need to establish trust. This means that the programmed multiple’s alter system not only feels the support person will be honest, but that they will protect the multiple physically and the multiple’s confidentiality. It also means that the alters trust the abilities of the therapist to accomplish something positive. For some front alters, they simply need to see that the therapist/support person cares, is a kind person and has credentials or a history of working in this area. For deeper alters, trust is a demanding and complex substance that has to be won by lots of hard work, consistency, respect, proficiency, and availability by the therapist. Many of the deeper alters have never seen a person try to protect them before. Many of the little hurting alters have never had any one to tell their pain to. Many of the alters are convinced that no one can love them, that they destroy everyone they touch, and that they can’t have a good relationship with any outsider. The therapist will have to prove these attitudes wrong, even in the face of the client carrying out actions to self-fulfill their expectations. This last paragraph was from the therapist’s vantage point. On the other side of the healing process is the programmed slave. Once the therapist opens up their system, they will be processing memory 24 hours a day--even though the front alters may not know it. Once therapy opens up a system all kinds of things start coming unraveled. The host alter, who probably has been thinking (and generally destroying all evidence to the contrary) that she/he is a single person, now has become a complex system of competing personalities. As the programming loses its power, more of the multiplicity appears. (Family members are often devastated, because they lose the person they knew for an entire tribe of personalities.) As the system tries to move against the programming, every step that would take a unit of mental energy for non-multiples is perhaps carried out only with 1,000 times the mental energy. Instead of one person changing his habits, you have an entire city or world that must be changed, and they must change in the face of overwhelming resistance from many others in the system as well as the programming and external threats. While trust seems to be an easy thing for the therapist, trust becomes one of the struggles that seems a no Many of the issues seem like no-win issues. Remember that the child victim initially resisted with all it had against being programmed, but at some point, the programmers broke the child and its resistance completely. That brokenness is a solid part of the child’s thinking. The victim will fall back into that broken "its-a-no-win thinking" very easily. The programming leaves the victim’s mind operating in a survival mode. This means that much of the survivor’s thinking comes straight Out of the first brain, the reptilian brain. The victim will try very hard to see what the therapist is trying to say, but before long, they find they have fallen back into the old way of thinking? Why? Let’s say the therapist has worked on teaching the kitten alters that they are really not cats. Let’s also say the therapist has worked hard on trust issues. Now all of a sudden the judge alters and the programmers apply pressure to the kitten alters, and before they realize it, they are seeing themselves as kittens and distrusting the therapist. They are saying to the therapist, "You’re telling me I’m

Page 395 ...

not a kitten, but I see myself as a kitten when I look in the mirror, and beside I don’t want to be a human, because humans get hurt." What has happened? When the mind learns it builds K-lines. K-lines are like highways that connect many different things in the mind. K-Lines can connect cognitive demon processes, memory bits such as visual maps stored as a memory. K-Lines are what create a mental state of consciousness. A mental state is really nothing more than a K-line or interconnected series of K-lines. When a highway (K-line) is built in the mind, it is essentially permanent. It is similar to the Apian Way that leads to Rome. The same road that allowed the Roman legion to move its troops still is being used today. The same purported street that Christ walked on in Jerusalem is still in existence today. In fact some of the old stones from Roman times with the ancient Roman marks are still in place. The road on top of the Great Wall of China still is used in some places. However, if a road is not used, it can fall into disrepair and its use will be abandoned. Likewise, the mind never normally loses a K-line, they simply fall into disuse. By employing Behavior Modification in the most extreme forms, alters are trained during programming to develop particular K-lines. Those K-lines will never be gone. Just like an alcoholic will always have an ability to go back to being an alcoholic. What can be done, is to build new K-lines that get more use. Since most deprogrammer are not willing to subject their clients to the same behavior modification techniques (based on survival & fear) that the programmers used, they must resort to building new K-Lines in the higher brains. The programmer’s K-lines remain dormant in the reptilian brain, the new behaviors that are taught to the alters are attached to the higher brains. Now what happens when an alter feels threatened? When their survival is at stake, the reptilian brain shuts off the higher brains, and the mind searches around for a K-Line that it can use. Lo and behold, the mind finds the old K-line and reaccesses it. This is why safety of the slave is so important to have a chance to develop strong new K-lines. When the victim reverts back to their old thinking, the victim will think that all has been lost, and that years of work have been lost. They may tell the therapist that they no longer trust the therapist and that years of work have gone down the drain. This is not so. The new positive K-lines are in the mind still. They will always be there. They simply need to be reaccessed and strengthened by use. When the survival instinct is triggered -- "danger, danger" -- no reassuring and no reasoning are going to break through, the mind under the control of the first brain is shutting down the higher thinking processes and putting its thinking energy into survival. Feelings are not facts, but the mind will be resistent to information that is coming in from the higher brains--unless it has been trained to let these higher thinking processes override survival instincts. This will help people understand why Jesus said that if you are not willing to mentally let go of the need to survive (your reptilian brain) and give your thinking to God (a higher conscious type thinking) you will not be able to have the spiritual walk needed to see God. (If you try to save your life, you will lose it. You must pick up your cross daily, that is sacrifice your survival instincts daily, and allow God to work His will in your life.) Christ also said that fear and trust are incompatible. He said that perfect love for God will cast out fear. In other words, a fearful person will have a hard time loving God. We must learn to conquer our fears by strengthening the higher brains (what people call higher levels of consciousness). The fifth brain processes concepts, works with abstract thoughts, and can pull up

Page 396 ...

thoughts from various parts of the mind and do comparisons. The fifth brain is a reflecting meditating type of brain. It is capable of integrating many concepts together. In a sense it lives, it feeds off of thoughts. Marijuana triggers this brain. Guided drug trips in sensory deprivation tanks can be used to program this brain. The higher brains can develop dominance over the lower brains to such a degree that the survival instinct can be overridden completely, cases in point, Jesus and his apostles allowed their own martyrdoms, the Anabaptists under Menno Simon’s teachings on the Bible peacefully allowed their own deaths, and modern-day Christians under Bill Gothard’s teachings in Uganda allowed themselves martyrdom under Idi Amin rather than fleeing. These were all deaths for a higher cause, not deaths from mind-control. An alter who suicides the system is acting under the confusion of behavior modification where it is acting under the programming lie that it is protecting the system from greater harm. This is simply a misguided survival instinct. What this means is that safety and trust are inseparable issues. If front alters trust a therapist who is not protecting their system from their mind-control abusers, then it shows that the front alters are dissociated from the ongoing abuse. The alters that are not dissociated from the ongoing abuse are probably the ones that are helping hold up the therapy! - Why don’t they trust the therapist? The front alters trust the therapist? After reading this, the reader can see why the deeper ones don’t have trust. If the system sees that there are higher concepts at stake, that they have a role to play in helping other victims, they may be able to override their fears with thoughts from higher brains. Trust is in part going to be established by building up the higher brains. This is why spiritual issues should not be neglected in helping a victim. The first brain can also be worked with by working with the body. The body memories of torture can be worked on to help work out some of the body tension that helps stimulate the strong survival danger signals. Massage and some types of rolfing or yoga might contribute to re-orienting the first brain. The first brain’s thinking sometimes show up in body symptoms.

Page 397 ...

TRUTH, discernment of

[For this section, we decided to let Fritz offer the reader some helpful hints about seeking and finding the truth. Then we’ll add a few comments at the end. Fritz has a reason for approaching the subject as he does, so try reading through it first before judging it.]

Everybody has their own methods for figuring truth out. Some are finding it better than others. As with other things, there isn’t one set way for determining truth. The procedures are going to vary from situation to situation, but there are certainly some useful tips that can be passed on from one truth seeker to another. Finding truth is not a matter of taste. One doesn’t investigate the one-true god by deciding what god suits our tastes best -- but lots of people do this anyway. As we set our personal criteria for what is truth, we will find others in disagreement with us. Ultimately, real truth is not something personal but something all truth seekers can agree upon. This is why Jesus Christ’s words are so powerful, they are eternally truthful. They are as much truth as they were when they were spoken. Even though truth is not relative, but is an eternal objective truth, God has given us free choice and a mind with which to choose what we want to believe. Many have mistakingly considered one’s religious views as a matter of taste, not a matter of truth. That is perhaps the first hurdle to correctly jump in the search for truth--Is this a matter of personal taste or is it a matter of truth. What I eat for breakfast is my choice, which of the foods is most beneficial for my body is a complex issue of truth. Because the Watchtower Society teaches that knowledge about God is an issue of truth not taste, the JW’s believe that they can apply rational thought in their search for God. The Jehovah’s Witnesses have a book Reasoning From the Scriptures. The idea behind the title is a good one. There is a place for reason and logic, but we must be careful to

place the Word of God as the foundation from which we reason. Unfortunately, that is not what the Jehovah’s Witnesses do. They reason that the God in 3 persons is unreasonable, because there can’t be both one God, and 3 Gods, so they reject the Triune nature of God, even though the Scriptures are very clear that the Father is God Almighty, Christ is God Almighty, and the Holy Spirit is God Almighty. Three persons, one God. Sometimes we don’t have enough understanding to reason from. The concept of three persons in one supreme being seems outrageous at first, and yet that is exactly what MPD (DID) is. That is one reason some people can not except multiple personalities either. If we reason from our past understandings, we may not be able to adequately explain new phenomena. The parallels between MPD and what the Bible says about God are enormous, once a person really gets a handle on how MPD really functions within the mind. There are so many misconceptions about MPD, and misconceptions about the "Trinity" (the word doesn’t appear in Scriptures), that this subject really needs a book in itself to explain the parallels. But the bottom line is that we believe what God has written to us, and then we reason from there. If God says He exists in three persons, we accept that and then reason from there. We don’t reason away what God Almighty says. This is where so many of us get ourselves into trouble. The Pharisees were able to make the Word of God to have no effect, by thinking out things. Thinking doesn’t always take us in the right direction even if it makes sense. This is probably why some people have rejected logic and reasoning in their Christian walk. Logic is a function of a clear mind. The Scriptures show godly men reasoning things out.

Page 398 ...

Being a reasonable person can be a good testimony for Christ. But we must always humbly bear in mind that our minds only have a small part of the facts and understanding about the universe and life that exists. If I understand one-billionth of what can be known about my situation, I suppose I am fortunate. God understands so much more. If His Word states something that seems unreasonable--I would rather trust His Word, than my own feeble understanding. However, if I begin to have thoughts that are contrary to the Word of God, and contrary to how I normally think, then logic helps me realize that these are not my own thoughts--they are the thoughts of demons. This is an example of how reasoning from Scriptures can spare us from trouble. When we mentally review how we have obtained certain thought patterns, if we acquaint ourselves with how evil spirits influence a man’s thinking via our actions opening up portals and strongholds, then we can logically separate out those thoughts that are from God and those thoughts that are from Satan. Most fears are ungodly, and they come from Satan’s kingdom. Hope and faith come from God. Discouragement and depression are not given to us from God, they are given to us from our adversary Satan. There may be exceptions to this, but in most cases it is clear that Satan’s kingdom is here to steal from us peace, hope, love and faith, and is here to give us hate, fear, and discouragement. We have to learn to be happy. We have to allow God to bring us peace. Logically, if you want a happy life, you must go to the Kingdom that wants to bring you peace, joy, love, and happiness. People look for happiness in the strangest places! Logic-and reasoning will tell you that Satan can’t bring you happiness. Logic can be helpful to us in our Christian walk. Examples were given of how that is true. We must be cautious in how we use logic. Logic is not to be used to overturn the Word of God. None of us are brilliant enough to challenge God’s Word. Logic & reasoning is how we protect what God has already taught us & placed into our hearts and consciences. As we gather information, we can take best advantage of that information if we separate the chaff from the wheat. Is the person giving this information speaking in generalities, or is he speaking about an exception to the rule, or is he speaking about a specific case? When someone speaks about their private thoughts, how they love someone, or have heartburn, their thoughts are private, we must accept that we only can approximately understand exactly what they are feeling and thinking. When we witness a car accident with another person, our perspective of the accident is our own private perception of the event--BUT other people can also witness the event. The car accident is NOT a subjective event, even though there is some subjectivity in people’s perception of it. The accident is not an idea it is an objective event. Modern philosophy has a hard time accepting this, even though it makes common sense. The events of that objective reality can be distorted or misreported and not reported in many different ways. However, the accident is an objective real event. More than one person can experience that reality. If we dream about an accident, then that is a concept. Concepts and what our judgement calls about what our senses have reported are two different things. We normally don’t doubt what we apprehend. We normally do question the existence of what we mentally create (our ideas); that is until we come to someone who has been programmed and taught via behavior modification not to trust their own senses. The programmed slave loses the ability to discern what is a concept, merely an idea the brain has imagined, and what is actually something that has an external reality and has been apprehended. Hallucinations will mask themselves as perceptions, when they are not perceptions at all. Further, they are very

Page 399 ...

suggestible. They have shut down their critical thinking and have an unconscious agreement with the programmer that whatever he says is truth. The movie/book 1984 which was written many years ago describes a time when society as a whole was under the mind-control of Big Brother. When the main character steps out of line, he is reprogrammed, by torture. The goal of the programming was to get this thought-offender to accept whatever truth the programmer wanted from him. The programmer wanted him to get to the point that when the programmer held up 4 fingers, the man didn’t know what he saw, but if the programmer said that the 4 fingers were 5, then the victim would actually see 5. This is exactly where the programmers get their victims, and is part of the reason they no longer can trust their own senses. Can several people have a simultaneous hallucination? Yes, and during the programming and during the life of the mind-controlled victim, hallucinations that are experienced by several people are a fake perception that is even more difficult to reject because our normal basis for deciding if something is an external reality that is being apprehended, versus our own imagination, is that other people can also see (or experience) it. When several other people experience something, that is a common test that the event happened in reality. (This is the concept of having several witnesses.) However, witnesses can be mistaken. The victim of mind-control must be given more than a Bible --"Here, take this, this is the truth." The victim of mind-control must take back what was stripped of them. They must learn to have that critical facility that has been stripped from them--the ability to ask is this an external reality that everyone can experience, or is this a perception, or a grand illusion that several people are only thinking.

Today, it is a fad to say everything is subjective. It is not. There is a reality. Our memories may or may not correspond to something that did exist. Memories can be perceptions and imaginations also, that mask themselves as experiences just like our hallucinations can. We can be skeptical about whether we have a concept in our mind that corresponds to what others could experience, or whether it is an imagination. But we can not accurately be skeptical of the existence of reality and truth. Since total skepticism of the existence of reality is self-defeating, the occultists have charged off in the other extreme, an equally wrong direction, and declared that if the mind has an idea, the idea must be attached to some reality, even if that reality is actually another magical sphere somewhere. This turns all fictions, visualizations, dreams, imaginations into some mystical perception of some supposed alternate reality. The truth is that these "magical realms" are shared hallucinations. No matter how many people have the same hallucination, that does not make that hallucination become a representation of some external reality. Reality is the world we live in together. The programmed multiple lives in their own private worlds. The therapist may have to enter that private world and bring the person back to the external world that humanity lives in together. If there is anything that highlights the differences between the external world of reality and the internal world of hallucination it is programmed multiplicity. Because the differences are obvious for the slave, there is no reason why they can’t return to the world of reality. The problem that lies for some non-multiples (especially some psychotics, but for many people in general) is that they can’t see the two tracks, they can’t see the two worlds. I have seen Americans watching soap operas, sitcoms, and other shows, and then tell me that the shows are real events, and no argument would dissuade them. In fact, the philosophers Locke and Descartes both shared the same problem, even as philosophers they could not see the difference between external reality that is apprehended by our senses, and our own

Page 400 ...

head-trips. As our senses gather in their sensory input, our minds go into gear to compare what they are sensing to what the mind has cataloged already. In other words, the mind is trying to make sense of what it is receiving. This is why we can "talk over someone’s head" or why I say that the common American has no frame of reference (& no world-view) to hang my information on. If we are unable to compare what we are sensing to anything else, it is unintellible to us. So learning is a building process, of comparing and building bridges from one item to the next. Our minds are masters at seeing relationships, but it still has to be a building process--whether the process is quick or slow. Some people want to jump over necessary steps of the building process, and read advanced level material before they are ready for it. That is one reason this book should only be read after a certain level of understanding is achieved. Detecting what is going on in the environment around a person is only part of what the human mind can do. It can also anticipate, plan, think, imagine, calculate, etc. The senses play only a limited role in our thinking. Sometimes we need to use common sense and realize a thought is merely a thought, and nothing else. Just because the thought develops in our mind, doesn’t mean there is any external reality to it. Feelings are not facts. Recovering victims of mind-control should remind themselves of this one frequently, feelings are not facts. On the flip side, there are certain phenomena is life which demand explanations, such as how did an extremely well-designed incredibly complex system of life as well as an incredible planet come into being? This is a fundamental question of reality. Although the answer "There was an Almighty Creator" calls for us to employ our imagination to visualize what we can’t see, that doesn’t subtract from God being an external reality. Something is not negated in its existence just because we can imagine it, or haven’t experienced it yet. Jesus in a sense argued for the existence of the Holy Spirit, by saying it was something not seen and yet it was something experienced and something that created tangible results like the wind blowing through the trees. He was essentially saying, yes, the Holy Spirit (Holy Ghost) is real. Aleister Crowley, a self-made satanist who revealed much more about the occult world than the Illuminati families would have done, based his Thalamic law, "Do what thou wilt, is the whole of the law" upon the underlying idea that pleasure is good. Common sense will teach people that pleasure and good are not equal. This philosophy is hedonism, and leads to self-destruction, which is what Crowley’s philosophy did to himself and others around him. Where this philosophy goes astray, is that Wisdom is good, but may not be obtained through simply pleasure. We may be pleased when we obtain Wisdom, but that pleasure in obtaining wisdom IS NOT wisdom itself but a by-product of having obtained a desired need. While thinking himself wise with all his satanic hedonistic cabalistic drug-sex magic, Crowley was going down a dead end. This is so obvious, that some modern thinkers try to revise the concept that pleasure is good, to the underlying idea that what is desirable for a man is good. But again this makes a mess out of things. People differ in their desires and this means what is evil for a victim of mind-control is good for the abuser. Betrand Russell connected to the Illuminati stated, "Ethics is the art of recommending to others what they must do to get along with ourselves." This fits with the basic viewpoint of many people today who think that there are no moral truths, everything is relative and subjective, just an opinion. If we approach the subject from an understanding that the way we as human beings are constructed by God, our very human nature has created needs within us. If we make a moral judgement it is not relative but it is grounded in the truth that we have a real need, and these

Page 401 ...

morals express a desire for the good that satisfying that need brings. For instance, a glass of water in the desert is a need, it is good. A glass of whiskey at the bar is a want, it appears good--but it is not a genuine need of the body. We ought to desire more of the things we need, but we often sacrifice these for our wants. Common sense teaches us a foundational moral law that we should desire what is really good for us. Good being defined as what mankind needs. If we know we that truly need something, then we know what is good, and we should desire having it. What sustains the universe? If we realize that God sustains the universe, then God is realized as a need, not a want. This explains why mankind is so busy with worship. Monkeys do not worship. Fish do not worship. But man tries to worship. Neither fish nor monkeys feel guilt because they do not sin. But man does, because man was given the free will to do what was right. What I am doing is laying the groundwork to show the reader that all these modern philosophies that say there are no absolute rights or wrongs, are not grounded in truth & reality. We as humans have needs, and to desire those real needs be met is good. Since the fall of man, which was the rise of religion, a great deal of muddying the waters has occurred. The fall of man paralleled the previous fall of Lucifer. The trauma-based mind-control is a mirror image of the fallen mind of Lucifer. At this point, - some of you readers will consider this to be wild preaching--because it is very unpopular to view the mind-control as something religious in nature. Because Luciferian gnosticism & Satanism are religions, it’s popular to ignore the religious side of the programming. To associate the occult with trauma-based mind-control seems to some secular therapists unnecessary. They want to sidestep the religious nature of the programming with the mistaken idea that they can sterilize what happens to the victim in strictly scientific terms. But if we don’t dismiss the existence of good & evil, God & Lucifer, and we understand the mind of Lucifer/Satan, then we amazingly "just happen" to have the greatest explanation for understanding the trauma-based mind-control. [Now Cisco will pick up from here.] Lucifer wanted to steal God’s identity. Lucifer in his fall was stripped of his birthright, his identity and his rank, and was separated from truth. Lucifer goes forth to steal the identity & birthright of children, and to separate them from truth. This is just a small part of how the mind-control is a reflection of the mind of Satan. An entire book could be written on this subject alone. No matter how painful it is for a mind-control victim to realize what Satan stole from them, once they have acknowledged that, and begin to take back what God originally gave them, then the wisdom God will give, will bring knowledge. And that knowledge will bring understanding. And with that understanding the eternal life force (spirit) that the Creator gives each person can look into the deepest pit of hell and it will still see the light of that truth. And Lucifer knows that when you put light on darkness, there is a light at the end of the tunnel which will continue to break down the darkness. The day one seeks truth with his whole heart, is the day he will find it. That light will be a light on the hill that will prevail over darkness. You can be sure that if you are dealing with mind-control structuring, you are dealing with Satan the father of all lies. When the victim can acknowledge the crimes that were done against him or her self, then he is able to acknowledge what Satan is, the Father of all lies. If evil is recognized as evil, then seek the goodness of truth. The truth will open a doorway into the mind that brings growth, maturity, stability, assurance, a new awakening, and other exciting things. The battle for your mind is between truth and evil.

Page 402 ...

ABREACTIONS, avoidence of

OVERVIEW. The original programming traumas are perpetrated by the programming cult because these traumas are dependably severe enough to cause the mind to split. Later traumas are the result of ongoing abuse by the slave’s users. They may cause splits because the multiple has developed splitting as a natural mental reflex to difficult situations.

The original programming traumas are so severe that if the slave remembers them, the memories of these traumas are enough to splinter the mind again. Traumas that result from ongoing perpetrator use of the slave may not be so traumatic, but they will also bring with them painful body memories, confusion, and the potential to splinter the mind.

Until recently, the major thrust of the therapeutic community has been to try to push the victim towards abreacting the trauma, which is actually causing more psychological stress and harm than good to the victim’s mind.

The correct Goal & some Basic Techniques.

Memory work needs to be done with the goal of preventing abreactions. Memories can be looked at by journaling, being placed on internal movie screens (or VCR players), by artwork and a number of other techniques. Of course the programmers are now a step ahead of therapists and are placing in programs to prevent these non-abreactive memory techniques. We will review some of the techniques for dealing with - abreactions. They basically follow common sense. When a person has a memory:

· they can be distracted to pull away from it,
· they can intentionally encase the memory in some box, vault, safe, room or other storage unit,
· or they can develop ways to slow down and tone down the affect of the memory so that the mind is cushioned from the severity of the memory.

As an alter struggles with memories, another alter can be intentionally shifted to hold the body. Some therapists will also develop a temporary safe room where an alter can retreat from memory work for a temporary respite. It is going to be nearly impossible for the victim not to suffer from their memories, in fact, every victim we know has suffered incalculable torment from their memories. The slogan "no pain, no gain" seems to have been written for their situation in life.

Page 403 ...

ABREACTIONS, understanding

MEMORY FLASHBACKS. A review of history will show that victims of torture/trauma can potentially get memory flashbacks for the rest of their life. These memory flashbacks can be triggered in a number of ways, and the memories may lay dormant and hidden for any length of time. The disadvantage of having memories is that they often bring fear, body pain, and loss of sleep. They are like nightmares--although technically memories are different than nightmares in that they are more closely rooted to an actual torture/trauma. The person experiencing these flashbacks typically thinks they are going crazy. It is important for you to realize that millions of people who have been tortured have also thought they were going crazy, but that what was really happening is that they were having just like you a normal reaction to some very frightening events. To get flashbacks means that the mind is again trying to overcome a bad experience. Flashbacks are not a reason to panic---they are normal---and if a person can remind him/herself to stay calm as possible, one will get through them better. It may be difficult to stay calm during a difficult memory. But staying calm is one of the goals which can be worked toward and achieved. One reason that flashback occur during sleep is that the mind’s defenses are weaker during sleep so the resistance to the memory coming is reduced. There are a number of positive things that can be done in response to memory flashbacks. Although the memory flashbacks on the surface appear to be negative experiences--there also can be some positive benefits. If the memories are correctly handled they can break down the dissociation. The memories can be used to protect the person from future danger. What I suggest as a plan of action is that you accomplish several goals:

1. reduced and eliminate the feeling of passive helplessness that comes from not being able to control memory. I will suggest ways to control memory.
2. take measures during the memory to restore your contact with present reality.
3. continue to breakdown dissociation.

There are a list of things a person can try when flashbacks occur. Some will work and others won’t. One may try these in the order listed:

a. Try to think of something that is opposite of what the memory is about or something that is incompatible with the event. If the event is centered around hate, think of an event that is centered in love.
b. Next, one might try to think of the negative consequences of going through the memory. This might encourage action to sidestep it.
c. Try an activity that will distract the mind.
d. Find out what triggered the memory flashback and then try to remove the flashback via the memory-on-a-movie-screen method or the memory-locked-in-a-safe-box method.
e. If nothing else try pushing it back from the mind--see if clenching your teeth and pushing your tongue hard against your palate will help.

To gain control of the flashback when it occurs here are some suggestions:

a. Learn and know of what situations cause certain flashbacks. This will give you a greater sense of control and lessen the panic that comes from certain flashbacks. Gaining control over flashbacks can seem like one step forward and one step back but eventually control is gained--sometimes without the person realizing the progress they have made.

b. When in a memory--first move a finger then bit by bit the rest of the body. Then start controlling your breathing (this can all be practiced anytime). Then get up and look out the window to prove to yourself that you are at home and not in the memory. Then write down the memory. This will help in several ways including the dissociation. If it gets difficult to write the memory--then interrupt yourself with

Page 404 ...

quiet deep breathing. After writing down the memory--don’t reread--but go get something to drink which will be calming such as a cup of coffee. If the relaxation is practiced and can be achieved in response to bad memories it will give you a sense of control over the memories. c. The victim can talk with their support person about what the trauma was and what it meant to you at the time it happened. This will allow you to achieve an assimilation of the experience into yourself. If you can discuss the event in full and the personal meaning you have a greater chance of conquering and controlling the flashback. It has been reported that memories that are too difficult for people to talk out because they have contradictory feelings, embarrassment etc. regarding them, will repeat themselves and the mind will often become obsessed with those difficult flashbacks. Talking them out can be healing. Why deal with memory flashbacks? One reason is that flashbacks intrude into the present and mean that you are pulled away from enjoying the present reality into reliving something in the past. Relief from flashbacks will help you, the healing victim, to concentrate better, get more pleasure out of being with others, and make life more enjoyable. Bear in mind also, that everyone who has been tortured goes through periods in time when they disconnect from others. This has been called different names such as "emotional anesthesia" and "psychic numbing" so don’t be hard on yourself if you temporarily lose the ability to feel close to others. The torture was aimed at breaking the victim’s personality. Accepting that that was a goal of the perpetrators of the mind-control programming is a step in restoring the identity that could have been there. This leads to the next area of concern: the dehumanization.

DEHUMANIZATION. Because devaluation of another person makes it easier to torture them, devaluation normally occurs in the minds of torturers. They dehumanized not only to control you--but to build up their own image enough to partially justify torturing you. They most likely were also devalued and dehumanized in their own lives and passed on that devaluation. Realizing the reasons why dehumanization was carried out may help a person overcome the process. Another help is to set yourself up in situations where you have positive experiences using your talents and skills will help you overcome the negatives of dehumanization.

Page 405

Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:

· goes into denial
· learns a. not to trust anyone incl. self, b. since trust is the basis of communication they also learn not to be in touch with the world.

· emotional distance
· collecting spirit
· clingy behavior or independent behavior
· learning difficulties


· lack of emotions
· denial of abuse

Page 406 ...

Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:

· to guard itself it creates free floating fears
· to further guard itself withdraws from people or acts aggressive toward others
· splits off a part to take the trauma
· tries to remedy by reaction in the other direction, i.e. becomes an obsessive caretaker of others
· learns a. help & support do not exist, b. that there is no power against the programmers.


· eating, sleeping and bedwetting disorders
· nightmares
· phobias
· withdrawal or aggressiveness from others
· obsessive caretaking


· Suicidal thoughts

Page 407 ...


Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:
· preserves a sense of the world—I must be bad. It was my fault.
· preserves self-respect—Since I didn’t resist, I am at fault.
· preserves good image of abuser—I can continue to love him, because I was at fault.
· preserves happiness—What a thrill to be abused, I must have wanted this for being so bad.
· learns to have a. a comfort zone of self-blame, b. to become a caretaker which sets the victim up for more self-blame when things go wrong, c. fantasize to stop the pain.

· wants to punish one self
· sabotages self achievements & acts of love by others
· isolates

· guilt, shame, & a "bad" self-image

Page 408 ...

Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:
· mind accepts the violations
· concludes that all touching is a sexual come-on
· learns a. confused & inappropriate behavior and values, b. perceives its value from being a sexual object

· far too-early sexual development
· strong negative or positive feelings/reactions to sexual issues
· confusion about sexual norms

· lots of sexual issues

Page 409

Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:
·decides not to tell about the trauma, becomes secretive
· believes it has a guilt to punish
· either it decides to quit risking failure by reaching for success OR over tries to succeed but never feels successful.


· secretive
· self-destructive behavior


· feelings of guilt, shame, self-hate, and isolation

Page 410 ...

Child’s subconscious mind protects itself:

· creates amnesia walls & splits the mind into dissociative parts
· the mind disowns the body
· learns to a. dissociate as a defensive habit & b. to copy others in cult as role models.


· no sense of danger
· dissociative behavior
· phobias
· eye-rolls
· sleeping disorders
· inconsistent behaviors
· lost time
· denies acts that others have witnessed
· moody
· uses pronoun "we"


· helpless feelings
· no confidence
· depersonalization
· emotions locked up

Page 411 ...

ABUSERS, confrontations or not

Several victims of mind-control have said that they felt the best pay-back that they could give their abusers was to get well. This is probably right. There wouldn’t be any punishment that would do justice to the crimes that have been committed. We victims should try and fight evil with something positive, something good. But what about confronting an abuser, and letting the perpetrator’s system know the suffering they’ve caused, etc. Just because the victim has worked through some issues, doesn’t mean the abuser has. The abuser had to sear his mind years ago. What abusers do, is that first they sear their consciences and then they develop justifications in their mind for what they do. They are deeply entrapped in their own rationalizations. The Network has prepared them excellent alibi’s to "prove" they could not have done it. Talking to an abuser about your mind-control issues is like talking to a cement wall. All it will do is get the therapist and the victim into more problems. In some cases, the False Memory Syndrome has helped the abuser and the therapist ends up getting taken out of commission. Keep the therapy work private. Go toward health quietly. The world is not even ready to understand the healing of the victim. And the abuser is even less ready to be understanding. The abusers simply feel threatened. Some victims have a deep drive to make their abusers understand. They are struggling with the effects of the mind-control, and have not yet realized that the abusers are NOT their friend, but another multiple who is also deeply trapped in what they are doing.

Page 412 ...

ALTERS, how to work with deep Illuminati alters (issues for therapists)

Up to now, therapists have chosen therapeutic modalities that resulted in avoiding dealing with the deep Illum. alters. One of the most acclaimed centers for helping programmed multiples only works on issues that presenting alters have, and uses electro-shock techniques to try to wipe out deeper issues in the mind. Other prominent psychiatrists who have travelled & trained other therapists how to deal with MPD/DID have incorrectly taught that right brain-left brain issues are simply a program. Therapists have by & large ignored Illuminati religious beliefs, which has insured that deeper alters are not going to present themselves to be ridiculed. Others have attempted to cast the deeper alters out, which in reality buries them deeper into the subconscious, where they carry out their influence at an even harder-to-find level. In fact, when this is being written in 1996, most therapists still remain ignorant of or in denial that the Illuminati exists. Our system has unsuccessfully looked far & wide for a professional who understands the deeper Illuminati alters. We believe this material will make a fresh and valuable contribution in the work needed to free Illuminati slaves. Therapists are in a difficult position to work on Ipsissimus/Grand Master alters or Grand Dame or Mother-of-darkness levels, because, before they can learn how to work with deeper parts, they must forget many things they have been incorrectly taught. Therapists need to see the interrelationships between Illuminati cosmology & beliefs and the programming that is carried out. Witchcraft rituals of the Illuminati are a form of deep level programming. This is why it is ludicrous

for Wiccan counselling centers to help mind-controlled slaves, & yet there are a number of licensed wiccan centers counseling’’ multiples with programming. The very teachings of witchcraft are intertwined with the programming that needs to be disassembled. Several elements that are common to all forms of witchcraft are: a. the stimulation of an awareness of a hidden side of "reality", b. the awakening and training of hidden powers of the mind, c. the intense training and discipline of the various levels of the subconscious mind. For instance, psychic abilities and astral projection are basic components to witchcraft. Witchcraft at the higher Illuminati levels is the skill to work in the subconscious mind & change consciousness at will. Witchcraft, especially the cabalistic and hermetic-based witchcraft of the Illuminati, understood how to work with the subconscious mind long before modern psychology existed. Modern psychology is actually based upon cabalistic doctrines. There is a one-to-one correspondence between Freud’s theories and Jung’s theories and the older witchcraft philosophies. The child, adult, parent of transactional analysis is simply the maiden, mother, crone triple goddess of the Illuminati. And these three parts of the mind have been well understood and manipulated in rituals for centuries. 2 important steps to take in order to help deeper parts are: a. realize that the deeper parts are centered in a trance state in their internal world, and are developed not to function in the conscious world, but are highly skilled to function in the subconscious mind, b. dream state therapy should be developed to help the deeper parts unravel their programming.

Page 413 ...


When the core is split, the dissociated parts that split when the child was in a rage are used to make clones. These little child parts are very small, and have not had a chance to grow up. The creation of clones is described in Vol 2. After they are discovered by the programmer he uses hypnotic magic to drop a robot suit over the child alter. The suits are made of different types of metal and there are a number of different types of suits. Often the children turned robots are given serial no.s. They may perceive themselves as military units. Clone splits are formed into armies that come to the front of the mind to protect the programming. They are like a nursery of screaming children. It is impossible for the front host alters to calm these clones down. What has been found to work on the clones from the 40’s through the 60’s programming is to put water on them. Water paralyzes them. Then one can go around to the back and find wires or switches on their suits. A switch may shut them off. Or perhaps the wires can be tampered with. When these little children are looked at, these parts still have probes and needles in them. These child alters need to go to an internal hospital, where they can mentally go through some care to get them relieved from the state they perceive themselves in. After they are out of their suits, the robot suits can be vaporized.


Judge alters are alters who enforce the laws of the system, which of course are the guidelines & programming established by the programmer. In witchcraft paradoxes are used. Each split of the mind is valued. The alters, such as the judges, are mirroring their abuse. Fear is the basis of their obedience. They have seen the worst terrors. They have seen things others haven’t seen. They are structured along the lines of demonology, and they believe that they must answer to Lucifer. They have no doubt that they are going to hell. They believe the better they obey, the better life they will have in hell. Their obedience in keeping the rest of the system in line with the programming is their desire for a better life in hell, which they already have a foretaste of. Much of their programming was put in during the sensory deprivation, so they don’t fully comprehend why they do what they do, they just believe that what they are doing is for their survival. Many of the deeper alters are functioning with a survival of the fittest attitude, where only the strong and obedient survive. They have been given the Spirit of War & they war for the system. They carry the full force of demonic possession. The starting point for many of these deeper alters is to realize they were programmed to their script. MIRROR IMAGES.The script for the mirror images came from God floating over the water in the Bible’s Genesis. Mirrors of an alter are simply fragments of some alter. They are taught they are separate, but the separation is an illusion. There are several programming tricks they do with the child such as "This is your hand" trick, to confuse the child’s mind about the mirror image. The splits are done in front of mirrors. "ITS THE MIRROR IMAGE ThAT IS GETTING HURT, AND HAS BLOOD ALL OVER IT, NOT YOU." After the child accepts the mirror image as real, they put it into hiding with hypnotic suggestions, & they tell the child the mirror image split doesn’t exist. The mirror image will take the programming traumas & the anger.

Page 414 ...

HOW TO WORK WITH DEEPER ILLUMINATI PARTS (deeper issues for therapists)

The following are things for therapists:


· a. how liluminati beliefs intertwine with programming
· b. how the external Illuminati is structured
· c. how to do dream therapy and to be sensitive to dreams


· a. the Illuminati reinstates (reprograms) sealing programs over the dream state approx. every 3 years to stop revealing dreams from surfacing.
· b. how Helping Alter can work deep in the subconscious to pull memories and to interact in a positive way with deeper parts
· c. how programming hits at a subconcscious level. It may seem benign to the conscious mind, and yet be building up subconscious momentum and growing power.
· d. how complex it is for deeper alters to separate objective & subjective realities.


· a. the training in programming that the deeper hierarchy alters have
· b. that the deeper alters will respond in a manner that reflects their position, staus and training.

Page 415 ...

BACKACHES, suggestions for body aches

Body aches, especially backaches, can keep the mind so preoccupied with pain that the rest of the mind doesn’t work on other issues. The body, mind, and spirit all need healing. When building an alter system, the Illuminati programmers build in protective programming by using spinal surgical techniques. This kind of programming is usually done in a hospital. It is done by specialists who know the spine and the nerves. There are several variations of what is done. They will attach this spinal pain to a hypnotic trigger that if you remember such and such, you will relive the intense spinal pain. The variations on this, are to paralyze someone from the waist down, or a leg, or an arm. Using surgical drugs and procedures, they can even make a person "blind" by hitting certain nerves and this can be used to create blind alters, or blinding programs. Simple electroshock to parts of the back can be painful. The Illuminati also lay in the spirit Leviathan which lays on the spinal column and causes intense pain if the victim goes toward health. A number of Illuminati victims have gotten relief from intense back pain by deliverance from Leviathan. What this means is that a support team that is working on issues may want to have a good chiropractor on the team, and maybe a masseuse. Working the muscles of the body will free up trauma pains, and alters that get locked up throughout the entire body. Needles that are still mentally in the body are also locked up in body pain too. If a victim hits programming that flips them into pain, the alters will of course be preoccupied with the pain in the body and they will lose sight of the memory. Go directly to the pain and work on the pain issues, because the memory is sheltered in the pain.

Page 416 ...

The following inventory can be worked on by a victim of mind-control as home work or the therapist can use the questions as a means to build rapport and understand the client better. In order to save printing costs this section will not provide room to write the answers down. Sheets of paper or a tape recorder are needed to record answers. Questions are numbered for easy reference. This inventory is for the therapeutic process--which means ultimately it is for the victim. The questions are meant to be a guide, feel free to speak about anything that pertains to each biographical time period. If something important happened that you want to report, you don’t need a question to talk or write about it.

EVERY ONE HAS ROOTS. The following questions are about the client’s roots. Roots are important, we need to know where we’ve come from to know where we’re headed. Understanding the client’s family may reveal a great deal about the client. Learning one’s roots can reveal important clues as to why things occurred in your life.

· 1. Tell the story about how your parents met and fell in love?
· 2. Tell a story that would show what your mother was like.
· 3. What can you say about your mother, do you know where she came from, where she was born and what her life was like before she met your father?
· 4. What are some of your mother’s emotional traits, was she warm and loving, or strict, or nagging, or unstable, or humorous, how was she?
· 5. What was the best thing about your father?
· 6. What was the worst thing about your father?
· 7. What do you know about your father’s bloodlines, his genealogy?
· 8. What do you know about your mother’s bloodlines, her genealogy?
· 9. Was there anything unusual about your mother or father?
· 10. Did your mother ever give any sex education to you, what was her attitude towards the subject in your view?
· 11. What was your father’s work?
· 12. What kind of bedtime stories did your father tell you?
· 13. Is there something important to say about your grandparents or greatgrandparents?
· 14. In what ways were your uncles and aunts important to you?

CHILDHOOD (pre-school) This section will be one of the most critical. Don’t be embarrassed if you don’t remember, just be open & frank, because this inventory is for you. The therapist needs to watch for protectors to surface with the "approved solutions", & watch the different slants that are given by the client at different times to the same subjects.

· 15. What is your earliest memory? How old were you? Where did you live?
· 16. What do you know about your birth, were you pre-mature, were you c-section, were you tiny or frail?
· 17. Did you have older siblings who helped raise you?
· 18. What was the neighborhood like that you grew up in before kindergarten?
· 19. Did you ever get into trouble when you were between 3 and 5 years old?

Page 417 ...

· 20. Were you ever sent to your room, or made to stand in a corner in your first few years?
· 21. How did your parents punish you?
· 22. Who disciplined you the most?
· 23. What kind of religious experiences did you have as a small child?
· 24. Who was more religious, your father or your mother?
· 25. Who was your first grade teacher?
· 26. What was your first grade teacher like?
· 27. Can you describe your first day at school?
· 28. How would other people have described you when you were a small child?
· 29. What kind of chores did you have as a child?
· 30. What kind of games did you play as a small child?
· 31. Do you think you had a happy childhood?
· 32. What are some of your favorite childhood memories?
· 33. What is your worst childhood memory?
· 34. How did you feel about going to doctors when you were little?
· 35. What did you want to be when you grew up?
· 36. Do you remember putting your teeth under the pillow for the tooth fairy?
· 37. Do you remember Christmas or some other holidays?
· 38. Did you know any crazy people when you were little?
· 39. What did you think about people who were a different race when you were little?
· 40. What did you think about Halloween when you were little?
· 41. Did you ever get sick when you were a little child?
· 42. Did your family go on any vacations, could you describe one?

ELEMENTARY SCHOOL DAYS. If the client is talkative, let them provide as much as they want. When dealing with victims of mind-control everything about their life tends to be a clue as to what has gone on. The therapist can trust their own curiosity and ask further questions. For some victims, their host alter will not have memories below the age of 18, or their memories will be spotty. However, the newer mind-control victims are getting better childhood cover memories laid in so that their mind-control is not so obvious.

· 43. Do you remember the first book you read?
· 44. What kind of things did your parents like to read?
· 45. What kind of toys did you have in elementary school?
· 46. What were some of your favorite games during your elementary school days?
· 47. Did you learn to play any musical instruments?
· 48. What were some of your favorite songs during that time period?
· 49. Did your family move a lot, and how did that affect you?
· 50. What was the worst experience that you can remember from your school days?
· 51. What was the best experience that you can remember from your school days?
· 52. Did someone in your class of the opposite sex have a crush on you?
· 53. Can you remember what was the most memorable gift that you gave as a child?
· 54. Can you remember what your favorite gift that you received was?
· 55. Did your family take vacations during your school years?
· 56. Did you have any strange people in your school or in your neighborhood, and how did you feel about them?

Page 418 ...

· 57. What kind of pets did you have growing up? What happened to them?
· 58. Do you remember your tenth and eleventh birthdays?
· 59. List the names of your elementary school teachers.
· 60. Describe your elementary school building on the inside & outside.
· 60. What was the name(s) of the Junior High that you went to?
· 61. What was the most influential teacher that you had during your school days?
· 62. Did you hang around with any kids, and if so, what were they like?
· 62. What kind of neighbors did you have?
· 63. What kind of trouble did you get into?

HIGH SCHOOL & TEENAGE YEARS. The high school years are years when the child is meeting interesting members of the opposite sex, preparing for their future, and working at their first jobs. It’s a time for new beginning as well as turmoils. It is also a time when the victim will be in many secret rituals, and will be used for many mind-control assignments. There are no right or wrong answers, if the client thinks of something else, besides what initially comes to mind, then it is quite alright to have several "most" events in answer to a "what is the most...?" type of question.

· 64. What was the craziest thing you ever did in high school? Why did you do it, and what happened?
· 65. Who was your favorite person during your high school days?
· 66. Who were your best friends during high school?
· 67. What is the funniest thing that happened to you as a teenager?
· 68. What did you expect to do when you graduated from high school?
· 69. Did you go to your high school prom?
· 70. Do you remember any of the nicknames you had for your teachers?
· 71. What was your favorite subject in school?
· 72. In your opinion, which did you like more in high school, sports or intellectual pursuits?
· 73. Could you describe what the high school building looked like?
· 74. Were you active in a church during your high school days?
· 75. Did you do any great activities with other teenagers in some religious club or sunday school group?
· 76. Were you a leader of any activity during your high school days?
· 77. What was it like going to the movies as a teenager in your area?
· 78. Who were your heros during your teenage years?
· 79. Who were the heroes of your peers when you were a teenager?
· 80. Did anybody ever accuse you of being dishonest as a teenager?
· 81. Did you try to pattern your life after anyone, if so who? do you still admire the qualities you saw in that person?
· 82. What kind of conflicts did you have with your parents?
· 83. What kind of conflicts did you have with your teachers?
· 84. What kind of conflicts did you have with your peers?
· 85. What was your attitude toward drugs and smoking during your teenage years?
· 86. Was there ever a point in time where you went against your parents wishes? tell the story about how you managed to get your way.

Page 419 ...

ADULT LIFE. It almost goes without saying that the therapist is trying to build rapport with these questions not to interrogate, not to judge, but simply to listen and learn. Find out what was the most important thing(s) in the person’s life. Find out what the client remembers that was interesting.

· 87. What kind of things were you involved in after high school?
· 88. Where did you go to college or trade school?
- 89. What was it like to leave home, to go to higher education or to be on your own?
· 90. Did you join any fraternity or sorority?
· 91. What was your major field of study after you left high school?
· 92. Did you have any part-time jobs, after you got out of high school?
· 93. Who were your best friends during the first few years after high school?
· 94. When was the first time you met your spouse? Describe the meeting.
· 95. Where did you live after you first got married?
· 96. How much did it cost for different items when you first got married, for instance, a packet of bacon, a gallon of gas,a dozen eggs, a hamburger?
· 97. What did the future look like when you graduated from high school?
· 98. What did the future look like when you graduated from college, or a trade school?
- 99. Do you think attitudes about sex have changed for the better or worse over the years? Why do you think attitudes are changing?
· 100. What did your family think about your first spouse? What were their reactions?
· 101. Did you have any common interests with your first spouse, & if so, what?
· 102. Who would you have liked to have married that you didn’t?
· 103. How would you describe yourself in your twenties?
· 104. From where you are today, when did you decide upon your career? When did you first entertain thoughts of this career? Were the seeds of where your life has ended up present in your early life?
· 105. What do you consider your most important achievement so far in your life?
· 106. How do you feel about God, and could you please describe your image of what kind of person God is?
· 107. Did you have military service, and what was that like?
· 108. Are you a flashy dresser, conservative, sloppy, well-groomed dresser?
· 109. How important is it to dress well?
· 110. What kind of pets did you have in adult life?
· 111. Do you think much about death? Do you fear death?
· 112. What do you think happens to people when they die?
· 113. Did you ever have an ESP experience?
· 114. Did you ever have a ghost experience?
· 115. What do you think about magic?
· 116. What kind of foods do you like? What kinds of foods do you detest and why?
· 117. What did you think about Watergate?
· 118. Where was the edge of the city when you graduated from high school, has the city grown since then?
· 119. Is there something that we have failed to talk about that you feel is important?

There are reasons why each of the questions was selected and why it was placed in the order that it appears. Those reasons are based upon experience with mind-control victims. To prepare this list of questions we looked at several books that were designed to inventory a person’s life. We were greatly assisted by William Fletcher’s book Recording Your Family History. Berkeley, CA: Ten Speed Press, 1989. The book is an organized guide to asking family history questions. This or other sourees might provide more ideas on reconstructing the client’s bio.

Page 420 ...

We will let our support person Fritz write about how a support person can deal with burn out: Allow me to start by saying, if you’re feeling stressed at this moment, take a deep breath, close your eyes for a moment and then exhale and relax. Burnout hits people who have nothing more to give. When you have been stressed to the max, the rewards are not there, and you have all these nagging agitating issues. Even a well-working piece of equipment will eventually rust--so don’t be too hard on yourself. Working with programmed multiples & implant victims will give a person long periods of distress, pressures from all angles, & a nauseating feeling that you are stuck and not going anywhere. I have always found that it’s healthier mentally & physically for me to be actively doing something, no matter how small against the mind-control, rather than being passive in difficult times. In fact, military units often find that their men handle stress better being on the attack than sitting around in a defensive mode waiting for the bombs to drop. I manage to keep a healthy positive outlook by continuing to take steps, even tiny ones. Attack the problem? You may feel like an ant against an elephant trying to bite off more than you can chew. There are indeed limits to what a single person trying to fly solo against the mind-control can achieve. Try to find some support from a few intelligent listening people. One therapist cries her heart out to God. Tears are not a bad idea. Did you know that tears contain stress hormones, so that crying actually empties the body of stress hormones. (Now wouldn’t we like to see our clients do more crying?) If it doesn’t seem like anyone, the client, friends, or God is listening to your difficulties, unfortunately your body quietly is. Emotions are the bridge between the body and the mind. Interaction between the two need emotions. Remember the reptilian brain controls the body, and is connected to emotions. The higher minds control thoughts, and they too are connected to emotions. Your body will respond to stress, with symptoms like higher blood pressure. Mine doubled in one year. Obviously, there is a price to pay for such challenging work. So where does this leave you? If you can connect with the tragedy of what is happening to your client, then therapy will take on a purpose. The price you pay will be worth every drop of sweat, or every diastolic & systolic number on your blood pressure. You may have to learn how to blow some things off. Multiples will say a lot of things. Everyone has buttons. Don’t be hard on yourself that you have buttons. My favorite ones are:

· Nobody listens.
· You can’t count on anyone.
· It’s never good enough.
· Don’t tell me what to do or think.
· Is anybody thinking?

Can you identify with any of these, what is on your list of buttons? Some of us are like ballistic missiles. When our buttons are pushed off we go. Realizing that we have buttons, and how the firing mechanisms got put in during our lifetime, can be helpful to diffuse these. A person only has so much energy and when they are constantly going ballistic they burn up a lot of energy quick. And if you stuff it under the emotional rug--you will still bum out, because your body is connected to the rest of you, and all those unused stress chemicals are still there. In fact, support team members should look at symptoms like pain in the gut, headaches, pain in the neck and realize some of these are simply the stress of all that is being dealt with. Do you have unresolved emotional or physical pain, that are visible as buttons and pain?

Perhaps you are wearing down because you have self-doubts, and negative expectations. Who wants to be like the greek mythological

Page 421 ...

Sisyphus who pushed a boulder up the hill, only to have it roll down again and again? Don’t devalue your little forward steps. Keep taking those steps forward, and recognize your accomplishments. Perhaps you need to write out what has been accomplished for you the support person and the client. I discovered that progress reports have been very-encouraging and well received. Often when I thought that success was self-evident the system was not able to see any until they read the progress report. Each of us are unique, and I am in no position to tell you what will or won’t encourage you or your client. However, some people have been helped by writing out all their self-doubts and then dumping them into a trash can. Let’s face it, bad news is often not as bad as it seems; and good news is often not as good as it seems. Throw your doubts away, but do try and get some support. Even if you are creative and capable, when you begin to get exhausted you will begin to lose that creative edge to meet the latest challenge. Does the problem still seem too big to fix? Trying to figure out how to deal with all kinds of alters as well as people in the external world is a big chore, and the work keeps accumulating of things that need to be worked on with your client. I don’t have all the answers, but part of the answer lies in remaining flexible, learning how to negotiate and communicate clearly with alters, and part of it lies in just accepting that some things come with the territory. The trust issues with programmed multiples are difficult and persistent. They will wear a person down, in the same fashion that having a boss looking over your shoulder the entire time gets old. Blow it off. It comes with the territory. And again, I can’t repeat this enough we need to work in teams. I have been greatly revitalized by working with others.

If you think you’ve got problems, put yourself in the victim’s shoes! With several victims who have just begun, their alters asked how long it would be until they were well, & I’ve told them, ‘Your beginning a long journey, like walking from New York to California. If we have to walk the entire distance, it’s going to be a long journey. If we can do some flying it will go quicker." I was trying to balance the enormous amount of work that needs to be done, with the actual truth that some of the better methods can get a great deal done in short intense periods. I want the victims of mind-control to see the hope. In order for victims of mind-control to obtain better results, and to minimize burnout among therapists/support persons, I suggest that we carry out an ongoing process to weed out self-defeating habits and behaviors, we continue to learn new techniques for helping mind-control victims, and that we continue to give ourselves a chance to grow, and learn too. After all therapists have needs too. I think the lack of recognition by people that therapists are people contributes to "therapeutic chronic fatigue". While the client is wanting to discover their feelings, the client is expecting the therapist to bury the therapist’s own feelings. I think that it is healthiest for the support persons to actually touch base emotionally with everything that is happening to both the client and the therapist. In the long run, I believe that burn-out will happen lots slower if the support persons are emotionally invested in the work, rather than simply being a paid automaton. Therapists will have less stress, when they have someone that can mentor them. Victims are tough, they are survivors of a lot of abuse, & they often survive incompetent therapists. What may seem like a tragedy for your multiple may not derail the therapy as much as the novice might expect. I not suggesting an uncaring attitude, I’m just saying that experience brings some calmness. Perhaps you’re not in position to put the time & energy into the client that your client wants. Sometimes we don’t have perfect answers. If you are giving it your best shot, who can complain? Be kind to yourself.

Page 422 ...

If all alters had the same thoughts and were in agreement, this book would not be needed. The essence of why trauma-based mind-control is so successful is that their are substantial differences between the various alters. Those differences allow the Illuminati to create good front alters as covers. Those differences allow the Illuminati to maintain control and prevent the system from finding their freedom. Incompatibilities and conflicts between alters is a given from the get-go with a DID client. The support team may hear of light and dark sides to a system. Internal persecutor alters are a given. Alters that self-mutilate the body have been programmed to do it. Psychologists have been baffled at the hate that some alters have for other alters or for those other alter’s body--which they don’t perceive as their own body. The longer the programming goes on the more established the self-persecuting alters become. When dealing with such alters, the support team must not be judgmental. These are simply hurting child alters doing what they have been programmed to do. They are simply trying to do their job right. Without reinforcing these alters dangerous behaviors, it is possible to give them some attention and friendship. They are not used to holding the body and will tire of holding it after a few minutes. Having them out regularly may diffuse some of their rage. The therapist should not scare them by threatening to get rid of them, or kill them, although occasionally they need to be restrained by a support person, for instance if they are trying to mutilate the victim with a knife. These persecutor alters can have their identity validated, they were just trying to help the system by doing the job that was expected by the programmers. The persecutor alters may often be the ones that took the pain for the "a" alters that function so well in life. When the host alter acknowledges the existence of the persecutor alter, and the persecutor alter’s pain & needs, it helps remove some of the animosity in their relationship. Alters can write each other letters. Because most systems are creative, they can use their creativity to think of some way to resolve the conflict, if they try. However, the answer that may occur to some readers, to internally lock up persecutor alters is not a good idea. Someone in the alter system must be the light on the hill, that moves toward freedom. Generally that will be the front host alter that came originally came into therapy. It may not be. Sometimes the original "person" who came in for therapy, dissolves into a mass of different personalities, and the therapist has trouble knowing who now is the client. The answer is the entire system is, they just don’t know it. And who speaks for the system? For instance, one alter says for the therapist to quit working with the system and another says they want the therapist to work, but only the non-cooperative alters show up for the sessions? All of our old ways of looking at people are obsolete, and the support team will encounter difficulties that boggle their mind. One way to overcome some of this is to treat a system as a city. How did God treat the church of a city? How does one relate to a city of people? How does one get cooperation in a city. Within an alter system, the change for health has to come family by family. One family of alters after another family must make the choice "I want to change direction. I don’t want to be like my abuser. I don’t want to conform to the programming." Many alters will not really know what is going on, they will only have a sense of it. They will sense, "Something is wrong here." That may be enough for them to make a decision for a change of direction. Persecutor alters can learn not to act out. Alters can be given another script. Each alter can be shown that the system has gratitude for the part they played in the system’s survival. Things that are helpful for alters are good reading, good friends, support groups, and

Page 423 ...

learning from each other internally. Some alters can clearly see the good from the bad, some have very limited understanding. The system can begin taking their power back. The alters can work as a team, and become co-conscious. Responsible alters can be given the care of other alters who need attention. It’s somewhat like how a teacher may delegate some children to be leaders so that they can help the troubled children. Internal peer pressure can work for good too. And alters can pray for each other too. Light side alters can form prayer circles or prayer chains. Even non-multiples have ego-states that can present problems, such as the part of you that wants to eat too many sweets. How is this overcome? By mental discipline. It will take some mental discipline for the victim to grow. Alters need to change their thinking from "I can’t to I can." Get rid of "I can’t." Getting rid of fear is a big step in overcoming alter conflicts. This is just one more reason why safety for the system is so important.

Most competition for having the body by alters occurs during the following times:

a. when cult programming goes off, and part of the system is trying to go to a ritual or a drug run, and the light side alters are holding the body.
b. when something exciting or fun is happening and everyone wants a piece of the action.
c. when alters are in conflict over goals or in conflict about what the system is doing in therapy.

Originally, the alter switches were subconscious and carried out mainly by the handlers. After getting to know one’s internal system better, the alters can begin to control their own switching. The alters need to build harmony. If they change the internal job description, or give an alter an external job, then that alter needs to be allowed to have that role. The alter can be asked internally, "What would you like to do?" and then give that alter a chance to develop that. Give everyone an important role. After a while of working together, the alters begin to get co-conscious. After alters are co-conscious, the conflicts will cease between them.

Page 424 ...


This page is not to be read by any victims of mind-control, no if's, and's, or but's. Reading this material may be highly lethal -- it will trigger powerful suicide programs in some victims of mind-control!!!


The core issues are issues that concern the basic survival of the mind. Therapists have blamed victims for not cooperating in integrating the core, when a fuller understanding of the dynamics of programming shows that the victim is only attempting to protect himself. In 1960, J.D. Sutherland at the second Tavistock seminar on mother-infant interaction in London presented his work which was entitled "The concepts of imprinting and critical period from a psycho-analytic viewpoint." This was reprinted in a book Determinants of Infant Behavior II. Sutherland discovered that traumatic frustration experiences in a child’s early development set up subsystems in a person, which continue to seek expression, and are relatively little influenced by subsequent experiences. The formation of social relationships by an infant relates to the concept of imprinting. Researchers have not sorted out all the complex processes, but imprinting researchers feel confident that imprinting in humans has some parallels to precocial birds. They found that newborn babies less than a day old will follow a real face much more than a mannequin. This proved for instance that babies are programmed prior to birth to respond to human faces. There are obviously some built-in mechanisms to human thinking. The human brain is actually 7 brains. The lower three brains are: one, the medulla; two, the pons; and three, the cerebellum. On top of the pons, is the fourth brain, the mid-brain. The mid-brain is the central brain linking the 3 higher and the 3 lower brains. It relays messages back and forth. It regulates the life force, and serves as a regulator to states of consciousness. Secretions in the fourth brain create the emotional construct of "me’. If traumatized, such as during the splitting-the-core trauma, the mid-brain does not secrete the peptides or endorphines which relate to the self-sense that is attached to a sensory experience. In other words, when the core is split, the mid-brain ceases to secrete the peptides that emotionally connect its potential sense of self to the sensations of the body. The mid-brain is also the area that is imprinted with roles. Each one of the 7 brains that make up the entire structure called the human brain is capable of having feelings. This is one reason why we can have "mixed feelings" about one item. What seems to occur during the splitting of the core (referred to as the Primal Dissociate Experience PDE), is that the mind decides that survival is dependent upon not identifying with what is happening. In a sense it decides that death to the self is a type of survival. The mind creates dissociated "ego states" (what Sutherland called "subsystems") to deal with these difficult situations that it refuses to accept into its memory as happening to itself. Deep level ISH (internal self-helpers--perhaps Guardian angels) have been successfully used to reintegrate the PDE held in that special part of the mind back into the mind.

Page 425 ...

When the brain’s senses try to record the PDE, the mind disconnects itself from the experience. Body memories remain of the experience, and dissociated memory fragments. The mind disassembles its concept of self. It decouples itself from existence and goes into hiding. The rest of the victim’s life will be spent by the "core" retreating deeper into hiding. When the mind, decouples itself from the body and takes itself into hiding, it permits dissociated pieces of the mind to pick up the abuse. One of the positive pieces of the original splitting experience will be used to create a host(s) personality. This is the person that will front the system. (Shortly an entire explanation of all this will follow.) The retreating "remnant of life", after it has let the self die and the mind be splintered is really only that part of the mid-brain which regulates the life-force and the soul. There is no alter that is the real core. ANY alter that claims to be the core, is a false front developed by the programmers. The real core is an essence--the soul, the deep part of the mind that remains alive when the central controls of the fourth brain completely decouples itself from identifying with life. In reality, the area of the brain that is normally imprinted by the events of life and grows up with a concept of self has decided to separate itself from external reality and goes into hiding. A variation of this is autism. In this case, the complete mind retreats from reality, rather than the soul. Many therapists ignorantly set their primary goal with DID programmed multiples to be the integration of the core. They are ignoring the fundamental issue for the victim’s mind. The fundamental issue is that the core’s survival demanded separation from external reality, and the creation of separate dissociative states to contain the traumas being heaped upon the victim. The driving motivation at the deepest level of the mind is to preserve the safety of this elusive core. Traditional therapies have worked against helping victims, because these therapies attempt to expose the core to reality, which aggravates and strengthens deep resistance by the victim to therapy, because the decoupling from reality is the imprinted survival mechanism of the mind. The Illuminati try to insure that the core never wants to rejoin the world by:

a. programming many alters to believe that they will go psychotic or kill themselves if the core is touched,
b. that trauma keeps the core distant, therefore, the greater the victim’s ongoing abusive relationship with the cult, then the greater the "safety" of the core.
c. internal worlds are created with walls protected by demons and suicide programs to prevent alters from reintegrating or connecting with anything else such as the core.
d. internal conflicts are set up to keep the alters fighting and disconnected from each other. Alters which fear the abusers must somehow resolve their fear with alters who identify with and mimic their abusers. The mess that is created, sets up an environment that places the core in an impossible situation. If the sense-of-self were ever to return to rejoin reality, how would it ever resolve all these conflicts or live with such a mess in reality? The sense-of-self may subconsciously give its energy to part of the mind, but it is not doing so in a conscious manner, because it has detached itself from identifying with what is going on.

Page 426 ...

The Illuminati perceive the core as that soul, that breathe of life that God breathed into Adam, to make him a living soul. This is not entirely off-base. The energy of an alter system comes from that 4th brain which is also that area of the brain that is involved with one’s sense of self. The programmers perceive that the core’s existence only remains in its ability to create parts of the mind to maintain its life. The core is like a soul--perhaps it is the soul of a person, and it creates alters to maintain its own integrity and safety. The Illuminati carry out a final ritual when a hierarchy person is ritually murdered where the successor sucks the dying person’s last breath out in order to capture the soul. Whatever the exact substance and nature of the core, whatever the detailed mechanics within the brain were when it dissociated itself from reality, the core still remains a very touchy issue for therapists. Therapists should approach alters that are core splits with great gentleness, honesty, love and kindness. Back door techniques should be used for talking through to a system of alters without attempts to go directly toward the "core". Attempts to go directly toward the core will most likely be frustrated and stopped by the victim’s alter system, but the energy that is wasted in such a move is not healthy. If a child victim were never to suffer trauma after the initial core split, the programmers discovered that at some point years down the line, the core will want to reconnect to reality. Now that we have explored some of the basics concerning the core, it is time to discuss the deeper realities of what happens to the core during programming. This information has never seen the light of day. We are able to provide it, because sad-to-say, our system had a level of programming alters who programmed and helped with the tests that showed what we are about to reveal. Until recently, the world (with the exception of the programmers) was too iguorant to be able to understand what we will reveal. We trust that there are a small group of therapists that are now ready to utilize the deeper secrets of what happens to the core. Remember, that the Vol. 2 book discussed the PDE, the Splitting of the Core trauma. This is actually a long series of traumas, that culminates in the mind deciding to split itself with dissociative barriers. This original PDE trauma provides some parts of the mind that love their master and some parts that fear (fear as in raw terror) the master. These two themes--LOVE & FEAR-- are skillfully used by the programmers to build a protective shield around the core for the front part (host part) of the system. The front part is built from the first PDE and then it is left in relative "peace" so that it has enough stability to function in the real world. That doesn’t mean the front has a life of ease, it just isn’t subjected to what the deeper parts have to endure.

The deeper parts will be derived from the second major programming trauma of the system. But before we get into that, let’s briefly touch on the LOVE/FEAR issues that protect the core. The love that the core has for its primary caretaker (refer back to Vol. 2, chptr. one, where it describes the excellent caretaking

Page 427 ...

& love bonding) is powerful and pertains to parent-young imprinting learning. There is a susceptible period that is built in during those first two years, where the psychic organizer emerges. (Refer to Hess, Eckard H. Imprinting Early Experience & the Developmental Psychobiology of Attachment, p. 340.) It has been clearly demonstrated by scientific research that the baby has an innate drive for love from a mother figure. This love is a primary need of the infant--without this love, some babies give up and die. This is not surprising, many people can realize this without the specific scientific proof. That primal need for love is exploited by the programmers. The parts of the mind holding this powerful primal love will split from the parts holding the raw terror of the PDE. When one tries to approach getting to the core from the host level, the alters holding the love of the master will protect the core. What has been discovered then is that the fear then protects that love. There are lots of silhouetted parts brought into this love-fear relationship of alters. This love-fear relationship has defeated the best therapists, because until the therapist can unravel such situation and these issues the mind will not let them get to the real core. Because the basis for the original splitting was RAW TERROR on the part of the core, it goes into hiding. It is very difficult for the core to be accessed, because he/she will only appear if he/or she has absolute and great trust in who is calling it up. As far as we know, there has never been a genuine core accessed by anyone outside of the Illuminati/& other programming cults. The Illuminati must have a very caring Mother-of-Darkness establish a trust relationship with the core BEFORE the PDE. This tender loving Mother-of-Darkness then can be used to pull up the core for work. Because our system (your author Cisco) was noted for its tenderness, we often received the job of being the "Mother" for systems which were being programmed. That is why we can pass on so much of the real secrets of what the core is all about. Hypnotic access codes are given to the core, which work only if used by that individual which the core greatly trusts. Working with the core splits which have the love/fear dichotomy does not establish rapport with the core. The real core has retreated far into the mind--under the basement of the mind, and lays under the hell pit that is built by the Illuminati at the basement of the mind. (What this means is that some of what was written in Vol. 2 about the carousel was cover programming. Splits from the core are strategically placed in the system to make those who work very hard think they have gotten to the core. This is not just for the protection of the programming, but this safety feature also protects the very life of the programmed multiple. It is not a safe thing for a programmed multiple’s core to be played with.) When a tender mother pulls a core up, what will she find? The core comes up in its fear. Centuries of Illuminati programming experience have clearly demonstrated that the core is the only part of the mind that has a true awareness of itself, such as its age, and a reality of its own. However, because the core stays in the basement of mind, it does not experience life. When it is pulled up, it will look around, notice that it has aged, wonder where the years have gone, but it doesn’t go into denial or into psychotic fantasy or some other defense.

Page 428 ...

It will simply accept reality, and reject all the fantasy. The core will NOT remember its memories of abuse. It may have some issues regarding some things, but its thinking is healthy and true to itself. Again the core is the only part that is true to her or his self. The programmers do use the core for some types of programming, but not in the sense that they use alters. The host (front) personality that lives in the day-to-day world will be strongly grounded in reality, but in a different way than the core. With the exceptions of the few host personalities that experience life day-to-day and the core, who can somehow access the truth when it awakes and comes to the front of the mind, MOST of the alters live at the age they were created at or have been hypnotically assigned. They do not experience life in a 3-dimension matter-space-time world. Life is 2-dimensional, without a concept of time. The Illuminati prefer they don’t wear watches for this reason. After lots of integration work, trust work, and memory work, it may be possible to access the core through some of its closer splits. Before discussing the second major programming trauma to the core, it is extremely important to disclose a major secret that the Illuminati programmers came up against. In fact, due to their prideful beliefs that they were gods, it was a rather touchy sensitive subject to talk about when we worked with major programmers. In spite of it being a touchy subject, it was such a major subject, we did have some conversations concerning it. The programmers called it "THE ETERNAL LIGHT". It was also referred to as "the SOUL". Different programmers speculated about what this light was, a few thought it was the Guardian Angel that God assigued to each person, one thought it was the part of man that would face Almighty God on judgement day, and "bow its knee". (If it’s hard for the reader to conceive that Illuminati programmers know Biblical verses such as "all knees will bow before God" and theological concepts, then read Aleister Crowley, who as a Satanist, knew Bible concepts and theology in detail. Also remember, some Christian ministers have a secondary vocation as Illuminati programmers.) It can be understood why programmers (who of course were Illuminati masters & adepts) would call this LIGHT "the soul" because they were steeped in Greek philosophy. The concept of the immortality of the soul was an idea of the mystery religions of Babylon, and was elaborated upon by the Greek philosopher Plato. This greek philosophical idea of the word "soul" clouds the biblical meaning for the word. In the Hebrew scriptures the word "soul" is the Hebrew word "nephesh" and in the Greek, it is "psykhe". In the Word of God, Genesis 2:7 states, "And the LORD God formed man of the dust of the ground, and breathed into his nostrils the breath of life; and man became a living being (nephesh)." What is significant here is that man was not given a soul (nephesh), but rather "became a living soul". The Greek scriptures also say in 1 COR 15:45, "The first man Adam BECAME a living soul (psycke)". It is clear from many other scriptures that soul (nephesh and psykhe--psykhai in plural form) meant the body and mind of a person. This nephesh can die. EZE 18:4b states, "The soul

Page 429 ...

(nephesh) who sins shall die." However, though the soul (mind and body) dies, the spirit returns to God, who gave it. ECC 12:7, "Then the dust will return to the earth as it was, And the spirit will return to God who gave it." The Bible uses the Hebrew word ruach and the Greek word pneuma for our word "spirit." It is very clear in numerous scriptures that the spirit is a powerful active force which has intellect. It is a person. The Holy Spirit could be blasphemed, and lied to. In turn it taught, and spoke and comforted. If a spirit can speak, teach and comfort, what is it? In programming, we programmers came in contact with this spirit that God places in each person, and it caused us fits. Each person’s God-given spirit was a powerful light that had intellect which attached itself to the core, but could be separated from the core. When the core comes up, this attached light form (the God-given spirit) would come up with it. This God-given spirit had no memory of abuse, it simply had energy, intellect and a power to protect the core. The essence of this God-given spirit was impossible for pre-verbal children or young children to describe. It has been the object of scientific research. One thing that the Illuminati have long known about this God-given spirit--it never works, it never takes on any responsibilities, like the entire rest of the system will do. The rest of the system will be a system of dissociative pieces of the mind, and alters who often have some type of job. This isn’t the case for the God-given spirit, or what the programmers called THE ETERNAL LIGHT. From experience it is also clear that the eternal light, although it wasn’t the core, somehow was a reflection, a total reflection of the core. We knew these things as oath-bound Luciferian programmers, long before we ever contemplated getting to know the Christian God. The Spirit was an intelligent life-force, a preserver of life. When the major programmers got into big trouble and their child slave was going to die, go insane or was splintering uncontrollably, even though they disliked the ETERNAL LIGHT because it was more powerful than they were, they would call it up, and get it to assist in bringing healing, life, and integration to the victim. This God-given spirit was like God’s own spirit, in that it gives its help to the good and bad alters, the just and the unjust alters. It is reminiscent of Christ’s words, "Your Father in heaven...He makes His sun rise on the evil and on the good, and sends rain on the just and on the unjust." MT 5:45 The Eternal Light can integrate parts of the core or as far as that goes any alters that have split. It is so powerful that the Programmers know that if they pull it up and attach it to alters that they are torturing, that it will provide a protective covering so hard that they can’t cause the mind to splinter. Another thing that centuries of programming experience has shown is that the eternal light does not know that it is connected to the core. The God-given spirit needs to be taught if it is know that it is connected to the core. The programmers of course do not teach this to it. The Illuminati have done lots of tests (and we observed some of these) where the core and its God-given spirit were allowed to spend positive time with a portion of alters. The core and its

Page 430 ...

spirit would automatically integrate all these parts back together. Therapists spend hundreds of hours trying to get cooperation between alters, and yet the core and its spirit can integrate them in a flash if given a safe opportunity. Now you’re beginning to see the power of a safe environment for the core. However, the top therapists (Dr.s of Psychiatry) are out on speaking circuit teaching that it doesn’t matter if your client is safe, you can still accomplish good. As a victim would you like to cross the Pacific swimming or flying in a 747 jet? Or to make the analogy more accurate, which choice would you want if you couldn’t even swim? When Fritz, our co-author worked 24 hours a day to provide our system a safe place, numerous therapists and deliverance ministries came out of the woodwork to publicly attack him. A few wise people are beginning to realize that safety of the victim IS THE NUMBER ONE ISSUE, AND THE BEGINNING ISSUE. If the victim is left alone in safety and with trustworthy loving people, at some point the core and its God-given spirit could integrate everything back in an effortless manner. Certain people are beginning to realize that the main part of a treatment plan is safety. (Unfortunately, the safety issues are far more vast than therapists care to admit. This book and the Vol. 2 Formula book are laying the foundation down for how varied and technologically advanced their control is. An afternoon with a Christian minister is not going to provide the security for the mind to let down its protective mechanisms. What is happening when skilled Christian ministers access what they think is the core, is that they are getting at best core splits. Having core splits heal is very powerful. That means that foundational sections of programming are automatically ripped up. One major drawback that is preventing more success is that the core is not understood, and the issues of safety are not being understood and addressed. When the God-given spirit joins itself to a group of alters, the Illuminati testing shows that it can take on a memory, bring the core along, and make that section the leader of the pack in the mind. In fact, knowledge of this is going to be used unfortunately for great evil, rather than for the good of humanity. Soon the Anti-Christ is to take power. At pre-arranged points in time, the hierarchy alters are to be given the core and the Eternal Light, and the rest of the minds of these slaves will be placed hypnotically under the hell-pit, where the cores are presently asleep. This means thousands of hierarchy Illuminati members will switch from their Christian host personalities, into people who day-to-day have very strong luciferian personalities which serve the Anti-Christ. Therapists, who have spent years in agonizing patient work using primitive often-damaging methods to help their programmed multiples, are going to see their work go down the drain literally overnight. A therapist, who has spent 10 years piddling around with stabilizing a few front alters, will find they no longer exist within the working part of the client’s mind. Some of these therapists are even targeted to be killed. Some of these therapists are Illuminati multiples themselves, who will go back to continue helping with the large-scale operations of mind-control programming.

Page 431 ...

In order to deceive both the therapists and the victims themselves, the programmers carry out several well-designed, excellently executed deceptions. An early split of the mind is pulled up which will perceive itself as light. This part will be shamed and called "bad magic, and treated like it is the core. It will then be placed in a box and sent into the outer-space of the victim’s mind. A few young watcher alters will see this, and believe they have spotted the core being placed in a box. This light will be allowed to come up to help the system when it is in trouble. Because it is not the real core, it can’t protect other alters. When the alters in trouble see that they are not being helped, they feel betrayed by the core, and feel helpless. They have no idea how powerful the real core can really be. In fact some alters are programmed to believe that the core is responsible for their problems. Some of the alters walk around internally with a bad attitude toward the core. The programmers put the core to sleep with the sleeping beauty story.

Another early core split will be placed in the carousel, along with 3 demons ask to function as a false trinity, and many mirrors for entrapment. Other core splits will be placed as blackmail in special castles. These will often be called ‘the core" by the programmers in order to confuse the victim. The second major core programming trauma takes place in a sensory deprivation tank under a controlled LSD trip. Readers can consult Chapter 3 of this Deeper Insights book, approx. page 28-32 for a description of how the sensory deprivation tank programming under LSD is carried out. The initial sensory deprivation trauma is done with the core and it shows no mercy upon the mind of the victim. The Illuminati want to have the victim go through the eight emotions and the five senses, in other words 13 categories of splitting. During the sensory deprivation experience they want the victim to go through love, fear, anger, confusion, pain, shame, despair, self-hate, and then the loss of each of the five senses (one by one) taste, hearing, pain, hot-cold, seeing, and finally a sense of being nothing. The mind of even the child victim is vast. As the lonely isolation and torture begins in the isolation tank, the mind finally reaches a point where it begins splitting and splitting. When the child is splitting due to fear, at some point the mind reaches exhaustion of this feeling, and begins entering into another response, perhaps anger. The mind will unravel in dissocation with the new emotion until again the mind switches and tries another response to its entrapment. The body is wide open for demonic forces to take advantage of the pained/drug state of the child’s mind. The Illuminati work to demonize the child while it is suffering under the full impact of the sensory isolation tank. Gradually the child begins to die. As the mind under LSD begins to feel its molecules evaporating into nothinguess, the child approaches death. The mind gives away the body. Then the spirit--the Eternal Light leaves the body. After years of experience, the Illuminati has scientifically figured out how long they can wait after what they call the "soul"--the God-given spirit leaves, before they hit the child with electroshock to revive its life. The core really believes it has died. (Chapter 10 of this book addresses the manipulation of near-death experiences by the Illuminati.) The Illuminati literally snatch the life of the child back into its body.

Page 432 ...

Now the job comes to take the 13 different stages and to build alters from those different dissociative states. From the state where the core has given up identity with its body, no longer sees itself as human, and considers itself dead, the Illuminati will take these hundreds or thousands of dissociative pieces and program them to see themselves as butterflies. In the sensory deprivation tank they are like tiny fficks of light. But the hypnotic suggestion is given that they are butterflies. This is just one of many reasons why the term Monarch programming is appropriate. These parts of the mind will make up one of the most secret parts of an Illuminati system. We are now revealing this secret grid for the first time. The butterflies are placed into the first grid of alters near the core. This grid forms a net around the core. These butterflies are floaters, that encircle the core. This is the sixth grid, but in Illuminati programmer parlance the grid is called a "DIMENSION". These protective butterflies are dehumanized and hold the victim’s final fear as the victim died. Only four strong splits from this time period of the tank trauma are not made into butterflies. They are made into four cornerstones (also called the "FOUR GATES TO HEAVEN", north, east, west, and south. These become the points of the compass upon which the system of alters will be structured. The four gates to heaven create a foundational pattern for an internal clock, a compass, and a seasonal/ritual clock. Another set of alters that will come from the tank experience are the gems. The gems are discussed in Vol. 2. They will be placed in the first dimension, along with a carousel. From the gems, ribbons will be created that run to the internal computers. The ribbons will have to learn access codes and other codes to mediate between the gems and the computers on each of the levels (dimensions). Each of the six main dimensions (also called sections on the alter grids that the handler carries around), will have a mirror. Of course the programmer can create any configuration he wants, but the 13 x 13 x 13 cube is a very common Illuminati system. Other common configurations area sphere, and a double pyramid. The Illuminati like to give a 3-D effect to their alter systems. The sequence of splitting alters from alters goes horizontally and vertically and downward. To chart out a genealogy of the time sequence on how alters arrived becomes a series of breaks in several directions. Needless to say, the programmers do chart all these breaks. They also keep a resevior of unused clean slate alters. The programmers are unable to touch the God-given spirit. This Eternal Light remains unsplintered and powerful throughout the life of the victim. It is hidden along with the core to prevent integration of the victim’s mind. While it is possible for the cult to bring the core up, it doesn’t serve any purpose for them to injure the core after they have created a system. There will always be a part of the core they cannot reach unless they destroy the individual.

Page 433 ...

Theories that the most cult obedient and mean alters are those farthest from the core are not based on reality. There is some partial correctness to the concept that those victims who have a better connection between their core and their alters heal better, but when the actual programming sequence and methodology is laid out for the reader as we have done in our books, hopefully the reader will realize that most of the time the core is sleeping (Sleeping Beauty) and thinks she is dead and waiting for her Prince to kiss her and bring her back to life. She is not lurking in the background cognizant of every conversation like some therapists have begun telling each other. A sound strategy for working on the core issues, would be to get the system in a place of complete safety, and then work to stabilize the system of alters, and then begin doing memory work and building trust. When the mind is ready, then some core split alters can be healed as a potential gateway to lowering the fears of the core. Some of the readers of this book will not have a Christian perspective. We encourage them to see the healing power of forgiveness, and love that a Christlike view offers to victims. In the reality of the real world, all men have sinned and come short of the glory of God. The core was not evil--it was simply a helpless innocent victim of overwhelming abuse. Of anybody who can understand pain, it is the Son of God (Emmanuel) who suffered innocently like-the core did. As the ministers preach, we are all guilty of the death of Christ. This means that terms like "man of God", "perpetrator" and "victim" begin to lose much meaning as we approach the glorious brilliant light of Christ. Without forgiveness, we are all sinners worthy of death. But we are also the apple of God’s eye. There is nothing that can stand in the way of His forgiving love if we want it in our lives. One of the biggest proofs of that redeeming love of God Almighty, has been carefully hidden by the programmers--it is that Eternal Light, that God-given spirit that the programmers have never conquered.

Page 434 ...

DELIVERANCE, understanding

Today, we live in a dark age. We trust that you will find some exciting liberating ideas within this article. Christ wondered if he would find any faith left when he returned. The answers we will provide you in this article are not something you will find in the establishment churches, but are fresh revelations from the throne of God. Fritz & I have worked together on this article, and this article will reflect what we have been taught by the Holy Spirit. As anyone, who has read about total mind-control, can realize, victims of ‘total mind-control are in the greatest need for deliverance that one could imagine. Why don’t victims just choose health? Why don’t victims simply walk out and grab their freedom? The answer goes back to understanding love and free-will. God gave free-will to that part of His creation that can know good & evil, especially humankind. That was His sovereign choice, and it was an action based on the nature of God which is love. Love does not seek its own, but seeks to build others up. The Kingdom of God has as its foundation love. We are called to speak truth in love. Satan’s Kingdom is built upon fear. How many churches operate on the foundation of fear? Sadly too many. Satan constructs all his governments, whether judicial, political or religious on a foundation of fear. He then takes that foundation of fear, and applies it in such a way as to get fear’s maximum leverage power to motivate people. While applying trauma along with drugs and hypnosis to people’s lives, Satan gets the maximum leverage out of their fear. He uses the greatest power he can get out of fear to harden the points where people have free choice. Imagine a piece of farm machinery that has been allowed to rust and harden. The joints, the hinges no longer have freedom of movement. They are rusted into one position. The joints have lost their freedom of choice. Now the farmer comes along and applies a lubricant to clean and loosen those frozen joints. The deliverance minister is finding the juncture of choice and he is pouring kindness upon that frozen juncture, and that oil of kindness lubricates it free. Now the person has freedom of choice. A spirit is love applied to the frozen hardened joints of life is a deliverance ministry. Sometimes unfortunately, the rust is so hard that the person must be broken, because the place where the free-will, the place where their options were stolen can not be restored. Satan knows that people would naturally choose paradise, would naturally choose love & good things. First, God created man in His own image, and we still have a built in desire to do saintly things, although our perfect nature has been corrupted. Satan must trick, and tweak, and loop and snake our free will, to the point that we will give up our freedom, that we will give up our free will, and that we will agree to his life of bondage. That is what Fritz’s half of the book was about. In Fritz’s half, he showed how Satan destroys that free will, how he shifts and snakes, he deceives, he manipulates and bends, and muddies the waters until a person doesn’t know where he is, nor what his choices are. After all the horrendous programming, the victim "willingly" wants to give up their free will, but at that time the alters do not even realize what they are giving up nor what is going on. God continues to gently call people to Him. It is a wooing. A man is wooed by a pretty girl, not compelled. God’s beauty compellingly woos us. However, some churches because they are not on the right foundations, see something wrong with someone and they come over and lay their hands on them and knock ‘em down. The idea of coming up to people and attacking their demons is spiritual rape. The demons do have to obey certain

Page 435 ...

spiritual laws, but "raping" people was not Christ’s method of deliverance. Let’s look at the way Christ dealt with people and demonic problems.

· The mother of Zebedee’s son comes to him, and he says, "What do you wish?" (MT 20:21)
· The multitudes come to him, and Christ says, "What do you want Me to do for you?" (MT 20:32)
· James & John come to Christ, and he says, ‘What do you want Me to do for you?" MK 10:36
· A blind man on the road to Jerico comes to Christ, and Christ asks, ‘What do you want Me to do for you?" MK 10:5 1, LK 18:4 1
· Two of John’s disciples approach Jesus, and Christ asks, ‘What do you seek?" JN 1:38
· At the marriage supper, a woman asks a favor & Christ asks, ‘Woman, what does your concern have to do with me?" (JN 2:4)

Christ told his disciples that whatever they asked in faith, that is what their heavenly Father would give them. (MK 11:24) Christ is very similar to the Father, he waited until people asked and explained what they wanted. The entire course or tenor of Christ’s life was a savior who waited until a person’s free will was ready for a deliverance. Christ wooed people to God. There is no wooing people to God, when demons are forcibly eradicated without a person’s consent. Does that mean that there is no place for aggressive deliverance? If we wait for some people to ask for freedom, they may never ask. With victims of mind-control, the controlling demons are sealed over and hidden quite deeply and Lucifer allows other demons to protect him in the system. Jesus went in and cleansed the temple of the money changers. Here was a situation where God’s temple was being desecrated. Most people are not aware of how the money changers were desecrating God’s temple, so allow us to explain this. The nation of Israel was to be the light of earth through which God poured His blessings out on mankind. The nation of Israel was to bless the world. Instead, the religious spirits lorded over the nation. The Israelites scorned everyone else (the Gentiles) as unclean. The temple’s outer court was where the gentiles were to be ministered to & were to come to God. Instead the Jews gave it over to a Spirit of Mammon. Money changers were blocking the purpose of that area of the Temple, which was meant to be the salvation of the unclean, not the enrichment of the self-righteous. Notice the religious judging spirit in the Temple rulers, for soon afterwards they were judging Jesus for spending time with children in the Temple. Jesus was hoping they would learn a lesson, he said, "Yes. And have you never read what is written in the Psalms, ‘Out of the mouth of babes and little ones, thou hast made thy praise perfect?" There is a place in God’s hearts for child alters & baby alters. And this then leads us to one of the best illustrations of deliverance in the Word of God. Jesus told the story of a man on the lonely road to Jerico. He had been attacked by a gang of robbers and left in the ditch for dead. Two religious men came by and judged him as unclean. The judging spirits that were in their hearts convinced these men of the lie that you get better by avoiding the unclean, rather than ministering to the unclean. (We have seen our share of ministers who have hated to see people working with programmed multiples. Fritz lost most of his Christians friends in order to work with us. Some of them got angry that someone would want to help someone like us.) But there was a Samaritan that came along. Now remember, the Samaritan was considered unclean and a dog by the men with the religious judging spirits. The religious judging spirit doesn’t want to enter into a real walk with God, and it will do all it can to prevent others. But this Samaritan who was considered unclean by the religious, comes and pulls the man out of the pit, and dresses his wounds, which means squeezing out the dross. He gives the man food and water to promote life. He pours in all this stuff into the

Page 436 ...

man’s wounds. Then he binds the wounds so that the skin will form a protection. He took what had carried him through life (his own donkey or horse) and took him to a place of safety and protection. But the Samaritan didn’t consider his deliverance over. He wanted to get the man to the end point. So he gave the inn keeper money, and told the inn keeper to take care of him, and if he ran up a bill, the Samaritan would take care of it on a return trip. THIS was a real deliverance ministry. This was a real deliverance. The religious heap the burdens of the cross or many crosses onto other people. The real deliverance ministries are like the "religiously unclean" Samaritan. When the religious leaders of Jesus’ day came to him and asked him on what authority he did his good works, Jesus told them a story. "But what do you think? A man had two sons, and he came to the first and said, ‘Son, go, work today in my vineyard.’ He answered and said, ‘I will not,’ but afterward he regretted it and went. ‘Then he came to the second and said likewise. And he answered and said, ‘I go, sir,’ but he did not go. Which of the two did the will of his father?" They said to Him, "The first." Jesus said to them, "Assuredly, I say to you that tax collectors and harlots enter the kingdom of God before you." Today, we have a entire class of professional ministers (master pastors) who are ministered to by their congregations. They consider the idea of stopping to bandage up the unclean to be repulsive. The broken souls of the programmed multiples are those who Christ came to deliver. He cameto set the captives free. The deliverance ministry will visit those who are in the prisons created by mind-control programming, they will give food and water to those in these "prisons" and liberate them. Deliverance is love in action. The oil and wine that the Samaritan put on the man’s wounds are symbolic of the power & authority of God that we minister to people. They are also symbolic of the grace and truth. Another parallel meaning to the oil & wine is the anointing and the new life that are given to those that the world has left for dead in the gutter. Deliverance is a restoration. The goal of the restoration is new life, the ultimate goal of deliverance is the ultimate new life in Christ. The new life in Christ is when Christ is on the throne in a person’s life. That is a distant goal for some programmed multiples. However, we must not elevate the process above the goal. In deliverance ministries today, many of them have elevated the process above the goal. We must keep the authority of Christ as the number one issue, and keep beholding him as an example to us. As the correct foundation is built, a godly structure based upon the His five attributes comes into being. (See the article on "Protection, Spiritual") then the lower level demons can’t handle the heat given off by the light of truth and they rise to the surface as dross and can be dealt with. The deeper big daddy demons are going to take a special deliverance similar to Christ’s cleansing of the temple. When the Holy Spirit has a claim on someone’s life, then a Temple cleansing may be in store. We must insure to lose good spirits to replace evil ones. The Children of Light do not negotiate with darkness. Darkness does not want to negotiate with light anyway. The Child of God walks in peace, because he is secure in who his Father is. This does not mean that he tempts God by bungy jumping every situation. It means that he doesn’t walk in fear, but that he takes with him the real keys to the Kingdom of God which are light, life and love. Love, light and life in their fullest meanings will open doors to riches that the slave could never dream of.

Deliverance is not a short term work. For a programmed multiple it will be a life of healing. When God continues to build his structure in you (see page 365), replacing the satanic structure, God will begin resting more

Page 437 ...

of His glory within His structure. God’s glory will expose and help cleanse the Temple. It will make the victim want to work hard to keep the Temple clean. Some people think that God simply wants to put His anointing onto people. He is trying to build His structure within His willing children. After that structure (His nature and character is built) then the anointing has a place to rest. Prayer, which is based upon the five elements of God’s structure, is like an offensive lance. The armor of God listed in Ephesians 6 includes 6 items. It does not mention anything that is clearly offensive. Prayer is offensive and aggressive in nature. It is seeking that which we do not have. Prayer can deliver a wound into the enemy through which supernatural love can be poured in to melt the hard spots that Satan has created. One of the five elements of God’s structure is life, which means growth. The healing victim if they are alive must keep growing, because that is the nature of life. The Word says that God’s Kingdom will always increase. We go from glory to glory. We grow up and grow up and grow up. If we stop growing, we can rest in God, but if we are not resting in Him or growing, then we are in a death process. We are to occupy until the Lord comes. While we occupy the land, God comes and builds His structures within us. What gives life to the victim of mind-control? There are various approaches to demons. Some say that they are only psychological illusions, they pass by on the road to Jerico. Some say that although demons exist, they are rare, so it is not likely that the victim has a serious problem. They pass by too on the road to Jerico. Others pass by and say, "I’ll pray for you." Others shout the name of Jesus and pass on. Others use their psychic abilities to notice from a distance what the demons are. In other words, they identify the problem, but pass by expecting that a few words will bind up the half-dead man. The other approaches are various ideas on how to help the man in the ditch. What we have been trying to do, is give people an idea on how half-dead people can be mended. This is somewhat of a spiritual first-aid class. There will be situations that people will need our help in deliverance. They simply can’t mend their own wounds, nor even see them to clean them. Deliverance prayers and supplications can be made that God would enlighten the victim, that God’s angels would provide protection, and that evil spirits would be contained or kept away. Because demons are in ranks and in hierarchal structures, it makes sense to try to go to the top to do business. The ranking demon may be asked on what spiritual grounds he has a right to be present. The legal right for that demon can be confessed and removed. Long story made short, demons must submit to the authority of Jesus Christ of Nazareth and His blood. If the deliverance minister walks in that authority, he can command that demon to leave. The response by demons when commanded to leave is varied. They will play many tricks to try and stay or to try and protect their leaders. Followup is important and the goal is a complete cleansing. If you are going toward the rest room, to take two steps in that direction is just not going to do the job. Go all the way. Keep praying and commanding and confessing. Having a prayer group in support helps. With victims of mind-control we are dealing with big daddy demons that the normal person has not had to deal with. The Illuminati programmed multiples are the pride of Satan. They don’t surrender easily.

Page 438 ...

DENIAL, identifying and dealing with defense mechanisms

Part of the reason that the Monarch trauma-based mind-control’s programming is successful is because the mind will naturally defend itself against threatening ideas. This defense is usually on a subconscious level--that is, people often do not even realize that the mind is putting up defenses. This is because the human mind is SO GOOD at defending itself. If our minds were to allow us to realize our minds defend themselves from something--then that would in itself indicate that what is being denied was real--so even the denial is denied! Denial is a natural part of the mind’s abilities. However, denial can often prevent us from moving forward and facing the issues we actually need to face. There are several forms of denial and we need to identify and recognize these forms in order to identify and recognize these forms in ourselves. I will now list some of the kinds (forms) of denial that a person can have.

· SIMPLE DENIAL: Pretending that something does not exist when it really does, for instance ignoring & discounting physical symptoms that may indicate the presence of problems. (For instance, the host personality of a programmed multiple will destroy evidence of the existence of any other alter.)
· MINIMIZING: Being willing to acknowledge a problem, but unwilling to see its severity. (For instance, the front alters will acknowledge their ways some past abuse, but they will minimize the extent of the abuse, and they will not acknowledge that the abuse is ongoing.)
· BLAMING: putting the blame on someone else for causing the problem; the behavior is not denied, but its cause is someone else’s fault. (Examples, are blaming one’s parents for your adult behavior, blaming one’s husband or wife for one’s overeating. In terms of programming, an example would be that some alters perceive that other alters are the cause of their problems, but that they are just fine.)
· EXCUSING: Offering excuses, alibis, justifications and other explanations for our own or other’s behavior. For instance, calling the boss for a friend and telling the boss the person is sick when they are really drunk. (This is a built in mechanism of the mind-control. For instance, an assassination alter will be told that the target they killed deserved to die.)
· GENERALIZING: Dealing with problems on a general level, but avoiding personal and emotional awareness of the situation or conditions. Example is when we might sympathize with a friend’s "flu" problems when the real problem is a drug problem. (Some alters tell the therapist, "I’m not in therapy, the other alter is in therapy." The problem of mind-control is not being addressed as mind-control, the real issue is being disavowalled. Some therapists contribute to this because they don’t understand the dynamics of mind-control, and they mistakingly think that their client is the host alter. They are failing to see the bigger picture.)
· DODGING: Changing the subject to avoid threatening topics, this includes being adept at small talk, never getting to real issues. (Alters love to talk about non-threatening issues with their therapists, as great deal of busy work can take place without much progress.)
· ATTACKING: Becoming angry and irritable when reference is made to the existing condition, thus avoiding the issue. This includes being unwilling to share one’s feelings.

Page 439


Children and even adults will perceive certain new foods as dangerous and painful. They will do anything and make any excuse not to eat what they don’t want to. At times there are legitimate concerns, but in general what is perceived as threatening is not. If the child ate his broccoli or his peas he would in fact be getting better nutrition. Denial seems to protect us--but often it protects us from what we really need to deal with.


Page 440 ...

DREAMWORK, understanding

We believe that this section may present the reader with the best look into
programmed MPD (DID) and dreams that has been published. This Dream Work
section will be divided up into the following subtopics:

· Part A: The Meaning of Dreams
· Part B. Dream Telepathy & MPD
· Part C. A Listing of Research into MPD (DID) & Dreams
· Part D. Important Findings of MPD (DID) Dream Research
· Part B. Our suggestions concerning MPD Dream Work
· Part F. Standard Illuminati Programming concerning dreams & memories

Part A. The Meaning of Dreams

Everyone dreams, and many people are fascinated in dreams, the difficult part is what do individual dreams mean? In a biblical study that our co-author Fritz made of the entire Word of God to determine how God communicates with mankind, he found that in an overwhelming percentage of cases, Almighty God used dreams to communicate to mankind. Joseph and Daniel got recognition by interpreting dreams (called oneicromancy) correctly. Joseph interpreted the Pharaoh’s dream about seven years of plenty and seven years of famine. On a stone tablet in front of the Great Sphinx, another Pharaoh, Thutmes IV, records a dream he received that his reign would be long and fruitful. This was one of what the ancient Egyptians called "divine dreams from the gods". On the flip side of things, the rational thinkers of the 18th century claimed that dreams were only the result of indigestion or cold drafts, and were meaningless. Obviously, not all dreams are a message from God, nor are they all simply the result of poor indigestion of pizza. or an open window at night. The priesthoods of the ancient mystery religions began research into dreams and began using them in various capacities. In the healing temple of ~Esclepius, the priesthood would place sick people on a couch in the temple, and would instruct them that a god would give them in a dream the remedy for their illness. The suggestion that the dreamer would learn of his health problem in his dream often worked. Modern researchers would not blame any particular god for this being successful, they would interpret it as the unconscious mind releasing information about the body that wouldn’t normally surface in the waking conscious mind. This ancient practice is similar to modern researchers who have had great success in placing hypnotic commands into people (where the subjects were told not to remember the command) to dream about particular things, with the result that then the researchers have observed that the subjects do indeed create dreams about the suggested subject matter. The resulting dreams are about the suggested matter according to the subject’s mind’s own tastes. It’s been documented that people who have suffered traumas, such as refugees, soldiers, and victims of SRA have nightmares that are a direct result of their traumas. Some therapists do dream work with refugees, post-traumatic stress disorder and DID clients. When multiples get memories that surface as dreams, these dreams repeat themselves and they leave the victim with profound feelings, often the strong sense of depersonalization. Several therapists/researchers (see Cushway & Sewell, 1992 and others) have discovered that nightmares can be used as a key indicator of PTSD (which is a problem that DID victims face.) (Non-multiples, of course, also at times experience auto-biographical dreams.) One dream researcher (Wunder, 1993)

Page 441 ...

discovered that siblings of disabled children had many common themes in their dreams, including the desire to be a type of "saviort, dreams of guilt that they were normal, the idea that something or someone (such as a fairy godmother) would change things, and sorrow about their siblings disability. Programmed multiples are also going to have dreams surface that relate to inner concerns.

Yes, the imagery of our nightmares and dreams do have relevant information about our deep concerns. The high frequency of nightmares has been directly shown to be linked to unpleasant life experiences, especially recent ones. Common sense would teach us many of these things, but it helps that people have validated these in studies, so that some of these things go beyond the realm of opinion.

Part B. Dream Telepathy & MPD

Psychiatric journals have been publishing for several years documented, authentic, scientific, controlled experiments where telepathic messages have been sent to and received by people in the dream state. On the one hand, while most people believe these kinds of things happen, they will also generally, when asked if such things happen, say that they do not believe they happen. This is because there is a strong scientific-cultural bias against the fact of telepathic messages occurring in the dream state. Common scientific awareness hasn’t caught up to both common sense and specific research into telepathic dreams. The natural response designed to protect those with "politically correct views" is to ask, "How does one distinguish between a telepathic dream and a lucky coincidence considering the numbers of dreams sent?" "At what point does one realize that a dream is not mere coincidence?" These are legitimate questions, and there has been legitimate research which has legitimately answered them. The original scientific work in this area was done by the British Society for Psychical Research, who did most of their work with the elite British aristocracy beginning in the 1880’s. Their initial findings were written up in Phantasms of the Living. Since then, a great deal more research has been completed. The two types of telepathic dreams that are quite frequently experienced are death messages and in-trouble messages. Some of the documented cases of telepathic messages between total strangers are absolutely amazing. While the public is still debating the existence of such already scientifically proven phenomena, the Illuminati have been constructing telepathic and astral projection capabilities into their hierarchy slaves. Whether the therapist is at a place to admit the existence of these phenomena or not, they will have to face the fact that deeper hierarchy alters believe they have these capabilities, & they will resist treatment and resist the success of therapy because they believe they are still participating fully with the Illuminati cult during sleeping hours. Nor will the therapist make significant progress by trying to debunk these capabilities, when these alters have personal experiences of having learned and travelled to rituals on the astral plane. A beginning point for therapists to learn about Dream Telepathy would be the book Dream Telepathy by Montague Ullman, M.D., Stanley Krippner, Ph.D. and Alan Vaughan.

Part C. A Listing of Research into MPD (DID) & Dreams

Because the potential benefits through dream therapy are great and still to be discovered, this section is covering the topic in greater depth than some of the other topics. For those who want to check the professional literature concerning dreams and their relationship with MPD (DID) we provide the following list:

Page 442 ...

Franklin, J. (1990). "Dreamlike thought and dream mode processes in the formation of personalities in MPD." Dissociation, 3(2), pp. 70-80

Gabel, S. (1989) "Dreams as a possible reflection of a dissociated self-monitoring system." Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 177, pp. 560-568.

Gabel, 5. (1990). "Dreams and dissociation theory: Speculations on beneficial aspects of their linkage." Dissociation, 3(1), pp. 38-47

Leviton, H.L. (1967) "Depersonalization and the dream." Psychoanalytic Quarterly, 36, pp. 157-171.

Marmer, S.S. (1980) ‘The dream in dissociative states." In J.M. Natterson (ed.), The dream in clinical practice (pp. 163-175). NY: Jason Aronson.

Myers, W.A. (1976). "Imaginary companions, fantasy twins, mirror dreams and depersonalization." Psychoanalytic Quarterly, 45, pp 503-524.

Peterson, E., Gooch, N.L., & Freeman, L. Nightmare. NY: Richardson & Steirman, 1987.

Sidis, B. (1918) "A Clinical study of a dream personality." Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 13, pp 137-1 57.

Ullman, M. (1989). "Commentary: Dreams as a possible reflection of a dissociated self-monitoring system." Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 177, pp. 569-571.

Part D. Important Findings of MPD (DID) Dream Research

One study (Hartman, 1984) showed that people who normally have recurrent nightmares have more permeable mental boundaries between fantasy and reality, and are confused in their self-image. This principle would certainly apply to people with DID. Cernovsky (1988) did research into the dreams of those who suffer from Post-Traumatic Stress syndrome. And Jeans (1976), Gabel (1989, 1990), Marmer (1980), and Salley (1988) did research into dreams and therapy of MPD clients. Worthy of comment here, is that Gabel was exploring the dreams of DID clients as repressed memories. Not only does this make common sense, but as an Illuminati programmer, our alters who were programmers were very aware that memories can surface as dreams. We were taught to make sure that the victim’s mind was properly prepared so that it would not allow trauma and memory to surface in dreams. We will discuss indepth the mind-control programming in this area later in this article. Another therapist/researcher who did a great deal of work with dreams to help DID (MPD) clients was S.S. Marmer. He was able to help alters understand how their systems were built by using dream therapy, and was able to use dream content to help break down the dissociation. He believed that each alter is able to create its own dreams separately from other alters. Dr. Frank Putnam found that he was able to get valuable information from the dreams of his multiples that he couldn’t get from hypnosis and hypnosis-with-the-affect-bridge. Putnam discovered that the repressed memories surfacing as dreams were so traumatic that his clients were dissociating the dreams. This author (Cisco), as a recovering multiple, has personally experienced this. Also we have discovered that fragments of the dissociated dream may linger, and these fragments may be helpful to go back and recover more of the memory. We also discovered that it is helpful to have a support person record and relate what the system is screaming during sleep, or saying during their sleep so that the memory is not lost. Putnam states, "When listening to this [MPD dream] material, I treat it as a dissociative experience similar to, for example, an out-of-body experience. The details and setting of these repetitive traumatic nightmares seem to be more clearly based on actual settings than are most dreamscapes and can often be used to determine what age the person was and

Page 443 ...

where he or she was when the trauma occurred. One can search the personality system for alters who were created during this time period in the patient’s life. The postdream residual effects are also important and can be used as a starting point for affect bridge work. MPD patients seem to be more willing to share and work with dream material than with other forms of memory for trauma." (Diagnosis & Treatment of Multiple Personality Disorder, p. 202) Oaklander, who used work with dreams to assist therapy, wrote, "In general, dreams serve a variety of functions for children. They may be an expression of anxiety--things that worry them. They may express feelings that children feel unable to express in real life. [bold added] They may depict wishes, wants, needs, fantasies, questions and curiosities, attitudes. The dream can be an indication of a general stance or feeling about life. It may be a way of working through feelings and experiences -situations that children are unable to deal with directly and openly." (1969, p. 150) Therapists have been using dreamwork (dreams) as a source of information that helps them to understand how the victim is processing horrible experiences, problem-solving, and adjusting to changing personal and social circumstances in life. An example of how dreams relate to these things, is Zaya’s study in 1988 that showed that expectant fathers went through three stages of dream content in anticipation of their new child. Here was a good example of the unconscious preoccupation of fathers toward the new child expressing itself symbolically in their dreamscapes.

Part E. Our suggestions concerning MPD Dream Work

The therapist is going to have to differentiate between symbolic meanings (for example a dream image of a "broken egg in a nest" which in one case represented a situation of family violence), and actual memories coming to the surface. The therapist is in a position of helping the victim move from making "no sense" of a dream to a place that it "makes sense". The type of questions that may be helpful would include, "how did you feel when...? or, "how do you feel now about...?, or "what color was...?" or, "have you considered how such-and-such might relate to such-and-such in your daytime life?" The therapist is facilitating the victim in discovering possible avenues of enquiry. For instance, in a dream having a baby in it, the victim might be asked, "What do babies mean to you?" Although this type of exploration may seem slow, when done by a skilled therapist some valuable work can occur. It may also be possible to influence victims to become more lucid dreamers. Lucid dreaming is when a person is conscious that they are dreaming & asleep, while still in the REM sleep state. Unfortunately, the current vocabulary of words are unsuitably very primitive for discussing different altered states of consciousness & unconscious mental activity. "Awake", "asleep" & "dream" are very crude terms to describe the various states that the mind can place itself in. A variety of techniques in training the mind while it is awake, have proven to result in changes in the remembrance and perception of dreams. While these are too extensive to try to cover here, there might be some possibilities to explore in this area for helping DID.

A mother while asleep will still have a mind that is scanning her external environment. She may sleep through her husband coming home from work, but wake up at the slightest noise from her baby. This type of behavior shows that the dreamer is still scanning his or her external environment. Most people do not have well-trained minds when it comes to states of consciousness.

Page 444 ...

Swami Rama, an expert in putting his body into different trance states, had worked with his various states of mind so well, that even during clinical studies while Swami Rama was in deepest sleep states (where people are "dead to the world"), he was still aware of everything going on in the room. Most multiples, because their mind is so traumatized and ever-vigilant, will never completely go to sleep, but will have an external alter awake in trance while the other alters go into a trance-sleep. The example of Billy Graham, a programmed multiple, who only sleeps in a zombie-trance state with his eyes open, was reported in the Vol 2 Formula book. Each time a slave goes to sleep, internal alters bring trauma memories to the sleeping alters as dreams, and condition the slave to fear sleep. Dreams may indicate that the part that holds a particular memory is ready to work on the memory that came up in the dream. REM sleep, the place where most dream occurs, is the most similar type of sleep in brain wave patterns to the waking brain. However, dreams that are carried out in the non-REM sleep phases have been discovered to be closer to reality than REM sleep dreams. This applies to everyone. Because the dreamer is still in contact with his environment, (granted that this contact is different than being awake), the dreamer can have his or her dream influenced by externals and internals. Gas on the stomach may be interpreted as a nightmare, internal bladder trouble may be dreamed about as a trip to the restroom, an alarm clock may be dreamed about as a church bell, the smell of smoke may cause one to dream of a building exploding, and the smell of cologne may cause a dream of a perfume factory, etc. This is why listeners can identify with the joke about the dreamer who dreams he ate a giant marshmallow and wakes up missing his pillow. Many dreamers have the ability to dream about things that are suggested to them, such as in a hypnotic suggestion, before bed time. Victims of mind control can, if they want, via self-hypnotic statements suggest to themselves that they would like every dream that night to be about a particular theme. The mind will decide what it has that matches during their sleep that night the suggested theme, so this method is not going to contaminate the mind, it is simply telling the mind what mental files or associated mental files to allow to drift up from deep in the mind into the dream state. A support team member can repeat personal names during REM sleep, and this may trigger the mind to bring up some mental files that relate to that name. Again, because the mind is not in a conscious logical state, the relationship between the file and the name said may not be the typical type of relationship experienced during waking hours. For example, the name "Stan" said aloud to the dreamer might evoke a dream about stamps. Another possible method to elicit dream material for work is to trigger the system. The alter system can be triggered via movies or by going to particular settings where they were traumatized. The movies that trigger certain auto-biographical dreams may trigger the dreams in a way that only appear to have remote connections, but at the deeper levels of the mind are connected in some way by the mind. In other words, triggering by watching negatively-charged movies may be helpful to therapy, but the memory & feelings which are pulled to the surface (evoked) may be completely unexpected.

Part F. Standard Illuminati Programming concerning dreams & memories

The programmers put into place a system of alters whose function is to control memories. These alters are created from

Page 445 ...

the purely logic side of the brain, and have been logically programmed, and tend to be perfectionists in their work. They have been programmed to see themselves as unicorns, pegasi (winged horses), and horses. We have touched on these horse alters in our Illustrated Guidebook and the Vol. 2 book, for instance, the Vol 2 book reports that JER 37:3 is used to put in the programming that if a certain boundary is crossed, the horses are activated to protect the system. The horses work at night when an alter system goes to bed. They dump their memories into the dream state for various purposes.

The base imagery to create the unicorns, Pegasi & horses is laid in with the film Fantasia (see Chapter 5). Later when the specific approx. 4-year-old alters are given their scripts, they choose alters who are heartless and purely logic to tell a script like the following one. A typical script for the horse alters during programming would be as follows: "Pegasi are handsome winged horses who graze in the treetops and have their home in the gourd. The gourd is an alternate world where black pearls store memories. Because the horses are magical they can fit their big selves into a tiny gourd. They are black and their eyes glow faintly. They are led by a stallion Trojan, who is also known as the Dark Horse, and who commands all the spirits who lack bodies. He rules the kingdom of dreams. It is the job of the night mares to carry the dreams that are made in the gourd to all the sleepers of the outside world who need them. The reason that the night mares give dreams to people is so they know what they have done that is bad. Night mares have no feelings. Those who gain feelings are soon no good for their work. Souls with feelings are not able to be tough like the night mares must be. A night mare must be careful to frighten with the fewest possible images so that the dreamer will not think the dreams to be a common everyday thing. If they have trouble doing their jobs, if they get bored, then the night mares can let their little colts take over their jobs. Night mares can not speak out loud, but can make dreams of a nonfrightening nature to those who are awake, and to those who say what the night mare wishes to talk about. They only come when people are asleep. They can go through walls and solid things under the cover of darkness. The moon & the horses go together. Night mares must flee from the sun. They only are safe travelling at night. Each night mares’ hoofprint is a the spot one sees on the moon. Those spots on the moon were named after each mare, such as Mare Imbrium, & Mare Crisis & Mare Frigoris. It is very bad to be seen by anyone when a mare delivers her dreams. The Mare Imbrium had to leap through a wall, and to become invisible. She had almost been caught. She must go home before the dawn comes. When she gets home she can relax all day until night comes again. Trojan reports to Mr. Moon & Mr. Green. When the messenger mare galloped up to Mare Imbrium she told her to report immediately to Trojan, who is a handsome, midnight black mare with enormous power. He is the smartest of horses. He rules the Powers of the Night. He was very impressive when the mare met him, & he told her how to do her job better. The difference between night mares and day mares is that night mares have no emotions & days mares do. The day mares have no bodies. Day mares have to work with shadows, & shadows are very strict that the sun shines so that the shadow can work. Day horses project dream visions to people, but these day dreams are not as powerful as the night dreams." The programmers give such alters names like Abaddon, Dark Horse, Mare Imbrium, Mare Nectaris, Night Mare, Night Stallion, Pegasus and Trojan and other

Page 446 ...

appropriate names for horses. These alters must report to the overseers, not the internal programmers. The overseers will be clones of the main external programmers. These horse alters carry all the memories. They are programmed to believe they have no souls (emotions), and that they can not speak (although they may "neigh" to the therapist and alters may hear the stomp of their hoofs behind them). These night mares carry the memories to other alters (which is their "dream duty"), and because they have no emotions (soul), they can be heartless in what they give and in what they must carry. Lacking emotions they carry the memories like a movie projector. They are really beasts of burden for the entire system. These beasts of burden are created early in the verbal stage. (Vol. 2 briefly reports about their creation.) The alters who see themselves as the primary abusers, who are overseers of the system will ride these horses. The horse for the front of the system has to be a gentler natured horse because they don’t want the front of the system finding out too much and they want the front of the system to be able to function. And now you understand the collage in our illustrated Guidebook to Monarch Mind Control Programming (1995), p. 68, where a White Horse and a Black Horse do battle over a grave yard. When we were trying to get our memories, a battle was raging with the horses as to how much memories we were to get. - (You’ll notice that a high percentage of our collages have horses in them. One example, on p. 54, is Alice riding a white horse. Another is our system’s two overseers Dr. Green & Dr. Black riding a fierce night mare on p. 38. The horses are attached to the computers, but they are neither good nor bad, they simply are beasts of burden carrying out their assigned tasks. They try to balance what they give the alters. When an alter goes into the dream state, the horses fill that dream state with a memory. Because the memory never gets attached to the original emotions (affect), the horses can bring it night after night to terrorize the alters. If a horse gets too close to the memories that it brings, or entangled with the alters that it gives memories to, then the horse will lose its job, and another alter, perhaps a clean slate made from the horse itself, will take its job. Most alter systems will go into a trance like sleep between 12 and 4 in the morning. During this time a lot of mischief can happen. The internal programmers may be working hard to reprogram the system, or the handler has arranged a quick stop at the house to help with the reprogramming. Meanwhile most therapists have a rule that after 11 o’clock the client can’t call. So during that time period when therapists are out of reach, is when the programming cults move in & do a lot of work. During the dream state, no one is really holding the body, and programs surface for contact alters to go "home" to "get fixed". The handler may be waiting in a sidestreet or back alley a block away. Flooding programs are released in the dream state. Flooding programs were created when a drug was given that takes down all the dissociative barriers, and the memory of this flooding trauma is then carried forward by a mare and given to the appropriate non-compliant alters to scare them into not wanting to go toward health. The reader has seen how the programmers take advantage of the dream state & control the dream state. The support team has to be alert from eleven p.m. to five a.m. for that is when most of the accessing mischief takes place. The support team has numerous ways that they can encourage the dream state to be productive, & they now know the alters who are responsible for turning those dream states into nightmares (pardon the pun.)

Page 447 ...

Validation is important especially at the early stages of therapy. Our experience, as well as many others who understand the dynamics of MPD, is that extended family members are NOT good sources of validation. If the dynamics of abuse are understood in the context of families who abuse their MPD children, it will be clearly understood that extended family members will deny the truth, misrepresent or misinterpret past events, and may even be involved in trying to reprogram and reaccess the victim. Because some therapists attempt such validation, we feel it is important to issue a warning. Until recently, programmed multiples have lived in a world that was hostile to admitting their existence. They ran many risks from being exposed, & the trend has been for most therapists to deny the existence of mind-control. The victim has had so much fantasy structured into their mind that they don’t know what to believe, but they do know that they feel safer if they could find some validation. It is not uncommon for some alters in a system to realize the MPD, while other alters hold out for more validation. Within in an alter system DENIAL is extremely strong. Denial has been a tool for survival. The mind does not want to believe the horrendous things that have happened to it. The mind wants to protect itself from these trauma memories--not admit them. As therapy progresses, the way the mind unravels itself, becomes a validation for the system. Alters may talk about things that are in their mind, which the therapist can point out are standard programming features, such as ruby slippers, a dollhouse & rainbow. Denial is a force that pulls the mind away from the truth. Validation gives the mind something external. Without that external place to land, it is hard for the mind to accept its own thoughts. In a sense, validation (ext. proof) brings a balance for the mind. The victim doesn’t feel like he or she is standing alone. Something else agrees with them. Dates can be helpful for validation. Victims who have identical structures can be validating. Other SRA victims from the same coven or same team can be validating. Recent books showing how different alters have different PET brain scans, as well as changes in regional cerebral blood flow as switches occur, have helped programmed DIDs to trust that MPD (DID) even exists. Many churches are still denying its existence. At a certain point in the therapy, the mind has reached the top of the hill in its quest for reassurance from external proofs. At that point, the mind knows, and has acknowledged it to the point that that knowledge has become part of itself. The external programmers will not try to stop this awareness, because it is something that permeates the mind, even though some alters will remain in denial. However, admitting that the multiplicity exists, is still a long ways from proving to others that mind-control is being carried out on a wide-and big scale, and that the recovering victim was abused by many of the "finest" figures of the establishment. It is hard to see that programming, mind-control, and control of society exists UNTIL you swim against the stream. As long as someone is flowing with the river (the programming) the current is not perceived. Everything goes easy like running with the wind at your back. It is when you step out of line with the programming, when you step out of line with how society is programmed, do you feel the weight of the programming. When people are hired, their bosses hire them for how they think. And their boss’s boss in turn hired them for the way they think in an approved fashion. Much of today’s thinking is simply drifting with the stream of what is "politically correct." Try swimming against the tide, and you’ll discover it is there!

Page 448 ...

FAMILY, rebuilding a shattered family

Everyone needs to belong to a family. Everyone needs love & acceptance. To belong to a family & to be loved gives a person an identity. The victim’s deeper alters have few opportunities for this, unless the support team makes an effort to address these vital needs. When you begin working on a programmed multiple, chances are high that the multiple has experienced extreme inconsistency in the actions of the parents or guardians, and extreme contradictory expectations (often double-binds) from the parents too. Most families, that multiples come out of, are extremely guarded and secret, although they may put on a good front. The good front may simply be an agreed upon good cover. The multiple’s deeper alters have been programmed not to have a regular family, but to only know their cult family or their internal family (other alters). The therapist will have to investigate: Who is your family? Name your family? How do feel about them? The multiple’s deeper alters will have to be shown there is an external world. After they were programmed with the NO TALK, NO SEE, NO HEAR, they were then programmed with the DO-NOTHING-TO-HURT-THE-FAMILY programming. Why do programmed multiples (or their therapists) sometimes want to contact actual family members? It may be for validation, for justice, for more information, or for reconciliation. First, extended families are poor sources for validation. Second, there is no justice that would be appropriate for the crimes done, such as a lifetime of torture, except an eternity in hell. Forget getting justice. Third, sometimes relatives will provide more information. Generally, victims of mind-control attempt to pry information from relatives, and to read between the lines. Worthwhile information can be gleaned from relatives, just realize that it be work getting it.

Often it works the other way, intense pressure is put upon the victim to protect the family’s secrets. Fourth, because most parents of multiples are multiples themselves, all victims of mind-control need to be extra cautious about spending unsupervised time with the parent figure. So where does the victim go to rebuild a family? The support team can become the new family. Or the victim can find some brothers and sisters in Christ that are not-judgmental and legalistic who will appreciate the victim for all the positives they have, in spite of the multiple’s inconsistent behavior. The multiple has quit asking why after about the age of 3 1/2. The Illuminati have built fantasy scripts for them so they don’t ask why. The victim only asks why in the context of fantasy. The victim child may explain their parents multiplicity in magical terms. Child victims will often be aware that they have several daddies and several mommies. They as a multiple will switch to adjust the parental switches. Children may even take advantage of the parent’s multiplicity, although it usually works the other way. The therapist may have to intervene to try & spare the child, if the situation warrants it. It makes sense to point out to victims, that people have to be accepted in the reality that they exist, and that all the wishful thinking in the world is not going to change them. If we want a good father, rather than destroy ourselves wishing, a victim can find a surrogate father or a spiritual father that has the attributes they feel a father should have. If the surrogate or spiritual father wants the role, that’s even better. Rather than beat one’s head against a wall that won’t change, walk around the wall and get where you want to be. This is not denying the power of prayer, it is simply facing the fact that even Almighty God can’t make everyone conform to the image He’d like them to be, because people have free will.

Page 449 ...

FLOODING, how to deal with

One of the hardest problems to deal with was flooding with memories. Part of the flooding of memories is the result of a flooding program that is put. The method that is used to program it in is discussed in Vol. 2. Flooding is often the result of improper maintenance of the the victim’s therapy. The therapist wants a controlled release of memories and effects, not a flood that will drown the victim in a sea of overwhelming trauma and emotions. Remember, the amnesia walls were put in by the mind as a survival mechanism! Removing the walls is like removing the dikes of Holland. When the floods come they bring dizzyness. all kinds of fears, especially the fear of death, difficult breathing, chest pains, delusions, confusion, chills, and heat flashes, and a terror at losing control over one’s self. When memories come, if they can’t be processed then they can be stored in a box. Or the memory can be shrunk by the mind to a mote, and then kept small until the mind is strong enough to deal with it. Then it can be enlarged to real life proportions and processed. Another method that works well once alters have learned it, is to place their memories on a screen. The screen can be moved closer, or pushed away. The memory is placed on the screen like a movie. The memory can be slowed down, speeded up, made into a silent movie, made into a black and white movie, freeze framed, and the sound turned down on it. In other words, the movie screen gives the victim control over their memory, so they can process the trauma, and regain part of their life. The victim can relieve some of the overwhelming nature of the flooding by having someone to talk to, even an understanding friend such as another victim is helpful. Some are able to journal their emotions, or do some physical activity to blunt the effect. Standing up and getting busy, will help place some distance between the alter and the memory. For a small minority of alters they are capable of using prayer, meditation or scriptures to regain encouragement and calmness. The articles on abreactions may help in this area also. Christian therapists will pray with their clients that memories are released in God’s timing and not in a flood. Different programs and memories occur at different trance levels, so the victim can go either below or above the memory to escape an abreaction. Therapist like to encourage victims to remember their cognitive memory (actual event) before their affective memory (emotions attached to the event). It is important to get the entire memory for memory work to be effective, but the alters that can process information logically (but not emotionally) can play an important role in the early processing of powerful painful memories. The emotional front alters are too easily overwhelmed. Many people would like to avoid the pain and have an easy salvation; unfortunately, the flesh has to be crucified (in a sense) daily, and the victim has to face the reality of what has been done to them. Christ warned his followers that the life of freedom would not be easy. Sometimes victims start pulling up emotional pain without the memories. They may respond by turning to alcohol, compulsive eating, drugs and sex to escape the pain. Often these escape routes are programmed into them by the programmers. When they start acting this way, they often quit therapy. The therapist might beat the programming to the punch and warn their client that this may happen, so that they don’t get discouraged, but realize it is a common side effect or programmed effect of the emotional pain surfacing.

Page 450 ...


Our father was also our programmer. As our programmer, he set himself up as our savior, our creator, our god, and our master. One day during our therapy, Fritz (our co-author) said at a very timely point one of the most powerful things ever said to our system, "Your father had a beautiful little girl, he didn’t want a beautiful little girl. He wanted a robotic slave." Those words cut to the marrow of the programming. Those words reverberated down through our system for the next few years. What was stolen from the mind-control victim that you are working with? Their identity? Their beauty? Their life? Their honor? Their intelligence? Their humanness? Most slaves never get to the point that they ever realize what was stolen from them. They never get to grieve their losses. The victim has had the truth stolen from them. During therapy they may grieve over this. In therapy, the victim may grieve that their master & programmer was not the image they were programmed to see him in, but was a sadistic person who delighted in cruelly hurting innocent children. The programming for front alters is meant to short circuit grief, front alters are to forgive and forget. The therapist can give grief a voice. Grief is not an Illuminati issue. The Illuminati bloodlines have sacrificed humans including their own children for centuries. With such practices there is no room for grief. Illuminati doctrines allow the mind to trivialize death. In our notes we wrote, "The circle or web of life is like a celtic cross looping back upon itself, and intertwined through its own twisting and turning. The continuity of existence is an unbroken chain linking all the elements of the universe. In the web of life, all things share in the same power and can exchange power, life, and consciousness." You will find out in higher Illuminati doctrine that a person’s being is considered simply a nucleus, a particle of the vast universe, which creates its own light, and you lose your separateness from the universe. When the Mothers-of-Darkness ritually sacrificed a popular Queen Mother, we’d miss her, but our belief (that she’d left all that she was to the next generation, and that she’d be reincarnated, and that she’d voluntarily given up her life), prevented us from having a deep grieving. We would say things like, "We miss Queen Mother, do you remember when she taught such and such, we must not let that teaching die." We had internalized the Queen Mother to quite an extent through the programming and the cult, so that when she died, it felt like she lived in us. One of our Mother-of-Darkness’s describes further how grief gets swallowed up in the Wheel of Life philosophy of the Illuminati, "The real or unreal are merely opposite ends of the continuum on which reality can be stretched to include what is normally considered unreal. Even better, the continuum, like a flexible rod, can be bent, curved, and shaped into a circle where the end points of reality and unreality met and become the same point." Reality can be "demolished then reconstructed, becoming that one part that must maintain a balance, between the internal worlds of oppositional force, unity and interdependence with all." When something is lost, this philosophy doesn’t perceive it as a loss, but a refolding back upon itself of reality. When a person chops up a potato and puts it in a soup, you do not grieve the splitting up and death of the potato, it is joining its life to the eater. When things are taken apart, or die, the particles will reconstruct themselves into the fabric of the universe, life loops back on itself linking all elements. There is no loss. Belief in reincarnation and this kind of philosophy eliminate the type of grieving that other people may experience. The Illuminati (and other satanic groups) do not allow grief. It is not an issue that is brought to the surface. But grieving

Page 451 ...

does occur. It is buried in the emptiness of where the alter’s hearts have been taken out via hypnotic surgery. Grief lays silent without a voice in the mind and body. Grief lays in the silence of hopelessness and powerlessness. When the cult forces a child to kill another child, many children internally grieve for the child they have been forced to kill. To save the child’s soul, you will find that some alters will take on the pain, the characteristics, and even the child’s soul and identity as part of their silent grieving process. During programming, grief may display itself as a child in a fetal position, in contrast with an angry child yanking on the cages screaming, or a child crouching in fear. An important key to the success of the programming is the resignation/decomposition of the child victim’s mind. Life inherently has fight built into it. The sperm fights to fertilize the egg. The child fights to survive the birthing process. The difference between resignation to a debilitating auto accident and a struggle to survive can mean life or death. The programmer wants to strip the child of this. He wants unconditional surrender of the mind. When the child’s mind enters its last struggle for its own life it is termed DECOMPENSATION. When the mind quits fighting, and all mechanisms of defense or escape crumble, it is called RESIGNATION. A full-blown psychosis results from the breakdown of the personality. Total surrender to overwhelming events is a survival mechanism. The child surrenders to the forces that control it and the new reality and script that are given it. The Illuminati call this "BREAKING REALITY". The Illuminati programmers want to take the child victim from Reality to fantasy. At this point the child can manipulate his life however he wants to stop the pain. The child has surrendered to fantasy. Does a soldier grieve surrendering to the enemy to save his life? The depth of surrender by the child is so deep, that grief lacks a place in the new mind. The old life has been unconditionally surrendered. Unveiling the "BREAKING REALITY" process to the therapist is important to explain to the therapist why the therapist will not find grief floating around in a system. Instead, the therapist will find happy bird alters, happy singing tree alters, happy bee alters humming and a menagerie of other happy alters content in their fantasy worlds. So where did the grief go? The broken spirit has moved into the fantasy world, and the grief is so profoundly deep and buried internally so deep that it won’t be seen. The grief goes into the dead parts who die (a deep grief so deep that it is death) and these parts end up in the internal graveyards, concentration camps and other deep burial grounds. The programmers make sure they skim off any dissociative parts that have humaness and grief and bury them. One method to bury the grieving parts is to have "pac-man" alters that "eat" and internalize these dead parts come and clean them up. After the "pac-man" alters do their job, they are put to sleep. After the grieving parts are hypnotically buried, only the psychotic fantasy parts are left to build the large alter systems. The programmers want the child slave to look like other children, and the front part of the system may be allowed to have a grieving part. For instance, one grieving alter who held grief kept her tears internal and felt like if she let them out of her bag of tears, which weighed hundreds of pounds, the flood of tears would drown everyone. The therapist may find a grieving part like this. How do you get this part to express the grief that has been kept secret for years? Also, the front parts of a system that hold the body day to day may have the same griefs that other people feel. The host personality needs the support of friends like anyone else, even if the front parts appear very stoic. Perhaps an article Fritz wrote on grief will be helpful to front alters who have grief to work through. The article is meant to be a tool that can be read by anyone to work through their grief.

Page 452 ...


Grief, each of us has our own unique trauma to grieve about--and yet there seems to be a great deal in common in the grieving process for everyone. Grief, it is a challenge. It comes with feelings of sadness, guilt, anger, confusion, and fear. The first feelings may be disbelief and confusion. Then we find that we want to get things off of our chest, a release of the feelings. A good friend can really help when we want to talk. Finally, the day comes when we are able to accept what has happened and move on with life. This doesn’t mean we no longer care about what we grieved about, nor does it mean we’ve forgotten, it simply means we have worked through the feelings associated with the grieving process. There is a light at the end of the tunnel, there is hope, there is freedom from emotional pain, but each person has his or her own timetable and sometimes the journey seems impossibly long. Have you tried to think things through, and it just doesn’t happen. Grief is a releasing process, and a healing, the heart and spirit of a person are the players to watch, don’t expect the analytical part of the brain to score a touchdown in this situation. The heart of a person will push through to score, even though the analytical part of the brain schemes and schemes. But many of us are afraid of our feelings. We hold back our feelings, when the tears and the grieving are what we need to heal. Blessed are those who weep, for they will find comfort.

When we grieve, we often feel our world is falling apart, its gone. We are isolated in a confusing world. The world made sense, but now it doesn’t. Now we see ourselves in such a different world. We need to be patient with the world. Faith is the victory that overcomes such a frightening world. We must have the faith that eventually there will be light at the end of the tunnel. The world that has shattered like a broken mirror seems like it can not be reconstructed. But miracles do happen everyday--and those shattered pieces will miraculously mend themselves in a mysterious way. When we first grieve, many of us want to retreat from life. We find it hard to talk and be around others. We just get through each day. Often we can handle the truth only is small packages, so we turn to denial, either partial or full denial to get us through. Sometimes the best we can do is incorporate the truth at the speed that we can internally deal with it. We know this happens to other people--but when we grieve it seems to be an aberration.

Slowly the mind breaks down its denial. But while it does, we wake up feeling like we’re in a nightmare. Can this really have happened? On the one hand we want to disbelieve, yet on the other a small voice tells us--YES, this terrible thing did happen. One shock after another. We take the shocks as fast as we can. Someday the denial will be gone, and the grieving will be gone. But until then the process continues. Our feelings of love, our good feelings are responsible for us grieving. If we had no feelings we could not grieve. Grief is a testimony that we can love. Grief is a neon sign that we can care for others. Grief is a memorial that we can get close to someone. Those same abilities to love are now causes for our pain. The weight on our backs from the grief is really the weight of the proof that we cared for and loved another. When we wrap our world and intertwine our world with another, the world seems empty when that person is gone. The disciples were heartbroken when Jesus left them. The Holy Spirit was sent to be an

Page 453 ...

eternal comforter for mankind. Not only is the Holy Spirit there to comfort us, but many of our brothers and sisters have gone through suffering so that they can minister comfort to us, as they were comforted. Maybe the world isn’t so lonely after all. Reaching out to someone else who has suffered the same pain as we have is often soothing. If we let people minister comfort to us, we are giving them the chance to be like God the Holy Spirit, the comforter. This will strengthen them spiritually as they walk in the same direction that the Holy Comforter moves. Some who we thought suffered with us, may not be in a place to provide comfort. They may not realize that with only a little better grasp of what grief is, a little extra time, and the willingness to listen they could be so helpful. We must give them space too. But if we reach out for help when we grieve, it is a chance for us to feel needed and loved by the living, rather than staring off into space, and a chance to talk, rather than hoarding our feelings. We must give people the space to not be helpful too. Unfortunately, the type of feelings we are hoarding are often the same type that our friends are secretly denying themselves. They are not able to face true emotions in anyone. The most helpful friends are those who will take the time to find out what we need, and will participate in helping with those needs. A vague suggestion to travel, is not going to help as much as if the friend gets a ticket for us and travels somewhere with us. Sometimes while grieving we enter those periods where we need to be touched, to be hugged, to have a pat on the back as a friend passes by. This can mean the world to us. When we grieve it is natural to feel alone. However, when we grieve we can honestly come to realize that others have also had the weight of grief on their back. So go ahead and grieve. Grieve and grow stronger through the hours, the days and the months. The road we each travel is our own--and yet to be honest with life--we each must travel down a road, and each road is filled with things to grieve about. Let us travel down our own road. It is ours to travel. But we must be kind to ourselves if we hope to travel down our own road, because it will take determination and spirit to get through. We must recognize and take care of our needs. If our needs conflict with what others expect, we may have to clearly state our needs without apologizing. It is our own road to travel not theirs. Its O.K. to get help from friends. We just need to learn to verbalize what it is that they can specifically do. Vague comments for help during a grieving state, may end up frustrating everyone involved. To shut ourselves off from others who can help is not wise. When we grieve, we float through the day. But people are resilient. They don’t sink, and after a while the floating numbly through the day, becomes soaring and flying through the day. The entire person grieves, the body, and the spirit and the mind. We must minister to all of these. And yet all of these parts seem so numb. Yet, we must allow these parts to feel. The body, spirit, and soul need to express themselves. They need to each groan in their own way. The body feels tired, not just occasionally but most of the time. We must sleep and we must eat if we are to have the strength to continue on this journey. Even if we don’t immediately want to do these things, to neglect our sleep or meals will only make the journey harder. On the other hand we need to be sensitive to our new limitations. Under the stress of grieving, we may not be up to going to the store like we used to, but we can console ourselves with the fact that this will only be temporary. Grief is an emotional surgery to the heart, body, soul and spirit which needs time to heal. Before our loss, we had settled into life a certain way. When we lose it, our confidence in life is jolted. And that lack of confidence develops into fear. This fear can come from

Page 454 ...

seemingly out of nowhere, and rob us of the safe secure feelings we had. There are many people who will ask us questions, give flippant advice, and if we let them, they can hurt us. However, we can choose to understand that often their pity is the best they have to offer us, and their questions, however thoughtless, are an outgrowth of their interest and natural curiosity. If people say worthless things to us, then we can discard these words into the trash. We want understanding from others, then we need to give understanding. There are not many people who will nurture us in silence, and just be there silently with us. And sometimes during grieving we want to talk, or to be talked to, but sometimes we just want silent companionship. Grieving is healing. When we lose something externally, sometimes we then try to internalize it. It’s as if we are saying, "Now I’ll place it in myself and then I won’t lose it." We may adopt the mannerisms of the person we lost, we may in an effort to stop the pain substitute something for them. After we heal, we will still be vulnerable to surprise triggers, which will trigger us to remember our period of grief. First, we must get over our loss, and then we will have to get over the grieving memories. As individuals we have to wrestle with powers that are greater than us. Changes in life, caused by overpowering uncontrollable events in life, may produce strong feelings of loneliness. If this is equation on life is written in another way, it can also be reduced to the statement loneliness equals a fear of life with its uncontrollable changes. The only way to win against overwhelming situations is to take baby steps and to deal with those situations that we can and keep moving forward even if its only at a snails pace. Gradually, as we step through and over the small problems, we will gain the confidence and inner strength to face the bigger ones. Life is brief. Many generations have come and gone. And just as a rain storm is made up of little rain drops, God Almighty’s big plans and His big purpose is produced through each of us tiny drops on the panorama of time. At some point in the recovery phase of grieving, we relearn our own happiness. We salvage what is good in our life, and we recognize how to be happy and we allow ourselves to be happy and move forward. In recovery we find ways to record the past so it is not forgotten, and then turn the focus of our minds onto the present. We can not be happy in the past or the future, for we live only in the present. It is possible to let go of the past without giving up caring. We can go forward into changes, while our memories carry all that was good of the past that we want to bring with us. Finally, as we recover, we get to the point where we are now equipped to comfort others. As we move forward to help them, we find that in helping them with their grief, we further heal ourselves. What a healing it is when we are able to be thankful for all the wonderful things we have experienced. Some of us have had hard lives, but most of us (there are exceptions) have something that we can appreciate. Thank the good Lord that the earth hasn’t jerked as it has revolved around its axis. If it had just once, we might have seriously been hurt. We take so much for granted. Our grief feels like it will rob us of joy forever. Nothing seems to console. We don’t think we could ever love anyone in the future, like the people we miss from the pass. In the early stages of grief, we were in a fog and it was frightening not being sure how to travel. But we learn to be patient with ourselves, and to balance self-improvement, solitude and involvement with others. Day by day our emotional lives stabilize.

More and more, we bloom like a flower and we open up to the sunshine all around us. We find new sources of love and joy. And as we finally recover, we are amazed at how

Page 455 ...

much grief has silently taught us. We never knew we were so strong. How did we persist in persisting. How did we get past just floating numbly through the day? When we recover, we surprise ourselves at that inner strength and patience we always had but didn’t know was there. Finally, the value of choice shines so bright. How wonderful God was in giving us choice. Thanks to grief, we have stopped to reflect upon our lives, and we have realized what is important. The chance to make good choices is important. Now we realize how important. Now we realize that we can choose and design our lives like we choose with the new strengths we discovered through the grieving process. We are survivors, and survivors are strong people. Survivors have better-defined goals, fresh views, and stronger views. We have thrown away oor masks, and we are facing life with a fresh understanding of who we are. As we grieved we recognized those things in life which gave us life and strength. Now we appreciate those life-giving things. As recovered survivors we no longer need to ask why we live, we realize the value of living life to its fullest potential. Now we are ready to be used of God. We are content to be alive.

GUILT, dealing with (also see art. on "Self-forgiveness)

a. In a deep contrite spirit confess your sins
b. Review the story of the prodigal son
c. Understand how Christ’s sacrifice attoned and paid for all guilt
d. Make restoration, restitution, and reparation to those injured.

Page 456 ...

Why have millions, if not billions of dollars, been spent on research into the mind-body interaction and hypnosis? Many believe self-hypnosis is a tool for making changes in your life. Others see hypnosis as a mystical hocus pocus tool to be (mis)used by people to control others. Part of the reason hypnosis is such a controversial subject is because the powerful elite that control the establishment know it is extremely powerful, that it works, and they want to keep its power out of the hands of the people. Another reason that hypnosis is controversial is that spiritually discerning people have realized that there is a demonic element involved with the process. They realize that hypnosis opens up portals in the mind for demons. This section will attempt to lay out facts, and allow the reader to draw their own conclusions and use whatever techniques that seem to have the best therapeutic potential. Hypnosis is a state of mind in which suggestions are accepted and acted upon more powerfully than they are under normal conditions. The Illuminati rank hypnotic trance depth from 0 to 10, where 0 equals being totally out of the trance state, and 10 equals a comatose state. This scale is called "Jacob’s ladder". You will find top-notch hypnotists will refer to trance depths as steps. The reader needs to bear in mind, that the Illuminati programmers can number the descending trance depths either "1 to 10" or "10 to 1". The choice of which -way to number the depths when training an alter depend on several factors. When training a small child, they may be able to count 1 to 10 but may not be able to reverse the count. The programmer may use the count "1 to 10" because it is what the child can count. The programmer may use the 0 to 10 method, as a reversal to what other hypnotists do in the world. The programmers will use one induction method in one area of an alter system and the reverse (or another type) in another area to throw a therapist off track. (For those unfamiliar with hypnotic inductions, it is common for psychiatrists/hypnotists to induct people down "10...9...8...7..." on down to 1. When bringing the subject up, hypnotists at times actually refer to these levels as "steps." In training the child to go down into trance, climbing and descending stairs while counting is used, and the game "Chutes and Ladders" is played. The child has often learned to trance as a reflex to the trauma it has received even while in the womb, so the assistant programmers only need to give these already acquired trance states numbers. Under hypnosis, a person can access and control areas of the mind that are normally out of reach of the conscious mind. This also applies to victims of mind-control, who can use the trance state to work their way through the amnesic barriers to work with parts of the mind that the conscious mind can’t reach.

The hypnotic trance is a naturally occurring phenomenon. Most modern Americans walk around in a slight hypnotic trance. The stress of the rat race, television, video games etc. contribute to the overall trance states that Americans walk around in. Have you ever come into a room full of people who have their eyes wide-eyed glued to the television? They are in a trance state. Have you ever thought about an important problem while driving to work. You were in a trance state. Your mind was operating on two levels at once. The spiritual danger that is inherent in hypnosis is that it opens up the spiritual portals of the mind. The true loving Creator of the Universe doesn’t seek His own, because love doesn’t seek its own, but is self-sacrificing. Yahweh God is a gentleman (so to speak) who gently knocks at your door, and wants your conscious mind to voluntarily decide to serve

Page 457 ...

him. The Kingdom of Demons operates just opposite of this. Demonic entities are always trying to capture the subconscious, to trick the mind, and to force the person into servitude. When the mind relaxes, and lets down its natural barriers to the subconscious, it is an open door for demonic attack. For Illuminati programming, the best hypnotic results occur at about 7. Some people can be hypnotically programmed at 5-6, but some children will fight it at that level. Most will cooperate by 7 and everyone else will be cooperative by 8. Beyond 8, the mind and body are in a very dangerous deep trance. It may surprise some to learn, that ALL major programs are put in at the deepest level, level 10. The base level 10 is used for the foundations of every program. Why? Because this level is associated in the mind with the primal functions of life, and the only way this programming can be tampered with is to use drugs and a medical facility which will monitor vital signs the entire time. Once the Illuminati have programmed in the basics to all the programming they want, they will refine and build upon that deep programming at other trance levels. The programming is like an octopus with its head at level 10 and its tentacles reaching up into the lighter trance states. Most alters within a system will learn to stay in the mind at a level 5 trance. The programmers will teach the alters to stay at whatever trance level they want that alter to function at. They want the alter to maintain its trance state. A few strong front alters may operate at a 3 to 4. Since most people are unfamiliar with trances, front alters appear to be normal to the outside world. Most memories of a slave occur at a 3-4 trance state. Some memories from deeper may float up to a 4 trance state. The programmers are intimately aware of how memories are connected to trance states, and they have a number of standard tricks to prevent therapists from getting anywhere. One standard hypnotic trick by the programmers is called a TRAP DOOR. A program or a memory will be placed in at various hypnotic levels. Let’s say the programmer places in a memory at a level 4. They will then stop in the middle of what’s happening and take the alter(s) down to an 8. The therapist comes along and is getting parts of the memory at four, and then the alter(s) remembering can not get anything more because they hit the part that’s been put in at an 8. The reverse of this, is when the programmer programs various alters that if they hit a certain memory they are to trance deeper (or trance higher--depending on what the programmer wants). When the alter reacts as it has been trained, the mind skirts around the memory and never comes to rest where the memory or program lays. These tricks can also be coupled with the use of two opposite induction counting systems, in other words "Jacob’s ladder" get changed. Like moving on a ladder, the mind climbs up or down. Should the therapist decide to use hypnosis with the victim, they should consider using a hypnotic tone of voice that is appropriate to what the victim will respond to. Sometimes hypnotists take control in a military voice as if they are the father figure, and some times they are very soothing as if they are the mother figure. In general, the maternal approach works best, although Hollywood and stage hypnotists like the more impressive authoritarian approach. Hypnosis can be related to the unconscious memories of being put to sleep as a child. This is why the programmer or handler will place himself into the role of putting the child victim to sleep. Brahm’s Lullaby is a favorite for hypnotists for inducing a trance. There is a strong tendency in many people to be submissive and to look for a savior figure, a daddy figure to guide them through life. Self-hypnosis has at times lessened the dependence upon the victim for the authority figure that comforted and

Page 458 ...

soothed the victim with his hypnotic voice during the programming. Don’t forget that the victim has been trauma-bonded with the hypnotic programmer, and has had a programming experience where drugs and hypnosis were used to give the victim a feeling of blissful, ecstatic merging with the programmer. The alter trusts the programmer totally. The alter will transfer that trust to the therapist, or if taught control over their own trance states learns to transfer power back to themselves. If a mind-controlled slave works toward developing the ability to self-trance so that they can regain power over the slave’s system, the person will have to overcome several obstacles. The programmers lay in programming to prevent alters from doing their own thing, or allowing other people to hypnotize them. Imagery which uses the senses of smell, touch, hearing and even taste are powerful for hypnosis. Being able to construct visual images in your head is also a valuable tool of hypnosis. If the therapist and victim decide they want to use self-hypnosis to gain control over the victim’s life, such as learning to change negative self-talk into positive self-talk, to overcome fears and anxiety, or to quit a programmed habit, then imagery and visualization will work in the same powerful manner as they did when they were used in a negative way to enslave the person. Finally, there are some victims who will have serious qualms about hypnosis. They object that it smacks to much of being "cult-like" and that if-has demonic side-affects. If the victim does not feel comfortable with hypnosis, the therapist needs to respect that. It is quite possible that hypnosis falls into the category of things one doesn’t strive to do, but sometimes is needed. In the Old Testament, God didn’t want to have to kill His Creation with a flood, indeed He gives as one of the Ten Commandments "Thou shalt not kill." and yet, He inspired Solomon to write, "To everything there is a season, A time for every purpose under heaven: A time to be born, And a time to die; A time to plant, And a time to pluck what is planted; A time to kill, And a time to heal; A time to break down, And a time to build up...A time to love, A time to hate; A time of war, And a time of peace." ECC. 3:1

The ministers who have rejected hypnosis, even self-hypnosis, as a possible tool to help victims of mind-control usually have little concept of how much of the victim’s splintered dissociative mind lives and operates in trance. We would encourage people to view self-hypnosis as a trance state that is to be used as a means to freedom, not a way of life. As to the objection that the trance state opens one up for demonic attack, so do many other things in life, such as travelling as a missionary to a pagan country. The bottom line is that the missionary opens himself up for attack because he is trying to give life, and the use of hypnosis can only be justified if it is being used in a way that is consistent with giving life and freedom, and life-more-abundant.


At the time this is being written, there are millions of people world-wide with end-time programming. This Illuminati mind-control programming has been put in at the deepest levels of the mind. The end-time programming concerns those events that are to happen to usher in the reign of the Anti-Christ. This author is sad that she obediently played a role of helping program this end-time programming into young slaves. What has this to do with hypnosis? Because so far therapists and ministers have only played with the surface issues. Therapists will only deal with issues that clients talk about, and most ministers only deal with surface issues they consider important. There are lots of slaves and Vietnam Viets, who have programming layered in at the deepest hypnotic levels for the end times, and no one is doing anything about it.

Page 459 ...

End-time programming will resemble the following. Some teams will assemble to carry out missions, sometimes the missions will be one-way missions like the Manchurian candidate. Some individuals will perform acts of violence and may end up getting themselves killed. Some of the hierarchy systems will go back to the cult and flip their system from being Christian into being day-to-day Satanists. The world will have an anti-Christian fad, where everyone will seem to be turning to the occult and hating Christians. Systems, which have Christian fronts, believe that they can pray and resist the final call-back. These type of prayers are similar to praying for someone else. It will still be that other person’s choice as to what they do, and in this case, the persons (alters) with end-time programming have this programming attached to the primal part of the mind, that part which regulates such things as the heart beat. Faith overcomes the world (& by extension the New World Order.) Just as people we pray for still travel directions we don’t like, unfortunately alters with end-time programming may well travel directions contrary to our prayers. Still total faith in an omnipotent God is far better than no faith. The mind of the survivor is like a computer where the operator snaps the mouse on an icon and then shifts into another enviroment, and continues to move into subsequent areas of programming. Hypnosis could be used as a tool to move down through these "Monarch mind-control computer icons. Although lots of victims of mind-control have come in to therapists for help, very little work has been done to go down the various computer paths and get into the hidden information that is stored everywhere within an alter system. Deliverance work has been done with a number of victims by a number of Christian therapists, where the Christian therapists were able to use spiritual techniques to break down the walls to get into areas of a system. The co-author’s of this book believe that some deep work with end-time programming may need hypnotic drugs and medical supervision, in spite of our experience in seeing some success without going to this extreme.

Page 460 ...

IDENTITY, discovering it

All non-multiple persons as children have ego states that develop and are integrated as time goes on into a more and tighter cohesive package. Most of the lines between the different states disappear after age one, and the child goes on to develop a single identity. With programmed multiples, the deeper alters, such as spin kittens, will be depersonalized to such an extent that they will have no sense of self. They will also have no sense of reality. Some alters have a 2-D world, where time does not exist in their concept of reality. However, deeper kitten alters, for instance, will not even have that. They have been stripped of even a concept of reality. When they hold the body everything is surreal and clouded by the hypnotic state they exist in. Out-of-body experiences, feelings that everyone else in the world is unreal, thoughts that one is dead are all classified in psychology as depersonalization. A normal Illuminati system will have many parts that are depersonalized. Reality for a spin kitten is but a facade. Can you blame such an alter? Whenever they are used they receive tremendous abuse in the outside world’s reality. It is better that they consider reality to be the walls that they live in along with the internal world they have created for themselves. Reality is being pulled between life and death, and they need to try and find a balance. -These deeper depersonalized alters need a new birth into the truth, they need an exodus experience out of their identity as a slave, into a new promised land. This again is why the safety of the slave is essential for progress. Why should a severely traumatized alter, which regularly receives the worst abuse imaginable when they hold the body, want to give up the comfort of their internal world, and come live in the rest of the world’s reality--if it means more abuse. The children of Israel wanted to go back to Egypt where as slaves they had some certainty. To get a new identity away from slavery is a challenge. There are many parallels that can be drawn between the children of Israel finding their freedom and identity as a people and a group of alters discovering who they are. Sometimes alters can help each other, and sometimes families of alters get into internal feuds. Sometimes a single alter can sabotage the hard work of many alters. Notice how God had Moses give the tribes back their history and ancestry. Soon each person could identify himself as a member of a family that gave him a sense of belonging. Each tribe had a flag. God also insisted that they break from the past. The alter who has lost its identity needs to learn to walk, to feel, to see, to hear beyond the programming. It needs to learn the who, when, where & how of who he or she is. The therapist may say, "You are not a princess," or "You are not a snowy fluffy white kitten." "Your identity is your birthright." "You’re human, that’s really where the truth is." It will be hard for such an alter. Everything they thought was real, was fantasy. And reality is extremely painful, so painful that it is beyond words, it is but a deep anguish. But the alter needs to break its old ties to the slave’s master, break all soul ties, and unshackle himself or herself from the lies. Then the therapist can teach them their strengths, and they can begin to find some self-respect in who they were when the system was born, and who they are becoming, and who they are as God sees them. Therapists will try to promote the humanism within an alter, by referring to it in human terms, such as saying "family of alters" rather than the cult’s terminology "litter of kittens". Doing this may be helpful to the overall cumultive effect of showing alters their humaness, but it doesn’t need to be done in a legalistic fashion.

Page 461 ...

IMPLANTS, dealing with

The people who are using implants for mind-control aren’t about to tell us what they are doing, and they certainly haven’t obtained the victims’ permission for their sadistic behavior. They haven’t spent trillions of dollars researching, designing and installing these black budget and secret projects, if they weren’t convinced that they work. They are trying hard to get implant technology to the point it is tamper proof.

The controllers seem to think they are above accountability. The various implants aren’t the stuff of sci-fi or delusions, their reality can be documented from real sources. Tracking implants are being put into our children and our dogs by people who want to "help" us not lose anything. Any bozo can purchase human tracking implants today & use them on their fellow man. After you’ve gotten over your denial that this is happening you are ready to deal with the unfortunate reality that we live in. The achilles heel of the NWO is that they have too many things to control and keep track of. This is why they use computers. Computers with artificial intelligence may be able to play chess and make decisions, but they are not superior to the human mind, and you as a human still have a chance to outsmart them. The human, whose mind is being read, can think in codes and speak in codes. The NWO does not have the manpower to control their implant victims with human handlers 100% of the time.


Thousands of implants victims (& electronic mind-control) are looking for help, some of them have approached the two co-authors for help. Some have given up fighting the implants. Some have bought into the flimsy cover stories that their syntel handlers try to give them to cover up who is actually controlling them. For instance, implant victims, who obviously have American handlers, are being told that their handlers are Iranians who hate America, or the Japanese who are trying to repay America for Hiroshima, or the Russians, etc. The first step is to recognize who your handlers are. 100% of the implant victims in this country who knew enough clues to provide clues were victims of American organizations. The Germans, the Swedish, the English, the Russians and who knows who else are all putting implants into people. Fritz has lived in several continents and can spot Americanisms immediately. One of the victims which we know, Carole Price, is also aware of Americanisms. The handlers of implant victims in this country have been obviously Americans. So the first step is to recognize that if you are an American, and your problem developed in this country, don’t blame aliens, whether from overseas or from outer space. The supposed alien implants in this country that alien abductees keep discovering have continually gotten more sophisticated. The hard fact is that it is our own secret government as part of the NWO, not aliens that are subjecting us to these implants. Now we have identified the basics of the question "who?". Refer back to the list of abuser organizations in Vol 2 page 18 for a comprehensive list of specifically what organization might be involved. Yes, there is even evidence that groups like Division 5 of the FBI are involved in this type of mind-body control. Also realize that many syntel implants are being controlled by artificial intelligence in computers most of the time. Try outsmarting the machine by doing unpredictable things.


If you are an implant victim begin journalling what is happening to you. Begin sharing your experiences with other people who understand that implants are being used. Go to a spectrum analyzer and find out what signals are being sent. Go to an anechoic chamber and

Page 462 ...

find out where the signals are coming from. Get heat thermography done of your body and find out the locations of implants that way. Map out where the pain occurs. Pin point where your master implant is located. Knowledge of what is happening will help you and others fight what they are doing to you.


Because a variety of implants are being employed by the NWO, there is no set answer to what is going to work. A person is going to have to discover if the implant is metallic, plastic, a virus, carbon-based or whatever. If you can identify how the implant is working--you have a chance to counter it. If you can get yourself to a location where they cannot get signals to & from the master implant, then they will lose track of you. Every few minutes they monitor the exact location of where the victim is. Their tracking computers will soon learn if they have lost track of where you are. That is fine. When they lose track, stay out of their signals long enough to get over 25 miles out of range, and they may lose track of what area you are in. How long you as an implant victim can remain out of their signals depends on where you are willing to go and what you are willing to do. A code activates some of the main implants on a body suit of implants. Many have some kind of safety feature to prevent someone from activating them who is a non-approved user. It is speculation at this point, but some of these implants may self-destruct if a person is able to make the implant think it were being tampered with by a non-approved user. If the main implant that controls other implants of a body suit is shut down it might bring a general relief to the victim. FOR VIRUS IMPLANTS. There are some antibiotics, some colloidal metals like colloidal silver, and perhaps some juices like cranberry juice that may destroy a virus implant. Certain juices or substances might change the body’s chemistry. An implant victim might test several things and see if they can find one that throws the body’s system off.


There are a few honest surgeons (they are far more rare than any one would at first imagine) that will take out implants. Although Fritz and I have heard of a number of these surgeons, we do not give out their names.

FOR ELECTRONIC IMPLANTS. Some victims have blasted their implant(s) with some type of electromagnetic energy to a degree that they blew the implants. Other victims have found some relief from lead shields. The woman who makes lead suits to protect people is:

Shirley S. Still, 680 W. Rose St., Lebanon, OR, 97355. The company that produces lead shields using her patent #5,038,047 is Shielding, Inc. International, P.O. Box Z, Madras, OR 97741-0069. ph. no. 541-475-7211, Fax 541-475-6628.

COVERING ONESELF.Implant victims have covered themselves with cages of various metallic substances & other things to isolate themselves from the electronic control. The newer implants are nearly impossible to isolate from, but implant victims should certainly try.

FOR FIBER OPTICS. Fiber optics are often like hairs. The victim should look for suspicious looking hair, such as in the pubic area--better yet, simply shave. Some victims have pulled or shaved off their fiber optic implants.

One victim of implants provided this list to search out & destroy implants:

1. Electro-Magnetic Forcefields of Interference

a. by going to a cable co. & walking around the area of the live satellite dishes. At a safe point, place both hands onto a live satellite dish.
b. try the same at a telephone co.
c. to a utility co. electric transfer Pt. & walk around the area.
If the victim’s implants respond to this type of countermeasure, they will experience a pulling sensation, which is a positive sign. Standing near a TV as it is repeatedly turned on & off may create interference with the implants too.

Page 463 ...

2. Full Body Electo Magnetic Scanner
3. Full Body MRI with contrast
4. Gas Chromatography, Toxic Light Chromatography, Mass Spectrotography, & Blood analysis.
5. Mason Receivers
6. Non Linear Detectors
7. Pherigen Test
8. Spectrum Analyzers.

This victim recommends that if you have a telephone charging device in your home, reprogram it if possible each day, for the telephone can be one of the main power sources of implants.


Most victims of implants need to get the bigger picture. They need to find out what the Illuminati are and who the Illuminati bloodlines are. They need to learn who to trust and who not to trust. They need to learn about trauma-based mind-control because our experience has been that most implant victims are also victims of trauma-based mind-control. They need to realize that ALL phones in this nation are listened to. They need to understand that voice identification programs allow computers to identify who is talking over a phone by your voice.

We wish we had all the answers, but we don’t. We can report that we have seen some victims get some temporary (short term) relief from implant control, which gives us hope that if all of us pull together and exchange what we are attempting to do, and what we learn that we will defeat them. Unfortunately, many implant victims are people who they have identified as isolated and without a support system. Perhaps the first step might be for victims to break their isolation, learn how to be good friends with others, and step out of the corner that the NWO has backed each of them into.

INTEGRATION, understanding

For years the goal of therapy has been "to integrate" the multiple. We believe that a more realistic and advantageous goal would be to allow the victim’s system to decide upon what form of functional unit they want to be, whether that is a well-organized company, or a close-knit family, or a single identity. The goal is to stabilize and create a functioning "person". Everyone, non-multiples included, consist of competing parts in their minds. Even the great saint Paul, who God used so powerfully, said I do that which I don’t want to do. Hollywood movies and several popular books have promoted unrealistic expectations that programmed multiples can simply do some integration work and be done. Support people use two words "integration" and "fusion" to describe various stages of the crumbling of dissociative barriers between alters. At one end of the spectrum is what is called "an apparent partial fusion" and at the other end is "full integration." Many programmed multiples terminate their therapy before the therapist has much of an idea what the therapist is looking at. Because the front parts of a system are amnesiac to the deeper levels, there have been numerous cases where clients fully believed they were integrated, but the client was unaware of the numerous levels of alters hidden away. Nor will they probably ever detect these levels. Is multiplicity the real problem of programmed slaves, or is their slavery the real problem? The therapists have had a tendency to want to rescue the slave from their multiplicity while not rescuing them from their slavery. The multiplicity is the slave’s principal survival mechanism for enduring the slavery. The issues of safety for these DID (MPD) slaves are still not being addressed, even after over a century of examination by psychologists on DID. Not only do we have problems within DID clients, but we have problems within the professional community.

Page 464 ...

Some therapists have decided that multiples are refusing to integrate because they like the attention they get from the therapist (or others) being a multiple. While this may occur, it strikes us as premature for most therapists to judge the victim this way, when they still have such a limited grasp of the programming and the other features of mind-control. Most therapists still do not even recognize that there is a World Order that is controlled by the abusers. Some Counselling courses are teaching their students that multiplicity gives a person a superiority over people who are non-multiples, because it gives them a broader repertoire of actions and abilities. When Fritz took counselling, his college instructor encouraged all would-be counsellors to create a pseudo-type of multiplicity. When a multiple system develops a high degree of internal cooperation and communication between various alters and levels, they may feel compelled to hold onto the system’s multiplicity because it gives them such a wide amplitude of actions, and makes accountability more difficult. Even though there are distinct advantages (or at least what appear to be distinct advantages), there are times for all programmed multiples when their multiplicity is simply "hell". Fusion is generally a process. It is similar to two people getting to know each other’s lives. A full integration is when they become one. Is this becoming one like two people marrying, or is it like two bodies/brains actually physically merging? A full integration is the complete merger of the two dissociative parts of the mind, however, much of what is called "integration" is really more like the marriage of two individuals--and the reader knows that divorces do happen, in the external world and they also happen between alters that "integrate" in this fashion. The longer the marriage the more chance for the union.

While it is true that as long as there is dissociation left and alters, the Network has a foothold to exploit; but another reality is, even if the person integrated fully, the threat that the Network could grab the person and manipulate his or her mind still exists. Again the question must be asked, "What is the primary problem, the multiplicity or the slavery?" The primary block to integration is programming. And the programming is held in place by demonic entities, lack of safety, dissociation, force of habit, alters who believe they want the programming, and the core splits and the core. While we will not go into the full details of how integration-blocking programs are put in, the therapist needs to understand that the client has received lots of heavy programming not to integrate. Trying to integrate doesn’t feel like moving to safety, it feels like moving toward death, and if the support team is not careful, trying to integrate alters could easily result in triggered suicide programs actually being acted out. The therapist tells the client in glowing terms how happy they will be to integrate, but the client only feels the death programs that are attached to any thoughts of integration. It seems that therapists could be more discrete and get what they want to accomplish through the back door, rather than tearing down the house trying to get through a booby-trapped front door. One of the best ways is to tell a story (such as Jesus did, and Milton Erickson did) that by-passes the grid of mental resistance and reaches the subconscious heart of a person’s thought processes. Creating these kinds of stories allow the therapist to develop his or her own creativity. The stories do not even need to be fiction, they just need to be anecdotes that evoke the subconscious to make the connection to the moral, without the mind’s resistance to change being triggered. For instance, there was once a man who found a piece of glass while he was walking. It was so beautiful. Later, he found a gemstone while he was out in the woods. Over a period of time he found many beautiful things and he put them together in a mosaic. The different colors of the gems worked so well together that they created a masterpiece, for the unified whole was far superior to the beauty of the individual pieces.

Page 465 ...


The great philosophers have encouraged men to "Know thyself." Self-awareness is easier said than done; it is hard for anyone to crawl into one’s own head to see how it works. Our conscious minds reveal precious little about how our conscious thoughts surface from deep in the mind. Whether one is a multiple or not, the mind does a great deal of thinking without thinking about it. Many of the important articles of my second half to this book have been devoted to how to get internal information, for instance:

· Communication Issues
· Fear issues
· Trust Issues
· Alters, deep, how to work with d. a.
· Biography
· Dreamwork
· Hypnosis, self, ins & outs
· Mapping

The material we have provided on structuring will give many insights into how the Illuminati slave’s system is set up. As you may know, things begin with the four elements & then are layered outward like an onion. The entire thing fits together like a 3-D puzzle. The grid that the handler carries with him, will spell out the who, where, what and why of the system. Everything in the system represents something. Simple things can often be important pieces. This article deals with learning how the client’s mind works. We’ll provide a few more specific insights on how to get internal information, in addition to the above articles. Initially, the client’s mind is working on trust. Information will begin flowing once some trust is established. Build the trust first. Initially, the therapist will be trying to establish if the person is a programmed DID. Once that is secure in the therapist’s mind, the therapist can begin assisting the client to discover what he can not find without the aid of the support team about how the client’s mind is working. And a giant puzzle begins to be assembled. One of the most difficult things to achieve is a coherent chronology of the person’s life. As more and more information is journalled and recorded the puzzle will piece itself together. Of course, the therapist needs to take good notes, or have an assistant do this. It is often beneficial for the principle alters involved in therapy to see the notes. Another way to do this is to have the sessions tape recorded and let the system go home with the tape and see if they can build upon what was in the session. The slave’s mind is programmed to believe that they will die if anything about the internal world is learned or seen. When information is recovered and they survive its recovery they expose the lie. It will be uncomfortable for alters to go against the programming, but they will soon demonstrate to themselves that they will not be dead the next day for learning about their programming.

Assisting the victim to see.

Some therapists are having great success teaching primary alters how to do self-hypnosis in order to trance deep. By doing this, alters can go down and retrieve information. Another way to get information is simply to speak through to the subconscious. The therapist wants to make each alter feel relaxed. Alters in deep trance states & deep kitten alters may feel more comfortable with dim lighting. One can’t automatically assume that alters will feel most comfortable laying on a couch. Sometimes that feels too close to when they were programmed. Alters should be allowed to choose where they feel most comfortable, on a chair, a couch, or in a corner. They can be allowed to find the place they will feel safest in. Often when the client goes looking, the host alter simply does not see its internal world. During the therapy, there will be a sense that

Page 466 ...

something exists there, but the client will not know how to tag it. You know how you have a nagging thought that you have left something behind, but the description of whatever it was, has not surfaced? Many times all the victim is aware of, is that something seems to be there. To deal with this, the alters can turn lights on, shine the light of the Holy Spirit on things, put windows in, reconfigure mirrors so they can be rotated, or are made from 1-way mirrors into 2-way mirrors. Then the images that come through 2-way mirrors can be enlarged until something comes into view. Many times, with the Alice In Wonderland programming, things behind mirrors are small specks in the grass. Perhaps they see only Mr. Nobody. Like the song, ‘Your nobody called today...", the fact that Mr. Nobody is there is a clue that he is there. (Figuring out Mr. Nobody is common sense, he is mentioned just to remind us how things are hidden.)

Difficulties, pre-existing & created.

As a programmed multiple is worked with, they may seem calm on the outside, while all hell is breaking loose on the inside. One of the triggers that therapists often unnecessarily push is that they talk about how the alter is part of the whole. The alters will discover this for themselves. But every time the therapist verbalizes it, they trigger programming, and then various alters get triggered & upset. They feel like their I.D. is being taken away. They do need to learn that they are part of a whole, but it can be learned quietly over a period of time. The mind will slowly assimilate the reality of it. Occasionally, alters will give a therapist a concocted answer to deflect more questions. Another difficulty is that the therapist and alters will almost always discover the cover story & the cover programming first. There is an art to asking questions to multiples and an art to interpreting the answers. It’s O.K. for the victim to only have pieces. It’s O.K. for the victim to change things as progress is made. Initially, the front alters will be trying to work through a great deal of false memories, planted thoughts, and programming. There is a knowing in the mind, between a planted thought and a real one. This knowing is hard to describe, but part of this knowing is the difference in impact a real trauma memory has in comparison to a false memory attached to a stringer of programming. The false memory will have emotions attached, but the intensity is much less, and these emotions do not linger like the impact of real traumas. After a while the victim will begin to discern the difference between the real and the false. A standard trauma for children is to lock them in a trunk, and dump the trunk into a body of water where a.the trunk fills with water, b. the child drowns, and c. is resuscitated in time to not suffer brain damage. How does the victim’s mind remember this? The young child doesn’t have a fully developed ability to anticipate. They have been locked in boxes before. From having debriefed children of these traumas, it is manifest that they never remember

the drowning (which takes anticipation), what they remember crystal clear is the terror of being locked in a dark box (which connects with their memories of similar traumas). The emotional affect of this trauma will be dissociated. Another reason why information processing slows down is that information is not processed with its affect, its emotional content. After the therapist asks, "What do you see?" he can ask, "How does this make you feel?" By encouraging the feelings, the memories get worked on rather than being stuffed. When memories get stuffed, then the next layer of memories is harder to reach.

At times when a particular area of a system is worked in, the client may feel certain feelings. "Why do you feel certain ways when you work on certain areas?" And if that feeling is "I’m bad", then rewrite a reverse program, so that each time the alter hears "I’m bad", it hears

Page 467 ...

& thinks "I’m good." The programmers depend upon the mind not wanting to believe itself. When one dissociated part of the mind creates something, the other parts are not in touch with that creation. For instance, parts create their home or environment that they live in. If another part were to try to get in touch with that internal home, it all seems like hearsay, second hand information. If you were the fourth born son, you would not remember the first few years of the first born son’s life! It is no different for the fourth split to try to get in touch with the first split’s history. It was created afterwards & it has none of the early memories of the first split. The client asks the therapist, "You want me to believe I have rivers, if there are rivers there, then why don’t I know?" If the therapist is not careful, the client (unable to see the internal world) may think the therapist is a wee bit crazy. You may get responses such as "What’s a castle?" "Why would I want to go into a graveyard, and dig up old bones? That’s scary." Some directions are not in the best interest of the therapy. It is not advisable to get the castle librarian. It is more important not to destablize the system, than any good that would be achieved in this direction.

Where to search for information.

The multiples’ mind will play a mental hide and seek with the therapist. The therapist is looking for holes in which to work through the system. Make a guess, and investigate it with some shrewd test. Try by-passing programming roadblocks with ambiguous statements, that the victim’s mind has to put into its own context. Much of what we hear in life is ambiguous, except that it is said in some context. Without a given context, the mind has to find one of its own. This is the science of how the mind represents ideas inside its mind. The therapist can gain insights if they will talk to the fear & talk to the anxiety. These emotions may be hiding parts behind them. When a particular alter is having a panic attack, the particular alter may not be able to see the alter with the panic emotions behind it. When you find an alter, main alters may have several roles for the outside world, and several internal jobs. Special purpose fragments, who have no history, are simply parts for a particular job. The therapist can ask questions such as, What does such & such smell smell like? The therapist can talk about their phobias & about their reactions to different foods. If the system has done or will do art work, and if the therapist will talk long enough about it, then they are likely to get someone pop up who can tell you about it. Questions like, "What do you see in the mind?" encourage the alters to start seeing what is happening in their internal world.

Therapists should look for the blue rooms, which are balancing points and a good place to start on each level. The magical room is a room full of gidgets and gadgets. There will be 26 rooms, two for each color. Look for the trees, such as "Do you have any trees in your system? Ask your mind." One novel way to gain insights into a client, would be for the client to give a signed release to the therapist on paper that the therapist can come to the client’s house and observe in order to understand better what the client is all about, and what the situation is for the client. Another novel way to by-pass programming and to give dehumanized alters a sense of who they are is to give their handwriting to a graphoanalyst for a handwriting analysis.

Page 468 ...

JOBS, new ones for alters

During the work on a system, there are different opportunities to encourage alters to step away from their programming, and carry out another job, role or task. Sometimes when the programming has collapsed, it has been appropriate to give alters new garments & new internal jobs. (This is also useful in delineating between demonic alter imitations -demonic constructs--and real alters.) In cases where the programming has entirely collapsed but the alters are not at a place to integrate, mt. schools can be set up for alters to get to know each other & learn new ideas. In terms of working with a particular alter, the therapist can inquire about what the alter’s internal job & history is, and what the alter can do besides that. Often the alter will say that there is nothing else he/she is interested in. But if the alter has creativity, the therapist may be able to direct that creativity in a new direction. If the alter is afraid of a particular task, the therapist might be able to use the alter’s creativity for he/she to mentally rehearse the job that it fears, where the alter takes control & has a positive outcome. This mental rehearsing may be enough of a calmer for the alter to successfully succeed at the new but feared non-programmed task. If an alter learns a new job, or role or task, he/she in turn can be an internal team leader to teach things to other alters. He can be the eyes for those alters that still need to learn how to function in the outside world in some task. Deeper alters will have only experienced the outside world in a programmed state. To take the body in an unprogrammed state will be a sharper experience, and the body will feel different. They will need to have their confusion over norms and boundaries clarified. They will have to slowly learn that they can handle a new responsibility. The rest of the alters will watch, and they will have to show that they can earn respect in the way they take on the new responsibility.

Page 469 ...

JUSTICE SYSTEM, dealing with the broken j.s.

The reader is probably not surprised that anyone who has the audacity to write about how to deprogram multiples also has an article on how to deal with the justice system. Writing about the justice system could take a book, and choices of titles might be, "How to ride a dead horse." "How to jump into quicksand." or "How to win by trial and error." We really don’t have any good advice about "justice", in fact in terms of legal advice we don’t have any--except to say stay as far a way from legal problems as possible. And most of the readers already knew that. So now that the reader knows that we are all on common ground--or should we say, legal quicksand, we are relieved of any burden to actually accomplish anything in this article, which is about the way you will feel about the legal system once you get involved with its fast-as-molasses process. When dealing with lawyers, it helps to repeat the following mantra, "My time is not important. Time is very important for lawyers." Most people have poor methodology when searching for a good lawyer. Looking for a good lawyer is like looking for a good therapist, and if you don’t find the former you may want to find the latter. Since most people have plenty of time on their hands, we suggest that you go down to the courthouse and watch lawyers in action. This is probably the best way to see how your prospective lawyer functions. Lawyers are modern-day gladiators, at least that is what we want them to be. One supreme court justice said 50% of the lawyers are incompetent to work in the courts, and the bar association defended lawyers by counter claiming that the figure is only 20% are incompetent. Whatever figure you want to believe in is irrelevant, because the blindfolded lady who was holding the scales disappeared long ago while the lawyers had their backs turned litigating. If you poke and prod a gooey mess on the ground, you will finally figure out what the solution is. We figure that with enough prodding, the reader will finally figure something out. Most of the time, they conclude that the lawyer ripped them off. The lawyer didn’t create the mess (well--maybe they did historically--but your lawyer didn’t personally create the mess the judicial system is in--he is just like you, trying to figure out how to ride a dead horse. The only difference is that he gets paid a large fee to do it.) You have to watch your lawyer bills, some lawyers have abnormal calculators. Try to find a lawyer that you can communicate with, and who is honest, and who is on the same wavelength as you. At this point you’re probably feeling that you’re in a lot of trouble. And that is the whole point of this, we’re in a heap of trouble. The roots of our freedoms are being killed. The Bill of Rights is essentially a dead tree, waiting to be cut up and hauled off. So what are your chances of success with the legal system? I guess we all need to take a hard look at our dead horse, and give it a proper burial, and see if we can substitute a live one into its place. The problem is that the legal system is in the unique position of being granted the power to justify itself legally. If you thought you were going to get an answer on this page--well, we did experientially, you got as much here as you will likely get in the justice system, and it cost a lot less. Now how’s that for a great deal!

Page 470 ...


The subject of mapping a system concerns the task of putting down on paper how the mind of the victim has been structured. It goes almost without saying that the therapist should be familiar with what has been written by the authors of this book in both this book and the Vol. 2 Formula book. The information in our books will take out lots of guesswork on mapping a system. If one understands programmed DID (MPD), one will immediately know numerous items & alters that a system will have to have. Just as common sense teaches us that a particular type of farm will have particular items, likewise an IlIum, system HAS to have many of the items we have described in detail. For instance, on a regular 13 x 13 grid of programs, the first square typically named 6.6 will have the program SEE NO EVIL, DO NO EVIL, HEAR NO EVIL--No-talk type messages linked to a suicide program. The alters will have both an internal world created for them, as well as a secret code grid. ln both the internal world and within the grid, will be demonic interjects, demonic constructs. Within both the computer grids and the alters worlds, there will be a center point upon which things will collapse, but can be rebuilt by the subconscious mind which is still programmed. The structuring is a layering effect. The assistant programmers will have the small child write scribbles, because the scribble designs are important for the subconscious. The structuring begins in the subconscious. There are many reasons why mapping is important. First, many alters will be in denial that they are part of a multiple personality system. They need to break their denial to move forward. Second, many alters are unaware of how their system is constructed. They need to discover their structure to begin alter communication. Third, for the skilled therapist, there are approaches that can be taken to get past surface programs to erase large sections of programs. Fourth, as the therapist tries to organize the vast amount of information & notes they take, it is very helpful to be able to use the preexisting organization of the client, in order to file information. If the therapist does not keep track of the structure, they will have a pile of disorganized notes. Fifth, mapping will expose positions of alters, who may otherwise remain undiscovered due to their oaths of silence. Initially, the therapist must build trust. The therapist may want to work at this before the entire support team is brought together. Trust is the foundation for mapping. It will flow down through a system and work like a protective cover. The victim needs to begin to journal, do art work, or if possible talk to the therapist. There will be powerful "no-talk" programs, like the one just mentioned on the 6.6 cell on the alpha grid. Somehow, in whatever fashion will work, the victim will need to circumvent the no-talk programs and the suicide programs, to begin to discover him or her self. The alters can begin to do a history, who are they, what has happened to them, what is their job, why were they "born", how old are they, etc. Many of the front alters will at best only be aware of 4 or 5 of themselves. All parts of a programmed multiple are important to recovery. Each part needs to discover what family of alters it belongs to, and how it can interact & communicate with others. Becoming co-conscious with each other is a powerful step toward defeating the programming. Alters can not truly be eliminated from the mind of a programmed multiple, because they are a dissociated part of the mind. That is why the programmers build dumping places for "dead" alters and other unusable parts, and fragments. Demonic introjects can be cast out, and indeed need to be. Ministers that try to tidy up the mind of programmed multiples by casting out alters have caused untold misery to many victims. At best, they have simply caused the

Page 471 ...

front host alter to go into denial that the system still has many alters. This greatly aids the programmers and handlers, because this is what they want to happen. Working on an alter system with programming running is very difficult. It is like working on an airplane that is flying. The therapist begins to feel like an acrobat, trying to carry out skillful stunts. It is understandable how for temporary purposes, the therapist may tell the victim: "your mind created that, it can do away with that." Alters, landscapes, programs, etc. are simply constructs of the mind. If the person’s mind will accept the removal of a mental image, the therapist may want to use such abilities to gain some control over the "flying airplane" that they want to ground so they can work on it. But removing alters, computers, programs etc. are not easy answers. Alters are actually parts of the mind, and the mind naturally uses its survival instincts to protect each part. Computers and programs will rebuild unless their anchoring mechanisms are taken out. Erasing memories is another trap. Memories are coded and laid in on the grids too. Again the simple solution seems to be to delete the memories--but that again is not the answer. That simply drives the memories deeper, just like alters will secretly hide deeper if they think the therapist wants "to kill them". The victim’s mind is very skilled in moving its dissociative pieces around, so it will stay a jump ahead of the therapist. Memories can be "washed" with the negative emotional parts of them saved in a jar. In order to map, the therapist may want to teach alters how to construct safe places in the mind. Experience has shown, that if a hypnotic-created image of a safe place is constructed, the internal programmers can usually figure out a method to destroy the safe place in approximately 24 hours. With ongoing work, the imagery may survive several days. As the reader has begun to see, the solution to mapping is simply lots of hard work. Most of the short cuts do not work. There are skilled methods to access deeper alters who know the maps of the systems, but remember the internal worlds are mental constructs that can be shifted by the mind. If there is a skilled member of the support team who is around the victim most of the time and who can take notes, then a great deal can be learned. During day-to-day life, many things will trigger the victim, and as the programming falls apart the MPD will become more visible.

To those who are unfamiliar with programmed DID (MPD), especially relatives, they may view the therapy with horror, because instead of a single person (the front host) now they have a team, or a group, or a world of alters who come and go. It seems that the therapy has created the multiplicity. The therapy has only uncovered what was hidden in secrecy by the programming, but those unfamiliar with programming generally don’t understand what is taking place. Many alters will only show themselves in specialized situations. This is why a variety of activities, a variety of triggering movies, and a variety of hours/days/months are needed to begin to spot and identify new alters. This is where the limited time that the therapist sees the client greatly limits the therapists ability to understand what their client is about. The host alter may come into therapy for years, even though the deeper parts are coming out at night, when nobody else will spot them. There are a variety of methods to get alters to surface, and a variety of ways to get them to dissociate. If a therapist needs to get beyond an alter, they might try talking about something that will cause the alter to dissociate, and then doing things that encourage the part they want to come up. Mapping will call for trust, ingenuity, patience, and good notekeeping. We recommend it.

Page 472 ...


The internal structures of an alter system will have mazes constructed. Mazes are power structures to reinforce feelings of being helpless. Mazes reinforce the helplessness a victim feels. When a child undergoes the horrendous traumas that it is subjected to by sadistic programmers, it knows completely that it is helpless. The child is placed into small enclosures such as isolation booths, boxes, ice boxes, cages, caskets, caves, corners, closets, drawers, hung in isolated forests, stuffed into laundry hampers, holes in the ground, refrigerators, soundproof rooms, tin rooms, under sand, in car trunks, under water, and wells. Some victims of mind-control have endured all of the above list and perhaps more. The mazes connect to those memories of isolation and helplessness. When the alter gets trapped in a maze, all the strong child memories of isolation and helplessness flood the alter, and immobilize it with fear. The mazes are attached the mote of nothingness sensory deprivation memory, where the child victim was totally trapped. During a panicked state, the child was placed in a maze. The maze was put in during trauma, go back to what you know as truth, the programming is a lie, do a reversal. To get through the mazes the recovering victim needs to

a. stay calm,
b. remember that the maze is a hypnotic suggestion.
c. take your power back by acknowledging that the maze is only a hypnotic suggestion, and you don’t need to play this mind game.
d. common sense & calmness will get you out.
e. shrink the maze down, because the maze will seem tall to the child. Shrink the maze down mentally until you can step over it. Start at the top until you can step over the image. When the image of the maze is as small as a speck of dust, blow it away, or sweep it away. If the alter must, use a magic wand, or star dust. Or if the alter is Christian use prayer.


Illuminati multiple personality systems are structured with many mirrors. As an alter attempts to move in the mind to try to connect with another part (alter or world) of the mind, they often come up against mirrors. The mirrors are guarded by demons, and may have alters attached to the mirrors too. The therapist should never have the client break the mirrors, unless it is done in a very specific way.

The victim’s mind is able to visualize a glass room. A mirror that needs to be broken can be placed within a glass box made of 2-way mirrors itself. Then the demons within the mirrors will be confined in the box when the mirror is worked on, rather than have them scatter throughout the entire alter system wrecking havoc like a herd of pigs. The alters which are part of the mirror will also be contained. Once a glass room (box) is created around the mirror, the box can be flooded with the blood of Jesus Christ of Nazareth. Any demonic forces attached to the mirror will be forced to leave, while the alters will stay behind. This way the damage is contained & confined. The authority & power of Christ, who is the victor, is powerful if properly used. The demons can be respectfully commanded to obey & go back to Christ their Creator for orders. Demons are under an authority structure and understand power & authority. The demons are not objects to ridicule, even though we do not agree with what they stand for & what they are all about. They will not respect your authority nor mine, but they will respect the name of Jesus Christ of Nazareth. Please do not use some other name like Buddha. If the mirrors are not broken in this fashion, all hell breaks loose for the alters near the mirror. At times, mirrors are constructed within a system so that they are attached to trap doors & tunnels. The mind can be asked to tell whether the mirror is part of a tunnel system or something else. These systems are designed somewhat on the style of the Great Pyramid, in that there are secret tunnels, chambers and trap doors. "Dead" alters may be buried in places.

Page 473 ...

PROGRAMMING, foundations, destruction of (as taught by an ex-Illuminati programmer)

Everyone comes upon a particular scenario in life, with their own understanding, their own perspective, their own set of things they consider to be foundational truths.

If we really want to understand the mind-control programming, we need to see it in the same context that the Illuminati mind-control programmers see it. Up until now, there has never been any Illuminati programmers who saw any purpose in breaking their oaths and revealing programming from an Illuminati programmer’s viewpoint. I have decided to take a bold step and allow you to see how my programming alters understand the programming. This section is like the fragile breath of a baby beginning to test a new world. Each time one sees the miracle of life, as a fragile baby tests out the air of the world with its first breaths, and discovers a new world beyond the womb, it is a powerful testimony of what our God-given life is all about. Our traumatic birth from the cocoon-like world of slavery into freedom is a miracle of Life. Life has a force of its own, and so will our own struggle for freedom.

We can say at the outset of explaining things, that we are not in a position to prove what we have seen and experienced. We could rummage through the dark books of magic to show a paper trail, but if the reader wouldn’t believe our personal testimony of what we experienced, then why would they believe the papertrail? What we write in this section are the inner secrets that throughout our life as a programmer we were involved in to do the programming. We understand that some readers may object to certain ideas, and we want to let the reader know that it is O.K. to question what we write. However, this may be your one and only chance to really understand the programming as an Illuminati programmer sees it. So, in the spirit of being helpful to the countless victims of Illuminati mind-control, and in the spirit of hope and openness, we are baring our secrets to the world. Therapists who read this are welcome to send us feedback when they find what we say is validated. If they don’t find this validated in their work with the very deepest secrets of a system, then there is a good chance they just haven’t gone far enough to find it yet.

Perhaps nothing is more baffling than how our minds work. Life is so complex that most of us give up trying to understand it. It is meant to be this way. The elite who have been gathering the mysteries of life for many thousands of years have wanted the common person to feel confused and overwhelmed. They have wanted the powers of darkness veiled from the people, so that they can use their supernatural evil powers without competition. They have hoarded the best of science, magic, psychology and spiritual knowledge to themselves, and given mankind the crumbs. This isn’t something new, they have been keeping secrets from the bulk of mankind for thousands of years. In a sophisticated divide and conquer strategy, the mystery religions were created to hide from the masses the existence, power, and worship of Lucifer. The Illuminati were not going to expose their power base. The Bible is correct that Lucifer was appointed a position of great authority. He understands what an anointing is. And he is skilled in copying that anointing. The Bible writers Isaiah and Paul (in 1 TM 3:6) wrote about how a jealous Lucifer was not content to cover God’s throne, but he coveted God’s throne. He was a cherub full of wisdom and perfect in beauty (EZ 28:12,14,15) At one point, he was the highest being created by God, and certainly far more intelligent than people imagine. Before we talk about what that intelligence has been able to do, let’s hear from the other side of things. One of our Vol 2 readers wrote Fritz the complaint, "You give much much good

Page 474 ...

information, but one wishes you would keep your religious beliefs out of it." Since Fritz did not push any denomination or organized religious group, one must assume that the chapters that quoted scriptures and spoke about demons bothered this reader. For the sake of discussion, let’s assume that demons, ghosts, aliens, and angels do not exist. Let’s assume for the sake of discussion that all the thousands of documented encounters with such beings did not exist. And finally, You are a therapist, and you sincerely want to help your client who has DID mind-control programming, but you don’t want to deal with such things as demonology. Have you ever wondered what the deeper alters think? The deeper cult parts are not going to talk with you, because they know that they will not be listened to. It is extremely doubtful that you will ever meet the deeper hierarchy parts. We have seen therapists scare hierarchy alters away from therapy in just this fashion. The therapist will not even know of their existence, even after years of hard work. As an agnostic or secular therapist, have you always felt antagonistic toward the supernatural? We can appreciate your fear at confronting something strange, new, and unbelievable, this is the same kind of issues that those of us who are DID must confront every day, as we work on the lies that have been programmed into us. Men are sent to the electric chairs on less evidence than has accumulated over the centuries about the existence ghosts, spirits, and demons. But we aren’t trying to convert anyone to believe they exist. -But think about this, if you, the agnostic therapist, do get a hierarchy part who has been practicing powerful magic for years, learning on the astral plane, observing demons control ones s mind-control slaves who are under your authority, etc. what does the agnostic therapist have to offer the hierarchy alters? The hierarchy alters have power and prestige. They are not the alters that take the punishment and abuse. Why should they give up their spiritual power, for what? The point is, if therapists are not willing to give their hierarchy alters something good to replace their dark powers, and if the therapists don’t have a spiritual power and spiritual plan that is stronger and better than the spiritual powers and rewards that control the hierarchy alters, then the therapists are not in a position to offer them freedom. By and large, there are extremely few therapists that publicly let on that they have a clue about spiritual captivity. Typically, they will patronize a victim who mentions a supernatural encounter, and add insult to injury by labeling the experience a hallucination. If the supernatural is only a hallucination, one wonders why the CIA has spent billions investigating the mind-control aspects of voodoo, astral projection, ESP, and other supernatural phenomena. The dark spiritual powers that control the lives of the hierarchy alters are very real to these alters. And you will not succeed in convincing them that demons do not exist, when they have spent a life time working with demons, anymore than you are going to convince a dairyman that cows don’t exist because you have never seen a cow. So therapists had better wise up, and get practical. Whether they believe in UFOs, whether they believe in demons, is rather irrelevant, they can still facilitate their client in obtaining help in areas that they do not have expertise. In the last few years, secrets that have been kept for many centuries are being released, but only in such a way that the uninitiated disregard the secrets. While these powerful occult secrets are being revealed, the masses are throwing away the foundations of truth that God has provided them through His Word. The masses see the power of the occult in New Age techniques that use disguised demonic power, but they do not see the dangers. As the world lets their guard down, more and more occult power is being declassified from the hidden mysteries.

Page 475 ...

While we were in the Illuminati, we witnessed numerous secret libraries that contained secret books that no one has heard of. Books like the 6th & 7th Book of Moses, The Spiritual Shield, Abdul-Kadir’s Book of Power and recently publicly published Necronomicon have spirits attached to them that make them dangerous. To quote from the editor of the english translation of the dangerous Necronornicon, "an inconsistency that is to be found in many grimoires of any period and perhaps reveals a little of the magician’s mentality; for there is very little that is evil to the advanced magus, who cares not if he deal with angelic or demonic forces, save that he gets the job done!" (Necronomicon, p. xxxvii) During our years as a programmer, we got the job done! Our programming alters did not get to see the world outside of the Illuminati. But if you the reader want to step into that world to see how the programmers think, you are welcome to come with us on our guided tour. Let’s cover some basics. We knew in the Illuminati that the earth was created. There were very specific ideas on how it all happened. Within Illuminati philosophy was the idea of dualism, that there was evil and good, and that you tried to balance your evil deeds with your bad deeds, as you climbed up the ranks of magic (spiritual) power. The Illuminati system is based on rivalry (free-enterprise in its most ruthless form), so there is no room for failure. We ate of the tree of knowledge that Satan promised to Adam that would make Adam into a god. The Illuminati adepts think that they are gods. They are illuminated and believe they are divine. When we worked with Illuminati programmers, we were working with people who believed they were gods and goddesses. They believed that they would be rewarded with the control of the whole universe as well as the means to do it. They also knew where their birthright came from and what their inheritance was. We will explain that shortly. In Exodus 20:5 we read, "...I, the LORD your God, am a jealous God, visiting the iniquity of the fathers on the children to the third and fourth generations of those who hate me..." One of the teachings that has been lost (thanks to the infiltration into Christianity by the mystery religions) has been who God meant by "the third and fourth generations of those who hate me." This was the third and fourth generation of those who rebelled without repentance against God Almighty. The real foundation for evil are the original generations that rebelled against God and established the foundation of the rebellion. This was Tubal-Cain, Zilah-bore and Jubal. This has been kept a secret from Christians, so they only work against their father’s and grandfather’s sins, rather than the real power base, which is Cain, Tubal-cain, and their master/deceiver Satan. Remember how important it was for Christ to atone for what Adam had done. Christ had to go back and repair the damage at the foundation, where the damage to mankind had begun. The foundations of the rebellion against God are the foundations that the programmers go back to. Our inheritance and authority laid with the Powers of Darkness. Just as a Christian would inherit his Father’s kingdom, we were to inherit the Prince of Darkness’s kingdom. We served a powerful trinity made up of Lucifer (the authority), Satan (the covering), and the Devil (the evil spirit). This evil trinity of darkness was very well-known to us. The programmers called up the forces of Darkness to give us programming insights. The programming was the heartbeat of Satan and the systems we built into people’s minds were modelled on what the programmers understood hell to be like. Every major programmer was a Grand Master or an Adept who was working his way up the ranks in magic power. Obviously, the lower level programmers could not command and place

Page 476 ...

into a victim, demons that they could not magically control. This means that each system is going to reflect the spiritual level of understanding and power that its programmer(s) had. Let us step back and place our discussion of demonology on the shelf temporarily. What builds the ideas of right and wrong, good and bad within the human mind? The answer is certainly a very complex answer. Our self-concepts which govern how our minds make choices are very complex. In fact, the concepts of what is sin, right or wrong, and what and who we are, are simply vastly more complex than a child’s mind can comprehend. Even common sense teaches us, that children are born innocent. The child’s mind has been given the wonderful ability to focus on one particular role model (usually a parent) to put together a cohesive idea of values. Those values are very much attached to the signals we get as children from the important people we focus upon to learn values. Separating a child from a role model (i.e. isolating it from any parent or parent surrogate) produces disastrous results. The child has no model upon which to learn values. Without a role-model, the mind must revert back to unlearned, built-in instincts. Does the reader begin to see how deep the destruction of the person is, when dissociated pieces must revert back to functioning on such instinctual unlearned values such as survival, because they have had no chance to observe and assimilate values, and if they do by chance assimilate values, they may well be those of the programmers! When the human mind (or a dissociative piece, or alter) functions and makes decisions only on the basis of survival, can the reader see how this opens the person up to control by fears? Deeper parts are prevented from establishing values that would question the control that demonic entities develop based on fear. The growth of mature thinking is the result of a complex chronological series of learning experiences. Even alters who have been hypnotically age-progressed by the programmer to see themselves as adults, have never had the opportunity to acquire mature thinking. Their thinking remain simplistic, because there have not been the complex learning stages that mature a person’s thinking. Therapists do not realize that even "adult" non-host alters can have thinking that is very immature and basically survival-based. This doesn’t mean that the therapist should initially confront the deeper adult alters by telling them that they are merely programming or immature--that would only damage communication. Given time out in the world on their own, they will begin to realize this on their own. What we are trying to say is that the demonology is attached to a defenseless mind. The structures that would normally develop so that the mind could ignore demon impulses have never developed. The natural development of a child to grow from innocence and purity into a rational moral person has been stopped. If it is difficult enough for a rational mature person to wrestle with demonic impulses, how much more so for a fragment of the mind that operates purely out of the reptilian-brain’s instinct for survival. During the programming, the Illuminati programmers would call up certain demons to help with the building of this hell in the victim’s mind. The programmers will also place important demons into the victim that are attached to strategic places and functions. Allow us to expose some of these:

Abbadon--Abbadon is sovereign over the bottomless pit. Depending on what rank the programmer is at, depends on how the programs are put in. If Abbadon is not put in as a protector of the core, something similar will be done that mirrors the abilities of Abbadon. The 18-month old victim has Abbadon placed into them to "SEAL" (guard) their core. Oaths are given, that provide Lucifer the legal right to capture and hide the

Page 477 ...

core away at this time. Abbadon will be tied to the programming at the base of the mind. The core lays at the base of the mind in a bottomless pit. This bottomless pit is cone shaped--which is the hidden reason that hour glasses are used. The hour glass is a cone shape that is similar to hell’s shape. Hell is shaped like a cone. Surrounding the core will be River Lethe. The Lethe River is also known as THE RIVER OF FORGETFULNESS. This river surrounds the core, and protects the core from any alter getting close to the actual core. Depending upon who your programmer is, different imagery will be applied. The programmers always use water as a cleansing element to cause the mind to "clear itself’ (clear from a deprog. viewpoint), "cleanse itself’ (so-to-speak from a prog. viewpt.). The programmers will use waterfalls, swimming pools, or other bodies of water as their CLEANSING RIVER. To enter into the CLEANSING RIVER or the RIVER OF FORGETFULNESS means that the alter will not know who they are, what they know, or are seeking. If the core ever got strong enough, the River of Forgetfulness Program would hold her there in the base of the mind. The programmers will never access the core through the RIVER, but will go under the river or over it. The silver cord that is hooked to the core then is ran under the RIVER OF FORGETFULNESS to every alter from the core. In only one particular instance, when a programmer was experimenting, did we ever see the silver cord get placed running over the river. In 99% of the cases, the silver cord will be run under the River of Forgetfulness. This has proven to be the most effective way to prevent any alter from seeing the core. The only connection between the core and the rest of the system is through the silver cords. It is invisible, especially since it is placed under the river, and assigned a spirit of invisibility. To cut that silver cord is to separate the core (and spirit) that gives life to the system. The system will die if the cord is cut. As any alter goes toward the core which is in the 9th realm, the alter will bounce off of the River of Lethe, forget what it went for, lose everything it is, and end up as clean slates in the 8th realm. The story of the Ten Lepers (LK 17:12) who came back clean is the programming story that pertains to this programming. All the alters except the one (the core) will go away as a clean slate, and only the one (the core) will return to its master (in this case not Christ as in the Biblical story, but the Divine Master, who is the programmer.) Should the core ever want to escape it would have to go through the 9 dimensions of Hell to free itself. While the therapists try to get to the core outside-to-inside, the core must go from inside-to-outside. The spirits are laid in from inside to outside, and we will describe the sections of hell, and the rivers from inside-to-outside. But the first barrier after the River is another River called "DARK HOLES" or in our System "TIlE RUBICON". The name Rubicon is so appropriate, because it is like Caesar when he crossed the rubicon, you do not come back. The name Dark Hole given by some programmers to this zone, is also appropriate, because you are sucked in and do not return. To cross the rubicon is to burn one’s bridges to return. This zone is outer space, it is darkness, it is a pool of darkness. An alter personality bounces off of this into a dark holding tank. The rubicon has 10 spheres (or levels) to it, and its shaped like an amphitheater. Another name for this layer is Malebolge. It holds 10 spheres for 10 classes of traitors to the programming. The spirit that hangs over this is Malebrinche with his evil claws.

The dark holes are wells in the 8th realm. The wells are guarded by Titan demons who will prevent the alter from coming out if they are punished by falling into a dark hole (well).

Page 478 ...

Within an Illuminati system, you will discover hell. You will discover the rivers of hell which are the Styx, Acheron, Phiegethon, the Cocytus, and Lethe (which was already discussed.) Cocytus encircles the frozen marsh where the monstrous Lucifer is frozen up to his breastplate. Over the years when he tried to free himself, his giant wings produced nothing more than cold winds that froze the ice hard. Deep in an Illuminati system you may find the marsh land where it is cold. Not every programmer has a clear idea of how hell is, so the programming differs, but some type of equivalent of this will be found very deep.

Before providing the names of other demons attached to parts within an Illuminati alter system, allow us to explain how a system is set up from the programmers viewpoint. The programmer sees his inheritance coming from Lucifer. He believes he will reign with Lucifer in hell. Who would want to be a satanist if they did not think that they were going to get advantages from it. Satanists (and Luciferians--actually Illuminati hierarchy members are actually both depending upon the time and circumstances) actually think that they will get eternal rewards for what they are doing. They are very intent on pleasing Satan, and he is a very demanding god. From the programmers viewpoint, he is reproducing Satan’s kingdom within the victim--he is reproducing hell in the victim’s mind. The programming is very much intended to be the heartbeat of Satan. The Illuminati at the top understand hell to have 9 realms. Recently a movie was made of the 7 deadly sins, a strange killer decides to kill people to expose to the world the horror of these deadly sins. Each of the deadly sins (pride, avarice, lechery, anger, gluttony, envy, sloth) each are said to have their own realm in hell. This has been a popular view for hundreds of years.

The section grid sheets that list alter grids with codes and the number of sections may not reveal the 9 realms pattern. The pattern is there, but a single realm of hell can be given several sections of alters if the programmer wants to. On the outer rim of the River encircling the 8th realm lie the important castles. There are 7 important Grandefather and Mother of Darkness castles. Some of the castles have gold pillars. There are also 7 important temples, such as the Temple of Moloch, where sacrificed babies are placed internally. The Mothers of Darkness and the Grand Master alters have to be able to enter into these internal castles, because they hold the spiritual demonic strongholds for the system. A front set of castles will be placed in the first realm to sidetrack deliverance ministries. The Mothers of Darkness and Grande Dame alters live in the 7th realm of Hell. The 7th, 8th, and 9th realms are considered lower hell. A ferry boat crosses the river that encircles the 7th realm (and the 8th and 9th). The protection for the hierarchy alters are the Delta alters that both male and female systems have placed in the 6th realm. The Delta alters are deadly. They will kill anyone including themselves! This is known as the sin of wrath. It is known as the realm of gloom. This 6th realm is protected by the river Styx. The 3-4-5 realms are not put to match the traditional schemes of Hell. A central computer section with programming alters and their accompanying entourage of alters that make it all work, in a sense compare with the 4th level of hell where there is great gnashing of teeth. These alters have been extremely dehumanized in this area, and many are totally dissociated from any sense of having a body. Really most of them are beyond the gnashing of teeth stage, to the out-of-body stage of dissociation. The second ring of hell is the realm of lust, where the prostitute alters and strip-tease alters are placed, including male child prostitute alters in male systems. The sixth realm may have the capital city of Dis, where fallen angels are reported to be able to have their R&R. The River Phlegethan is filled with

Page 479 ...

boiling blood. It is filled with dead tormented souls. Titan guardian demons guard the wells. The internal world will have dark woods with wild animals lurking about waiting to attack those who would be foolhardy to go through them. Somewhere in the deep reaches of the hell that Satan has built within the mind of the slave, there will likely be the capital city Pandaemonium, which is a palace with many gates and a large meeting hall. In fact, Pandaemonium may be an entire secret world within a mind-control system. The first realm of hell is the Limbo state, where non-satanic gatekeepers (who are pagan in outlook) float around in mental limbo. The programmers build streams and meadows and other things into this area. There are front castles built into this quadrant. It is separated from the front by the River Archeron. However, it is unlikely that any of the front alters and gatekeepers know the name of this internal river, because it is invisible and they are not told its name. They may feel its effects though. Behind the River Acheron will be kitten alters that have never lived outside of programming. And setting on top of hell on the surface is the front section. The front system in a typical Illuminati system will be a reflection of the world at large as it known. The front system will have anarchy-coven level witchcraft alters, Christian alters, smart alters, stupid alters, child alters, possibly a token opposite sex alter, and perhaps even a few animal alters. In a sense the top is the widest part of the cone, that retreats into deeper darker levels of the mind (and hell that the programmer has created.) The front system will give the therapist plenty to work with. The front system will look like a chaotic but complete system. There will be a few witchcraft alters that will surface to explain the SRA. There will be a few abused alters who will surface to explain the abuse. All of this will help deflect from the real truth and the real secrets. There will be dozens of child alters to work with. The front system will be designed to hide the design of the entire system. If a therapist wanted to, they could easily spend the rest of their life working on issues of the front system. Some therapists have spent a decade on the front alone. The Illuminati generally appreciates having the front alters stabilized so that they can continue the horrendous abuse of the victim, without the system self-destructing. Skilled therapists know how to work vertically down into a system. There are methods, and we will not expose trade secrets, on how to descend into a system to get a particular alter. The reader can think to himself or herself, how do you pull up an alter, and how to you get one to leave. For instance, a non-sexual alter will dissociate and leave if you speak about sex. Think about things for a while, and perhaps you will realize how to get the deeper alters you want to work with. Be prepared to get demonic constructs that pretend to be alters, to shell alters, to get mirror images, as well as what you really want. After developing some skill you may even be able to begin to separate the demonic, shell alters and mirror images from the real thing. The skilled deprogrammers know who they need deep in the systems, they go for these alters, and then work with them. But it greatly helps if the front system has done stabilizing work, that has prepared them spiritually and psychologically so that they can handle some "rocking of the boat", if the therapist digs deep. There are certain alters that can assist more than others in dismantling some of the programs. There are two protector alters who are assigned to protect the deeper parts of the system. They are Lucifer and Dameon. Both of these protector alters (Lucifer, and the protector alter Dameon) will know part of the system. But bear in mind their assignment is to keep therapists away from the even deeper

Page 480 ...

parts. So if they do cooperate with a therapist, their cooperation may be to sidetrack the therapist from the deeper parts, and they do not know the entire system. Every Illuminati alter system (100% of the systems while we were in) were constructed with a Dameon alter, which identified with and thought it was Satan/Lucifer. All male and female systems all a Dameon alter. (We suppose now that we’ve revealed this secret, they may change things, but for anyone programmed before this book came out, their system will have a Dameon alter.) The Dameon alter has three different names. In Fritz’s section he mentioned Data Entry Points of a system. This is an alter that can be used for quick access. During the child victim’s early years, the Illuminati programmers will take one of the first Gatekeepers, such as Gatekeeper 3 or 4, and will hypnotically show them the entire system. This is so they have quick access to the entire system. This is entirely done via hypnosis (and hypnotic drugs), so that the Gatekeeper no. 3 does not remember that it knows the entire system. Only via hypnosis can the programmer use this Gatekeeper to get to the entire system. After the Gatekeeper does its job, it is hypnotically told to forget.

What kind of thing might the gatekeeper know? The deeper parts of a system would be the All-Seeing Eye of the pyramid. The pyramid may rotate, and its rotation is controlled by a computer. By rotating, secret passageways are aligned. These pyramids contain "dead" alters (who think they are spirits) and protectors such as egyptian soldiers. The Eye itself is a secret passageway. Sometimes a 1-2-3 tap done 3 times opens the passage. If there is a purgatory in the system, as one approaches it there may be a silver veil wall, behind which may be hell in a system. The high capital of Satan in a system is often Pandaemonium. The palace has many gates and porches. The demons assemble in the palace for councils. Every alter has demons assigned and attached to it. Here are the names of common ones in an alter system. These are really family names, just like there will be a Susy 1, a Susy 2, a Susy 3, etc. Sometimes satanic programmers put their own twists on the way they pronounce names, these "play on words" help protect the programming. The VoL 2 book provides information on other important demons involved with the mind-control on pp 299-302.

Abduscius--This demon was involved with the tree programs, the roots of all the trees, such as the willow, oak, ash, yggdrassil, etc. The demon would be joined with the internal Singing Forest of a system. One can look for a familiar spirit connected to all this.

Abigor--This demon was involved with working with fragment parts that make war upon the system of alters. The child armies that protect the programming had this demon attached to them.

Abyss--This is a popular demon with Crowley devotees, and it also goes by the names of Absu, Nar Mattaru, Cutha, Kutu. This may be the internal underworld ocean. A system will have a deep ocean where things are hid.

Archeron--This is a demon who looks like a monster with flaming eyes. This demon was attached to the "eye in the sky". A mirror image of this demon could be used to impart a mirror image to a part.

Adramalech--This grand chancellor demon is the supervisor of Satan’s wardrobe and provides a likeness of the himself to the programmer. Adramalech is in charge of all the various costumes and outfits that the occult world use, such as your masonic ritual garments. Because there is one spirit over all this, the various costumes all work together for

Page 481 ...

Agaliarept --this demon is very important in the structuring, for this demon is used to call up the internal self-helper of the victim. This demon works with the ISH and the system to know what is going on in the internal worlds of the victim. The person’s guardian angel (spirit) has been locked away to prevent interference to demons like Agaliarept. The programmers are very familiar with this demon. Another demon that works with the cult’s ISH is Botis.

Aguares--These grand dukes of Hell are associated with dance, and have familiar family demons with Aguares that help the victim assume sexual gestures, special ceremonial dances that have to be done perfectly, and other certain steps.

Aim--This demon may be attached to the alters who are associated with fire, like Bonfire Child alters, Firechild, etc. He is a fire demon.

Alastor--The demonic executor of court decrees in hell is a guardian. When the system betrays the programming, he will declare the judgements on the system.

Amduscias--This demon of disturbing music continually plays the internal rhymes and riddles internally to reinstate the programming if it is ever touched. This demon then is responsible for the programs to continue running. This demon is a unicorn whose internal music is in an alter system.

Amon--This demonic marquis family shows their faces to scare alters. It may appear like a man with dogs teeth and a head like a raven.

Andrealphus--If a victim has a peacock demon it may be Andrealphus.

Asmodeus--This demon is attached to create lust in the system, and marital discord.

Baal--This demon can make internal things go invisible. He can look like a cheshire-cat. He matches how things disappear in the Alice of Wonderland story, where only gold objects stay. He speaks hoarsely, and can appear as a toad, a cat, a man or all 4 at once. He rules over 66 legion of demons. He is a king demon ruling in the east, and important to Freemasons.

Baalberith--The is the chief secretary of hell who is attached to the internal library of an alter system. He will keep the records of the genealogy of the victim’s Illuminati bloodline.

Barbatos--When a mind-control victim says, "I talk to my animals and they talk to me", this is the demon that carries out the voice of other animals.

Beelzebub--(See the article on the spirit Hydra below.) According to Illuminati beliefs, they must serve Beelzebub, and he in turn will reward them with financial wealth so that they can control and destroy the nations. They believe that Beelzebub only wants to be addressed in Yiddish or Hebrew. Beelzebub demands souls in payment for his favors. It is not known, technically speaking, which manifestation of the false trinity will be the beast who will be worshipped by taking "the Mark of the Beast", but it may be Beelzebub who has demanded worship since antiquity. The Illuminati Sisters of Light are married in ritual to Beelzebub, while the Mothers of Darkness are married to Lucifer. Beelzebub is important to the upper levels of Freemasonry which do secret Luciferian rituals. There are a number of secret manuscripts of the Holy Book of Beelzebub located at important Masonic centers. The book is large, written in blood on

Page 482 ...

Behemoth--This hugh demon who presides over feasting in hell is attached to cannibalistic alters who must perform cannibalism in rituals.

Beiphegor--This demon seduces men with wealth. He will be attached when the programmers use blackmail and bribery to insure that the victim goes the direction they want the victim to go. In a sense, he is part of the carrot (in the carrot & the stick tactics of the programmers.)

Blackwell--This demon is important for the mind-control, associated with dissociation

Botis--This viper demon is attached to the cult’s ISH in the internal system. He knows the past and present things within a system.

Captaintto--A spirit involved with astral projection.

Changeling--This fairy demon is attached to child alters. The actual mechanics are that the child alter presents itself as a mirror of the child, and the child alter assumes that it is the this fairy demon itself. The child alter takes on the fairy demons identity, and then the fairy demon attaches itself. The end result is that the child alter doesn’t know what it is, or where it begins and the fairy begins. This creates an alter/demon construct, of which there are many within a normal Illuminati system.

Crocell--This demon makes the noise like rushing water that alters talk about hearing in their internal worlds.

Dantalion--A demonic duke who has many countenances. He is a joker within the system.

Decarabia-Appears as a star, and Pentacles is also a star appearing demon.

Flauras--This demon along with the demon Andras are attached to alters who must commit ritual murders.

Foras--This demon is knowledgeable. It can teach logic, the virtues of herbs, how to live long and supposedly how to become invisible. It can appear as a strong man in human form.

Forneus--This demon gives men the ability to have speaking in tongues and the ability to have gifted speaking abilities. He works with Renove, who is a demon who assists with demonic speaking in tongues and rhetoric.

Furcas--This demon teaches philosophy.

Furfur--This demon controls lightening, thunder and strong winds. He is attached to internal programs that are connected to internal weather phenomena. For instance, if a victim is having internal earthquakes, if the support person knows how to call up and command Furfur he can cast Furfur out, and stop the internal earthquakes immediately.

Guardians--Enforcer demons are put in place to protect the system.

Goblins--These are mischievous and ugly fairies that are placed internally to protect the rivers and secret places in the internal worlds.

Haborym--This is a demon of fire who is placed in control of the fire around the internal hell pit.

Haures--This demon hold the history of the fall of creation within the internal library.

Hydra-- In the Illuminati, a member takes oaths to three demonic entities, Lucifer, Beelzebub, and Hydra. Who is Hydra? In the Christian New Testament, Hydra is described in the last book, Revelation 17:7-9. It is a beast with 7 heads. The Illuminati do ritual worship where they do special chants, and

Page 483 ...

blood sacrifices, and bow seven times to obtain Hydra’s presence. During rituals, when Hydra appears within the room, one of the ways Hydra communicates is by taps. When it taps 3 times, this means the third letter C, which also can mean "see". Later, after the child victim of mind-control has experienced the horrifying ritual of seeing Hydra appear and tap out its messages, the child victim can be taken in and programmed to special codes that are portrayed as knocks (taps). The ritual trauma memory is pulled up and used for a base for the programming. This is how the traditional 3 tap signal came to be. It is secretly based upon demonic communication. You will often encounter mind-control victims who are programmed to what they describe as morse code. The foundation for all this morse code programming was communication with the god/demon Hydra. Hydra by the way is also the god of Freemasonry, because Luciferians control Freemasonry. Hydra hisses like a snake. A partial quote from an oath to Hydra would include, "...lead my arm, you have the supremacy of the universe, because you move it, all is your creation. Heaven and earth belong to you, which is fulfilled in your glory, which are images of your greatness and superiority. You are helpful protector of each of yours, you Enemy- of-the-crucified. In your name I curse God, the Trinity, Christ...ln trust of your revelations, in the faith of your might above all Creation; visible and invisible things. I have the right to request and receive from you what you know." Hydra is acknowledged as the supreme master by a blood oath. You must sell yourself to Hydra totally, even to the point of suicide. In return you are promised honor, power, and wealth. The dragon also promises to give confidence to the pact-maker. As the Illuminati understand it, demons are only interested in soul-pacts or sutleges (pacts written in blood on paper that are swallowed).

Klotilde--This spirit demands that the slave never get involved in human love. To love with human love would be to suffer.

Knochers--These are tiny spirits who work in the internal gold mines. They are the Keepers of the Jewels. What are the jewels? The jewels are those parts created by master programmers such as Dr. Mengele, which are left as clean slates from which the programmers can build from later.

Leraje (Leraikka)--This demon is used for ritual battles.

Lucifer/Satan/Devil--This triad has Black/Red/Gold as their colors.

Malebranche--This is the demon with the evil claws that is a tormentor in the 8th realm. Readers will remember seeing his presence in this author’s collages in the Illustrated Guidebook to Monarch Mind- Control Programming.

Maleficia--This demon is not used internally, but is used when casting spells to hurt others. This demon is also employed to punish disobedient slaves.

Malphas--A builder of high towers. He may also get involved with the hypnosis.

Mammon--His family of demons creates the internal worlds, especially the palaces and towers.

Marax--This demon helps the Mothers-of-Darkness understand astrology. A Mother will loose her powers if he is removed.

Marbas--Demon attached to help the system heal, or get diseased.

Marchosias--This is a family of fighting demons. They work well with fighting alters.

Page 484 ...

Melchom--This demon is placed internally to oversee the internal treasures of a system. This demon is very secret and understands the Grand Druid Council.

Mulciber--This is one of the builder demons who helps construct the internal worlds. The programming scripture that applies is "Unless the Lord builds the house, they labor in vain." This scripture is misused to teach alters, that unless this lord (demon) is involved in the construction of something internal, the alters labor in vain, because it will only be a superficial temporary structure. To insure that all structures put in by a therapist are temporary, all kinds of alters and demons will scurry about in a frenzy to figure out how to destroy any internal structure that the therapist & victim’s alters try to build to oppose the programmer’s control.

Murmur--This demon is in charge of the soul. He is connected to core issues. (See the article on the core to understand the core’s issues.)

Navky--This is a Spirit of Murder that is tied to the sacrifice of unbaptized children.

Nebiros--This is a field marshall who is given command of the little robots alters and fragment purpose armies.

Nysrock--This is a demon chief in hell within a system.

Osculum infame--This refers to the Sabbat ritual that Mother’s of Darkness perform where they "kiss the ass" of Satan, also known as the "Kiss of Shame".

Paimon--This knight spirit is very obedient to Lucifer and is used as an enforcer in an internal system. He continues to report back as to whether the internal worlds are intact or not.

Paymon--This demon is placed into alter systems of politician to give them the ability to speak in public.

Phenex--This demon is a poet who speaks to exorcists but supposedly does not need to obey exorcists.

Philatanus--This is a Spirit of Sodomy and Pederasty

Procel--This demon can make internal water freeze or boil.

Purson--This demon blows internal trumpets, and is believed connected to the revelator to the AntiChrist. He also knows the system.

Put Satanachia--Commander-in-chief of the call back army’s in a system especially the army’s that ride on armageddon horses. He will play an important role in the end times.

Raum-- He destroys internal parts or internal cities.

Sabnack--This demon is attached to death programming. If a slave does the "unpardonable sin’’ against Lucifer and his programming then Sabnack helps insure that the heart of the victim will stop.

Seera--This demon is in charge of internal perceptions of time. He can make time fly at whirlwind speed or to slow down.

Seraphim-- The highest order of the Heavenly host. Illuminati systems will have seraphim placed into them.

Shaba lidoma--This demon bring depression

Shax--This alter works with deaf and dumb alters.

Sitri--This spirit is used in the covens for sexual enchantment and nudity.

Page 485 ...

Speculum--This spirit is an internal crystal ball reader. He may also use mirrors.

Succubus--A female demon who preys on men sexually. This demon will be active during rituals.

Sytry--This demon is attached to stripper alters. It encourages women to show themselves naked.

Uphir--This demon heals in the name of Satan. He is placed into a system to help it heal quickly.

Volarire--A gatekeeper to a world or city, will play games to protect that part of system

Watchers--Demons attached to flying monkey alters who are used for observation in a system.

Zepar--This demon drives women insane. It is attached to insane programming.

It’s really hard to describe spiritual things to those who haven’t experienced similar spiritual things. We want to help people begin to get a feel for what works and what doesn’t work. The following is a few minutes of a transcript of a deliverance. The deliverance minister has never been told anything about this person’s alter system, but the Holy Spirit reveals that the system is 13x 13. The deliverance minister speaks about grace and love. He also does something very important: he teaches the alters how to put a spiritual canopy of protection around them so that they can sleep without spiritual attacks at night. The spiritual canopy that is built by this alter system ends up being helpful. Here is only a tiny portion of this deliverance session.

Alter: You can’t love what isn’t.

Support Person: They’ve had their hearts and souls taken away. Many of the things they need to be able to have a relationship with Christ have been stolen from them.

Alter: How did I get this two-headed beast?

Deliverance minister: You got it from the time of conception given to you by Dad. It is a two-headed demon. One of the heads goes back 18 generations, that would be about 400 years. The other head dates back 22 generations. Allow me to explain, there are 365 levels of demons.... We need to walk in one accord. I realize your system has many of you who don’t know how to, and also that there are many who don’t want to.

Alter: God can’t love us.

Deliverance minister: God will remove all the curses, all the spells, the garbage, the chains, the tar, the slime, the pain, the bondage.. .All these things which carry bad feelings, pain and unbelief will be taken care of. Each curse carries memories....

Alter: How did our light side even know Christ with those demons?

Deliverance minister: It’s because of Grace, amazing grace. [Then the deliverance minister explains how demons imitate alters and play roles within an alter system.] Father we come before your throne, strengthen the canopy about this house, and purify it with your holy fire. We ask that you seal and cleanse this room with your holy blood, and every object about us, and each one of us. Seal and cleanse us with your blood. Purify us with your fire. I acknowledge the diamond shaped head that encapsulizes her head and is filled with your essence. Will you fill that diamond head with the blood of Jesus Christ. I recognize that this represents your eternal ownership of this body. Father, we acknowledge that you love them no matter what. Father, I’m glad you love them, even the alters who don’t know that you love them. Remove any demonic shields from these alters and send them to the abyss. Father, bind Lucifer from interfering. Set some warring angels about us to help. Thank you. Father, I ask for every

Page 486 ...

anointing that we need for this work. I ask you to acknowledge all three of your servants. Order our thoughts. Keep this floating diamond over her Lord. Now fill up her System’s 13 by 13 by 13 grid right now with your blood. [End of quoted material.]

We have watched deliverance ministries in action, we have visited and heard other deliverance ministries give reports on what they have done, and we have seen what works for us. What we have seen is that some of the better ministries are on the basic right track and are able to help in some important areas, but by and large there is little depth to what most Christians are doing, and some blindsides. We can also add some of our own first hand observations. Our own master was far more concerned about deliverances being done to our system, than he was for a psychiatrist to work with us. But we also have a view of things from having been on the other side, that is from the programmers viewpoint, and we can honestly say, that the programming is so far reaching, that the mind-control victim could use a chiropractor, a medical doctor, a psychologist, a guard, a prayer partner, a friend, and a deliverance minister. This is why we applaud the few groups that have established safe-houses and teams of people to assist mind-control victims. The type of issues we write about in articles like this are enough to challenge support teams who are working with well stabilized programmed DID’s who have worked on issues for a while.

The removal of foundational programming can take several different avenues, but there are several constants in how to fight the programming. The stronger a person’s alters are spiritually, the better they will do. The healthier a victim is, the more chance they have to survive the debilitating effects of the programming. The more humor, rest, and internal peace the recovering victim has, the better they will do. Morale is important. The morale of the support team is essential. The therapist has to have a strong conviction that hope exists for the victim, and the victim needs to have this hope conveyed to them. The will to resist needs to be fed. We know that this is nothing new, but it is so important that we don’t want to neglect emphasizing it. The reader will find many suggestions and hints within this book on routes to take to dismantle the programming. Where there is a will, there is a way. Sometimes the victim will loose the willpower, and that is where the support team must pick them up. Let’s not kill our wounded, instead let’s dig into ourselves to find the resources to minister to them even more. We know of some ministers who have justified dumping programmed-multiples because at some point they didn’t met the minister’s criteria of wanting to work on issues. There were times when our system didn’t want to work on issues, but we’re glad Fritz didn’t give up on us. On the flip side, we also believe that support teams and therapists need to take a serious look at who they decide to invest time helping. The unfortunate truth is that our time and energy is limited and we should choose sincere candidates who are capable of success.

Page 487 ...

RATIONALES, of the abusers

Persons, who are just getting into the subject of Illuminati mind-control, naturally ask "Why do the abusers do what they do?" and "How can the abusers mentally justify doing what they do?" We will not attempt to give a comprehensive answer to this question, which would take a book, but will try to give a condensed version of why it happens, and how it is justified in the abusers’ minds. First, we’ll look at what psychologists are saying, & then we will build upon that to give a more accurate sketch of why the abuse happens. Psychologists who have studied parents who sexually abuse their children have concluded that such parents are extremely narcissistic. Narcissism means self-love. They go on to say that essentially everyone is narcissistic, but the abusers are extremely so. The psychologists are on the right track, but not quite there. (Hold this thought for a moment.) The psychologists also think that the sexual abuse is done to gratify the abuser’s need for a reward, in the same vane that some are also alcoholics. The mind-control abuser needs to be worshipped, which will gratify the need to be desirable & important. Because children idolize adults, and since children are innocent & powerless, the abuser enjoys dominating the child sexually, mentally, & spiritually. Because knowledge of the 7 brains has been kept away from the public’s general awareness, the public and psychologists don’t think in these terms. Knowledge of the 7 separate brains that make up the human mind are how the Illuminati successfully carry out mind-control. Psychologists carrying out research have reported between 40 to 80 % of the abusers were abused themselves as children. When it pertains to trauma-based mind-control, we can assure the reader that 99.999% of the abusers have been abused themselves as children. That abuse has locked the abuser into making the reptilian brain their principle brain. The reptilian mind thinks only in terms of survival. It thinks in terms of its own needs. What the psychologists call narcissism is simply the survival-type thinking (the self-love so to speak) of the reptilian brain which we all have. The only difference is that some non-multiples are able to develop their higher brains so that they can develop their conscience and true spiritually enlightened thinking as the guiding source of their actions. Everyone has a reptilian first brain. Almost any male can be made to tap into that survival instincts and can be made to be sadistic. The programmers create clean slate alters which are created in the crucible of survival. When a person fears for his life, the higher brains are shut down. These alters are simply working from the reptilian brain. They are power-based, greed-based, survival-instinct-based alters. These alters are then given scripts that morally justify this thinking, so that the reptilian brain can block any future second thoughts from the two highest brains. This is where Illuminati Luciferian doctrine is important. The Illuminati teach their Grand Masters that they are the elite of the world, that their rulership is their birthright, and that Lucifer has taught them programming so that they can be a god, and follow after Lucifer’s own heartbeat. They believe that they are pleasing Lucifer by carrying out mind-control on children and then presenting these "little treasures" to Lucifer. These Illuminati programmers are not going to say, "I doing this because I’m a sinner [which is a higher brain concept]", but they are going to say, "I’m doing this because I’m a god." Power is a need that stems from the reptilian brain. Power can be directed into proper channels by our higher brains, but due to the mind-control that the Illuminati programmers themselves have received there is nothing structured in the mind to veto this power-hungry thinking. Also Satanic doctrines, like LaVey’s and Crowley’s "Do what thou wilt", give the mind a blocker to prevent the higher brains from

Page 488 ...

overriding the actions based on the reptilian brain’s selfish survival based thinking. There are many other rationalizations, for instance, "this is the way our fathers and forefathers have traditionally done things", "no pain no gain", and "this child (such as Marilyn Monroe) would have been a nothing, but by carrying out the programming we are building the person into something". The World System has set up dialectics such as the Cold War, which gave lower echelon abusers the survival-based justifications that mind-controlled slaves were needed if their side were to win the Cold War, and protect their nation.

They justify their criminal behavior by saying that most people want leaders, and they are merely providing that leadership. Most people have been conned into accepting the leadership of others. Most people go through a stage in life like the hippies, where they want to think for themselves, but just like the hippy movement they end up taking the attitude if you can’t beat them join them. But even the most average of persons has an incredible computer between the ears, and are far more capable than they are given credit for. At least the potential is there, if it weren’t stolen by an education system that dumbs students down, and the other hassles in life that steal so much potential from people. Because the abusers have seared their consciences, they often look at the abuse as a game (albeit a sadistic one). At that point, several of them may try to outdo each other and the abuse becomes an ongoing contest to see who can outdo each other. In some cases, not only do the hidden Luciferian doctrines support the abuse (such as reincarnation), but the front alter’s religious views may also support the abuse. Numerous passages in the Talmud, give legal religious sanction for pedophilia, torture and other crimes. Because this fact has been covered up, it would be appropriate to quote some of the fuller Talmudic translations (because some of the translations into english leave out passages that are in the original Hebrew which promote such things as pediophilia and sodomy. The book of Yebamoth of the Talmud, 2 Vols., London, The Soncino Press, 1936, page 397 states, "Harlotry is not applicable to bestial intercourse." In other words, intercourse with a beast is not regarded as a sin of intercourse. Page 402 (as well as 403) of the same Talmudic book states, that it is O.K. for a priest to have "co-habitation" with a girl proselyte under three. It states, "A proselyte who is under the age of three years and one day is permitted to marry a priest" or the daughter of a proselyte is "eligible to live with a priest" and have intercourse. In Kethuboth (another book of the Talmud) pp. 54, 57, 58, 59 provide more examples of legal religious justification of adults having sex with children. For instance, on pg. 58 it states, "When a grown-up man has intercourse with a little girl it is nothing.,, "Although the intercourse of a small boy is not regarded as a sexual act, nevertheless the woman is injured by it as by a piece of wood." This does not mean that all readers of the Talmud practice such things, but it’s one example of many of how religious beliefs & cultural beliefs give sanction to abuse. Some deranged criminals are hiding behind their religious covers, & these religious covers are across the board. Some small size cults teach that ‘‘free sex" between all persons is "liberation" and "love". In such cases, one has a layering of rationalizations, from the front clear down to the deeper levels. And as for the abuse, many of the handlers think that it is O.K. because they have the ability to erase any memory of the abuse from the slave’s mind, and make it "O.K." They also rationalize that they are ‘expanding the mind of their slaves. You’ve all heard the New Age clap trap that man is on the edge of a new evolutionary leap forward, and they talk themselves into believing they are part of that great leap forward. Some of the leading mind researchers, who help program seem to honestly believe this. As rediculous as this may sound, people will believe rediculous things if it will justify to their own minds, the cruelty they perpetuate on innocent people. At the heart of all the mind-control, you will find the heartbeat of Lucifer and the willingness of his followers to do what they believe he wants.

Page 489 ...


This article will discuss the ins & outs of an alter’s perception of things, and the external world. In many ways, it might be helpful for the client and the therapist to view each other as two beings from separate worlds who need to learn some common means to communicate. Stephen Toulmin said, "All knowledge bears the imprint of the mind’s own structure." There is some truth that our minds help us organize our perceptions. A newborn baby will turn its head toward a sound, even though it has not had any experience in the world that would teach it that anything important is in the direction of the sound. It knows to do this because it is born with this ability. As the magician uses a slight of hand, the programmer uses a slight of "the mind’s abilities to learn". As we live in the real world, we grow up & learn meanings to words. Our ideas are representations of what exists in the world. The problem between the programmed multiple and the common person in the street who is not programmed, is that the programmed multiple’s experiences indeed make his or her ideas representations that exist in the reality that the programmers created for the various alters. One might say that many of these objects in an internal world are objects of a multiple’s imagination. This may be ultimately true, but the programming has a reality of its own and may be the best reality that the alter has had a chance to apprehend. For instance, at one point Fritz hooked up a heart/pulse monitor to prove to an alter that she had a heart. However, this alter was programmed to trance out if hooked up to such a device. The device read "no pulse", and the alter said "See I told you I had no heart". Fritz was chagrined, but he didn’t give up. He explained that the programming was causing this alter to trance, so the alter tried hard not to trance and the next time, there was a weak reading. The third time, there was even a better reading, as the alter mastered the ability to stay grounded. When people remember something or imagine something, one can not be sure if these ideas relate to something that really existed. Generally, when a person perceives something, unless he is drunk, his perception is going to conform to reality. However, the programmers mess with the mind of victims so much, that the deeper alters only live in a deep hypnotic trance. They only perceive as they have been programmed to perceive. This really is a tribute to how incredible the human mind is. The human mind can creatively design all kinds of concepts and can function in an imaginary world if that is what it takes to survive. One of the things that most of the alters need to develop is a sense of external reality. This means that they need to spend time holding the body and experiences life outside of their external world which they live in. They will also need to learn that truth is not whatever you make it. Of course, the victim of mind-control already has many doubts and to realize that they can’t trust their own judgement is difficult to accept. Some of the alters will be left-brain and some will be right-brain alters. The therapist will experience various quasi-psychotic" symptoms, but there is no reason to be alarmed by it. It simply comes with the territory. Because the alters systems are complex, and may be subjected to programming at a particular time, alters may not present a consistent picture. The therapist may begin to wonder if the entire thing is a very complex game for the client’s alters. Over time the therapist will begin to sort things out. If the client does not have the ability to communicate, there may develop many incidents that are difficult to understand. Again, the therapist needs to remind her or his self that there is probably a good reason WHY the alters are acting the way they are acting. As this book has repeatedly brought out, the phenomena of programmed multiplicity has been very poorly understood by therapists.

Page 490 ...

RESPONSIBILITIES, tips to face new ones

The programmers succeed in what they do, because they know how the mind works, and they work with the victim’s mind. The support team must do the same. The programmers know how the mind needs the stage set for it to learn new things, and they will take the time and effort to lay the groundwork, the foundation. Likewise, when the deeper alters begin experiencing the real external life, they need to have the groundwork, the stage set for them to learn new things. The deeper alters can be encouraged to put their survival skills to work. The deeper alters need to forget the "I can’t"s and recognize that they have powerful survival skills that can be redirected to make them successful in the external world. When deeper alters who are learning about the outside world see a need, they need to tackle that need. If one sees dirty dishes, then wash them. If one sees a barren front yard, plant some flowers. If one sees a hurting person, give solace. By using their powers of observation the deeper alters can see needs and address those needs around them. This will give them a sense of accomplishment and power. They will then begin to recognize their worth and their potential. After one looks around for needs to address, the next step is to ask yourself what you’d like to try doing. If you think you’d like to do something, then try it. Go to a hobby shop, or to the library and get some ideas on what new activity you can do. You will be surprised at what you will be able to accomplish. Alter can help alters, and can work together as teams on new projects. Deeper alters need to have the goal of having a full range of emotions. Emotions will help them achieve maturity. Anyway, who gave the right to the programmers to say you can’t step outside of programming?

SALVATION, obtaining it, issues for multiples

An infant will enjoy playing with a box, and later as a child will enjoy trees. When the child gains an intellectual understanding of boxes and trees as an adult, the simple fun of being with these things is lost. Sometimes people would enjoy God more if they didn’t become so intellectual about Him, and just played with Him as a child. There are a number of people who insist on quarreling about what has already passed. How could God have done this? Why is God so cruel? Why is God so merciful? Why does God love me a sinner? Why does God hate me a sinner? With something so vast and big like God, He often gets the same treatment accorded the weather, in that everyone has their own opinion of how the weather should be. If we couldn’t understand adults as children, why do we think we can understand God? Wouldn’t it be more fun if we could crawl up in His spiritual arms and experience His concern and kindness, rather than trying to dissect His actions with intellectual theories. But one thing God’s Word makes clear, our happiness is not His goal for us in life, His goal is that we would be conformed to the image of Christ. When we see our problems in that light, we see that our problems are actually just what we needed to develop the Christ-like ministry God wants for us. Did you ever wonder why your parents wanted you to have good habits?--you wanted to play, and they wanted you to have good habits. They weren’t interested in your idea of happiness, they were trying to develop character. But rather than fight with God, why don’t we try to have some child-like wonder, isn’t it amazing how beautiful life is? Watch a spider spin a web. Watch the sunset. Watch a mother cat and her kittens. We sometimes think that our own problems are unique. We like to think that our modern world has its own unique problems. Western civilization has been built upon the

Page 491 ...

ancient wisdom of the Word of God. The Bible records that in ancient times there were: child sacrifices (for example see 2 KGS 17:17), satanic rituals where they did self-inflicted cuts (for example I KGS 18:26-28), witches who used magic paraphernalia like rings (EZE 13: 17-21), secret magic books (ACTS 19:17-19), child prostitution (for example I KGS 14:24, & JOB 36:14), and political leaders who were into satanic witchcraft (2 KGS 21:1-16), and much more. On and on we could go describing many of the same problems that people face today--including mind-control. This does not mean everything was exactly the same. The Roman toilets and swimming pools looked similar to ours, but their elite had only 4 wheeled carts rather than cars. Obviously, a Roman senator didn’t have to worry about a flat tire. But when it comes to matters about the human soul, the human spirit, eternal salvation, guilt, shame, greed and hate, and tax collectors the issues are exactly the very same issues as they were thousands of years ago. The ancient wisdom of the ancients which is embodied in the Holy Bible is still as rich and powerful for us today as it was in ancient times. That ancient wisdom said, "Open your mouth for the speechless...and plead the cause of the poor and needy" PROV 3 1:8. I wish we could find a few Christians who would stand with us to open their mouths for all the alter personalities of the 2 million mind-controlled slaves in this country who do not have a voice, and that we could plead the cause of these needy mind-controlled victims throughout this land. What you sow, you reap. In street parlance this translates "what goes around, comes around." If we want to reap some salvation for ourselves, we had better sow some salvation. What have you been planting? One of the most difficult topics for programmed multiples and for those who work with them IS THE QUESTION: HOW do PROGRAMMED MULTIPLES GET SALVATION? We have been saved, we are being saved, and we will be saved. Salvation comes in many tenses. If one alter gives his life to Christ, does that save an entire system? Can a system of alters lose their salvation if the front is Christian and the deeper parts are active in rituals where humans are sacrificed? How can a person be two things at once? Does each alter need a separate baptism? Is it wrong to baptize different alters of one system? These are a few of the questions that have plagued multiples. God is not a respecter of persons. Everyone will be treated equally and equitably by God. There is not one standard for multiples and another for non-multiples. The question is

JUST WHAT ARE GOD’s STANDARDS? It may surprise the reader to be told that in spite of all the preaching that is going on today--many of the teachings of Christ and the teachings of the Bible have been lost, including many that concern salvation. Christ said it was foolish to gain the whole world, but to lose one’s own soul. By extension it would be foolish to gain power over all the internal worlds of oneself or of another person, and to lose one’s own soul. Don’t be foolish, don’t lose your soul. Can you imagine a company building an exclusive ship like the Queen Mary, installing many beautiful things, the latest communication equipment, the best safety equipment and then when it is completed, set the ship adrift without a crew to float aimlessly around and to be tossed by each storm and to sink without any purpose. The human is far more wonderfully made than any ship. Our brains are still far superior in many ways to the best computers. Do you think that God created mankind (and crowned him with "glory & honor" according to His Word in PS 8:5) just to cast mankind adrift? Some men have decided that man is adrift. That man must chart his own course--somewhat like the ship deciding to sail itself. Adam Smith, a scottish intellectual of the 18th

Page 492 ...

century was convinced that science would save mankind from war and superstition (which is how he viewed Christianity). Science did not save us from war, nor have the teachings of Christ lost meaning as some superstitious gobblygook, but the Words of Christ are just as powerful today as they were 2,000 years ago. Christ said that the truth shall set men free, and those words are no less true today than they were in his day. There are plenty of philosophies that will convince you that you were designed by God merely to be abandoned, that there is no purpose to life. But why did the prodigal son feel miserable eating with the pigs? Because he was a man and he knew that he was meant to have a better life. People know that they are called to something better. They are often not content to think that their life is meaningless, because they know better. In the sight of God the creator there are no common people, only special important people that He ordained. Almighty God loves us better than we love ourselves. Not Sally over here because she goes to church several times a week, nor Sue over here because she has the Bible memorized better than anyone else. He loves us, all of us, good and bad, because He created us and as our Creator He loves what He created in His own image. Christ asked people to get to know him. He didn’t ask his disciples to go to church on sunday. He didn’t give them a Bible and command them to follow the Bible, he asked them to learn from him and to follow him and to get to know Him. God allowed a persecution to come upon the early Christians so they would quit going to church and would go to the world and tell them the good news that their Creator loved them and had a plan for their lives. "That day a great persecution broke out against the church in Jerusalem, and all except the apostles were scattered. ..So the people who were scattered went from place to place telling the good news." ACTS 8:1 The good news IS NOT that you are unworthy, God’s Word says that all are worthy

of anything good that He has. The good news IS NOT that we are rejected and worthy of punishment. God’s Word says that he suffered rejection and punishment so that we can realize that we don’t need to. The good news IS NOT that we should be ashamed of ourselves, and walk around in guilt, I’m sure most of you were told at some point, "Shame on you, you are a bad person." God sent his only begotten-son to love us, not to judge us. Don’t you think He knew what people were like, when he came to show us God’s love? The self-righteous and those with religious spirits enjoy making people feel guilty. They threaten you with rejection, punishment, and want us to lower our self-esteem. After a while a person surrenders to their incessant religious spirits, and decides that "I’m stupid, I’m worthless, I’m bad, etc." But guilt is NOT the answer. Guilt is not the good news. But you may be protesting--But isn’t that what the Bible wants, doesn’t it want us to be guilty, doesn’t it say ‘for all have sinned and come short of the glory of God."? Doesn’t it say, "All of us like sheep have gone astray. Each has turned to his own way."? Doesn’t it say, "For whoever keeps the whole law, yet stumbles in one point, he has become guilty of all".? Surprises of surprises, the Bible NEVER asks man to feel guilty. The Biblical greek words that translate guilt (hupodikos, opheilo and enochos), mean guilty in the same sense that if you leave your car overparked and the meter runs out--you have violated a law and are guilty of violating that law---BUT THAT IS SOMETHING ENTIRELY DIFFERENT THAN FEELING GUILTY. We have been told all our lifetimes by the modern day pharisees that it is God who wants us to feel guilty. God wants us to feel loved. God wants us to realize that He loves us more than we can ever love ourselves. God is love, God never tells us that God is guilt. I can do all things through Christ Jesus who lives in me! Wow! How can God expect us

Page 493 ...

to have a low opinion of ourselves if He tells us that we can do all things through Christ! He never expected us to have a low opinion of ourselves. Jesus is called the most humblest man ever, and yet he had no sins to castigate himself about. He couldn’t crawl in the dust and plead for God’s mercy on his wretchedness, so how did he get to be the humblest man? Because humility is not self-denigration. We have been fed a lie here too by the religious pharisees of our day. Humility means knowing God’s plan for your life. God wants us to learn His ways which are the ways of love. Religious spirits don’t want to treat people with love, they want to judge them, they want to hit them over the head with religion, they want to legalistically find ways to prove that their fellow man is bad. They can always show you how they are right and the other person is wrong. They like to use the law--but they seldom use love. The Word of God says that the letter of the Law kills, but the Spirit of Love gives life. Yes man has fallen greatly, and mankind sins greatly. But where sin abounds, God’s love and strength are poured out in more abundance. Christ said, if God clothes the wild flowers in all their beauty won’t he do more for you if you have faith? On the one hand is the beauty of mankind--bought with a price" "in the image & glory of God" and "in the likeness of God"; and on the other hand this beautiful image of God has wandered off in total rebellion to his Creator. But even in that state of rebellion God still sees worth and value in a man. The enemies of God, such as the mind-control programmers, love to make people think that God has rejected them because they are bad. And since our parents didn’t listen to us, and told us we were bad, we think that God acts like our parents. But the message that Christ’s disciples gave was not one of guilt, and shame, and religious rules, but sounded like this, "For David, after he had served his own generation by the will of God, fell on sleep, and was laid unto his fathers, and saw corruption. Be it known unto you therefore, men and brethren, that through this man [Jesus] is preached unto you the forgiveness of sins: and by him all that believe are justified from all things, from which ye could not be justified by the law of Moses." ACTS 19:36-39 When my deeper alters thought about forgiveness, the programming kicked in and I got suicidal. These alters had been programmed to think they had no heart, that they were bad, etc. Forgiveness was a concept that they could not grasp. But these alters were able to take the first step of faith. (Allow me to switch to first person:) I told myself, if God said it, I had to believe it, because God said WHOSOEVER asks for forgiveness is forgiven. The day you seek Me with your whole heart is the day you’ll find me. (cf. PS 34:8-10, 2 CHR. 15:2, HEB 10:22). I stepped outside of the programming and believed God was the integrity of His own Word. I couldn’t rationalize the forgiveness, I simply accepted it on the basis of God’s integrity. As the months past, I realized that the Holy Spirit had quietly done His work, and had freed me from the guilt that I had carried, and freed me from the effects of the programming. I did feel forgiven. I didn’t intellectually comprehend forgiveness, the programming blocked me mentally, but it couldn’t block the Holy Spirit working in my heart. Forgiveness came to my deeper parts by standing on the Word of God. Now I was free to acknowledge the things God had for me in life. If your prayers are not going anywhere, and you feel like God is not hearing your prayers--then quit praying, and start trusting that God knows your situation. He knows the trouble your in. Place some trust and faith in Him. Quit fearing, and start having some faith. An innocent child is birthed out of heaven. The Word of God says that Christ died for all men, the entire world. He was the lamb of God who took away the sins of the world. He was the second Adam, who corrected the curse that Adam brought upon mankind. It is very

Page 494 ...

clear in scripture that you will only be held accountable for the sins that you have done. Adam’s sins are not imputed to you. The goal of the Illuminati is to take the innocent child and perform mind-control upon it before it can know right from wrong, before it has stepped outside of its innocence. The perverted joy that Satan gets in marrying and polluting the innocence of a small child is part of why things happen the way they do. What happens when free-will is stripped from a young innocent child? Those parts that do have free-will will stand in proxy for those who are trapped. How did God judge a city? God told Abraham he would spare Sodom and Gomorrah if he could find a few righteous persons within them. God told Abraham that if he could find 10 righteous men in the city of Sodom, then he would spare it. If a person’s front alters have free will they will stand in proxy for those who do not have free-will. Persons are not responsible for action under extreme duress nor are contracts valid legally if they are contracted under duress. Likewise, those alters who have no free-will are not in a situation where they can choose right from wrong. They become accountable when they are free of the mind-control and can choose between right and wrong. In other words, front alters can indeed save a city of alters, if they are the only ones with free will and they are righteous. But with freedom comes responsibility. There are numerous cases of non-multiples coming forward for numerous altar calls, and repeatedly giving themselves to Christ. There are plenty of cases of non-multiples receiving repeat baptisms. As much as this happens, it seems strange that some ministers will deny alters who come to Christ the chance to be baptized. If the alter wants to make a personal public confession of faith, they should be allowed to do it. And the co-authors will be happy to help victims with this area of concern. If a person is really O.K. with the Lord, do you think that going into the water and getting baptized is going to injure that relationship? Does the reader really think God is that petty and has that little compassion. What kind of person do some people think God is? And that is probably one of the big secrets to gaining salvation--DISCOVERING WHO GOD REALLY IS, versus what all the modern religious pharisees say about Him. You are not going to find salvation by submitting yourself to an organized religious group that takes your free-will away. Christ came to give you free-will to seek God on your own. He came to set men free of religious tyranny. Unfortunately, after setting men free of religious tyranny, many have come using his name and have established religious tyranny. And they usually justify their tyranny by distorting the character and nature of God. What you sow, you reap. If you want a spiritual life, you need a spiritual birth. Its that simple. You don’t plant a natural life and get a spiritual life.


1. Provides for a full and complete pardon for all sins of commission and omission of which a sinner might be guilty.
2. Provides for a cleansing from all unrighteousness which results from said sinner’s behaviour. "If we confess our sins He is faithful and just to forgive us our sins and to cleanse us from all unrighteousness."
3. Provides for the Judge of all the earth, "Remembering our sins no more".
4. Provides for the sins to be blotted out as a thick cloud, and put away as far as the East is from the West.
5. Provides for clearing of the conscience by way of asking for forgiveness, not just apologizing, and making restitution where it is possible to restore the damages.

Page 495 ...

SANCTUARY (safe room), creating a s.

Therapists working in tandem with clients have built internal safe rooms for alters to view memories together, or to work on issues together in safety. They may also construct new living quarters for alters as they work with the front systems and try to stabilize, integrate and fuse alters. The concept of building safe rooms internally to protect alters from internal attacks is a good idea for therapists, but it has limited success. There is nothing wrong with using internal sanctuaries, if the therapist realizes the ins and outs of creating and using one. Safe rooms created by the therapist & client work better for the front alters than for deeper alters. Every change in the system comes with a price tag. Programming has its own kind of security. The programmers allowed alters to build their own internal worlds and the homes they live in. They have felt safe in their internal residences for years. When they abandon their internal homes it doesn’t have a safe feeling, and then they are pounced upon by numerous internal mechanism to not disturb the peace and order of the system, such as judge alters with armies who enforce the order of the system with pain and punishment. So they have exchanged their comfortable internal home for a palace with pain. No matter how beautiful the therapist makes the safe room, it is still will be a place of pain. During deprogramming, when we wanted to preserve temporary gains, it was possible to creatively think of some type of internal structure like an accessible mountain with a hollow oak to hide in or an invulnerable space ship where an alter could have refuge from the internal programmers. The problem is as long as those internal programmers are operating, they are cagey and they can creatively think of some way to overcome the imagery of the new safe place. Generally within 48 hours they had figured out some way to recapture the alter and had started attempts to reprogram the alter. This means that every two days a new safe hiding place has to be created, unless a sloppy job is done and the system defenders break through very quickly, and then a sanctuary may have to be built even sooner. And telling this just underscores the need to work on why the alters are making their changes in their life. Why are they fighting the programming? They need to be reminded. If the support team wants to create an internal sanctuary, and are aware of its vulnerability, then the therapist needs to work with the alter being protected to find out what the alter feels is safe. The alter may have lived internally in a box and may not know what a large room is. The alter may not even feel comfortable in a large room. Perhaps the alter has been around numerous other alters and has always heard noisy chattering. How will the alter feel if the alter is now going to be isolated in a "safe" room. The safe room may end up feeling more like maximum security. In other words, the therapist needs to work with the alter and the alter’s creativity to secure the best choice of safety. Other supportive alters can help. Internal telephone lines can be put in to keep alters in touch with each other.

Page 496 ...

SATANIC CULTS, understanding the practice of

For a certain part of mankind, the drive for power has developed the power to fashion other men. But what power controls those who have gained the power to fashion the minds of men as they choose? Is that power which controls the programmers merely the latent potential of the human mind? Or is that power merely a mass hallucination, or an auto suggestion by these programmers? Or to rephrase these questions more bluntly: does Lucifer and his demons really control the programmers? Or do they only half-way pretend that demons exist, because if you believe in something, anything, then supposedly it will work? For the power hungry, truth and fiction are but tools to gain power. There is an appealing theory that the CIA, Anton LaVey (a satanist & programmer), Michael Aquino (a satanist & programmer), and others of the occult underworld find witchcraft and spells appealing simply because it gives power, and that they do not believe in an actual character named Satan. LaVey and Aquino both convincingly claim that they do not believe in Satan. They also lie convincingly that they don’t carry out human sacrifices. Who knows the hearts of these programmers? At the heart of evil is the quest for power. That is what is at the root of the love of money. At the heart of evil is a philosophy of death that must act as if it is a philosophy of life. Because the Illuminati is not able to see the true meaning of life, on the surface nothing seems to count but personal power, but is there something else? Yes, there is, and we know it for a fact because we were there. These programmers are prisoners of their quest for power, but they also believe that there is a greater power that they serve which will reward them. Again the question begs itself--when they are captured by their insatiable quest for power, have they surrendered themselves to a neutral thing, or have these programmers surrendered their life to a higher power? Everyone is willing to concede that these satanic movers and shakers are obsessed with gaining power. If these men want power so bad, and have such resources available, would they devote so much time and resources to something that didn’t work? But the rational thinker can correctly answer, much of magic is trickery, natural unknown forces in nature, or some unknown power of mind over matter. The rational thinker argues, it works, but not by supernatural forces. Psychic abilities are merely untrained RV abilities.

But the surrender to demonic forces always brings with it a desire for the irrational. If reason were to have a central place in the magician’s world view, then much of what the magician believes would have to be discarded. Castaneda’s occult classic Tales of Power (NY: Simon & Schuster, 1974) p. 101 states, "We, the luminous beings [the Illuminati], are born with two rings of power, but we use only one to create the world. That ring, which is hooked very soon after we are born, is reason, and its companion is talking. Between the two they concoct and maintain the world. So, in essence, the world that your reason wants to sustain is the world created by a description and its dogmatic and inviolable rules, which the reason learns to accept and defend. The secret of the luminous beings is that they have another ring of power which is never used, the will. The trick of the sorcerer is the same trick of the average man. Both have a description; one, the average man, uphold it with his reason; the other, the sorcerer, upholds it with his will....the advantage of the sorcerer is that will is more engulfing than reason....from now on you should let yourself perceive whether the description is upheld by your reason or your will." The child victim while they are being programmed are told that if they want something bad enough they can create it.

Page 497

Hitler, a secret satanist, never quit preaching the power of the will. If the German people willed to win, then they could, was Hitler’s magical perception. When individuals lost the will to fight, Hitler held those individuals accountable, rather than external circumstances for their lack of fight. Mind over matter. This is the sorcerer’s world view. There have been and continue to be plenty of gullible people who want to believe the deceptions of the cults. What you see is not what you get. The world of reason must be left behind to understand the Illuminati. We must think in terms of willpower and power of all kinds. We must think in irrational terms. We must grasp what it is like to be addicted to power, and the quest for hidden knowledge to gain more power, and power through deception. The Mystery Religions (which continue today in their hard core form as the Illuminati, and their more ceremonial symbolism as Freemasonry) have had thousands of years to perfect their deceptions. The victim of mind-control experiences the depth of how powerful the perpetrators’ network of deception is. The Illuminati and the Masonic Perpetrators of mind-control have a system of secrecy so pervasive and well in place that you will not see the obvious telltale signs that most people would look for when they initially hear that something is amiss. Even the visible front of the occult world is overlooked by many people. Along this line, when a therapist or victim begins to catch on to the mind-control, immediately the natural questions present themselves, HOW DID THEY HAVE TIME TO DO THIS? and WHERE COULD THEY HAVE DONE ALL THIS? These questions may stem from genuine concern that the person not jump to false conclusions, but they also are predicated on a lack of understanding about how the Illuminati and associated cults work. For reasonable people who are disposed to learn, we can provide the inside story on how the unexplainable can be explained. For those who have made up their minds and are not interested, all we have to ask is this, "How do you explain this present wicked world and how do you explain how incompetent our government seems to be in correcting problems? How is it that billions of dollars get looted from the entire Savings & Loan industry by hundreds of insiders and no-one ever gets punished? How is it that Russian generals pilot our most secret Stealth bombers, but U.S. airforce personnel get shot if they approach a stealth bomber without authorization?" Actually, when we think of it, the list of "anomalies" of this present system are endless. We could honestly ask hundreds of questions of things that don’t make sense, unless you understand how the Illuminati are running things. Take a minute to think about how important power is to the military and to the alphabet spy-agencies? Their quest for power lines them up philosophically with the occult world’s philosophy. Truth for warriors and spies is merely a tool. The men who will rise to the top of such organizations are those who will defend the satanic philosophy of using willpower to create one’s worldview. During our time within the Illuminati, we can say for a fact that Freemasonry and the Illuminati are interlocked. The Masonic system has lodges and temples that public can see, but don’t think that they are not smart enough to create a system of secret lodges. They have a system of secret lodges, and secret tunnels to temples that allow them to carry out human sacrifices and sexual rituals without the mainstream of lower level Masons even knowing what Freemasonry is all about. In a female Illuminati system, the Sisters of Light alters will be created before the Illuminati Mothers of Darkness. All Mothers of Darkness have to have Sister of Light alters. However, the Sisters of Light alters, which are used during the body’s teenage years are extremely difficult to find?

Page 498 ...

Why? Because the Sisters of Light are created for extremely abusive Masonic sexual rituals that are done in both visible & secret Masonic Temples. The teenage girl may be used on Friday, by quietly pulling the child out of school for a preparation ritual by the Masons, and then on Saturday and Sunday the teenage child Sister of Light alters will participate in the actual full-blown rituals.

DEMONOLOGY, and its relation to mind-control and the satanic cults.

If you investigate into the depths of darkness in the hearts of men, where will it lead you? Your investigation will take you into demonology. In its nicer forms, it shows itself as mysticism and spiritism. It is upon demonology that the Illuminati is founded. It is from demonology that the rituals and the mind-control spring forth. Of course those who have no previous knowledge of this will be the first to feel qualified to pass judgement that magic and demons are merely urban myths. In the rarified air of academia, denial of Satanic Ritual Abuse is like an opium addiction. If corruption & organized crime need satanic philosophies to justify their acts, then they also need demonology to provide the spiritual power and guidance. It all becomes one dynamic, sacrifice and gore are necessary to harness spiritual power, secrecy is demanded to perform such a blood lusting magical tradition, and control of the outside world then is needed to hide the crimes done for power. A mind-controlled slave’s hidden life is based upon the spirit world. The science of dealing with spirits is called the Cabala. Theurgy is a high degree of occultism where the magician can evoke angels (evil), exalted spirits, genii, fire spirits. Within the Illuminati, we were Luciferians (also known as Gnostics), not Satanists. That does not mean that Satan doesn’t play a role in the occultism of the Illuminati, it means that Satanic cults tend to be deranged dabblers, and the Illuminati are sophisticated blue-blooded bloodlines that view themselves as the elite of the world. But whether one is part of a Satanic cult or the Illuminati or some other occult group, the foundation of what is done is demonology. With ruthless dedication the upcoming Illuminati undertake to transform themselves into magicians and witches who can control the spirits. Controlling spirits gives power. Satanic dabblers are not the only practitioners of necromancy, so are the Illuminati. You will find the Illuminati in graveyards for some of their rituals. Many of the Illuminati rituals are so severe only persons with multiple personalities (or great dissociative abilities) could endure them and maintain a functioning sanity. Although we can write with authority about demonology and the Illuminati and its relationship to programming, we hope to show a few tidbits of the paper trail that could be amassed to add validity to what we want to share. A member of the elite Stewart bloodline, R.J. Stewart, provides a paper trail of what we also experienced in the Illuminati, "The developing practitioner of advanced magical arts must have grounding and experience in the following disciplines: meditation, concentration, visualization and ritual pattern-making. No advanced work may be undertaken without training and experience in these four skills. There are five fundamental arts or disciplines in magical work, and the first four tend to lead towards the fifth, which is meditation." (Stewart, R.J. Advanced Magical Arts. Longmead, England, 1988, p. 8; this is also in Stewart, R.J. Living Magical Arts. Blandford Press, Poole, 1987.) The same abilities that are needed for advanced magic, (according to this great magic adept and member of the scottish Stewarts), are the same abilities needed for becoming a programmed multiple. The mind-control with its abilities to endure pain, to go into trances, to visualize is really a natural outgrowth of the deeper black magical arts.

Page 499 ...

The eastern branch of the secret occult world is Indian Yogism, and it is well known how they have developed total control of their minds and bodies. They can go into altered states and sleep on beds of nails or walk on hot coals. Because demonology is based upon power, and power is obtained by fighting to the top, a child victim is soon taught that if they do not perform they will bring harm upon their cult bloodline. In high level magic, there is no room for failure. The bloodlines and individuals are locked in intense rivalries, and individuals are expected to contribute to the competition. The child victim is expected to blindly obey all orders within the family. The victim is to never ask why or ask about the consequences of an order. The victim is warned, "If you ever break this oath may all the Darkness of the family fall upon you as the same daggers pierce your heart through and through." After such an oath the child will be ordered to worship Lucifer, and carry out Luciferian chants. Some of the oaths, and secrets are beginning to see the light of day. J.K. Huysmans wrote in La Bas (french for Down There) that one of the Illuminati oaths at that time of the French revolution (and still used) was, "Lightning does not strike so quickly as the dagger which will reach thee wherever thou mayest be."

Page 500 ...


One of the major blocks preventing deprogramming is the lack of self-forgiveness that alters maintain. Some churches have it backwards, they think that the victims need to forgive their abusers from the start. The victims do not even recognize what their abusers have done, and the victims generally blame themselves (unfairly) for much of what was done to them. The victim needs first to work on self-forgiveness, then learn what has really been done, and finally when the memories are all worked on, and the person has completely integrated, then the victim can honestly forgive their abusers. Mouthing some words about forgiveness without understanding what the sin was that was done to the victim is only pretending to work on the issue. The bitterness that is embedded in their hearts and minds needs a proper release, and unfortunately most of this bitterness is turned by victim themselves on themselves, not against the abusers, who are the ones who really should held responsible. Because self-forgiveness is such a major issue, it has already been covered some in Vol. 2, p. 284, and in our Deeper Insights article on "Salvation" Those who have studied the professional literature on treatment of MPD/DID will notice a deathly silence in most professional literature on the topic of self-forgiveness. All Illuminati victims of mind-control have been terrorized by their abusers about how God hates them and how God will punish them for their badness. The mind has had to accept the repeated messages that the programmers will drill into the victim that the victim is bad. Why will the mind accept this message so conclusively? The mind is pre-set to expect love from parents. Every animal and every person expects care and love from its mother when it’s born. When the child does not receive what it expects then it has no choice but to conclude, "I must be bad for so many people to treat me this way." "These all-knowing big people must have a reason for abusing me, and they say it’s because I’m bad, and all the evidence shows that I’m bad, so I must be very bad." It’s a vicious cycle. The programming makes the child feel defective, and the feelings of being defective and guilty make the child feel shame. All these feelings combine to make the person hate him or her self. The victim of mind-control has had a foundation of guilt and humiliation laid into their unconscious mind. Memorizing a Bible verse and repeating some verse like it’s a mantra is not going to root out that foundation which is firmly embedded. Programs which attempt to show deeper alters their identity in Christ will hit lots of strongholds and triggers and may get bogged down in fierce resistance. The struggle for self-forgiveness will be a process. It is a process of sanctification that the Holy Spirit will work in a person over a period of time. The mind needs time to process and sort things out. The bitterness and self-hatred were not wired into the mind in countless neural-synapses and K-lines overnight. It will take time for the mind to re-wire itself. Here are some tips, and the reader may have already thought of these: Study the Word of God about self-forgiveness. Pray for self-forgiveness. Be gentle and patient, it takes time for the mind to overcome its foundation of self-hatred. Keep bathing the mind in positives and washing away the negatives. Over a period of time a healing will take place, and you will have regained the self-respect that the programmers and abusers stole from you.

Page 501 ...


One of the most powerful programming tools is the use of split-brain programming. In order to insure the continued secrecy and success of the use of alters who function only from one hemisphere, the Illuminati used their psychiatrists to spread the notion that split-brain programming was simply a hypnotic program, a trick of the mind. The reality is that one side of the brain is physically drugged to sleep with an injection while the victim is traumatized to create parts. Vol. 2 covers methods used in split brain programming. After a single hemisphere part (alter) is created, it can then be further programmed by each of its two eyes viewing different films simultaneously. Actually, the split-brain films begin during the splitting tortures. If a programmer wants a part to assassinate a particular person, they will often create a particular part for just that assignment. While they are torturing the mind to get that part who will do the job, they will be showing films of the crimes supposedly done by the person who is the target of the assassination mission. The programmer doesn’t know exactly when the mind will split a piece so the films are run during the entire trauma-splitting process. The crime films and what needs to be done will be run during the process. The part that is created for this specific job will be accessed after the mission and destroyed by shattering it with trauma, and then the shattered parts will be locked up in a concentration camp in the mind. This specialized type of assassination programming is done usually with men. Sometimes the programmers are too busy or don’t have the patience and they merely put in a shattering program, that self-triggers when the slave’s mission is complete; and shatters that piece using the internal programming capabilities of the slave’s mind. This works fine, but the risk of leakage is somewhat greater. Special alters created for a single drug run or money laundering run for an important politician will be created and destroyed in a very sophisticated hi-tech fashion. There will be no split-brain alter left for the therapist to work with, only tiny fragments locked up in very deep secure parts of the mind. However, the key to understanding why these dissociative pieces (alters) are so good at their jobs is SPLIT-BRAIN PROGRAMMING. That is why it has been kept such a secret. Alters who have been created when only one hemisphere was awake will either operate only on logic or operate only on emotion. Alters who operate only on logic serve in roles such as assassination alters just described and internal programming alters. These alters will carry out inhumane horrible atrocities upon others and themselves because they have no emotions. On the other side, an alter which has no logic can be hypnotically told to act like Betty Boop (the cartoon figure) and they will emotionally carry out this assignment, because they have no logic to tell them that people don’t act like Betty Boop, a cartoon figure. An alter who has no logic can easily be made into a door knob or some other illogical form. These alters will only function from the side of the mind they were created from. Over time, the Illuminati has discovered that alters with split brain programming do not gain the advantage of the other hemisphere, but remain stunted. This is why it is so difficult for therapists to "contaminate" internal programmers with positive thinking. Internal programming alters can make themselves co-conscious with other alters who want to be free of programming, and the programming alters don’t sense the horror of the abuse with which they subject the rest of the system.

Page 502 ...


Brain Integration Therapy developed from the foundational research of Dr. Glenn and Robert Doman and and educator, Carl Delacato, and later Dr. Paul Dennison provides exercises that will develop brain pathways for integration of the hemispheres. An example of such an exercise is called "the crosscrawl". The Crosscrawl stimulates both sides of the brain and has a very positive impact on integration of the brain from side to side. The exercise is basically marching in place with the opposite hand touching the opposite knee. If it done to music its more fun. A variation is is to try touching the opposite hand to the opposite foot in the back instead of in the front. Or one can try touching the opposite hand to the opposite heal in the front. The exercises and advice that Dr. Paul Dennison developed have solid research to validate them. This section can’t possibly cover what several books cover on the subject. Interested therapists should consult the following books:

Dennison, Paul E. and Gail E. Dennison. Brain Gym, Teachers Edition. Ventura, CA: Edu-Kinesthetics, Inc., 1989.

Dennison, Paul E. and Gail E. Dennison. Personalized Whole Brain Integration. Ventura, CA: Edu-Kinesthetics, Inc., 1989.

Hannaford, Carla. Smart Moves: Why Learning is Not All In Your Head. Arlington, VA: Grat Ocean Pub., 1995. This book was written by a neurophysicist/educator who has research to validate the Brain Integration Therapy.

Some therapists have explored using music that both hemispheres of the brain listen to in order to pull the two hemispheres together. Whether this helps or not is not known. Alters, who find they are only logic or emotion, can pair up with the opposite type of alter and can work in teams. By learning to co-consciously work side by side, they regain some of the brain’s natural abilities to look at life both ways.

Page 503 ...

SURVEILLANCE, dealing with surveillance

SPIES IN THE SKY (This information is based upon Harold Hough’s book Satellite Surveillance.) The FBI, SWAT teams, and other law enforcement, the NSA, and the military all use spy satellites. The best way to detect people from space is infrared. Spy satellite KH-II (KEYHOLE-II) transmits its information instantly to the ground. It can circle and view a particular site every few days. Keyhole is the codeword for spy satellites and each new generation gets a higher number. Low level electric currents on the ground known as dark currents interfere with their images. KENNAN, & LACROSSE spy satellites are the newer generation spy satellites. LACROSSE has radar imagining with a 3’ resolution. The Russians have the ability to track spy satellite locations as they have circled the globe. They could hide things as the satellites came around. The normal person can’t do this, nor does the average person have a great deal to hide anyway. So what if a spy satellite can read a billboard from space?

How do these spy satellites work? CCDs are used in electronic cameras in spy satellites (but the CCDs are blocked by cloud cover). Radar from satellites is also used. Radar is used from space to watch things, including what is happening in the oceans. Passive radar can see through the surfaces of underground structures. These kind of satellites are more of a threat to the privacy of objects like cars & underground shelters, than they are to people. They are not going to be able to track you as an individual. But add in the factor of a tracking implant, and the overhead satellite system becomes a nightmare. The implants are a far greater threat than any spy satellite with an electronic camera.


Some of the standard surveillance techniques are given in Chapter 12. From our observations of their surveillance methods, the Illuminati handlers use the standard techniques that are taught by the military and the intelligence agencies. Quite often people who are trying to mess with slaves will use dealership cars that don’t have traceable licence plates. Over the years, we have seen some clever ways for mind-controlled slaves to elude their trackers. In fact, our system has had to elude some with our car at times. The first step in eluding their tracking is to realize they generally know where you are, and they are looking for ways to exploit your weakest situation. They will watch for your support person to leave. They will try to access you on your way to your therapist. They will try to access you when you are alone. They will disguise themselves as JWs, a repairmen, as salesmen, and other disguises too numerous to mention. Watch out for "friends". Try to keep your business to yourself. Realize that everything you say over the telephone is heard by the controllers. Fritz had a hard time convincing us that the telephone wasn’t safe, because it seems like such an invasion of one’s privacy, and to admit it, means that one can no longer walk around with feeling that illusion of safety. Finally, after years of evidence that the phones are not private, we realize that if we talk on the phone, we need to accept that others are listening. This seems like a simple thing, but for Americans it is really difficult for them to realize that all ordinary phone calls are run through 30 computers between the caller and the receiver & that some of those computers record all conversations. If the computer spots trigger words, your conversation will get sent on to be listened to by humans. If you don’t want your conversation listened to by a person, don’t use trigger words. Much of what we would suggest is common sense. We realize that the wise don’t need our advice, and fools won’t heed our advice.

Page 504 ...


One of the first things that therapists must acclimate themselves to, is that the victim will go from one crisis to another, and many times seem a hair’s breath away from death. This is because they will actually bounce from one total disaster to another calamity. The reasons for this chaos are many, but if proper treatment through a support team can be mustered, the length of this time period of disasters may be decreased. Please don’t think that the victim is simply making this all up for attention. And please don’t overreact and place the victim into a hospital setting which will only create a new set of problems. There is also a mistake on the part of some psychiatrists to try to medicate the person to suppress the symptoms. The best way to help a victim is to get the victim’s alters to creatively and internally work on situations, after all, they were creative enough to survive the most horrendous traumas ever dreamed up by mankind. Another tip for therapists is that they should not play favorites with alters. The therapist is in the same situation as any leader, be he a sergeant or a kindergarten teacher. In the long run, treating all persons with respect will produce the best results. Not all systems are ready for treatment. Some systems will bug out when their programming kicks in.


A programmed multiple is probably the closest robot mankind will ever design that approaches being like humans--why? Because they are humans, and that is the horror of the thing. Men can applaud when science makes true robots to assist mankind, but mankind shrinks in horror and disgust to realize that during the entire 20th century the Illuminati have been creating robots out of people with the full secret assistance of the British, American, French and German governments. People, including therapists, shrink from the horror that slave robots are being created out of humans, so they label us anything but "slaves". People will tell you, "Love me as I am." We saw one therapist tell an alter of a recovering victim, "You’re nothing but programming." Are programmed feelings any less than normal human feelings? Does it hurt any less to be programmed that you lost a baby in child birth, than to have actually lost a child? Is pain any less pain because it comes from programming and not external reality? Is there any less pain from being hypnotically convinced that they murdered a child because of your disobedience, than if it were watched in real life? Is the illusion of conscious thinking that the victim has any less an illusion than the illusion of mainstream America that common Americans determine who runs their government? Is the victim of mind-control any less free than the average person who must follow the dictates of their station in life, their genetic coding, the dictates of society, the dictates of their own lack of talents, and the subtle influences of peer pressure, organized religion and mass mind-control, not to mention the laws of physics? Perhaps there is more similarity between the mind-controlled slaves and the rest of society than we choose to admit! At any rate, the programmed thoughts and feelings of an alter should not be given any less respect nor any less validity than any other hurting person. It is time that psychologists quit throwing labels on people, and love them where they are at. Fritz and I have discussed what it is like for an observant person to watch a programmed multiple. Programmed multiples are not like other people. When you see some of the deeper alters that carry out jobs in the real world you will notice distinct differences between their thinking and non-programmed people. The observer may find that the unusual person

Page 505 ...

before them doesn’t laugh as they should, and they don’t follow the cues of life in quite the right cadence. The unusual person (the multiple) will seem to know about things, but when questioned in depth will be found wanting. Specifics will be lacking in explanations. It is typical of how a programmed alter thinks. At times, in situations in which mind-controlled slaves are prepared to function in, they can spew forth information that will make them look above their peers in intelligence, and at least look like non-programmed individuals. They will show discipline and appear composed. But they will not carry with them the baggage of half-baked ideas and useless memories, and half-forgotten images. Reality of non-programmed people is like a jungle full of tangled undergrowth. The programmed multiple is like a well-manicured garden. What they know, they know; and what they are ignorant of, they are ignorant of. Their minds are more straight forward than non-multiples. Even front alters have a way of being very on task and straight forward. An observant person can use this as a clue. Learning behaviors outside of the programming are more difficult, and provide the appearance of "erratic" abilities. Many parts of the slave are told they have no heart and no soul. They are told they are robots, that they are slaves, that they are not human, etc. Just as an ugly child knows in its being that it is ugly by the way it has been treated by everyone in life, so also, the slave in its innermost being, is convinced that it is something less than human. The deeper alters will be amazed to see someone cry for them. The deeper alters will be amazed to see someone care about them. When the deeper alters are helped, who can blame them for loving their rescuers? But again, the alters will ask themselves, is this just another illusion? And anyway how can anyone really care? We have hoped that by being brutally honest with what a programmed multiple is really all about, that there will be some people who can actually genuinely love multiples in the reality of who they are. For instance, in our Illustrated Guidebook we show a child involved in cannibalism. We are calling for solid relationships between victims and recovering slaves, not relationships based on illusions. Although the thinking of the victim has been modified to suit the Illuminati, that does not mean that victims are any less worthwhile than anyone else. Today, we lavish time and special attention to those who are handicapped and learning disabled. But to think that any person is deserving of attention because they are unusual is lopsided thinking. Our role in life to facilitate people to be the person God had intended. Underneath the superficial thoughts of the programming are special dear people who hold many of the answers to the questions so many of us ask, and to whom God has bestowed contributions and abilities for the rest of mankind. In other words, love us for being worthwhile humans, not for being an oddity, but love us in the totality of what has been done to us to make us into robotic mind-controlled slaves.

Page 506 ...


To be expected.

Transference issues are a given when working with programmed multiples. It comes with the territory. The programmed multiple’s mind naturally sets itself up for a proxy. (A proxy is someone who stands in for another.) Instead of seeing it as something to be feared, hopefully the therapists can begin seeing that transference actually has a great deal of positives. The person who suffers the most from transference is the therapist, who will wonder at times if he or she is coming or going. What is also interesting, is that not only is the therapist the one who has to endure the brunt of the transference issues, the therapist is also generally the primary trigger of the transference problem. Transference issues are related to memories, and the victim’s memories are very intense. The programming memories are often abreacted in a drugged state, so it is hard to separate the therapist from the abusers in the fog of the memory.

Will be varied.

There are several types of transference issues. Transference occurs when the client responds to their therapist or support person based on some significant childhood figure. Transference may also occur where the response to the support person is based on several different important figures from different points in the system’s past. The alter system may also transfer feelings that should be directed toward their abusers and internalize it. In other words, they treat themselves based on some significant person in their past. (And then if this isn’t enough, many therapists end up having transferences provoked by someone in the system. This has a high chance of happening because alter behavior is so exaggerated, and there are so many different kinds of alters in a system, there is a

likelihood one of them will trigger the therapist. This is called "countertransference".) Because an alter system is like a city full of people (with lots of children), a large number of contradictory transference issues may be going on at one time. Let’s say Sally is a multiple going for therapy from therapist Betty. One child alter of Sally’s system may see Betty as one of her past Mother-of-Darkness abusers. Another may see her as their abusive natural mother. Another may see her as a former sexual partner. Another may see her as the programmer. Another may see her as this wonderful kind teacher that the system had in high school. The therapist barely knows at first if she is coming or going, because so many alters are interpreting and seeing her differently but all in the light of their varied past experiences.

Can happen naturally.

Alters are very good at having transference reactions. Sometimes all it takes for a transference reaction is the gender of the therapist. A small alter when it takes the body may hide, thinking that the therapist is one of its abusers from the past. One of the sports that the Network of abusers likes to carry out are hunts, where slaves are turned loose naked on large tracts of private property like the Bohemian Grove and then hunted. If an alter that was involved in a hunt is near the surface of the mind, and a noise or sound randomly occurs that makes that alter think that it is being chased, it may take the body and run for its life. Transference issues happen so easily because the multiple’s mind often runs two tracks, they may be in memory while they are also carrying out other duties. The programmed multiple will have feelings all over the place. Children (child alters) easily see their abuser all around them.

Page 507 ...

Can be manipulated for the abusers’ benefit. The abusers at times can manipulate transference so that the therapist gets a raw deal. This is another reason why victims need to be safe before work is started. There are enough difficulties with transference issues without the Network increasing them.

Can be worked with during therapy.

The therapist may want to take the feelings that the alters have locked away and see if they can vent them. They might use a dummy or mannequin to get in touch with their emotions. "Who are you really angry at?" "What is the undercurrent of your feelings, not what is on the surface, but what is below?" "What have you remembered and not dealt with?" In this way, the victim begins to learn to verbalize. To learn to redirect transference is a sign of maturity. The guilt that is transferred, can be dealt with. "You are not responsible for what was done to you." If the victim acknowledges that they were powerless, that acknowledgment will help with the fear. Facing the fears and the lies saves the victim from internal transferences. Dealing with this in turn will pave the way for the system to get a clearer picture of programming. "I don’t have to personalize it."

Transference issues call for teams.

Within an Illuminati system, you are going to find some alters that work well with one gender, and some that work well with the other. This is why it is advisable for teams to work with multiple systems. A male therapist will simply never reach some alters, and a female therapist will simply never reach other alters. The therapist may feel like many of the transferences are uncalled for or unfair, but the therapist must go beyond personalizing the actions of the multiple. It is common for the programmed multiple to assume that the therapist will be cruel and sadistic just like their parents were. The therapist may think that this misperception can be taken care easily, but because of the way the multiple’s mind works, the only way to change the misperception is over a long period of time, such as a year or two of work. The therapist can make headway in this area by being there for the client when the system desperately needs help--which will happen. Gradually, the system will see that the therapist was there. But the system will never quit testing the therapist. It is the nature of children to test, and most alters except for a few front alters have very little experience in the world--even less than most children. It really is a positive that they are questioning and beginning to think for themselves. A child will be rebellious toward its parent, because it knows that it can be its true self, it can show its true colors, and still be accepted and received. Some of what the alters do, is simply testing to see that the therapist will be there and will continue to receive them.

Page 508 ...

a name="del115">TWINNING, understanding and dealing with

Twinning is a critical factor to consider in the therapy of all victims, and yet it has been basically a secret until Fritz, with the help of some survivors like the author Cisco, began exposing it in writing & talks in 1992. The reader will look in vain at some of the best literature on treatment of MPD (now DID) and not find it mentioned. The Illuminati via their dirty psychologists have spread the false information that victims should not be in contact with each other. For therapists who have yet to get the word about twinning (or have heard the disinformation that is being spread), this article may save the life of their client.

Essentially all Monarch trauma-based mind-controlled slaves are programmed to have a twin. The front host alter will generally not know about the twinning unless they have had a deep Illuminati alter teaches the host or they have read something in our previous books. The Vol 2 book has information on twinning on pages 83-84, 215, and 359. Our Illustrated Guidebook has information on twinning on pages 45 and 47. During the twinning each victim will create parts that internalize all the characteristics of the person selected to be their twin. These parts have totally internalized the other person’s identity. These parts are programmed to take responsibility for what the twin does contrary to the programming. If a victim goes into the hospital for therapy, the twin system’s alters that identify with the victim will punish their own system’s body and will report back to the master what is happening. (A hospital stay will trigger the fear of death in the twin, i.e. she’s dying, we’re dying.) The victim’s system will not have to report back to the handler, their twin’s system will do it for them. Twinning makes the subject of victim safety and the prevention of victim accessing far more complex than has been generally realized. Likewise, the victim of

mind-control who is attempting to move toward health and freedom will experience lots of guilt in moving toward freedom, when they know that this may be causing their twin to commit suicide. The front parts (for instance the host alter) will have no idea of the deeper torments that coming in to therapy causes the deeper parts, because the host is oblivious to the twinning. The therapist then double-binds the host by making them sign contracts not to hurt the body, not realizing the dynamics of why deeper parts are being pushed increasingly to punish themselves for what is happening to or for what they are doing to their twin system. We will review the various types of programming scenarios that the programmers use to create twins. The 12 sciences of mind-control that the Vol 2 and the Deeper Insights book describe are all used to create twins. The programming begins at about age 7, although the preparation and selecting work may have taken place many years before.


a. One parent will have two children, but the two will be raised independently of one another.
b. The eggs of a mother will be placed in surrogates to create separate but identical twins.
c. A mother may swap her child with another mother.
d. The two will have generational ties.


a. The paired slaves will be trauma-bonded to each other, the older will want to protect and nurture the younger, and will be set up in situations to save the other from death.
b. They will torture each other, at times they are forced to almost kill each other via torture.
c. They will go through almost all the death, burial and resurrection ceremonies together. They learn to live and to die together.
d. They will take & internalize each other’s pain when they are tortured in the vicinity of one another.


a. Placed in front of mirrors under drugs to take on (internalize) the identity of the other person.


a. The full power of hypnosis will be used to twin the pair of slaves.


a. The alters of both systems will be told elaborate lies to bond them, to think they have common heritages, and also to create scripts and conflicts.

Page 509 ...


a. They will be given identical structures so that they can have the hidden keys to each others systems. The deeper parts of most systems can’t